PACKAGE - B

132kV SUB-STATIONS
VOLUME-III
PART – 2 of 4

SECTION – IX TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

INDEX

Sl. No. ITEM CHAPTER No.

1. Technical Specification for Instrument Transformers VII

2. Technical Specification for Surge Arrestors VIII

3. Technical Specification for Control & Relay Panels IX

4. Technical Specification for Battery & Battery Chargers X

5. Technical Specification for Capacitor Bank XI

6. Technical Specification for XII

Optical Line Termination Equipment (OLTE)

7. Technical Specification for Sub-station Automation XIII

SECTION – IX
CHAPTER - VII
 CT-PT-CVT

Section-IX
Chapter –VII

INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
CTs, CVTs and PTs

1. SCOPE:
1.1 This specification covers design, manufacture, testing before despatch, supply and transport
to respective substations of 132 and 33 kV, instrument transformers, unloading, storage,
transport to respective support structures for erection at 132 / 33 kV Recreation Green and
Village Gharbara substations in Greater Noida of U.P. State with all materials and
accessories required for efficient and trouble free operations.

1.2 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of the design and construction
of equipment. However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of
engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous
commercial operation. The owner will interpret the meanings of drawings and specification
and shall have the power to reject any work or material which, in his judgment is not in
accordance therewith. The offered equipment shall be complete with all components
necessary for their effective and trouble free operation. Such, components shall be deemed
to be within the scope of contractor's supply irrespective of whether those are specifically
brought out in this specification and / or the commercial order or not.

1.3 Climatic conditions and Auxiliary Power Supply facilities are as per clause 1.2 & 1.3 of
section GTC (Chapter 1 of section IX).

1.4 The EPC contractor should procure the CT, CVTs and PTs from reputed firms like M/s.
ALSTOM, Chennai, M/s BHEL, Hyderabad, M/s ABB, Vadodara, M/s. CGL,Nasik, M/s.
TELK, Ernakulam, M/s. Siemens Ltd., and other reputed manufacturer with the prior
approval obtained from PMC.

2 ADDITIONAL QUAILIFYING REQUIREMENT:

The instrument transformers to be supplied shall be of a manufacturer, who has designed,

manufactured, tested, supplied at least 10 nos. of respective instrument transformers of the
specified rating or above in the last 5 years out of which 5 nos. are in successful operation
during the last two years as on the date of bid opening. Copies of certificates from the clients
towards supply of material and their satisfactory performance as required may be enclosed as
evidence for meeting the qualifying requirements. Certificates are to be from Electricity
Utilities like SEBs, State Transmission Corporations, Power Grid and Distribution Utilities
only.

1
 CT-PT-CVT

Equipment should have been fully type tested and contractor shall enclose test reports of all
type tests to the bid failing which the bid will be treated as incomplete and non-responsive and
will be rejected. Type tests should have been conducted not earlier than 5 years from the date
of bid opening. Above qualifying requirements are in addition to those stated in section ITB
(Instructions to Bidder).

3.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS: Common for all instrument transformers

(CTs, CVTs and PTs) :

3.1 Construction :

The core shall be high grade non-ageing electrical silicon laminated steel of low hysterisis loss
and high permeability to ensure high accuracy at both normal and over current voltage.

The secondary terminals shall be brought into a compartment on one side of Instrument
transformer or to a separate terminal marshalling box, for easy access. The secondary terminals
shall be provided with short circuiting arrangements in case of Current Transformers. The
secondary taps shall be adequately reinforced to withstand normal handling without damage.
The ratio taps shall be on secondary side.

The mounting base of instrument transformers shall be pedestal type and shall be suitable for
mounting on steel structures. The necessary flanges, bolts etc., for the base of instrument
transformers shall be supplied and they shall be galvanized.

All windings shall be made of double paper covering insulation and the manufacturing of the
units shall be done in completely closed and air-conditioned room, otherwise fiber glass
insulation sleeves are to be provided for primary winding. Details of winding and core shall be
furnished.

The Instrument Transformers shall be complete in all respects with first filling of oil conforming
to IS-335. It shall have oil level indicator with minimum/maximum oil level marks. The top
cover and terminal box cover should be such that rain water does not enter even through the
gaskets.

3.1.1. The insulation of the Instrument transformers shall be so designed that the internal insulation shall
have higher electrical withstand capability than the external insulation. The designed dielectric
withstand values of external and internal insulation shall be clearly brought out in the guaranteed
technical particulars.

. The dielectric withstand values specified in this specification are meant for fully assembled
Instrument Transformers.

2
 CT-PT-CVT

3.1.2 Porcelain Housing:

Instrument transformers shall be of 145 kV class and 36kV class as the case may be, oil filled, with
shedded porcelain bushings / Insulators suitable for outdoor service and upright mounting on steel
structures. Bushings / Insulators shall conform to requirements stipulated in Chapter-GTC.

The porcelain housing shall be in single piece only, without any metallic joints. The housing shall
be made of homogeneous, vitreous porcelain of high mechanical and dielectric strength. Glazing of
porcelain shall be of uniform brown or dark brown color free from blisters, burns etc., with a
smooth surface arranged to shed away rain water or condensed water particles (fog). The profile of
porcelain shall be aerodynamic type as per IEC-815.

Bushings shall be provided with oil filling and drain plugs, oil sight glass of CT and for
electromagnetic unit of CVT, etc. The bushing / insulator of instrument transformer shall have a
cantilever strength of not less than 350 kg for 145 kV instrument transformers

3.1.2.2 Details of attachment of metallic flanges to the porcelain bushing shall be brought out in the offer.

3.1.3 The metal tanks shall have bare minimum number of welded joints so as to minimize possible
locations of oil leakage. The metal tanks shall be made out of mild steel/stainless steel/aluminum
alloy, depending on the requirement. Welding in horizontal plane is to be avoided as welding at
this location may give way due to vibrations during transport resulting in oil leakage. The
thickness of the metal tank shall not be less than 3mm.

3.1.4 Surface Finish:

The metal tanks shall be coated with at least two coats of zinc rich epoxy painting. All the
ferrous hardware, exposed to atmosphere, shall be hot dip galvanized. All other fixing nuts, bolts,
washers shall be made out of stainless steel only

3.1.5 Insulating Oil:

Insulating oil required for first filling of the Instrument transformer shall be covered in Contractor's
scope of supply. The oil shall meet the requirements of latest edition of IS:335.

3.1.6 Prevention of Oil Leakage and Entry of Moisture:

3.1.6.1The Contractor shall ensure that the sealing of Instrument Transformer is properly achieved. In this
connection the arrangement provided by the Contractor at various locations including the following
ones shall be described, supported by sectional drawings.

i) Locations of emergence of primary and secondary terminals.

ii) Interface between porcelain housing and metal tanks.

iii) Cover of the secondary terminal box.

3
 CT-PT-CVT

3.1.6.2 Nuts and bolts or screws used for fixation of the interfacing porcelain bushings for taking
out terminals, shall be provided on flanges cemented to the bushings and not on the
porcelain.
3.1.6.3 For gasket joints wherever used, nitrite butyl rubber gaskets shall be used. The gasket
shall be fitted in properly machined groove with adequate space for accommodating the
gasket under compression.
3.1.7 Oil Level Indicators:
Instrument Transformers supplied with nitrogen cushion for compensation of oil volume
variation shall be provided with prismatic type oil sight window at suitable location so that the
oil level is clearly visible with naked eye to an observer standing at ground level. If metal bellow
is used for the above purpose, a ground glass window shall be provided to monitor the
position of metal below.
3.1.8 Earthing:
Metal tank of the Instrument Transformer shall be provided with two separate Earthing terminals
for bolted connection to 50 x 8 mm MS flat to be provided by the Purchaser for connection to
station earth-mat.
3.1.9 Instrument Transformer shall be provided with suitable lifting arrangement to lift the entire unit.
The lifting arrangement shall be clearly shown in the general arrangement drawing. Lifting
arrangement (lifting eye) shall be positioned in such a way as to avoid any damage to the porcelain
housing or the tanks during lifting for installation/transport. Necessary removable type string
guides shall be provided.

3.1.10 Name Plate:

The Instrument Transformer shall be provided with non-corrosive, legible name plate with the
information specified in relevant standards, duly engraved/punched on it.
Name plate shall conform to the requirements of IEC incorporating the year of manufacture. The
rated current, extended current rating in case of current transformers and rated voltage, voltage
factor in case of voltage transformers shall be clearly indicated on the name plate. The rated thermal
current in case of CT shall also be marked on the name plate.
The intermediate voltage in case of capacitor voltage transformer shall be indicated on the name
plate.
3.1.11 Terminal connectors :
The terminal connectors required for connection of the Instrument transformer to bus bar,
shall be in Contractor's scope. Terminal Connectors shall be suitable for terminating single/
twin/quadruple ACSR Moose conductor or single ACSR Zebra conductor as the case may be. The
terminal connector shall be suitable for both vertical and horizontal take off positions.
1) Terminal connectors shall be suitable for single/Twin moose ACSR conductor in
case of 132 kV instrument transformer and suitable for horizontal or vertical take off
positions. Confirmation from PMC shall be obtained regarding type of terminal
connectors at the time of drawing approval.

4
 CT-PT-CVT

2) Bushing terminals shall be provided with terminal connectors of approved type and
size for connection to external parts. Terminal connectors offered must have been
successfully type tested as per IS 5561

3) i) All castings shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities.
All sharp edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.

ii) No part of a clamp shall be less than 10 mm thick.

iii) All steel bolts & nuts shall be hot dip galvanized conforming to IS:2629 part
xiii and spring washers shall be Electro galvanized conforming to IS 1573.

iv) For bimetallic clamp, copper alloy linear of minimum thickness of 2 mm shall
be supplied which shall fix tightly.

v) Flexible connectors shall be made out of tinned copper sheets.

vi) Size of terminal/conductor for which the clamp is suitable and rated current under
site conditions shall be embossed/punched on each component of the clamp, except
hardware.
vii) All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have minimum
contact resistance.

viii) Clamps shall be designed corona controlled.

ix) The short time rating of terminal connector shall correspond to short time
rating of respective bushing.

3.1.12 Enamel, if used for conductor insulation, shall be either polyvinyl acetate type or amide type
and shall meet the requirements of relevant IS. Polyester enamel shall not be used. Double
cotton cover, if used, shall be suitably covered to ensure that it does not come in contact with oil.
The secondary winding insulation shall be of class ‘H’ type.

3.1.13 The temperature rise on any part of equipment shall not exceed the maximum temperature rise
mentioned below under the conditions specified in test clauses. The permissible
temperature rise indicated below is for a maximum ambient temperature of 50 deg.C.
___________________________________________________________________________
Sl. Nature of the part or Maximum value of
No. of the liquid -------------------------------------
Temperature Temp. rise at a max.
(deg.C) ambient air temp. not
exceeding 50 deg. C
(deg.C)
___________________________________________________________________________
1. Contacts in air, silver-faced 105 55

5
 CT-PT-CVT

copper, copper alloy or aluminium

alloy (see notes (i) and (ii))

Bare copper or tinned aluminium 75 25

alloy.
2. Contacts in oil:
Silver-faced copper, copper 90 40
alloy or aluminum alloy (see note ii)

Bare copper or tinned 80 30

aluminum alloy
3. Terminals to be connected 105 55
to external conductors by
screws or bolts silver
faced (see note iii)
4. Bare Metal parts acting as springs 90 40
-----(See note iv)-----
5. Metal parts in contact with
insulation of the following classes:

Class Y :(for non-impregnated 90 40

materials)
Class A :(for materials 100 50
immersed in oil
or impregnated)
Class E : in air 120 70
in oil 100 50

Class B : in air 130 80

in oil 100 50

Class F : in air 155 105

in oil 100 50

Enamel : oil base 100 50

synthetic, air 120 70

6. Any part of metal or of 100 50

insulating material in contact
with oil except contacts

7. Oil 90 40
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Note: i) When applying the temperature rise of 55 deg.C, care should be taken to ensure
that no damage is caused to the surrounding insulating materials.

6
 CT-PT-CVT

ii) The quality of the silver facing shall be such that a layer of silver remains at the
point of contact after the mechanical endurance test. Otherwise, the contacts shall be
regarded as "bare".
iii) The values of temperature and temperature rise are valid whether or not the
conductor connected to the terminals is silver-faced.
iv) The temperature shall not reach a value where the elasticity of the material is
impaired. For pure copper, this implies to a temperature limit of 75 deg.C.

3.1.14 The 132 kV Current Transformers shall be provided with suitable test tap for measurement of
capacitance, tan delta as well as partial discharges, in factory as well as at site. Provision shall
be made of a screw on cap, for solid and secured earthing of the test tap connection, when not in
use. A suitable caution plate shall be provided duly fixed on the cover of the secondary terminal
box indicating the purpose of the test tap and necessity of its solid Earthing as per prescribed
method before energizing the Instrument Transformer.

4.0 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

4.1 STANDARDS:

The current transformers and associated accessories shall conform to the latest issues/amendments
of standards given below, except to the extent explicitly modified in the specification.

----------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------
Sl. No. Standard No. Title
----------------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
1. IS:2165 Insulation Co-ordination for equipment of 100 kV and above.

2. IS:2705 (I to IV) Current Transformers

3. IS:2099 High voltage porcelain Bushings

4. IS:3347 Dimensions of porcelain transformer bushings.

5. IS:2071 Method of High Voltage Testing.

6. IS:335 Insulating oil for transformers and switch gears

7. IS:13947 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage

(Part-I) switch gear and control.

8. IEC-185 Instrument Transformers.

9. IEC-270 Partial Discharge Measurement.

10. IEC-44(1) Current Transformer measurement of PDs & Tan Delta.

7
 CT-PT-CVT

11. IEC-171 Insulation co-ordination.

12. IEC-60 High voltage testing techniques

13. IEC-8263 Method for RIV test on high voltage insulators

14. IEC Indian Electricity Rules 1956.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4.1.1 In case equipment conforms to other international standards which ensure equal or better
performance than that specified under clause 2,then the English version of such standards or the
relevant extracts of the same shall be furnished with the bid and the salient features of
comparison shall be brought out separately in additional information schedule.

4.2. PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:

The Current Transformers shall conform to the following specific parameters.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sl. Item Parameters
No. 132 kV 33kV
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS:

1. Type of Installation Single phase, dead tank, oil filled Single phase, live tank, oil filled
hermetically sealed out door type hermetically sealed/dry type
(Poly crete) and out door type

2. Type of mounting Pedestal Type Pedestal Type

3. Suitable for system 50 Hz+/- 5% 50 Hz+/- 5%

Frequency

4. Highest System voltage (kV rms) 145 36

5. Current Ratio A/A See Annexure II See Annexure II

6. Ratio taps On secondary side On secondary side

7. Method of earthing effectively grounded neutral system

8. Rated continuous thermal 120% of rated current 120% of rated current

current (A)

8
 CT-PT-CVT

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sl. Item Parameters
No. 132 kV 33kV
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. Acceptable limit of temperature As per IS:2705 As per IS:2705
rise above the specified
ambient temperature for
continuous operation at rated
current

10. Acceptable partial discharge As per Technical ---------

level at 1.1 times the rated Clause No.3.1.14 (A)
voltage

11. 1.2/50 microsecond lightning 650 170

impulse withstand voltage
(kVp)

12. 1 minute dry power frequency 275 70

ithstand voltage for primary
winding (kV rms)

13. 1 minute dry Power frequency over- 3 3

voltage withstand voltage for
secondary winding (kV rms)

14. Min. total creepage distance of 3625 900

porcelain housing (mm)

15. Rated short time withstand 31.5 25

current for 1 second duration for 3 seconds
(kA rms)

16. Rated dynamic withstand 78.75 62.5

current (kAp)

17. Type of Insulation Class A Class A

18. R.I.V at 1.1 X rated voltage Less than 500 micro volts. N.A.

19. Max. temperature raise over As per IEC-46-1

designed ambient temp
20. Number of terminals All terminals of control circuits are to
be wired upto marshaling box plus 20%
spare terminals evenly distributed on all TBs.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

9
 CT-PT-CVT

4.3 The current transformer shall be of dead tank design for132 kV CTs and live tank design/ dry type
(Poly crete) for 33kV CTs and they shall be so designed and constructed, that it can be easily
transported to site within the allowable transport limitation in vertical position.

4.4 For compensation of variation in the oil volume due to ambient variation, nitrogen cushion or
stainless steel bellows shall be used. Rubber diaphragms shall not be permitted for this purpose.
The expansion chamber at the top of the porcelain insulators should be suitable for expansion of oil.

4.5 The current transformer secondary terminals shall be brought out in a weather proof terminal
box having IP 55 protection as per IS: 214. The terminal box shall be provided with removable
gland plate and glands suitable for 1100 volts grade, PVC insulated, PVC sheathed multi-core
stranded copper conductor cable. The terminal box shall be dust and vermin proof. Suitable
arrangement shall be made for drying of air inside the secondary terminal box. The dimensions of
the terminal box and its openings shall be adequate to enable easy access and working space
with use of normal tools. In addition to CT secondary existing terminals on extra set of secondary
terminals shall be brought out on top of the original terminals to avoid direct tapping of original
terminals to avoid leakage of oil. The wiring diagram plate for the interconnections of the three
single phase CTs shall be provided inside the marshalling box.

4.6. Polarity shall be indelibly marked on each primary and secondary terminal. Facility shall be
provided for star delta formation, short circuiting and grounding of the current transformer
secondary terminals inside the terminal box.

4.7 The current transformer shall be provided with a rating plate with dimensions and markings as
per IS:2705. The markings shall be punched and not painted.

4.8. The current transformer shall be vacuum filled with oil after processing and thereafter
hermetically sealed to eliminate breathing and to prevent air and moisture from entering the
tanks. Oil filling and/or oil sampling cocks, if provided to facilitate factory processing, should be
permanently sealed before dispatching the current transformer. The method adopted for hermetic
sealing shall be described in the offer.

4.9. The castings of base, collar etc., shall be die cast and tested before assembly to detect cracks and
voids if any. The current transformers should be suitable for mounting on lattice support structure
by the contractor per the relevant specification. .

4.10 (a) The Instrument security factor of metering core shall be less than 5. This shall be demonstrated
on all the ratios of the metering core, in accordance with procedure specified in IEC-185 or
IS:2705. If any auxiliary CTs / reactor are used in the current transformers then all parameters
specified shall have to be met treating auxiliary CTs as an integral part of the current transformer.
The auxiliary CTs/ reactor shall preferably be inbuilt construction of the CTs. In case these are to be
mounted separately these shall be mounted in the central marshalling box suitably wired upto the
terminal blocks.
(b) For 145 and 36kV class CTs the rated extended primary current shall be 120 % (150 % if
applicable) on all cores of the CT.

10
 CT-PT-CVT

(c) For 145 kV current transformer, characteristics shall be such as to provide satisfactory
performance of burdens ranging from 25% to 100% of rated burden over a range of 10% to 100%
of rated current in case of metering CTs and up to the accuracy limit factor / knee point voltage in
case of relaying CTs.
(d) Current transformers’s guaranteed burdens and accuracy class are to be intended as
simultaneous for all cores.
(e) The current transformer shall be suitable for horizontal transportation it shall be ensured that the
CT is able to withstand all the stresses imposed on it while transporting and there shall be no
damage in transit the contractor shall submit the details of packing design to the PMC for review.
(f) The CT shall be designed as to achieve the minimum risks of explosion in service. Bidder /
Manufacturer shall bring out in his offer, the measures taken to achieve this.

4.11 Core : All the cores may be continuous without any air-gap. The area of cross-section of the core and
flux density at rated primary current and rated burden shall be consistent with the required
characteristics of CTs. The cores shall be carefully annealed and bonded after they are wound, to
relieve the stress during winding.

All the protection cores shall be able to produce undisturbed secondary current under transient
conditions at all ratios. Core lamination shall be of cold rolled grain oriented silicon steel or other
equivalent alloys. The cores used for protection shall produce undistorted secondary current under
transient conditions at all ratios with specified CT parameters.

4.12 Winding : The main insulation for the winding shall consist of paper and oil system which will
possess high mechanical strength, superior electrical withstand properties and good ageing
qualities to ensure long trouble free life for the CTs . The windings shall have high mechanical
strength to withstand short-circuit stresses.

4.13 Primary Winding:

Primary winding shall consist of a single primary of suitable design. The conducting material for
primary winding may consist of electrolytic high conductivity copper strip or Aluminum tube of
sufficient area of cross-section to cater for the guaranteed short time as well as continuous thermal
current rating. Conductors used for the primary winding shall be rigid or housed in rigid metallic
shell. Unavoidable joints in the Primary winding shall be of welded type. The winding may be hair
pin type or ring type.

The bidder in case of 132 class CT also may offer CTs having bar type primary with inverted
arrangement of construction if considered more appropriate. However in such a case the following
requirements are to be met.

(i) The secondaries shall be totally encased in metallic shielding providing a uniform equi-
potential surface for even electric field distribution.
(ii) The lowest part of the insulation assembly shall be properly secured to avoid any risk of
damage due to transportation stresses.
(iii) The upper part of insulation assembly resting on primary bar shall be properly secured to
avoid any damage during transportation due to relative movement between insulation
assembly & top dome.

11
 CT-PT-CVT

(iv) Nitrogen if used for hermetic sealing (in case of live tank design) should not come
indirect contact with oil.
(v) Contractor / Manufacturer shall recommend whether any special storage facility is
required for spare CT.

The details of such welded joints shall be indicated in the drawings submitted with the offer. The
design density for short circuit current as well as conductivity of the metal used for primary
winding shall meet the requirement of IS : 2705. The Bidder shall furnish in his offer detailed
calculations for selection of winding cross-sections.

4.14 Secondary Windings:

Suitably insulated copper wire of high conductivity electrolytic grade shall be used for secondary
windings. Type of insulation used shall be described in the offer. For multi ratio design,
suitable tappings shall be provided on the secondary winding only. Primary reconnection to
achieve different ratios on secondary is not acceptable.

4.15 The exciting current of the current transformer shall be as low as possible. The Bidder shall
furnish along with his offer the magnetization curve(s) for all the core(s).

4.16. Primary Terminals:

Primary terminal shall be made out of two rods of 30mm dia x 80mm length in parallel. The No.
of rods shall be one for CT primary current rating unto 600Amps and two rods for rating more than
600 Amps. The primary terminals shall be of heavily tinned electrolytic copper or aluminum alloy
of 99.9% conductivity. The minimum thickness of tinning shall be 15 microns.

4.17. Secondary Terminals:

Secondary terminal shall be terminated to stud type studs shall be provided with at least three nuts
and adequate plain and spring washers for fixing the leads. The studs, nuts and washers shall be of
brass, duly nickel plated. The minimum outside diameter of the studs shall be 6mm. A length of at
least 15 mm shall be available on the studs for inserting the leads. The horizontal spacing between
centers of the adjacent studs shall be at least 1.5 times the outside circum dia of the nuts.

4.18. Explosion Vent

Explosion vent shall be provided in expansion chamber for all class of CTs for safeguarding the
equipment.

5.0 CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS :

5.1. STANDARDS:

Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this specification the rating as well as performance and
testing of the Capacitor voltage transformers and associated accessories shall confirm to the latest
issues/amendments of standards available at the time of placement of order of all the relevant
standards as listed hereunder.

12
 CT-PT-CVT

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sl. Standard No. Title
No.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
1. IS:3156 (PART-IV) Capacitor Voltage Transformers

2. IS:2099 High Voltage porcelain bushings

3. IS:2071 Method of High Voltage Testing

4. IS:335 Insulating oil for transformers

and switchings.

5. IS:2165 Insulation Co-ordination for

equipment of 100 kV and above..

6. IEC:186 Voltage Transformers :-

Chapter –III
Capacitor Voltage Transformers:-
Chapter – IV

7. IEC:186 A First supplement to IEC

Publication 186

8. IEC-270 Partial Discharge Measurement..

9. IEC-171 Insulation co-ordination.

10. IEC-358 Coupling capacitor divider.

11. IEC-60 High Voltage Testing Techniques.

12. IS: 9348 Coupling capacitors and capacitor dividers.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

5.1.1 Equipment meeting with the requirement of other authoritative standards which ensure equal or
better performance than the standards mentioned above, shall also be considered .When the
equipment offered by the Contractor conforms to other standards adopted and the standards
specified in this specification shall be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule. Four copies of
such standards with authentic translation in English shall be furnished along with the offer.

13
 CT-PT-CVT

5.2 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:

The Capacitor Voltage Transformers shall conform to the following specific parameters.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sl. Item Specification
No. 132 kV
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS:

1. Type of Installation Single phase,

oil filled
hermetically
sealed and
outdoor type
2. Type of mounting Pedestal Type

3. Suitable for system 50 Hz +/- 5%

Frequency

4.Highest System voltage

(kV rms) 145

5. Voltage Ratio
i)Rated primary 132/\/3
Voltage (kV r.m.s)

ii)Secondary Voltage
(Volts)

a) Winding – I 110/ \/3

(For metering)

b) Winding – II 110 – 110/ \/3

(For protection)

Simultaneous output of
Secondary (VA)

Winding – I 50 VA Protection
Winding - II 200 VA Metering
Winding –III 50 VA Protection

14
 CT-PT-CVT

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sl. Item Specification
No. 132 kV
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Accuracy Class
Winding – I 0.2
Winding – II 3p
8. Method of earthing Effectively
the system earthed

9 1.2/50 microsecond 650

lightning impulse withstand
voltage(kvp)
10 . 1 minute dry Power frequency 275
wiithstand voltage for
Primary winding (kV rms)

11 Min. creepage distance of 3625

porcelain housing (mm)

12 Rated Voltage factor 1.2 Continuous

1.5 for 30 seconds

13 Limits of voltage errors Accuracy Percentage Phase

and Phase displacement class Voltage displacement
error in minutes
---------------------------------------------------------------
a) Metering + 0.2 + 10
0.2
b) Protection + 3 + 120
3p
c) Protection ± 3 ± 20
3p
-----------------------------------------------------------------
14. Rated total capacitance (pf) 4400+10% - 5%

15. Acceptable limit of variation + 50 % & –20 %

of total capacitance of the rated
over the entire carrier capacitance
frequency range

16. Equivalent series resistance <40

over the entire carrier frequency
range (ohms)

15
 CT-PT-CVT

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sl. Item Specification
No. 132 kV
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17. Stray capacitance and stray As per
conductance of low voltage IEC- 350
terminal over the entire
carrier frequency range

18. Standard reference range 96% to 102 %

of frequency for which for protection
accuracies are valid 99% to 101% for
metering

19. 1 minute power frequency

withstand voltage :

i) Low voltage terminal 3

(HF) and earth terminal
(kV r.m.s)
ii) Withstand voltage for 3
secondary winding
(kV r.m.s)

20. Partial discharge level at < 10

rated voltage for capacitance
divider (pico coulombs)

21. Maximum Temperature rise As per

over ambient of 50 deg.C IEC – 186

22. Rated total thermal burden 300 VA

(Simultaneous)

23. Seismic acceleration 0.3 g

(Horizontal)

24. Type of insulation Class A

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

5.3 The Capacitor voltage transformer is required for protection, metering, tele-metering and tele-control
purposes.

16
 CT-PT-CVT

5.4 The capacitor voltage divider of the capacitor voltage transformer shall be mounted in shedded, oil
filled porcelain bushing. The electro-magnetic unit consisting compensating reactor, intermediate
transformer, protective and damping devices etc., shall be mounted in a hermetically sealed metal
enclosure, which shall also be used as a mechanical support for the capacitor voltage divider. The
terminals of the secondary windings of the electromagnetic units shall be brought out in a separate,
weather proof terminal box, which shall be properly mounted on the wall of the metal enclosure of
the electromagnetic unit. The terminal box shall be dust and vermin proof. Suitable arrangement
shall be provided for drying of air inside the terminal box

5.5 The capacitor voltage divider shall capable of being used over a wide carrier frequency bandwidth.
The value of capacitance shall be suitably chosen for reliable wide band carrier coupling and shall be
as per the values indicated in clause 5.1. The reactance of the teed branch of the CVT shall be
adjusted to minimize carrier loss. With carrier frequency coupling device connected to the earth lead
of the intermediate coupling capacitor, the accuracy of the electromagnetic voltage transformer unit
shall remain within the specified limits.

5.6 Volumetric variations of the insulating oil inside the capacitor voltage divider unit shall be suitably
compensated. The arrangement provided for this purpose shall be clearly described in the offer. Each
unit of the capacitor voltage divider shall be hermetically sealed.

5.7 The oil volume variation in metal enclosure of the electromagnetic unit shall be counter balanced by
a suitably dimensioned gas cushion.

5.8 Electromagnetic Unit / Base Housing :

5.8.1 Steel enclosure housing the Electromagnetic unit shall be coated with atleast two coats of zinc rich
epoxy painting which will also serve as a mounting base for the Capacitor stack and a housing for
carrier accessories.

5.9 PRIMARY WINDING:

The primary winding shall be of suitably insulated electrolytic copper wire. Type of insulation used
shall be described in the offer. A carrier frequency choke shall be provided in series with the primary
winding to prevent the loss of signal.

5.10 SECONDARY WINDING:

Suitably insulated copper wire of electrolytic grade shall be used for secondary windings. Type of
insulation used shall be described in the offer. Each core of secondary winding shall be protected by
two sets of HRC fuses in parallel.

5.11 The Secondary terminals shall be brought out in a weather proof terminal box. The HRC fuses meant
for protection of secondary winding shall also be located in the terminal box. The terminal box shall
be provided with removable gland plate and glands suitable for 1100 voltage grade, PVC insulated,
PVC sheathed multicore stranded copper conductor cable. The dimensions of the terminal box and

17
 CT-PT-CVT

its openings shall be adequate to enable easy access and sufficient working space for use of normal
tools. Polarity shall be indelibly marked on each of the secondary terminals in the terminal box.

5.12 SECONDARY TERMINALS:

Secondary winding terminal studs shall be provided with at least three nuts, plain and spring washers
for fixing the leads. The studs, nuts and washers shall be of brass, duly nickel plated. The minimum
outside diameter of the studs shall be 6mm. A length of at least 15 mm shall be available on the
studs for inserting the leads.

5.13 The capacitor voltage transformer shall be provided with a rating plate with dimensions and
markings as per IS : 3156 (Part- IV). The markings shall be punched and not painted. The wiring
diagram for the interconnection of the three single phase CVTs shall be provided inside the
marshalling box in such a manner that it does not deteriorate with time.

5.14 It should be ensured that access to secondary terminals is without any danger of access to high
voltage circuit.

6.0 POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS :

6.1 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS :

The Voltage Transformers shall confirm to the following specific parameters

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sl. Item Specification
No. 132kV 33kV
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a) Type : Outdoor, Single phase, oil immersed and
self cooled.
b) Mounting of tank : -- Bottom tank -- -- Bottom tank --

c) Nominal system voltage : 132kV 33kV

d) Highest system voltage : 145kV 36kV

e) Earthing of system : Effectively grounded neutral system

f) Frequency : -- 50 C/S – -- 50 C/S –

g) Insulation level (primary) : 275 kVrms 70 kVrms

h) One minute power frequency : -- 3 kV rms -- -- 3 kV rms --

withstand test voltage (Secondary)

i) Impulse withstand voltage(peak) : 650 kV 170kV

j) Minimum creepage distance of : 3625mm 900mm

18
 CT-PT-CVT

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sl. Item Specification
No. 132kV 33kV
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

i) Bottom-most portion of the bushing: 2500mm 2500mm

at a height of (the structure design
to meet this requirement shall be
given by the contractor

k) Primary and secondary core details: The VTs are intended for use on 3 phase
system. These shall be of single phase with
primary suitable for phase to earth connection.
The primary voltage is 132/\/3kV and
33/\/3kV respectively . The secondary core
details are as indicated below:

132 kV/ \/3 33kV/ \/3

i) Secondary winding :
Secondary voltage : 110-110/ \/3 110-110/ \/3

Wdg. – I Wdg. – II Wdg. – I Wdg. - II

ii) Class of accuracy : 0.2 3P 0.2 3P

iii)Rated burden (simultaneous)VA: 200 50 200 50

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

6.2 The PTs covered by this specification shall comply with the latest issue of ISS : 3156 or British
Standard : 3941 or IEC – 186 except where specified otherwise.

The bushing shall be of single piece. PTs with cores mounted at the top or middle of the bushing are
not acceptable. Bushings with metallic joints in the middle are also not acceptable. The oil used for
the PTs shall conform to the requirements of IS-335 of latest issue. The PTs shall be supplied with
first filling of oil.
The bushings of PTs shall conform to the ISS-2039 of latest issue.

7 TESTS:

7.1 Type Tests for CTs:

CTs of each voltage class offered in the bid shall be fully type tested as per the relevant standards.
The type tests must have been conducted not earlier than five years form the date of bid
opening. In case type tests reports pertained to the period earlier than 5 years from the date
of bid opening, type tests shall be performed in the presence of PMC’s representative free of
cost. The Bidder shall furnish two sets of the following type test reports as per IS-2705 along with
offer.

19
 CT-PT-CVT

I. Short time current test.

II. Temperature –rise test.
III. Lightning impulse test.
IV. High voltage power frequency wet withstand voltage test.
V. Determination of errors.

The offers received without these type test reports shall be treated as Non-Responsive.

The following tests are to be conducted for all the current Transformers free of cost.
A Partial discharge Test clause 5.1.2.2, 8.2.2.2 of IEC 60044-1

a) Measurement at highest system voltage Um for which limiting value is 10 Pc

b) Measurement at 1.2 Um/√3 for which limiting value is 5 Pc.

B. Tan Delta Test Clause 5.12.4 of IEC 60044-1

Maximum Limiting value 5x10-3

Measuring value to be 10 kV to Um/√35

7.2. Type Test for CVTs :

CVTs of each voltage class offered in the bid shall be fully type tested as per the relevant
standards. The type tests must have been conducted not earlier than five years form the date of
bid opening. The bidder shall furnish two sets of the following type test reports as per IS-3156
along with offer.

i. Temperature –rise test.

ii. Lightning impulse test.
iii. Ferro resonance test
iv. Transient response test
v. Verification of accuracy.
vi. High frequency capacitance and equivalent series resistance measurements in
the range of the rated temperature category
vii. Stray capacitance and stray conductance measurements of the low voltage
terminal
viii. A.C. voltage test, dry or wet.
ix. Discharge test.
x. Determination of the temperature coefficient
xi. Cantilever test

The offers received without these type test reports shall be treated as Non-Responsive.

20
 CT-PT-CVT

7.3 Type Test for PTs

PTs of each voltage class offered in the bid shall be fully type tested as per the relevant
standards. The type tests must have been conducted not earlier than five years form the date of bid
opening. The bidder shall furnish two sets of the following type test reports as per IS-3156 along
with offer.

i. Temperature –rise test.

ii. Lightning impulse test.
iii. High voltage power frequency wet withstand voltage test.
iv. Determination of errors and other characteristics.
v. Short circuit withstand capability test.
The offers received without these type test reports shall be treated as Non-Responsive.

7.4 Acceptance and Routine Tests:

7.5 All acceptance and routine tests for Instrument Transformers as stipulated in the relevant standards
shall be carried out free of cost. Partial discharge test and tan delta tests shall be carried out as per
Technical clause No.3.1.14 (A) and (B), by the bidder in the presence of PMC or its representative.

7.6 Immediately after finalization of the program of acceptance/routine testing, the bidder shall
give sufficient advance intimation to the PMC, to enable deputation of PMC’s representative for
witnessing the tests.

8. INSPECTION:

i) The owner/ PMC shall have access at all times to the works and all other places of
manufacture, where the Instrument Transformers are being manufactured and the
Contractor shall provide PMC’s representative all facilities for unrestricted inspection of the
works, raw materials, manufacture of all the accessories and for conducting necessary tests
as detailed herein.

ii) The Contractor shall keep the PMC informed in advance of the time of starting and of the
progress of manufacture of equipment in its various stages so that arrangements could be
made for inspection.

iii) No equipment shall be dispatched from its place of manufacture unless the equipment has
been satisfactorily inspected and tested.

iv) The acceptance of any quantity of the equipment shall in no way relieve the Contractor of
his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of this specification and shall not prevent
subsequent rejection if such equipment is later found to be defective.

The contractor shall give 15 days (for local supplies)/ 60 days (in case of foreign supplies)
advance, intimation to enable the PMC to depute their representative for witnessing

21
 CT-PT-CVT

acceptance and routine tests. All charges in connection with inspection by PMC's
personnel such as travel, accommodation and incidentals shall be borne by the
Contractor.

9.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN: As per relevant clause in Chapter-GTC.

10.0 DOCUMENTATION:

10.1 All drawings shall conform to International Standards Organization (ISO) 'A' series of
drawing sheet/Indian Standards Specification. All drawings shall be in ink and suitable for
micro filming. All dimensions and data shall be in S.I. Units only.

10.2 List of Drawings and Documents:

The bidder shall furnish four sets of following drawings along with his offer:

a) General outline and assembly drawings of the equipment.

b) Graphs showing the performance of equipment in regard to magnetization

characteristics.
c) Sectional views showing:

i) General Constructional Features.

ii) Materials/Gaskets/Sealing used.
iii) The insulation of the winding arrangements, method of connection of the
primary/secondary winding to the primary/secondary terminals etc.,
iv) Porcelain used and its dimensions along with the mechanical and electrical
characteristics.

d) Arrangement of terminals and details of connection studs provided.

e) Name plate.

f) Schematic drawing.

g) Type test reports of equipment offered.

h) Test reports, literature, pamphlets of the bought out items and raw material.

10.3 The Contractor shall within 2 weeks of placement of order, submit four sets of final versions of
all the above drawings for PMC's approval. The PMC shall communicate its comments/approval
on the drawings to the Contractor within reasonable time. The Contractor shall, if necessary,
modify the drawings and resubmit four copies of the modified drawings for PMC's approval
within two weeks from the date of receipt of comments.

22
 CT-PT-CVT

After receipt of PMC's approval, the Contractor shall within three weeks, submit 20 prints and
two good quality reproducible of the approved drawings for Owner's use.

10.4 Adequate copies of contract drawings, acceptance and routine test certificates, duly approved by the
PMC shall accompany each of the dispatched consignment.

10.5 The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the approved
drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of thePMC . All
manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior to the approval of the
drawing shall be at the Contractor’s risk only.

10.6 Approval of drawings by the PMC shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility and
liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the latest revision of applicable
standards, rules and codes of practices. The equipment shall conform in all respects to high
standards of engineering, design, workmanship and latest revisions of relevant standards at the
time of ordering and the PMC/Owner shall have the power to reject any material which in his
judgement is not in full accordance therewith.

10.7 One reproducible and four copies of nicely printed and bound volumes of Instruction manuals on
operation, maintenance and erection instructions in English language, for each type and rating
of equipment supplied shall be submitted by the Contractor for distribution, prior to the dispatch
of the equipment. The manual shall contain all the drawings and information required for
erection, operation and maintenance of the Instrument transformers. The manual shall also contain
a set of all the approved drawings, type, routine & acceptance Test reports etc. for final copies of
Instructional manuals and other details please refer to clause 5 of GTC, Chapter-I of Section IX of
this volume.

11 PACKING AND FORWARDING: Refer to relevant clause in GTC Chapter-I of Section-IX

12 QUANTITY AND DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS

Recreation Gharbara Delivery period
Sl. No EQUIPMENT Ratio Green SS Village SS
(Qty.) (Qty.)
1 132kV CTs 800-300A/1-1,0.5775#–1-1-1 A 3 3 CVTs and PTs
complete along
800A/1-1 – 1- 1A 6 6 with all
accessories,
800-600-400/ 1-1 –1-1- 1A** 9 6 fittings and
mandatory
spares shall be
delivered within
six (6 months )
from the date of
LOA

23
 CT-PT-CVT

Sl. No EQUIPMENT Ratio Recreation Gharbara Delivery period

Green SS Village SS
(Qty.) (Qty.)
2. 33kV CTs 1200 A/1-1, 0.5775#-1 A 3 3 CVTs and PTs
complete along
800 -600 - 400 A/ 1-1 A 24 24 with all
accessories,
2000-1200 A/1-1A 6 6 fittings and
mandatory
480-240-120 A / 1-1A(For spares shall be
Capacitor Banks)* 6 6 delivered within
six (6 months )
132CVTs 132/ \/3 kV /110-110 / \/3 V 5 4 from the date of
3 LOA

4 132kVPTS 132/ \/3 kV /110-110/ \/3 V 6 6

5 33kVPTs 33/ \/3 kV /110-110/ \/3 V 6 6

*These CTs along with relevant mandatory spares are covered under the price schedule
for capacitor banks.
** For the sake of catering to a feeder or transformer and also to facilitate inter-
changeability, CTs of 800-600-400/1-1- 1-1-1A ratio are being procured for transfer bus also.
# The Bidder can offer core of 300 / 1A ratio and achieve the required ratio of 300 / 0.5775
A either with the help of Auxiliary CTs or making use of inherent properties of a numeric
relay. Similarly in case of 1200/0.5775 core also 1200/1A can be offered and the required
ratio of 1200 / 0.5775 A can be achieved either with the help of Auxiliary CTs or making
use of inherent properties of a numeric relay.

13.0 MANDATORY SPARES :- Please refer to ANNEXURE- I

14.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

The Guaranteed Technical particulars for the equipment being supplied shall be provided with the
Bid as specified in this technical specification at Annexures- V to VII . The Bids received without
guaranteed technical particulars shall be treated as Non-responsive and rejected.

15.0 All deviations shall be specifically brought out in the ‘Schedule of Deviations’(Annexure-
VIII). Deviations brought out elsewhere will not be considered.

24
CT-PT-CVT

ANNEXURE-I

Mandatory Spares for Instrument Transformers

Recreation Gharbara
Sl. No EQUIPMENT Ratio Green SS Village SS
(Qty.) (Qty.)
1 132kV CTs 800 – 300A /1-1, 0.5775 – 1-1-1 A 1 1

800A/1-1 –1-1 A 1 1

800-600-400A/1-1 –1-1-1A 2 2

2. 33kV CTs 1200 /1-1, 0.5775-1 A 1 1

800 -600 – 400 A/ 1-1A 3 3

2000-1200 /1-1 A 1 1

480-240-120 A / 1-1A(For 1 1
Capacitor Banks)*
3 132CVTs 132/ \/3 kV /110-110 / \/3 V 1 1

4 132kVPTS 132/ \/3 kV /110-110/ \/3 V 1 1

5 33kVPTs 33/ \/3 kV /110-110/ \/3 V 1 1

80 Covered under the price schedule for capacitor banks.

25
CT-PT-CVT

ANNEXURE-II
CORE WISE DETAILS OF CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
Sl. No.of Core Applica-tion Current ratio Output Accuracy Accurac Minimum Maximum
No. Cores No. burden Class y Limit knee exciting
VA Factor point current at
Voltage ¼ Knee
(Volts) point
=Vk voltage
ie.,Vk/4
(mA)
I 132 kV feeder CT ratio 800-600-400A /1 –1-1-1-1 A
1 O/L, E/L 600/1 20 5P 20
Protection 400/1 VA
2 Distance 600/1 - PS 40 30
Protection 400/1 (Rct +
10)
3 Metering 600/1** 20 0.2 - -
400/1** VA
4 Bus bar 800/1 PS- 80 (RCt + 30
differential 10)
5 Bus bar 800/1 - PS 80 (RCt + 30
differential 10)
II 50 MVA 132/33 kV Transformer 800 –300A /1 –1,0.5775-1-1-1 A
1 O/L, E/L 300/1 20 5P 20
Protection VA
2 Transformer 300/0.5775* - PS 40 (Rct+ 30
differential 10)
3 Metering 300/1** 20 0.2 - -
VA
4 Bus bar 800/1 - PS 80 (RCt + 30
differential 10)
5 Bus bar 800/1 - PS 80 (RCt + 30
differential 10)
III Transfer Bus 800 A- 600-400 A/1-1-1A***
1 Metering 400/1** 20 0.2 - -
600/1** VA
2 Bus bar 800/1 - PS 80(RCt + 30
differential 10)
3 Bus bar 800/1 - PS 80 (RCt + 30
differential 10)

26
CT-PT-CVT

IV Bus coupler CT ratio :800 A/1-1-1-1 A

1 Backup 800/1 20 5P 20
(O/L, E/L)
2 Metering 800/1** 30 0.2 -
VA
3 Bus bar 800/1 - PS 80 (Rct+ 30
differential 10)
4 Bus bar 800/1 - PS 80 (Rct+ 30
differential 10)
*The Bidder can offer core of 300 / 1A ratio and achieve the required ratio either with the
help of Auxiliary CTs or making use of inherent properties of a numeric relay.
** Instrument security factor of the metering core shall be less than 5
***For the sake of catering to a feeder or transformer and also to facilitate inter-
changeability, CTs of 800-600-400/1-1- 1-1-1A ratio are being procured for transfer bus also..
Rct shall be less than 5 Ohms at the highest tap for PS core .

B). 33kV side

(i) Transformer CTs (LV CTs) Ratio: 1200-/1-1, 0.5775,1A

Minimum kneepoint Purpose

Core Accuracy
Burden voltage as per Current Ratio
No class
formula
1 5P 20 30 VA -- 1200/1A O / L & E / L
Protection
2 PS - Min. Vk = 40(RCt+ 1200/0.5775A* Transformer
10) Max. Im= 0.03A Differential
protection
3 0.2 20 VA - 1200/1A** Metering

*The bidder can offer core of1200 / 1A ratio and achieve the required ratio of
1200/0.5775A, either with the help of Auxiliary CTs or making use of inherent properties
of a numeric relay.

(ii) 33 KV CTs for Feeders : CT Ratio : 800-600-400 A/1-1A

Core-I Core –II

Burden 15 VA 15 VA

Class of accuracy 5P20 0.2

Purpose Protection Metering **

27
CT-PT-CVT

(iii) 33 KV CTs for Bus- sectionaliser:- Ratio: 2000- 1200-/1-1-1A

Minimum kneepoint Purpose

Core Accuracy
Burden voltage as per Current Ratio
No class
formula
1 5P 20 30 VA -- 2000/1A O / L & E / L
1200/1A Protection
2 0.2 30 VA - 2000/1A** Metering
1200/1A**

General Note (for all) :-

i. Additional one set of secondary terminals shall be brought on top of the secondary terminals to
avoid direct tapping of the terminals.

ii.** Instrument security factor of the metering core shall be less than 5.

iii. Rct shall be less than 5 Ohms at the highest tap for PS core .

iv. The ratios for the secondary core of the CTs shall be confirmed along with the drawing
approval.

ANNEXURE – III

WINDING WISE DETAILS OF CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

Sl No.of Winding Secondary Application Accuracy Simultaneous

Windings No. Voltage (V) Class out put burden (VA)

1 132kV CVTs

3 1 110/\/3 Metering 0.2 200

2 110-110/\/3 Protection 3P 50

3 110-110/\/3 Protection 3P 50

2. Rated thermal (Simultaneous) burden for the above 300

28
CT-PT-CVT

ANNEXURE – IV

WINDING WISE DETAILS OF PT

Sl. No.of Winding Secondary Application Accuracy Simultaneous

Windings No. Voltage (V) Class out put burden (VA)

1. 132kV PTs
2 1 110-110/\/3 Metering 0.2 200

2 110-110/\/3 Protection 3P 50

2. 33kV

2 1 110-110/\/3 Metering 0.2 50

2 110-110/\/3 Protection 3P 50

Note : The ratios for secondary core of the PTs shall be confirmed along with drawing
approval.

29
 CT-PT-CVT

ANNEXURE-V
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

(To be filled in by the Contractor separately for each type and voltage rating)

1. Type of tank/Installation

2. Type of mounting

3. Manufacturer's Name and address and Country of Manufacture

4. Conforming to standard

5. a) i) Primary and Secondary winding made out of (As per clause 4.12,4.13,4.14)

ii ) Primary windings – Design density for short circuit current –

Conductivity of metal used -
b) i) Area of cross section of primary winding

ii) Area of cross section of secondary winding

c) Material used for providing secondary terminals

6. Rated primary voltage (kV rms)

7. Rated highest voltage (kV rms)

8. Rated frequency (Hz)

9. Rated primary current (A)

10. Rated secondary current (A)

11. Ratio taps (on secondary side only)

12. Type of insulation

13. Seismic acceleration (g)

14. RIV at 1.1 x Rated voltage (mv)

15. Tank material and Tank coating (As per clause 3.1.3 & 3.1.4)

16. Hardware exposed to atmosphere (As per clause 3.1.4)

17. Bolts, Nuts and Washers (As per clause 3.1.4)

30
CT-PT-CVT

18. Porcelain housing and it make (Single piece only as per clause 3.1.2)

19. Sealing (Nitrogen gas cushion/Metal bellow as per clause 3.1.7)

20. Instrument security factor (As per clause 4.10)

21. Whether test tap provided (As per clause 4.18)

22. Acceptable limit of temperature

23. Acceptable partial discharge level at 1.1 times the rated voltage

24. Rated short time withstand current for 1 sec. duration (kA rms)

25. Rated dynamic withstand current (kAp)

26. Rated continuous thermal current (pu) where pu = rated current

27. 1.2/50 micro-second impulse withstand voltage (kVp)

28. One minute power frequency withstand voltage (kV rms) of primary winding (Dry)

29. One minute power frequency withstand voltage of secondary winding (kV rms)

30. a) Minimum total creepage distance of insulator bushing (mm)

b) Protected creepage of distance of bushing (mm)

31. Details of Cores Core No. I II III IV V

31.1 Current Ratios A/A -- -- --- -- --

31.2 Output burden (VA) -- -- --- -- --

31.3 Class of accuracy __ __ __ __ __

31.4 Accuracy limit factor __ __ __ __ __

31.5 Min. knee point voltage (kpv) __ __ __ __ __

31.6 Secondary resistance __ __ __ __ __

corrected to 75 deg.C

31
CT-PT-CVT

31.7 Max. exciting current at __ __ __ __ __

20% of knee point voltage
50% of knee point voltage
100% of knee point voltage

31.8 Application -- -- -- -- --

32. Weight of oil (Kg.)

33. Total Weight (Kg.)

34. Mounting details

35 Overall dimensions

36. Characteristics (whether graphs enclosed):

a. Ratio and phase angle curves

b. Magnetisation curves

c. Ratio correction factor curves

37. Core

a) Area of cross section

b) Flux density at rated primary current and rated burden.

Name of the firm .............

Signature of Bidder...........

Name & Designation & Seal ………..

Date .........................

32
CT-PT-CVT

ANNEXURE-VI

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR CAPACITOR VOLTAGE

TRANSFORMERS

(To be filled in by the Contractor separately for each type and voltage rating)

1. Type of tank/Installation
2. Type of mounting
3. Manufacturer's Name, Address and Country of Manufacture
4. Conforming to standard
5. Type of voltage transformer
6. Type of insulation used
7. Rated primary voltage (kV rms)
8. Highest system voltage (kV rms)
9. Rated Secondary For winding-I Winding-II Winding-III
Voltage (volts)

10. Rated Transformation ratio --- --- ---

11. Rated secondary Burden(VA) --- --- ---

12. Rated thermal burden(VA) --- --- ---

13. Accuracy at rated burden --- --- ---

14. Rated frequency (Hz) --- --- ---

15. Temp. rise of winding by resistance (deg.c)

16. Primary winding one minute power frequency withstand voltage kV (r.m.s)

17. Impulse withstand Voltage 1.2/50 micro Sec.full wave positive

And negative impulse withstand voltage KV(peak)

18. One minute power frequency withstand voltage of secondary winding kV (r.m.s)

19. Maximum dynamic P.F.overvoltage kV (peak)

20. Maximum Radio interference voltage at 266 kV r.m.s (micro volts)

21. Corona inception and extinction voltage 9 kV(r.m.s)

33
CT-PT-CVT

22. Capacitance (+ 10% -5%)

23. Total creepage distance of bushing (mm)
24. Overall height(mm)
25. Total weight (mm)
26. Type test report (Report No.)
27. Min. recommended spacing between voltage transformers
28. Outline dimension drawing No. giving clearance for installation (Drg.No.)
29. Mounting flange dimensional details.
30. Rated voltage Factor

31. Partial discharge level at rated voltage for capacitance divider (pc)

32. Seismic acceleration (horizontal) (g)

33. No. of terminals in terminal box

34. Primary and secondary windings made out of (copper only)

35. Tank material & tank coating (as per clause 3.1.3, 3.1.4)

36. Hardware exposed to atmosphere (as per clause 3.1.4)

37. Bolts, nuts and washers (as per clause 3.1.4)

38. Porcelain housing and its make (singular piece only as per clause 3.1.2)

39. Sealing (nitrogen gas cushion/metal bellow as per clause 3.1.7)

40. Whether supply includes terminal connectors.

Name of the firm .............

Signature of Bidder ...........

Name, Designation & Seal ...........

Date .........................

34
 CT-PT-CVT

ANNEXURE – VII

SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL & GUARANTEED PARTICULARS FOR PTs

(To be filled in by the contractor separately for each voltage rating)

132KV
1. Type

2. Manufacturer’s type /Designation

3. Mounting of tank (Bottom)

4. Conforming to Standard

5. System rated voltage/highest voltage (kv)

6. Rated primary voltage (kv)

7. Secondary winding details:

a) No.of secondary Winding – I Winding – II
windings
b) Rated secondary voltage(v)
c) Rated burden (VA)
d) Class of accuracy

8. Temperature rise at 1.1 times rated voltage with rated burden (deg.C)

9. Rated voltage factor and time.

10. Temperature rise for item – 10 above (deg.C)

11. Impulse withstand test voltage (KV) peak.

12. One minute power frequency withstand test voltage on primary (KV rms)

13. One minute power frequency withstand test voltage on secondary (KV rms)

14. Porcelain Bushing (make)

15. Total creepage distance of the bushing (mm)

16. Protected creepage distance of the bushing (mm)

35
CT-PT-CVT

17. Quantity of insulating oil (Litres)

18. Weight of oil (Kg.)

19. Total weight including oil (Kg).

20. Mounting details

21. Live parts to ground clearance

22. Whether V.T. is sealed construction with nitrogen at top.

23. Overall dimensions:

Height mm
Length mm
Breadth mm

24. Grade of oil.

25. Voltage Transformers shall carry 25% above the

rated burden continuously without injury in
respect of voltage Transformers.

Name of the firm .............

Signature of Bidder...........

Name, Designation & Seal ...........

Date .........................

36
 CT-PT-CVT

Annexure VIII

SCHEDULE OF DEVIATION

TECHNICAL
Sl. Requirements / Specification Deviations Remarks
No. Equipment Clause No.

It is hereby conformed that except for deviations mentioned above, the offer conforms to
all the other features specified in Technical Specification Section ____ of this Bid
Document

Date : Name of the Bidder

Business address :

37
CT-PT-CVT

ACRONYMS

MVA Mega Volt Ampere

KVA Kilo Volt Ampere
kV Kilo Volt
Cu. m Cubic metre
Deg. C Degrees Centigrade
mm. Millimetre
cm. Centimetre
dm. Decimetre
km. Kilometre
g. Grams
kg. Kilogram
V Volts
Hz Hertz
DC Direct Current
AC Alternate Current
ONAN Oil Natural Air Natural
ONAF Oil Natural Air Forced
HV High Voltage
IV Intermediary Voltage
Db Decibel
KA Kilo Amperes
sec. Seconds
Amps. Amperes
kVp. Kilo volts peak
kV. rms. Kilo volts root mean square
KW Kilo watt
Max. Maximum
Min. Minimum
UTS Ultimate Tensile Strength
QAP Quality Assurance Plan
ACSR Aluminium Conductor Steel Reinforced
AAAC All Aluminium Alloy Conductor
HP Horse Power
ppm. Parts Per Million

OLTC On Load Tap Changer

WTI Winding Temperature Indicator
OTI Oil Temperature Indicator
Torr Torr.
LOI Letter of Intent
CIF Cost including Insurance & Freight
CIP Carriage Insurance Paid

38
CT-PT-CVT

SF6 Sulphur Hexa Flouride

TRV Transient Recovery Voltage
CTD Capacitor Tripping Device
ICU Individual Compressor Unit
NO Normally Open
NC Normally Close
sq.mm Al. Cable Square millimeter Aluminium cable
sq.mm Cu. Cable Square millimeter Copper cable
MS Flat Mild Steel Flat
C Close
O Open
HRC High Rupturing Capacity
PVC Poly Vinyl Chloride
p.f Power factor
CT Current transformer
NCT Neutral Current Transformer
TEFC Totally enclosed fan cooled
P.U. Per Unit
ISO Indian Standard Organization
CB Circuit Breaker
Auto Automatic
kg./Sq. mm Kilogram per square millimeter

39
 SECTION – IX
CHAPTER - VIII
SA

SECTION – IX
Chapter - VIII

SURGE ARRESTERS

1.0 SCOPE:

1.1 This specification covers design, engineering, manufacture, assembly, stage testing
inspection and testing before supply and delivery at site/CIP destination of 132 and 33 kV,
surge arrestors complete with all fittings, accessories, associated equipment and mandatory
spares specified herein which are required for efficient and trouble free operation as
specified hereunder for erection at 132 / 33 kV RC Green and Garbhara Substations in
Greater Noida of U.P State.
The climatic conditions and auxiliary supply available are as stated in clause 1 of GTC,
Chapter -1 of section –IX of this volume.

1.2 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of the design and construction
of equipment. However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of
engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous
commercial operation. The PMC will interpret the meanings of drawings and specification
and shall have the power to reject any work or material which, in his judgment is not in
accordance therewith. The offered equipment shall be complete with all components
necessary for their effective and trouble free operation. Such, components shall be deemed
to be within the scope of bidder's supply irrespective of whether those are specifically
brought out in this specification and / or the commercial order or not.

1.3 The EPC contractor should procure the Surge Arrestors from reputed firms like M/s.
ARIVA, Pondicherry, M/s OBLUM, Hyderabad, M/s Crompton Greeves, Nasik,
M/s.LAMCO Industries, Hyderabad and any other reputed manufacturer with the prior
approval obtained from PMC.

2.0 STANDARDS:

2.1 The Surge Arrestors shall conform to the latest revisions with amendments available of
relevant standards, rules and codes some of which are listed herein for ready reference,
unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this specification.
--------------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Sl No.. Standard Ref No Title
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. IEC 99-4 Specification Part-4 for Surge
Arrestors without gap for AC
system.

2. a. IS : 15086 Specification for Lightning

Arrestors for Alternating
current system Part-I.

1
 SA

IS : 3070 (Part-III)
b. IS11993 Gapless metal oxide surge arrestors

3. IS : 2629 Recommended Practice for hot

dip galvanizing of iron and steel.

4. IS : 2633 Method For testing uniformity of

coating on Zinc coated articles.

5. IS : 5621 Specification for large hollow

porcelain for use in electrical
installation.

6. IS : 13947 Degree of protection provided

by enclosures for low voltage
switchgear and control.

7. IEC :71 Electrical clearances

8. IS : 12063 Classification of degrees

of protection provided by
enclosures of Electrical equipment .
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NOTE :

i) For the purpose of this specification all technical terms used herein after shall have the
meaning as per IEC Specification.

ii) For the parameters of the Arrestor which are not specified in IEC specification for
Surge Arrestors, the provisions of IS 3070 (Part-I) shall be applicable.

3. ADDITIONAL QUALIFYING REQUIREMENTS

132 and 33 kV surge arresters to be supplied shall be of a reputed manufacturer.

Who has Designed, manufactured , tested and supplied at least 15 nos. each of
132 and 33 kV LAs of the specified or above rating in the last five years out of which
at least 10 nos. are in successful operation during the last 2 years as on the date of
the bid opening. Documentary evidence for supply and satisfactory operation as
specified above from the clients (Only SEBs, State transmission utilities, Central
transmission utility, distribution utilities and Public Sector undertakings like NTPC
etc.) had to be enclosed to the bid, failing which the bid will be liable for rejection.

Surge Arresters supplied should have been fully type tested. Bidder shall enclose
copies of type test reports to his bid failing which the bid will be treated as
incomplete and non-responsive and will be rejected. Type test reports shall be of

2
SA

dates not earlier than 5 years from the date of bid opening. In case type test reports
pertain to a period earlier than 5 years type tests must be carried out in the presence
of PMC’s representative free of cost.

This requirement is in addition to the qualifying requirement specified for the

bidder in the section – Instructions to Bidder (ITB).

4.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:

The Surge Arresters offered under this specification shall conform to the parameters given
below.
Sl No. Particulars 132 kV 33 kV

1. a. Nominal System voltage(kV rms) 132 33

b. Nominal discharge current 10 KA of 8/20 10 KA of 8/20

2. Highest System voltage(kV rms) 145 36

3. Installation class Outdoor Outdoor

station class station class
4. A. 1.2/50 micro second
impulse voltage
withstand level
a. Transformers (kVp) 550 170

b. Other equipment and lines(kVp) 650 170

B. One unit power frequency day at wet

With standard voltage (kV rms) 275 70

5. Minimum prospective symmetrical 31.5 25

fault current for 1 second at
Arrester location ( kA rms)

6. Anticipated levels of temporary

over voltage and its duration

a) Voltage (p.u.) 1.5/1.2 1.5/1.2

b) Duration (Seconds) 1/10 1/10

7. Neutral Grounding E.E E.E

8. Number of Phases Three Three

3
SA

9. Minimum creepage distance (mm) 3625 900

10. Seismic acceleration 0.3 g Horizontal 0.3g

Horizontal

11. Max. radio interference volt (min. volts) 500 micro volts ---
For frequency between 0-5 MH2 and 2 MH2 at 92 kV rms
in all positions

Note: E.E. = Effectively Earthed.

5.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS :

5.1.1 The Surge Arresters shall conform to the technical requirements as perAnnexure –I,
IEC99-4 and chapter G.T.C ( Chapter-I) of section-IX of this volume.

5.1.2 The surge arresters shall be of heavy duty station class and gapless type without any
series or shunt gaps.

5.2 Each individual unit of Surge Arrestor shall be hermetically sealed and fully protected
against ingress of moisture.

5.5 PROTECTIVE LEVELS:

The basic insulation levels and switching impulse withstand levels of the lines and
equipment to be protected, have been specified in clause 4.0, " Principal Parameters". The
protective characteristics of the Arresters offered shall be clearly specified in the schedule
of Guaranteed Technical Particulars.

5.6 DUTY REQUIREMENTS:

5.6.1 The surge arresters shall be capable of discharging over-voltages occurring during switching
of unloaded transformers and long lines

5.6.2 145 kV class arrester shall be capable for discharging energy equivalent to class 3 of IEC
699 for 145 kV systems on two successive operations and energy equivalent to
class 2 in case of 33kV system.

5.6.3 The surge arrester shall be adequately designed to withstand specified dynamic over
voltages after discharge of two surges of class-I duty.

5.6.4 Surge arrestor shall be capable of discharging long duration surges of multiple lightning
strokes, severe switching surges and temporary power frequency surges.

4
SA

5.6.5 The reference current of the arresters shall be high enough to eliminate the influence of
grading and stray capacitance on the measured reference voltage.

5.6.6 The Surge Arresters shall be suitable for hot line washing.

5.6.7 The surge arresters are being provided to protect the following equipment whose insulation
levels are indicated in the table given below:

Equipment to be protected Lightning impulse Lightning impulse

(kVp) for 145 kV (kVp) for 36 kV
system system
Power transformer ± 550 ± 170
Instrument transformer ± 650 ± 170
CB / Isolator Phase to ground ± 650 ± 170
Across open contacts ± 750 ± 195

5.6.8 The duty cycle of CB installed in 145 kV and 36kV systems of the Owner shall be O-0.3
sec-CO-3 min-CO. The surge arrester shall be suitable for such circuit breaker duties in the
system.
5.6.9 Arresters shall be designed with sufficient cantilever strength to meet stress due to specified
wind speed and seismic acceleration.
5.6.10 Arresters shall require no routine maintenance upkeep, or attendance, except as required to
remove pollution contaminants.

5.7 CONSTRUCTION AND FEATURES:

5.7.1 The hermetic seal shall be effective for the entire life time of the Arrester and under the
service conditions as specified The Bidder shall furnish sectional view of the Arrestor,
showing details of sealing employed

5.7.2 The Surge Arresters shall be fitted with pressure relief devices and arc diverting ports
and shall be tested as per the requirements of IEC specification for minimum prospective
symmetrical fault current as specified in clause 4.0 (5). Details shall be furnished in the
bid. The bidder shall furnish in the offer, a sectional view of pressure relief device employed
in the Surge Arrestors offered.

5.7.3 The Grading ring on each complete Arrester for proper stress distribution shall be
provided if required for attaining all the relevant technical parameters.
5.7.4 All the units of Arrestors of same rating shall be interchangeable without adversely
affecting the performance.
5.7.5 The Surge Arrestors shall be suitable for pedestal type mounting.
5.7.6 All the necessary flanges, bolts, nuts, clamps etc., required for assembly of complete
Arrestor with accessories for mounting on support structure to be supplied by the
contractor, are in contractor’s scope of supply.

5
SA

5.7.7 The drilling details for mounting the Arrestor supporting structures shall be indicated by
the Bidder.
5.7.8 The minimum permissible separation between the Surge Arrestor and any earthed
object shall be indicated by the Bidder in his offer.

5.7.9 Seals shall be provided in such a way that these are always effectively maintained even
when discharging rated lightning current.

5.7.10 The energy handling capability of each rating of Arrester offered, supported by
calculations, shall be furnished in the offer.

5.7.11 The non- linear blocks shall be of sintered metal oxide material.. These shall be provided in
such a way as to obtain robust construction with excellent mechanical electrical properties
even after repeated operations.

5.7.12 Arresters shall incorporate an anti-contamination feature to prevent arrester failure

consequent to uneven voltage gradient across the stack, in the event of contamination of the
arrester porcelain.

5.7.13 The arrester assembly shall consist of arrester unit, line terminal, earth terminal, insulating
base and other hardware required for installation as given in clause 5.10. Insulating base
shall have a provision for bolting it to flat surface of structure.

5.7.14 The manufacturer shall submit date on rejection rate of Zno blocks during
manufacturing/operation for the past three years.

5.7.15 The heat treatment cycle details along with nece4ssary quality checks used for individual
blocks along with insulation layer formed across each block are to be furnished. Metalizing
coating thickness for reduced resistance between adjacent discs is to be furnished with
additional information schedule of bid proposal sheets along with procedure for checking
the same Details of thermal stability test for uniform distribution of current on individual
disc is to be furnished.

5.8 Porcelain Housing :

5.8.1 All porcelain housings shall be free from lamination cavities or other flaws affecting the
maximum level of mechanical and electrical strength. Arrester shall not fail due to
arrester porcelain contaminations.

5.8.2 The porcelain shall be well vitrified and non-porous.

5.8.3 The creepage distance of the Arrestor housing shall be as per Annexure -I.

5.8.4 The porcelain petticoat shall be preferably of self-cleaning type (Aero foil design). The
details of the porcelain housing such as height, angle of inclination, shape of petticoats,
gap between the petticoats, diameter (ID and OD) etc. shall be indicated in a detailed

6
SA

drawing.

5.8.5 The Arrestor housing shall conform to the requirements of IS :3070 specification and clause
No.51 of GTC, chapter - I of section – IX of this volume

5.9 Galvanisation, Nickel Plating etc :

5.9.1 All ferrous parts exposed to atmosphere shall be hot dip galvanised as per IS:2629 as
amended from time to time., Tinned copper/ brass lugs shall be used for internal wiring
of discharge counter. Screws used for electrical connections shall be either made of brass
or nickel plated.

5.9.2 Ground terminal pads and name plate brackets shall be hot dip galvanised.

5.9.3 The material shall be galvanised only after completing all shop operations.

5.10 Accessories and Fittings :

5.10.1 Arresters shall be provided fasteners for stacking units together, discharge counters with
leakage current meters and terminal connectors. The end fittings shall be of non-magnetic
and corrosion proof material suitable for outdoor installations.

5.10.2 Self contained and suitably enclosed Discharge counters shall be provided for each single
pole of 132 kV Arrestors only. The discharge counter shall be provided with milli-ammeter
for measuring the leakage current which shall not require any DC or AC Aux. Supply. It
shall be suitable for out door use. The installation of discharge counter shall not adversely
affect the Arrestor performance.

5.10.3 The discharge counter shall register operation whenever lightning or any other type of surge
strikes the Surge Arrestor. The discharge counters shall be capable of counting at least 9999
discharges. It shall not be possible to reset the counter.

5.10.4 All necessary accessories and earthing connection leads between the bottom of the Arrestor
and the discharge counter shall be in the bidder's scope of supply. The connecting lead
between discharge counter and Surge Arrestor shall be of copper flat of size 25 x 4 mm and
minimum of 1.5 metre length. The discharge counter shall be so designed that the readings
of discharge recorded by the counter and the readings of the milli-ammeter shall be clearly
visible through an inspection window to a person standing on ground. The minimum height
of support structures to be provided shall be 2.55 m.

Surge monitor comprising discharge counter and leakage current meter shall conform to
environment protection corresponding to IP:55. Each Surge monitor shall have terminals of
robust construction for connection to earthing lead and these shall be suitably arranged so
as to enable the incoming and outgoing connections to be made with minimum bends.
Proper functioning of the Surge Counter with Surge Arrestor shall be ensured by the
contractor.

7
SA

5.10.5 Following performance is desired from the discharge counter:

a. The material used in the discharge counter shall be such that it can safely withstand
discharge current of the surge arrester.
b. The discharge counter shall operate for a minimum lightning impulse current (8/20)
of 100amps and maximum of high current impulse 4/10, 100 kA peak (2
application)
c. The discharge counter shall operate perfectly if the interval time of multiple lighting
strokes is more than 0.1 second.
d. The discharge counter shall have negligible effect on the protection level of the
surge arrester.
e. Long duration current impulses corresponding to the discharge class of the surge
arrester with which it is to be used.
f. Normal discharge current corresponding to the discharge current of the surge
arrester with which it is to be used.
g. The potential across the discharge counter shall be less than 10V (rms.) under
normal conditions.

5.10.6 In case of 33 kV surge arrester all accessories and earthing connection leads between
arrester and earth grid G.I. flat shall be arranged.

5.10.7 Terminal connectors conforming to IS : 5561 shall be supplied along with the arrestor.
The size & rating of the terminal connector shall be suitable to receive the following
ACSR conductor sizes.

System Horizontal / Vertical

S.No Conductor Mounting
voltage takeoff
1 132 kV ACSR Moose a) Vertical for line LAs Support structure
(61/3.53)
b)Horizontal for LAs Support structure
near power transformer
2 33 kV Single moose Jumper Boom of SS
ACSR (Transformer LV side)
ACSR dog Jumper DP structure (station
transformer)
3 33 kV ACSR dog Dropper Support structure
line type

5.10.8 Terminal connectors shall be subjected to type, routine and acceptance tests as per IS
5561-1970. The connectors shall be tested with the code name of the ACSR which it
should receive. Terminal connectors shall meet the requirements specified under clause
48 of chapter 1, GTC, section IX of this volume.

5.11 The grounding terminals shall be suitable for accommodating raiser of 50 mm x 6mm /
50 mm x 8 mm Ms flat (grounding) connection to 100 x16 mm earth mat.

8
SA

5.12 Name Plate:

The arrestor shall be provided with non-corrosive legible name plate conforming to
provisions and indelibly marked with the following information.

1. Greater Noida Industrial Development Authority

2. Order no.

3. Manufacturer's name or trade mark and identification no. of the Arrester being supplied.

4. Rated Voltage.

5. Maximum Continuous operating voltage.

6 Type.

7. Rated Frequency.

8. Nominal discharge current.

9. Long Duration discharge class.

10. Pressure relief current in kA rms.

11. B.I.L. of the equipment to be protected.

12. Year of manufacture.

5.13 The Guaranteed Technical Particulars for the material being supplied shall be provided
with this bid as specified in the Annexure-II enclosed. The bids received without these
particulars will be considered non-responsive.

6.0 TESTS:

6.1 TYPE TESTS:

6.1.1 The Surge Arrestors of the type and design offered should have been fully type tested as
per the relevant standards. The date of type tests conducted shall be the latest and not
earlier than five years from the date of bid opening. The Bidder shall furnish two sets of
Type Test reports, along with the offer. The bids received without type test reports
will be considered Non-Responsive.

9
SA

6.1.2 The test report of the following additional type tests shall also be submitted for the
PMC’s review:
a. Radio interference voltage test
b. Seismic withstand test
c. Contamination test
d. Temporary over voltage withstand test

6.1.3 The artificial pollution test shall be carried out as per applicable standards. This test
shall be considered as a type test.

6.2 Acceptance and Routine Tests:

6.2.1 All acceptance and routine tests as stipulated in the relevant standards shall be carried
out by the Supplier in the presence of the Purchaser's representative free of cost.

6.2.2 Acceptance tests, whenever possible shall be conducted on the complete arrester unit.
The number of samples to be subjected to acceptance tests shall be decided by the PMC
at the time of actual testing.

6.2.3 The following acceptance tests shall be made on the nearest whole number to the sube
root of the No. of Arrester to be supplied.
a) Acceptance tests :
1. Measurement of power frequency reference voltage of the arrester units.
2. Lightning Impulse Residual voltage on arrester units (IEC clause 6.3.2)
3. Internal Ionization or partial discharge test.
4. The galvanisation test on expose metal parts.
The special tests of thermal stability test and watt loss test shall be carried out as
acceptance test free of cost.

6.2.4 b) Routine tests:

1. Measurement of reference voltage.
2. Residual voltage test of arrester unit 5kA (8/20us), 10 kA (8/20 us) and 20 kA (8/20us)
as per provisions of clause 8.1 (b) of IEC: 99-4.
3. Internal Ionization or partial discharge test.
4. Sealing test.
5. Vertical check on completely assembled surge arresters as a sample test on each lot.
6. Power losses are measured at 0.8 times rated voltage on each arrester.
7. Check of internal corona made at 1.05 times COV. Each unit is checked to have
steady internal corona level less than 50 pC in a pass/no-pass test.
8. Tightness check to made on each unit in pass/no-pass test. Maximum permissible
leakage is 0.0001 cc/sec at a pressure difference of 0.1 MPa.
9. Dimensional Verification
10. Galvanizing Test
11. Porosity Test.

10
SA

6.2.5 Surge moniters

(a) The functional (operational) acceptance tests shall be carried out on the Surge
counter by way of checking its operation at the following nominal discharge currents:
a) 100 Amps with 8/20 microsecond wave shape.
b) 10 kA with 8/20 microsecond wave shape.
(b) Surge monitors shall also be connected in series with the test specimens during
Residual voltage and current impulse withstand tests to verify efficacy of the same.
Surge monitor with current meter shall have practically no effect on performance and
protection level of the surge arrestor.
The Additional tests:
1. Routine tests on Hallow column Insulators.
Arrester housing shall be type tested as per IEC 60233/IS:5621. All routine tests shall be
conducted on the hollow column insulators as per standards in addition to the following
a. Ultrasonic test as a routine test.
b. Pressure test as a routine test.
c. Bending load test in 4 directions at 50 % specified bending load as a routine test.
d. Bending load test in 4 directions at 100 % specified bending load as a sample test on
each lot.
e. Burst pressure test as a sample test on each lot.

7.0 INSPECTION:

Please refer to relevant clause in GTC chapter 1 of section IX of this volume.

8.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN: Refer to relevant clause in chapter GTC chapter 1
of section IX of this volume.

9.0 DOCUMENTATION:
9.1 All drawings shall conform to International Standards Organization (ISO) 'A'
series of drawing sheet/Indian Standards Specification. All drawings shall be in ink and
suitable for micro filming. All dimensions and data shall be in S.I.units only.

9.2 List of Drawings and Documents.

The Bidder shall furnish four sets of following drawings along with his offer:

i) General outline drawings of the complete Arrestors with technical parameters.

ii) Drawing showing clearances from grounded and other live objects and between
adjacent poles of Surge Arrestors, required at various heights of Surge Arrestors.
iii) Drawings showing details of pressure relief devices.
iv) Detailed Drawing of discharge counters along with the wiring and schematic
drawing of discharge counter and meter.
v) Outline drawing of insulating base.

11
SA

vi) Details of grading ring if used.

vii) Mounting Details of Surge Arrestors.
viii) Details of line terminal and ground terminals.
ix) volt-time characteristics of Surge Arrestors.

x) Details of Galvanizing being provided on different ferrous parts.

xi) The detailed dimensional drawing of porcelain housing such as ID,OD, thickness
and insulator details such as height, profile of petticoats, angle of inclination and
gap between successive petticoats, total creepage distance etc.,

9.2.1. The contractor should within two weeks of placement of order, submit four sets of
final versions of all the above said drawings for PMC's approval. The PMC shall
communicate his approval/comments on the drawings within two weeks from the
date of receipt of drawings. The contractor shall if necessary, modify the drawings
and resubmit four copies of the modified drawings for PMC's approval within two
weeks from the date of PMC's comments. The PMC shall communicate his approval
within two weeks from the date of receipt of the revised drawings. After receipt of
PMC's approval, the contractor shall within three weeks, submit 20 prints and two
good quality reproducible of the approved drawings for PMC / owner's use.

9.2.2 The approval of the drawings by the PMC/Owner shall not relieve the contractor
for his responsibility and liability for ensuring correctness and correct
interpretation of the latest revision of applicable standards, rules and codes of
practices.

9.2.3 The contractor shall supply instructions manuals as per clause 5.0 of chapter GTC
(Chapter -) of Section IX of this volume.

9.3 TEST REPORTS:

i) Four copies of acceptance test reports shall be furnished to the PMC. One copy will
be returned, duly certified by the PMC and only thereafter shall the materials be
despatched.

ii) All records of routine test reports shall be maintained by the contractor at his works
for periodic inspection by the PMC.

iii) All test reports of tests conducted during manufacture shall be maintained by the
contractor. These shall be produced for verification as and when requested for by the
PMC/ Owner.

10.0 PACKING AND FORWARDING: Refer to relevant clause in chapter GTC

chapter 1 of section IX of this volume.

12
SA

11.0 QUANTITY AND DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS :

S.No Name of the 132 / 132kV 33kV Delivery schedule

33kV substation station station
type type LAs
LAs
120kV 30kV
rating rating
1 RC Green SS 9 36* Within 5 months from the
date of LoA along with
2 Garbhara SS complete accessories,
9 36* fittings, terminal connectors
etc., and mandatory spares as
specified.
.* Including the requirement of Station transformers

12.0 MANDATORY SPARES

S.No Name of the 132 / 132kV 33kV Terminal Connectors

33kV substation station station
type type LAs
LAs
120kV 30kV
rating rating
1 RC Green SS 2 2 Nos. of each type and rating
3

2 Garbhara SS 2 3 2 Nos. of each type and rating

13.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

The Guaranteed Technical particulars for the equipment being supplied shall be
provided with the Bid as specified in this technical specification at Annexure-II. The
Bids received without guaranteed technical particulars shall be treated as Non-responsive.

14.0 SCHEDULE OF DEVIATIONS.

Unless otherwise brought out separately by the Bidder in the schedule of deviations
(Annexure-III). the Surge Arrestors offered shall conform to the specification
scrupulously. All deviations from the specification shall be brought out in the schedule of
deviations. The discrepancies between the specification and the catalogues or literature
submitted as part of the offer shall not be considered as valid deviations unless
specifically brought out in the schedule of deviations.

13
SA

Any deviation which has not been specifically brought out in the schedule of deviations
of the Bid Proposal Sheets shall not be given effect to. The deviations brought out in the
Schedule shall be supported by authentic documents, standards and other references.

14
SA

ANNEXURE - I (Surge Arrestors)

Page 1 of 2
Technical Requirements for Metal Oxide ( Gapless ) Surge Arrestors

Sl.No. Particulars 132 kV 33 kV

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Rated Arrester 120 30
Voltage kV

2. a. M.C.O.V. 102 25
(kV r.m.s.)
Max. continuous
operating voltage.

b. Max. discharge capacity 5 KJ/kV referred to 4.5kJ/kV at arrestor

rated arrester voltage rating and 4.9kJ/kV
corresponding to min. at COV
discharge characteristics.

3. Installation outdoor outdoor

4. Class station class station class

5. Type of Single column, Single column ,

Construction for Single Phase. Single Phase.
10 kA rated Arrester.

6. a. Nominal discharge 10 10
current corresponding
to 8/20 microsecond wave
shape ( kA r.m.s.)

b. Max. residual voltage at 10kA

nominal discharge current 330 kVp 85 kVp

c. Max. residual voltage at 5kA 310 kVp

7. Type of mounting Pedestal Pedestal

8. Connection P/E P/E

(between phase to
earth P/E)
(between phase to phaseP/P)

9. Long duration discharge class 3 2

15
SA

10. Ratio of switching 2 2

impulse residual
voltage to rated
voltage of Arrester.

ANNEXURE –I (Surge Arrestors)

Page 2 0f 2
Sl.No. Particulars 132 kV 33 kV
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

11. Minimum Prospective 31.5 25

symmetrical fault
current for pressure
relief test ( kA rms)

12. Voltage ( corona -------- Rated voltage of the Arrester --------------

extinction ) (kV rms)

13. Whether insulating base YES Only insulating base

and discharge counter
with milli-ammeter are
required.

14. Pressure relief class A A

15. Low Current Long duration As per IEC As per IEC

test value
16. Max. switching surge residual 280kVp ---
voltage (1kA)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

16
SA

(To be filled in by the bidder) (page one of four)

ANNEXURE II (SURGE ARRESTORS)

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

132kV 33kV
1 .Name of Manufacturer

2. Arrestor class & type

3. Applicable Standard

4. Rated Arrestor Voltage(kV)

5. Maximum Continuous
Operating voltage (MCOV)-(kV)

6. Nominal Discharge Current (kA)

with 8/20 Micro-second wave

7. Long Duration Discharge

8. Maximum Energy Discharge

Capability (kJ/kV of rated voltage
of arrestor)
9. Maximum switching current
impulse residual voltage at
i) 1000 Amps kVp
ii) 250 Amps kVp

10. Maximum residual voltage

with Steep current impulse
(1/20micro second) at 10 kA ( kVp)

11. Maximum residual voltage

For Lightning impulse current
8/20 Micro-second wave (kVp)

i) 5 kA
ii) 10 kA
iii) 20 kA

12. Safe Fault Current (kA)

17
SA

13. Arrestor Housing:

(i) Lightning impulse withstand
voltage of Arrestor housing
with 1.2/50 micro-second wave (kVp).

(Surge Arrestors) (page two of four)

132kV 33kV

(ii)One minute power frequency

withstand voltage of housing
(dry/wet) - kv (r.m.s.)

(iii) Total creepage distance (mm):

(iv) Dry arcing distance (mm) :
(v) Cantilever strength: (N-M) :
(vi) Internal diameter (mm) :
(vii) Thickness (mm) :
14 Continuous current at COV
and ambient temperature
a) resistive component (mA rms)
b) capacitive component (mA rms)

15. High Current short duration impulse

withstand level with 4/10 micro
second wave ( kA ) Peak

16. Pressure Relief Class

17. Over-voltage withstand Capability kV

a) 10 seconds
b) 1 second
c) 0.1 second

18. a) Reference Voltage (kVp)

b) Reference Current (kA)
guaranteed by the manufacturer

19.(i)Number of Units per phase :

(ii) Voltage rating of each unit:
(iii) Ht. of longest unit :
20. Minimum total creepage
distance (mm)
21. Leakage Current (mA)

22. Total weight of Arrestor (kg)

18
SA

23. Maximum cantilever strength

of Surge Arrester (Including Wind Load)

24. Overall Height of Surge Arrestors (mm)

25. Maximum distance recommended

from equipment to be
protected by Surge Arrester (mm)

(Surge Arrestors) (page three of four)

132kV 33kV

26. Minimum distance between

grounded object( mm)

27. Minimum distance between

Arrester phase legs (mm)

28. Any other particulars

29. Whether pressure relief devices

provided YES /NO
30. Prospective symmetrical
fault current kA(rms)

31. a) High current value employed for

pressure relief test
b) Low current value employed for
pressure relief test
32. Metal oxide discs:
a) Country of manufacture
b) Size of discs (Diameter
and thickness) mm
a) How the electricity contact is
Ensured between blocks
b) Medium of heat dissipation
from the blocks to the surrounding

33. Partial discharge level pC

34. Radio interference level at 1.1 COV
35. Weight of one complete single
phase arrester, Kg.
36. Surge Monitor:
a) Type
b) Minimum lightning impulse

19
SA

Current 98/20 micro sec.) to

Which surge counter will
Respond successfully
c) Whether the surge monitor has
been successfully Tested for
high current Impulses, long
duration Current impulse & low
Current response test YES / NO
c) Scale range of leakage Current
Meter
37. a) Recommended protective
Distance of surge arrester from
Transformer, m
(Surge Arrestors) (page four of four)
132kV 33kV

b) Protective distance of LA (m)

- Forward
- Backward

38. Are LAs are suitable for hot line

washing YES /NO

39. Whether following curves / Drawings

enclosed with offer:
a) Volt time characteristic YES /NO
b) Voltage current characteristic
Of arrester YES /NO
c) Type test has been conducted
as per IEC-99-4 & IS: 5621 YES /NO
d) Type test reports submitted along
With the offer YES /NO
e) Drawing outline Dimensions for
Installation enclosed YES /NO
f) Drawing of mounting flange
Dimension details enclosed YES /NO
g) Drawing of earthing arrangement provided
Enclosed YES /NO
h) Details for surge monitor enclosed YES /NO
i) Each arrestor unit with sealed Housing
to be tested for leakage YES /NO

Name of firm-------------------------------

Signature of bidder-------------------------

20
 SA

Annexure III

SCHEDULE OF DEVIATION

TECHNICAL
Sl. Requirements / Specification Deviations Remarks
No. Equipment Clause No.

It is hereby conformed that except for deviations mentioned above, the offer conforms to
all the other features specified in Technical Specification Section ____ of this Bid
Document

Place : Signature of the Bidder :

Date : Name :

Business address :

21
SECTION – IX
CHAPTER - IX
 Section - IX
Chapter -IX
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CONTROL, RELAY, ALARM AND
ANNUNCIATION PANELS
SCOPE :

1.1 This Specification provides for design, engineering, manufacture, assembly, shop
testing, inspection and testing before despatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at
site of Control, relay, alarm and annunciation panels for Transformers (HV & LV),
132 kV and 33 kV feeders, and different Bus bar arrangements to be erected at the
132/33 kV substations at R.C. Green and Village Gharbara, within the Greater Noida
area of U.P. State.

1.2 It is not the intent to specify completely here all the details of design and
construction of the circuit breakers. However, the breakers shall conform in all
respects to the high standard of engineering design and workmanship and shall be
capable of performing in continuous commercial operation. The PMC who will
interpret the meanings of drawings and specifications and shall have power to
reject any material which in his judgment is not in accordance therewith. The
circuit breakers offered shall be complete with all components necessary for their
effective and trouble free operation. Such components shall be deemed to be within
the scope of the Contractor irrespective of whether they are specifically brought
out in this specification and/or in the commercial order or not.

1.3 Control relay panels supplied shall be suitable for Climatic conditions and
Auxiliary supply conditions stated in clause 1.2 and 1.3 of GTC (CHAPTER-1 of
Section- IX of this volume).

2.0 STANDARDS:

All equipment provided under this specification shall in general conform to the latest
revision/amendment etc. of the following:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sl. Standard Title
No.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. IS 3231 Electrical relays for power
IEC 255 Part I to III system protection
BS 142
2. IS 1248 Indicating instruments
IS 2419
BS 89
3. IS-13010,IS , 13779 ( Energy meters
IEC 521
BS 3T
4. IS 13947 General requirement of switch-
gear and control gear for
voltages not exceeding 1 kV
5. IS 5578/11353 Marking arrangement for switch-
gear, bus bars, main connection
and auxiliary wiring

1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
S.No. Standard Title
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

6. IS 8686 Specification for static

IEC-255Part V&VI protective relays and tests.
IEC 801-4

7. IEC 337 Control switches (LV switching

IEC 337-1 devices for control and
IS 13947 – Part V Auxiliary circuits

8. IS 13118 MCCB sand load break switches having a

break capacity of 30 kVA rms at 415 volts

9. IS 13947 –Part-III Fuse switching units

10. IS 2208 HRC fuse links

11. IS 2705 Current transformers

IEC-185
12. IS 3156 Potential transformers
IEC-186
13. IS 8623 Factory built assemblies of switch gear and
control gear for voltages upto and including
1000V AC and 1200V DC.

14. IEC 439 Low voltage switch gear and control gear
assemblies

15. IS 13947 – Part I Degree of protection provided by enclosures

for low voltage switch gear and control gear

16. IS 5082 Aluminum alloy bars

17. IS 1897 Copper strips for electrical purpose

18. IS 3618 Code of practice for phosphate

IS 6005 treatment of iron and steel

19. IS 13947 – Part III Air break switches, air break dis-connectors,
air break disconnectors and fuse combination
units for voltages not exceeding 1000V AC or
1200V DC

2
 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sl. Standard Title
No.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

20. IS 13703 HRC catridge fuses

21. IS 5578 Guide for marking of insulated

conductors.

22. IS 2032 Graphical symbols

Ref- abbreviations

Equipment meeting with the requirements of other authoritative Standards, which

ensure equal or better performance than the standards mentioned above, shall also be
considered. When the equipment offered by the Contractor conforms to other
standards, salient points of difference between standards adopted and the standards
specified in this specification shall be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule.
Four copies of such standards with authentic translation in English shall be
furnished along with the offer.

3.0 ADDITIONAL QUALIFYING REQUIREMENTS

The control relay panels proposed to be supplied shall be of a manufacturer who has
designed, manufactured, tested and supplied control and relay panels for atleast
5 nos 132 kV/ 33 kV substations in the last 5 years of which at least 3 no.s are in
successful operation for at least 2 years as on the date of the bid opening.
Documentary evidence in the form of performance certificate issued by clients
consisting of only SEBs, Central Transmission Utility or State Transmission Utility,
Distribution Utilities or Public Sector undertakings like NTPC etc., had to be
enclosed to the bid, failing which the bid will be liable for rejection.

The Control panels proposed to be supplied should have been fully type tested as per
relevant standards. The dates of type tests should have been not earlier than 5 years
from the date of bid opening. Contractor shall enclose copies of type test reports to
his bid failing which the bid will be treated as incomplete and non-responsive and
will be rejected. In case the dates of type tests reports are earlier than 5 years the
tests have to be repeated in the presence of PMCs representative free of cost.

This requirement is in addition to the qualifying requirement specified for the

contractor in the section – Instructions to Contractor (ITB).

4.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS :

General : Greater Noida Industrial Development Authority is contemplating erection

of two 132 /33 kV substations at R.C Green and village Gharbhara, each of 1 x 50
MVA transformation capacity. The details are as given below:

3
A. (1) 132/33kV Recreational Green SS:

Incoming feeders = 2 nos. 132 kV feeders each with single Panther

ACSR conductor (37/3.00 Sq.mm) from
400 /220/132 kV Pali SS.
(spare bays for 1No. future feeder without
equipment)
No. of transformers = 1no. 50 MVA 132/33 kV transformer (spare bays
for 2nos. future 50 MVA 132/33 kV transformers
without equipment.)

Bus bar arrangement = 1. 132 kV Double main and transfer bus.

2. Main Buses with Twin Moose ACSR (61/3.53)
conductor and Transfer bus with Single Moose
ACSR (61/3.53) conductor.
3. Jack bus except in bus coupler bay with–Single
Moose ACSR conductor
4. Jack bus in Bus coupler bay with Twin Moose
ACSR (61/3.53) conductor.
5. Jack bus on transformer LV side with twin
moose ACSR (61/3.53) conductor
(2) CTs shall be provided on either side of the breaker in the bus coupler bay.
(3) Bus PTs are connected to Main –I and Main-II buses. 1 no. CVT is connected to
transfer bus.

B. 132/33 kV SS at Village Gharbara.

(1) Incoming 132 kV feeders = 2nos. with ACSR Panther (37/3.00 Sq.mm)
(single) conductor (spare bay for 1 No. future
feeders, without equipment)
(2) Transformers = 50 MVA 132/33 kV transformer
(spare bays for 2nos.future 50 MVA 132/33 kV
transformers without equipment.)
(3) Main bus bar arrangement = Double bus with twin moose ACSR (61/3.53 mm)
(4) Jack buses
(a) Bus coupler bay = Twin Moose ACSR (61/3.53 mm) conductor
(b) Transformer LV side = Twin Moose ACSR conductor
(c) Other jack buses = Single Moose ACSR conductor
(5) Both the substations have the following 33 kV features
(a) Bus bar arrangement = Single bus
(b) 33 kV main bus = With Quadruple Moose
(c) Special provision = Bus sectionalizer with a breaker, 2 sets of CTs
and 2 sets of isolators
(d) Outgoing feeders = 8 nos + 2nos. capacitor bank with infeeds from
either side of the sectionalizer + provisions in
main bus for 2 nos. future feeders with jack
buses.
(e) Capacitor bank = 2 nos. 5 MVAR 33 kV capacitor bank
(f) 33 kV bus PTs = 2 nos. one on either side of the sectionalizer.

4
 (g) 33 kV station transformer = 33kV /415V 250 KVA – 1 No.
(h) 132/33kV transformer = 1 No. L.V feeder with provision for 2nos..
future transformer feeders without equipment
(6) Both the substations have the station automation features to be operated from Main
Control Room at Station Delta.

4.1 50 MVA 132/33 kV TRANSFORMERS:

4.1.1 1. Normal continuous rating : 50 MVA

2. Ratio of Transformation : 132/33 kV

3. Phase Connections:
a) HV winding : Star
b) LV winding : Star
c) Vector group reference : YNynO
4. Type of cooling : ONAN/ONAF
5. Percentage impedance : 12.5% with ± 10 %
6. Over fluxing : Limited to 12.5%
7. Range of Tap position on : -5% to +15% in 1.25% Steps on 132 KV
side(HV side)

8. Fault levels
a) 132 kV side : 31.5 kA for 1 second
b) 33 kV side : 25 kA for 1 second
9. Auxiliary equipment on the : 1.low oil level gauge
Transformer with trip & 2.Buchloz relay in main tank.
Alarm contacts. 3.Buchloz relay in tap changer
4.Oil temperature indicator
5.Winding temperature indicator
on HV winding.
6. Winding temperature indicator
on LV winding.

4.1.2 A. The details of terminal equipment for 50 MVA, 132/33 kV Transformers are given
below:
a) 132 kV Side CTs (HV CTs) Ratio: 800-300/1-0.5775, 1-1-1-1A

Core Accuracy Minimum kneepoint

Burden Purpose
No class voltage as per formula
1 5P 20 20 VA O / L & E / L Protection
2 PS Min. Vk = 40(RCT + 10) Transformer Differential
Max. Im= 0.03A protection
3 0.2 20 VA - Metering
4 PS - 80 (RCT + 10) Bus bar differential
Max. Im= 0.03A
5 PS - 80 (RCT + 10) Bus bar differential
Max. Im= 0.03A

5
 b) Breakers for HV side of 50 MVA, 132/33 kV Transformer HV breaker = 1600 A
No. of poles : 3 (Gang operated)
Rating of closing : 220 V DC, 260 Ohms, 800 Watts
coil and trip coil
Number of auxiliary : 6 N/ O and 6 N/C
contacts
HV Breakers are provided with two sets of trip coils
(Each set common to all three phases)
c) 33 kV side CTs (LV CTs) Ratio:1200/1-0.5775,1-1A
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Core Accuracy Burden Minimum Purpose
No. class knee point
voltage as
per formula
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. 5 P 20 30 VA - O / L & E / L Protection

2. PS - Min. Vk= Transformer Differential

40(RCT + 10) protection
Max. Im= 0.03A

3. 0.2 20 VA - Metering
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

d) 33 kv bus bar (LV side) breakers for 50 MVA 132 / 33kV transformer
1250 A vacuum circuit breaker
No. of poles : 3 (Gang operated)
Rating of closing : 220 V DC, 260 Ohms, 800 Watts
coil and trip coil
Number of auxiliary : 6 N/ O and 6 N/C
contacts

B. 132 KV FEEDER SYSTEM PARTICULARS:

I The layout arrangements for 132 kV double bus substation (Village Gharbara) are
such that any feeder can be connected to either of the buses. Bypass isolators are not
available at these substations. The line length of 132 kV feeder from 400/ 220 /132kV
Pali SS is 18 km.

a) 132 kV feeder current transformers:

Ratio 800-600-400/1-1-1-1-1 A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Core Accuracy Burden Minimum Maximum Purpose
No. class knee point excitation
voltage as current at
per formula VSKT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. 5 P 20 20 VA - - Over current and earth
fault protection

6
2. PS - 40(RCT+10) 30 mA Distance protection
3. 0.2 20 VA - - Metering
4. PS - 80(RCT+10) 30mA Bus bar differential
5. PS - 80(RCT+10) 30mA Bus bar differential
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

b) CVTs:
Winding-I Winding-II Winding-III
Burden 50 VA 200 VA 50 VA
Class of accuracy 3P 0.2 3P
Purpose Protection Metering Protection
Sec. Vol. 110/√3 110/√3 110-110/√3

II 132 / 33kV Recreation Green substation

The layout arrangements for 132 kV double main and transfer bus substation
(Recreation Green) are such that any feeder can be connected to either of the buses.
Bypass isolators are not available at these substations. However there will be a
Transfer bus in addition transfer bus and it will have a breaker with a dedicated CT
for transferring any of the feeders when the original breaker of that feeder is faulty.
However, transfer bus breaker will not have any dedicated CT cores for the protection
of feeder transferred onto it and hence, the protection of transferred circuit itself shall
be used for tripping the transfer bus breaker in the event of any fault. Necessary trip
transfer switch shall be provided. The line length of 132 kV D.C feeder from 400/
220 /132kV Pali SS is 5 km.

a) 132 kV feeder current transformers:

Ratio 800-600-400/1-1-1-1-1 A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Core Accuracy Burden Minimum Maximum Purpose
No. class knee point excitation
voltage as current at
per formula VSKT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. 5 P 20 20 VA - - Over current and earth
fault protection
2. PS - 40(RCT+10) 30 mA Distance protection
3. 0.2 20 VA - - Metering
4. PS - 80(RCT+10) 30mA Bus bar differential
5. PS - 80(RCT+10) 30mA Bus bar differential
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
b) CVTs:
Winding-I Winding-II Winding-III
Burden 50 VA 200 VA 50 VA
Class of accuracy 3P 0.2 3P
Purpose Protection Metering Protection
Sec. Vol. 110/√3 110/√3 110-110/√3

7
4.3 132 KV BUS BAR PROTECTION

The details of 132kV bus bar protection at 132 kV substations are given below. The
over all CT ratio for bus bar protection is 800/1 Amp. 132kV CTs for bus bar
protection have identical turn ratio even though they have different current ratios.
Each 132kV CT is provided with 2 Nos. separate cores of ‘PS’ class accuracy for bus
bar protection.

132kV CT RATIOS FOR THE BUS BAR PROTECTION

i) For 132kV feeders : 800/1 Amp

ii) For 50 MVA 132/33 kV : 800/1 Amp

Power transformers (HV CTs)
iii) For bus coupler : 800/1 Amp

CTs are provided on either side of bus coupler breaker. . The secondary resistance of ‘PS’
cores for bus protection may vary from 3 to 5 ohms.

The bidder shall quote for the required auxiliary current transformer for the bus bar protection
panels separately.

This relay is included in the scope of supply for Bus Coupler panels

132 kV breakers are provided with capacitor tripping device.

132 kV PTs at both substations

Winding-I Winding – II
Burden 200 VA 50 VA
Class of accuracy 0.2 3P
Purpose Metering Protection
Sec. Voltage 110-110/√3 110-110/√3

d) Circuit breakers:
i) 132 KV feeder breakers:

132 kV SF6 breakers having 3 Nos. breaker poles suitable for 3 phase re-closing will
be used as 132 kV feeder breakers.
Each Pole 132 kV breaker is provided with 2 sets of trip coils.
Each 33 kV breaker is provided with 2 sets of trip coils.

8
 The details of breakers are given in the Table below:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sl. Details 132 kV SF6 33 kV Feeder
No. Breakers Breaker
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Highest System Voltage 145 kV 36 kV

2. Breaking Capacity 31.5 KA 25 KA

3. Total Break Time

i) at 10% rated }
interrupting capacity }
} < 5 cycles < 5 cycles
ii) at rated }
interrupting capacity }

4. Make time Not exceeding 150 ms

5. Minimum re-closing time 300 ms 380 ms

at full rated interrupting
capacity from the instant
of trip coil energisation.

6. Minimum dead time

i) 3 phase re-closing 300 ms 300 ms

ii) 1 phase re-closing -

7. Type of closing Spring spring

8. Trip coil and close 220 V DC 220 V DC

coil rating 800 Watts 800 Watts

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
e) 33 KV CTs for Feeders :

CT Ratio : 800-600-400/1-1 A
Core-I Core -II

Burden 15 VA 15 VA

Class of accuracy 5P20 0.2

Purpose Protection Metering

9
5.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:

5.1.0 Control & Relay panels: Detailed description:

The control and relay panels shall be of Simplex type. Each Simplex panel shall
consist of a vertical front panel with equipment mounted thereon and having wiring
access from the rear. It shall have double leaf door with lift off hinges at the back for
panels of width more than 800 mm. Doors shall have handles with built-in locking
facility.

5.1.1 Constructional Features:

a) Control and relay panels shall be of Simplex type. It is the responsibility of the
contractor to ensure that the equipment specified and such unspecified
complementary equipment required for completeness of the protective/control
schemes be properly accommodated in the panels without congestion and if necessary
provide panels with larger dimensions. No price increase at a later date on this
account shall be allowed.

b) Panels shall be completely metal enclosed and shall be dust, moisture and vermin
proof. The enclosure shall provide a degree of protection not less than IP-31 in
accordance with IS: 13947- Part-1

c) Panels shall be free standing, floor mounting type and shall comprise structural
frames enclosed completely with specially selected smooth finished, cold rolled sheet
steel of thickness not less than 3 mm for weight bearing members of the panels such
as bass frame, front sheet and door frames, and 2.0 mm for sides, door top and bottom
portions. There shall be sufficient reinforcement to provide level surfaces, resistance
to vibration and rigidity during transportation and installation.

d) All doors, removable covers and panels shall be gasketed all around with neoprene
/EPDM gaskets generally confirming to IS:11149. However XLPE gaskets can also
be used for fixing protective glass doors. Ventilating louvers, if provided shall have
screens and filters. The screens shall be made of either brass or GI wire mesh.

e) Design, materials selection and workmanship shall be such as to result in neat

appearance inside and outside with no welds, rivets or bolt head apparent from
outside, with all exterior surfaces true and smooth.

f) Panels shall have base frames with smooth bearing surface which shall be fixed on
the embedded foundation channels / insert plates. All necessary anchor bolts, Base
frames, foundation channels / insert plates, and other materials required for
foundation of panels shall be supplied. Anti vibration strip made of shock absorbing
materials that shall be supplied by the contactor shall be placed between panel and
base frame.

g) Cable entries to the panel shall be from the bottom. The plates of the panel shall be
fitted with removable gland plates for fixing the cable glands. Necessary number of
cable glands of sizes to suit different cables getting terminated in the panels shall be
supplied by the contractor. Cable glands shall be screwed type, and shall be suitable

10
 for PVC cables. Cable gland plate fitted in the bottom of the Panel shall be connected
to the earthing Panel/Station through a flexible braided copper conductor rigidly.

h) Relay panels of modern, modular construction would also be acceptable.

i) The total height of the panel shall be 2250mm. The depth of the panel shall be
800mm. The panels shall have suitable width required for mounting of all the
equipments on the front panel.

j) The width and depth of panel shall be well designed for giving sufficient room and
space for ease of working and safety.

5.1.2 Mounting

a) All equipment on and in panels shall be mounted and completely wired to the
terminal blocks ready for external connection. The equipment on front of panel shall
be mounted flush.

b) Equipment shall be mounted such that removal and replacement can be

accomplished individually without interruption of service to adjacent devices and are
readily accessible without use of special tools. Terminal marking shall be clearly
visible.

c) The center lines of switches, push buttons and indicating lamps shall be not less than
750mm from the bottom of the panel. The center lines of relays, meters and
recorders shall be not less than 450 mm from the bottom of the panel. Cutouts, if
any, provided for future mounting of equipment shall be properly blanked off with
blanking plates.

d) The center lines of switches, push buttons and indicating lamps shall be matched to
give a neat and uniform appearance. Likewise the top lines of all meters, relays and
recorders etc., shall be matched.

e) No equipment shall be mounted on the doors.

f) All the equipment connections and cabling shall be designed and arranged to
minimize the risk of fire and damage which may be caused by fire.

5.1.3 Panel Internal Wiring and other Accessory Equipment :

a) Panels shall be supplied completely with interconnecting wiring provided between all
electrical devices mounted and wired in the panels and between the devices and
terminal blocks for the devices to be connected to equipment outside the panels.
When panels are arranged to be located adjacent to each other all inter panel wiring
and connections between the panels shall be furnished and the wiring shall be carried
out internally. These adjacent inter panel wiring shall be clearly indicated in the
drawing furnished by the contractor.

b) All wiring shall be carried out with 1100 V grade, single core, stranded copper
conductor wires with PVC insulation and shall be heat resistant grade and vermin and
rodent proof. The minimum size of the stranded copper conductor used for internal
wiring shall be as follows:

11
 i) All circuits except current transformer circuits one multi strand 1.5 sq.mm per
lead
ii) Current transformer circuit: one 2.5 sq.mm per lead. The minimum number of
strands per conductor shall be three.
iii) Voltage transformer circuits (for energy meters) two of 2.5 sq.mm per lead.

c) All internal wiring shall be securely supported, neatly arranged, readily accessible and
connected to equipment terminals and terminal blocks. Wiring gutters and troughs
shall be used for this purpose.

d) Auxiliary bus wiring for AC and DC supplies, voltage transformer circuits,

annunciation circuits and other common services shall be provided near the top of the
panels running throughout the entire length of the panels.

e) Wire termination shall be made with solder less crimping type and tinned copper lugs
which firmly grip the conductor and insulation. Insulated sleeves shall be provided at
all the wire terminations. Engraved core identification plastic ferrules marked to
correspond with panel wiring diagram shall be fitted at both ends of each wire.
Ferrules shall fit tightly on the wire and shall not fall off when the wire is
disconnected from terminal blocks.

f) All wires directly connected to trip circuit breaker or device shall be distinguished by
the addition of red coloured unlettered ferrule. Numbers 6 and 9 shall not be included
for ferrule purposes.

g) Longitudinal troughs extending throughout the full length of the panel shall be
preferred for inter panel wiring. Interconnections to adjacent panel shall be brought
out to a separate set of terminal blocks located near the slots or holes meant for taking
the inter-connecting wires. Arrangements shall permit easy inter connections to
adjacent panels at site and wires for this purposes shall be provided by Contractor
looped and bunched properly inside the panel.

h) Contractor shall be solely responsible for the completeness and correctness of the
internal wiring and for the proper functioning of the connected equipment

i) For Inter panel wiring , terminations shall be done on bottom side of panel.

j) The indicating lamp shall be of LED type with sufficient brightness. Coloured LED
lamps shall be used for appropriate indication.

5.1.4 Terminal Blocks

a) All internal wiring to be connected to the external equipment shall terminate on

terminal blocks preferably vertically mounted on the side of each panel. Terminal
blocks shall be 1100V grade and have 10 amps continuous rating moulded piece
complete with insulated barriers, stud type terminals, washers, nuts and lock nuts.
Terminal block design shall include a white fiber markings strip with clear plastic
slip-on/ clip-on terminal covers. Markings on the terminal strips shall correspond to
wire number and terminal numbers on the wiring diagrams.

12
 b) Terminal blocks for current transformer and voltage transformer secondary leads
shall be provided with test links and isolating facilities. Also current transformer
secondary leads shall be provided with short circuiting and earthing facilities.

c) At least 20% spare terminals shall be provided on each panel and these spare
terminals shall be uniformly distributed on all terminal blocks.

d) Unless otherwise specified, terminal blocks shall be suitable for connecting the
following conductor cable on each side:

i) All circuits except current transformer circuits: minimum of one of 2.5 sq.mm
copper

ii) All CT circuits: minimum of two of 2.5 mm square copper and all PT circuits
minimum of two of 2.5 sq.mm copper.

iii) AC / DC power supply circuits.- 1No. of 6 sq. mm Alluminium

e) There shall be a minimum clearance of 250 mm between the first row of terminal
blocks and associated cable gland plate. Also the clearance between two rows of
terminal blocks shall be minimum, of 150 mm.

f) Arrangement of the terminal block assemblies and the wiring channel within the
enclosure shall be such that a row of terminal blocks is run parallel and in close
proximity along each side of wiring duct to provide for convenient attachment of
internal panel wiring. The side of the terminal block opposite the wiring duct shall be
reserved for PMC's external cable connection. An adjacent terminal block shall also
share this field wiring corridor. A steel strip shall be connected between adjacent
terminal block rows at 450 mm intervals for support of incoming cables.

g) All necessary cable terminating accessories such as gland plates, packing glandser,
crimp type tinned copper lugs supporting clamps and brackets, wiring troughs and
gutters etc., shall be included in contractor's scope of supply.

5.1.5 Painting

a) All sheet steel work shall be phosphated in accordance with the IS:6005 "Code of
practice for phosphating iron and steel"

b) Oil, grease, dirt and sweat shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning.

c) Rust and scale shall be removed by picking with dilute acid followed by washing
with running water rinsing with a slightly alkaline hot water and drying.

d) After phosphating thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clean water followed by
final rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and oven drying.

e) The phosphate coating shall be sealed with application of two coats of ready mixed,
stoved type zinc chromate primer. The first coat may be "flash dried" while the
second coat shall be stoved.

13
 f) After application of the primer, two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint shall be
applied, each coat followed by stoving. The second finishing coat shall be applied
after completion of inspection of first coat of painting. The exterior Colour of the
paint shall be selected by the PMC at a later date.

g) Each coat of primer and finished paint shall be of a slightly different shade to enable
inspection of the painting.

h) A small quantity of finished paint shall be supplied for minor touching up required at
site after installation of the panels.

i) In case the contractor proposes to follow any other established painting procedure like
electrostatic painting, the procedure shall be submitted along with offer/bid for PMC's
review and approval.

5.1.6 Mimic Diagram

a) Coloured mimic diagram and symbols showing the exact representation of the system
shall be provided in the front of control panels.

b) Mimic diagram shall be made preferably of anodized aluminum or plastic of

approved fast Colour material which shall be screwed on to the panel and can be
easily cleaned. Painted overlaid mimic is also acceptable. The mimic bus shall be 2
mm thick. The width of the mimic bus shall be 10 mm for bus bars and 7 mm for
other connections.

c) Mimic bus Colour will be decided by the PMC and shall be obtained from the PMC
by the successful bidder.

d) When semaphore indicators are used for equipment position they shall be so mounted
in the mimic that the equipment closed position shall complete the continuity of
mimic.

e) Indicating lamp, one for each phase for each bus shall be provided on the mimic to
indicate bus charged condition.

5.1.7 Name plates and markings:

a) All equipment mounted on front and rear side as well as equipment mounted inside
the panels shall be provided with individual name plates with equipment designation
engraved. Also on the top of each panel, on front as well as rear side, large and bold
name plates shall be provided for circuit/feeder designation.

b) All front mounted equipment shall be also provided at the rear with individual name
plates engraved with tag numbers corresponding to the one shown in the panel
internal wiring to facilitate easy tracing of the wiring. The name plates shall be
mounted directly by the side of the respective equipment in a visible manner and shall
not be hidden by the equipment wiring.

14
 c) Name plate (giving details of equipment) in all equipments (i.e. relays, breaker
switches semaphore indicating lamps, push buttons etc.) mounted on the panel shall
be provided. Name plates of suitable size on metal/PVC acrylic/thick plastic sheets
shall only be provided. Stickers in no case will be accepted. Large and bold name
plates shall be provided for circuit/feeder designation. Name plates for AC fuses, DC
fuses, resisters and other equipment mounted inside the panel shall be provided
clearly indicating the purpose for which they are meant for.

Name plates of suitable size shall be provided on the top of the panel clearly
indicating manufacturers name, purchase order number and date, year of
manufacturer, serial number of the panel and type of panels.

Name plates shall be made of non-rusting metal or 3 ply lami-coid. Name plates shall
be black with white engraving lettering. The name plates inscription and size of name
plates and letters shall be submitted to the PMC for approval.

d) Each instrument and meter shall be prominently marked with the quantity measured
e.g. kV, A, MW, etc. All relays and other devices shall be clearly marked with
manufacturer's name, manufacturer's type, serial number and electrical rating data.

e) Each switch shall bear clear inscription, identifying its function eg. "BREAKER"
"52 A" "AMMETER" "SYNCHRONISING" etc., similar inscriptions shall also be
provided on each device whose function is not otherwise identified. If any switch
device does not bear this inscription separate name plate giving its function shall be
provided for it. Switch shall also have clear inscription for each position indicating
eg. "TRIP-NEUTRAL-CLOSE", "ON-OFF", "R-Y-B-N-OFF" etc.,

f) All the panels shall be provided with name plate mounted inside the panel bearing
LoA nos, date, name of the substation, feeder and reference drawing no.

5.1.8 Miscellaneous Accessories:

a) Plug point-A AC 240 Volts, single phase, 50 HZ AC socket shall be provided in the
interior of each cubicle with "ON-OFF" Switch for connection of hand lamps.

b) Interior lighting: Each panel shall be provided with a fluorescent lighting fixture rated
for 240 volts, single phase, 50 HZ supply for the interior illumination of the panel
during maintenance. The fittings shall be complete with switch fuse unit and
switching of the lighting shall be controlled by the respective panel door switch.

c) Each control panel shall be provided with necessary arrangements for receiving,
distributing, isolating and fusing of DC and AC supplies for various control signaling,
lighting and space heater circuits. MCBs for the incoming circuits and fuses for sub-
circuits shall be provided. Selection of the main and sub-circuit fuse rating shall be
such as to ensure selective clearance of sub-circuit faults. MCBs shall conform to
IS:13947. Each MCB shall be provided with a potential free contact and the same
shall be wired for annunciation purpose. Potential circuit for relaying and metering
shall be protected by fuses. All fuses shall be HRC cartridge type conforming to
IS:2208 / 13703 mounted on plug-in type fuse bases. All accessible live connection to
fuse bases shall be adequately shrouded. Fuses shall have operation indicators for
indicating blown fuse condition. Fuse carrier base shall have imprints of the fuse
rating and voltage.

15
 d) Space heater: Each panel shall be provided with a space heater rated for 240 V, single
phase, 50 Hz AC for the internal heating of the panel to prevent condensation of
moisture. The fittings shall be complete with isolating switching HRC fuse on phase
and link on the neutral of the heater supply and its switching shall be controlled by a
thermostat.

e) Other Accessories

Test link, special terminal boards and other accessories normally required for testing
operation and maintenance of all relays and meters shall be furnished by the tenderer.

5.1.9 Earthing:
a) All panels shall be equipped with an earth bus securely screwed. Location of earth
bus shall ensure no radiation interference for earth systems under various switching
conditions of isolators and breakers. The material and the sizes of the bus bar shall be
atleast 25 x 6 mm copper flat.
When several panels are mounted adjoining each other, the earth bus shall be made
continuous and necessary connectors and clamps for this purpose shall be included in
the scope of supply of contractor. Provision shall be made for extending the earth bus
bars to future adjoining panels on either side.

b) Provision shall be made on each earth bus bars of the end panels for connection to
main earthing grid. Necessary terminal clamps and connectors for this purpose shall
be included in the scope of supply of contractor. The wire or screens should be clearly
bonded and earthed at the gland plate.

c) All metallic cases of relays, instruments and other panel mounted equipment shall be
connected to the earth bus preferably by independent copper wires of size not less
than 2.5 sq.mm. The colour code of earthing wires shall be green. Earthing wire shall
be connected on terminals with suitable clamp connectors and soldering shall not be
permitted.

d) Looping of earth connections which would result in loss of earth connection to other
devices where the loop is broken shall not be permitted. However, looping of earth
connections between equipment to provide alternative paths to earth bus shall be
provided.

e) VT and CT secondary neutral or common lead shall be earthed at one place only at
the terminal blocks where they enter the panel. Such earthing shall be made through
links so that earthing may be removed from one group without disturbing continuity
of earthing system for other groups.

f) Detailed earthing scheme shall be submitted for approval.

5.1.10 Instruments and Meters:

a) All instruments, meters, recorders and transducers shall be enclosed in dust proof,
moisture resistant, cases and shall be suitable for tropical use. They shall be calibrated
to read directly the primary quantities. They shall be accurately adjusted and

16
 calibrated at works and shall have means of calibration, check and adjustment at site.
Watt and Var meters shall have an indication of (+) and (-) to indicate EXPORT and
IMPORT respectively. Digital voltage and frequency meters shall be of class: 0.5 and
shall have digital display of 5 and 4 digits respectively, with display size, not less than
25 mm (height). All accessories including test switches and test plugs, where
applicable shall be furnished. Their elements shall be shock resistant and shielded
from external magnetic fields.

b) Indicating Instruments: Digital instruments shall have digital display of not less than
25mm (height). Instrument shall have four digit display.

i) Unless otherwise specified all electrical indicating instruments shall be of

96sq. mm size. They shall be suitable for flush mounting.

ii) The dial shall be free from warping, fading and discoloring. The dial shall
also be free from parallax error.

iii) Instruments shall conform to IS:1248 and shall have accuracy class of 1.0 or
better. The design of the scales shall be such that it can read to a resolution
corresponding to 50% of the accuracy class index.
iv) Instrument covers shall be of shadow proof design, utilizing all available
light. The indicating instruments shall have red marks on the dial
corresponding to rated values of the associated primary equipment.
v) Ammeters and current coils of watt meters and VAR meters shall
continuously withstand 120% of rated current and 10 times the rated current
for 0.5 sec. without loss of accuracy. Voltmeters and potential coils of watt
meters and VAR meters shall withstand 120% of rated voltage for 0.5 seconds
without loss of accuracy.

c) Metering Instruments:
1. Ammeters:
All ammeters shall be of digital type and provided with direct reading triple
range scale. Scale value of ammeters shall be equal to 1 to 1.3 times the rated
primary current of the current transformer feeding it. The rated current shall be
1.0 Amp. Accurate reading of ammeter shall be possible at the lowest limit of
5% of the rated current.
2. Voltmeter:
Voltmeter shall be digital type. Rated voltage shall be 110/√3 Volts. Maximum
value of voltage scale shall be 20% in excess of the normal voltage.

3. Watt meters and VAR meters:

These meters shall be suitable for indicating flow of power in both directions
and shall be of 2 elements type for use in 3 phase 3 wire unbalanced system or 3
element type for 3 phase 4 wire unbalanced system. Current coil shall be rated
or 1 A and the voltage coil for 110 √3 volts.
4 . Energy Meters:
Electronic Trivector meters shall be static type conforming to IEC 687 and
suitable for bidirectional power flow and for CT/CVT or IVT connection. The
static meter shall measure active and reactive energy both import and export, by

17
3 phase 4 wire principle suitable for balanced/unbalanced 3phase load. Accuracy
of meter shall be 0.2 for active energy and 0.5 for reactive energy. The active
and reactive energy shall be directly computed in CT & VT primary values and
stored in four different registers as KWH (E), KWH(I), KVARH(E) and
KVARH(I) along with a plus sign for export and minus sign for import. CT
secondary is 1 A, PT secondary and CVT secondary is 110/√3V, the appropriate
ratios of CT and CVT separately or VT will be given in the detailed order.
Meters shall compute the energy sent out/received, from/to the station bus bar
during each successive 15 minute block and store in the respective registers.
Meter shall display on demand the energy sent out/received during the previous
15 minute block. Further the meter shall continuously integrate the energy
readings of each register upto that time. All these readings shall be displayed on
demand. Cumulative reading of each register shall be stored in non-volatile
memory at the end of each hour of day starting from 01 hours. These readings
shall be stored for a period of 40 days before being erased. The meters shall be
capable of reading and storing 8 parameters for 40 days. The static meter shall
have built in clock and calendar having an accuracy of 1 minute per month or
better. Date/time shall be displayed on demand. Meter shall have
communication interface via (i) optical port conforming to IEC 1107
Protocol/ANSI/PACT for data retrieving through Common Meter Reading
Instrument (CMRI) and (ii) RS 485 Port for remote communication. The meters
shall have minimum 8 load survey parameters as below with 15 minutes
integration period and minimum 40 days storage data.
a. KW(E)
b. KW (I)
c. KVA (E)
d. KVA (I)
e. KVAR lead @ KW(I)
f. KVAR lag @ KW(I)
g. KVAR lead @ KW(E)
h. KVAR lag @ KW(E)
The trivector meter shall have both Trivector and Availability Based Tariff
(ABT) features. The user shall be above to select logging interval for 15 minutes
or 30 minutres.

Each meter shall have a unique identification code provided by PMC and shall
be marked permanently on the front and also on the non-volatile memory. The
voltage monitoring of all the three voltages shall be provided.

The meter shall normally operate with power drawn from VT supplies. Power
supply to the meter shall be healthy even with a single phase VT supply. An
automatic back up shall be provided by a built in life time battery and shall not
need replacement for at least ten years with a continuous VT interruption of even
two years. Date and time of VT interruption and restoration shall be
automatically stored in non-volatile memory. The meter shall have an optical
port at the front of the meter for data collection by a hand held device and RS
485 port for remote communication. The meter shall conform to open protocol
modem for remote communication. The meter shall have pulse outputs to test
accuracy and provision for connecting it to time of day tariff equipment when
required.

18
5. Bus Voltage & Frequency Recording instruments

• Recording instruments shall be square or rectangular in shape and shall be

suitable for flush mounting on panels. They shall be of 'draw out' type and
suitable for back connection.

• Recorders shall be furnished in dust tight metal cases with gasketed doors
and they shall be designed so as to require minimum maintenance.

• They shall have fast response and critical dumping.

• The recorder shall

i. be double pen type employing potentionmeteric servo drive
principle.
ii. Be with a manual on/off switch
iii. be of continuous recording type with disposable fibre tip cartridge
pens, employing ink on paper.
iv. have a Calibrated Chart width of at least 100 mm and a viewing
area of 100x50mm, at least.
v. have an accuracy of + 1.0% span. The accuracy class of recorder
shall be 1.5 for the measured quantity or 1.0 for time keeping.
vi. have full span response time of less than 2 seconds.
vii. have maximum chart speed facility of 60mm per hour.
viii. be directly calibrated for CT and PT ratios in use. Be provided with
a facility for automatic shorting of CT leads if and when the
recorder is drawn out.
ix. be provided with chart rolls of adequate length requiring
replacement, not earlier than 27 days. The quantity of chart rolls and
ink included with the offer shall be 1000 metre length of paper and
five pens with each recorder. There shall be provision for advance
indication towards replacement of chart paper and replenishing of
ink.
x. be suitable for operation with station DC source, in case of AC
supply (240 volts, 1 phase, 50Hz) failure (inverter may be included ,
if required) .

Alternatively, Static/Digital type frequency recorder and voltage recorder

either as individual units or composite unit for total substation with time
tagged information shall also be acceptable if it meets the accuracy of
+ 1.0% span and full span response time of less than 2 seconds. The
static/digital shall also meet the high voltage susceptibility test, impulse
voltage with stand test, high frequency disturbance test –class III and fast
transient disturbance test – level III as per IEC 60255.

Feeding chart paper or removal of chart paper shall be simple. Chart rolls
and ink required for two years shall be supplied.

19
d) Disturbance Recorder :

i) Disturbance recorder shall be microprocessor based and shall be used to record

the graphic form of instantaneous values of voltage and current in all three
phases, open delta voltage & neutral current, open or closed position of relay
contacts and breakers during the system disturbances and built in feature of line
distance relay is acceptable provided the requirements of following clauses are
met.

ii) The Disturbance recorder shall consist of individual acquisition units, or as a

part of distance protection and an Evaluation unit which is common for the
entire Sub-Station. Whenever, more than one acquisition units are connected
to an Evaluation unit, necessary hardware and software shall also be supplied
for on line transfer of data from all acquisition units of Evaluation unit. If there
are any constraints for one Evaluation unit to accept the data from number of
acquisition units under the present scope, adequate number of Evaluation units
shall be supplied.

iii) Disturbance recorder shall have 8 analog and 16 digital channels for each
feeder.

iv) Acquisition units shall acquire the fault data for the pre fault and post fault
period and transfer them to Evaluation unit automatically to store in the hard
disk. The acquisition units shall be located in the protection panels of the
respective feeders.

v) The acquisition unit shall be suitable for inputs from current transformers with
one Amp rated secondary and capacitive voltage transformers with 63.5V
(phase to neutral voltage) rated secondary. Any device required for processing
of input signals in order to make the signals compatible to the Disturbance
recorder equipment shall form an integral part of it. However, such processing
of input signals shall in no way distort it waveform.

vi) The equipment shall be carefully screened, shielded, earthed and protected as
may be required for its safe functioning. Also, the disturbance recorder shall
have stable software, reliable hardware, simplicity of maintenance and
immunity from the effects of the hostile environment of EHV switchyard
which are prone to various interference signals typically from large switching
transients.

vii) The Evaluation unit shall consist of a desktop personal computer (including
VGA colour monitor, mouse and key board) and printer. The desktop PC shall
have Pentium-IV processor or better and having a clock speed 3.2GHz or
better. The hard disk capacity of PC shall not be less than 120 GB and RAM
capacity shall not be less than 512 MB.

viii) Evaluation software shall be provided for the analysis and evaluation of the
recorded data made available in the PC under WINDOWS environment. The
Software features shall include repositioning of analog and digital signals
selection and amplification of time and amplitude scales of each analog and
digital channel, calculation of MAX/MIN frequency, phase difference values,

20
recording of MAX/MIN values etc. of analog channel, group of signal to be drawn
on the same axis etc. listing and numbering of all analog and digital channels and
current, voltage, frequency and phase difference values at the time of
fault/tripping. Also, the software should be capable of carrying out
Fourier/Harmonic analysis of the current and voltage wave forms. The disturbance
records shall also be available in COMTRADE format (IEEE standard – Common
Format for Transient data Exchange for Power System)

ix) The Evaluation unit shall be connected to the printer to obtain the graphic
form of disturbances whenever desired by the operator.

x) Disturbance recorder acquisition units shall be suitable to operate from 220V

DC as available at Sub-Station Evaluation unit along with the printer shall
normally be connected to 240V, single phase AC supply. In case of failure of
AC supply, Evaluation unit and printer shall be switched automatically to the
station DC through Inverter of adequate capacity which shall form a part of
Disturbance recorder system.

xi) The acquisition unit shall have the following features

1) Facility shall exist to alarm operator in case of any internal faults in the
acquisition units such as power supply fail, processor/memory fail etc
and same shall be wired to annunciation system.
2) The frequency response shall be 5 Hz on lower side an 250Hz or better
on upper side.
3) Scan rate shall be 1000Hz/channel or better.
4) Pre-fault time shall not be less than 100milliseconds and the post fault
time shall not be less than 2 seconds (adjustable). If another system
disturbance occurs during one post-fault run time, the recorder shall also
be able to record the same. However the total memory of acquisition
unit shall not be less than 5.0 seconds.
5) The open delta voltage and neutral current shall be derived either through
software or externally by providing necessary auxiliary transformers.
6) The acquisition unit shall be typically used to record the following digital
channels:
a. Main CB R phase open
b. Main CB Y phase open
c. Main CB B phase open
d. Main-1 carrier received
e. Main-I protection operated
f. Director Trip received
g. Back up protection operated
h. Bus bar protection operated

7) In case the disturbance recorder is in-built part of line distance

protection, above digital channels may be interfaced either externally or
internally.

8) Any digital signal can be programmed to act as trigger for the acquisition
unit. Analog channels should have programmable threshold levels for
triggers and selection for over or under levels should be possible.

21
 xii) The printer shall be compatible with the desktop PC and shall use Plain paper.
The print out shall contain the Feeder identity, Date and time (in hour, minute
and second up to 100th of a second), identity of trigger source and Graphic form
of analog and digital signals of all the channels. Ten packets of Z-fold paper
(500 sheets in each packet) suitable for printer shall be supplied.

xiii) Each disturbance recorder shall have its own time generator. The clock of the
time generator shall be such that the drift is limited to +/- 0.5 seconds/day, if
allowed to run with out synchronisation.

xiv) Disturbance recorder shall have facility to synchronise its time generator from
Time Synchronisation Equipment specified vide clause 3.11 in the Technical
specification for Substation Automation (Chapter XIII, Section IX 0f this
volume).

The recorder shall give annunciation in case of absence of synchronising pulse

within a specified time.

xv) If Time Synchronisation Equipment is not available / faulty, time generator of

any one of the disturbance recorders can be taken as master and time generators
of other disturbance recorders and Event loggers in that station shall be
synchronized to follow the master.

xvi) Disturbance recorder shall be an integral part of IED specified vide the
technical specification for Substation Automation (Chapter XIII of
section IX) and as such gets covered in the price schedule therein. If so,
the cost of disturbance recorder and such of those relevant items
covered in the price schedule of station automation shall not be included
in the cost to be quoted against those items mentioned in panels ‘C’ or
‘D’ or ‘R’ in the price schedule (1A) relevant to CR panels.

e) Fault Locator:

i) electronic or microprocessor based type

ii) ‘On-line’ type
iii) suitable for breaker operating time of 2 cycles i.e., the measurement time for
fault locator shall not exceed 2 cycles (40 ms).
iv) Built-in display unit
v) The display shall be directly in % of line length or kilometers without
requiring any further calculations
vi) An accuracy of 3% or better for all types for faults and fault levels.
vii) The above accuracy should not be impaired under the following conditions:
a) presence of remote end in feed
b) predominant D.C. component in fault current
c) high fault ARC resistance
d) severe CVT transients
e) magnitude of line loading before occurrence of faults.

viii) Facility for remote data transmission

ix) Shall meet IEC-255 or any other equivalent internationally recognized
standards.

22
 x) Shall have mutual zero sequence compensation unit if fault locator is to be
used on double circuit line
xi) Have built in supervision and testing facility.
xii) Built in feature of line distance relay is acceptable provided the requirements
of above clauses are met.

f. Event Logger: (Optional)

1. The event logger as a part of Numerical relay/self alone shall be used to record
open and close states of switchyard equipment, relays and changes of alarms.
The Event logger shall also include, desktop PC with VDU, printer and keyboard
can be supplied with Event Logger.
2. The equipment is used to record changes in digital events. When such changes
occur in display in VDU as well as print out on printer should result.
3. The equipment should be constructed in clearly defined plug-in modules. A
monitor module should be provided for indicating internal faults such as
Processor failure, memory failure, other internal hardware failures. These
failures should be displayed on the LED's mounted on the monitor module and
facility shall exist to alarm the operator.
4. The event logger shall have stable software, reliable hardware, simplicity of
maintenance. The equipment shall be carefully screened, shielded, earthed and
protected against severe hostile electrical environment of EHV switchyard which
are prone to various interference signals typically from large switching
transients.
5. The event logger equipment shall meet the following requirements

i) at least 500digital event inputs shall be accommodated in single equipment.

ii) the time resolution shall be 1 milli second
iii) cope with upto 40 changes in any one 10 milli sec. interval.
iv) the date and time should be printed to the nearest 1 milli second followed
by a message describing the point which has operated.
v) the operator shall be able to change the date and time from the keyboard
and allow normal inputs of Accept. Alarm demand log, plant state
demand log and date & time.
vi) Events occurring whilst a previous event is in processes of being printed
or to be stored to wait printing. Over Hundred such events must be
stored.
vii) Necessary facility to change the text of the event by the operator shall
exist.

6. Event Logger shall its own time generator and the clock of the time generator
shall be such that the drift is limited to +/- 0.5 seconds/day, if allowed to run with
out synchronisation.
Event Logger shall have facility to synchronise its time generator from Time
Synchronisation Equipment specified vide cl. 3.11 in the Technical specification
for Substation Automation (Chapter XIII, Section IX 0f this volume),
The event logger shall give annunciation in case of absence of Synchronising
pulse within a specified time.

7. The printer shall be compatible with event logger and desktop personal computer
and shall use plain paper. Ten packets of paper (500 sheets in each packet)
suitable for printer shall be supplied.

23
 8. The printout of the events shall contain at least the station identification, date &
time (in hour, minutes, seconds & milliseconds), event number and event
description (at least 40 characters).

9. Event Logger shall be suitable to operate from 220V DC as available at Sub-

Station. PC along with the printer shall normally be connected to 240V, single
phase supply. In case of failure of AC supply, PC and printer shall be switched
automatically to the station DC through Inverter of adequate capacity.

10. Event logger and DC converter as specified shall be an integral part of

IED specified vide the technical specification for Substation Automation
(Chapter XIII of section IX) and as such gets covered in the price schedule
therein. If so, the cost of Event logger and such of those relevant items
covered in the price schedule of station automation shall not be included in
the cost to be quoted against those items mentioned in panel ‘S’ in the
price schedule (1A) relevant to CR panels.

5.1.11 Relays:

a) All relays shall conform to the requirements of IS: 3231/IEC-60255/IEC-61000

or other applicable approved standards. Relays shall be suitable for flush or semi
flush mounting on the front with connections from the rear. Relays shall be
rectangular in shape and shall have dust tight, dull black or egg shell black enamel
painted cases with transparent cover removable from the front.

b) All main protective relays shall be of numerical type and communication protocol
shall be as per IEC-61850. Further, the test levels of EMI as indicated in IEC-
61850 shall be applicable to these.

c) All protective relays shall be in draw out or plug-in type/ modular cases with
proper testing facilities. The testing facilities provided on the relays shall be
specifically stated in the bid. Necessary test plugs shall be supplied loose and
shall be included in Contractor's scope of supply. Test block and switches shall be
located immediately below each relay for testing. As an alternative to test block
and test plug arrangements the Contractor shall also quote alternative testing
facility of protective relays by providing a push button which when pressed
connects the testing equipment to the relay coils and injects current in the coil and
automatically disconnects the trip circuits and on operation of relay gives a signal
that the equipment and the circuits are correct. The above tests shall be carried out
without short circuiting the CT secondary connections. The PMC reserves the
right for accepting any one of the above two testing facilities. Unless otherwise
specified all auxiliary relays and timers shall be supplied in non-draw out
cases/plug in type modular cases.

d) All AC relays shall be suitable for operation at 50Hz AC Voltage operated relays
shall be suitable for 110 or √3 volts VT secondaries and current operated relays
for 1 Amp CT secondaries as specified in this specification. DC auxiliary relays
and timers shall be designed for 220 V DC voltage and shall operate satisfactorily
between 80% and 110% of rated voltage. Voltage operated relays shall have
adequate thermal capacity for continuous operation.

24
e) The protective relays shall be suitable for efficient and reliable operation of the
protection scheme described in the specification. Necessary auxiliary relays and
timers required for interlocking schemes for multiplying of contacts/suiting
contact duties of protective relays and monitoring of control supplies and circuits,
lockout relay monitoring of circuits etc., and also required for the complete
protection schemes described in the specification shall be provided.

All protective relays shall be provided with at least two pairs of potential free
isolated output contacts. Auxiliary relays and timers shall have pairs of contacts
as required to complete the scheme. Contacts shall be silver faced with spring
action. Relay cases shall have adequate number of terminals for making potential
free external connections to the relay coils and contacts including spare contacts.
Relay case size shall be so chosen as not to introduce any limitations on the use of
available contacts on the relay due to in-adequacy of terminals. Paralleling of
contacts, if any shall be done at the terminals on the casing of the relay. Relay
case shall have adequate number of terminals for making potential free external
connections to the relay coils and contacts, including spare contacts.

f) All protective relays, auxiliary relays and timers except the lock out relays and
interlocking relays specified shall be provided with self-reset type contacts. All
protective relays and timers shall be provided with externally hand reset positive
action operation indicators, provided with inscription, subject to PMC's approval.
All protective relays which do not have built in hand reset operation indicators
shall have additional auxiliary relays with operating indicators for this purpose.
Similar separate operating indicator (auxiliary relays) shall also be provided in the
trip circuits of protections located outside the board such as Bucholz relays,
temperature protection, fire protection etc.

g) Timers shall be of the solid state type. Pneumatic timers are not acceptable. Short
time delays in terms of milliseconds may be obtained by using copper slugs on
auxiliary relays. In such case it shall be ensured that the continuous rating of the
relay is not affected. Time delay in terms of milliseconds obtained by the external
capacitor resistor combination is not acceptable.

h) No control relay which shall trip the power circuit breaker when the relay is de-
energized shall be employed in the circuits. All relays shall be self reset type
unless specified other wise.

i) Provision shall be made for easy isolation of trip circuits of each relay for the
purpose of testing and maintenance.

j) All relays shall withstand a test voltage 2.5 kV, 50 HZ, rms voltage for one
second. In case of static relays the sub clause ‘m’ of this clause 5.1.11 shall be
applicable.

k) Auxiliary seal-in-units provided on the protective relays shall preferably be of

shunt reinforcement type. If series relays are used the following shall be strictly
ensured:

i) The operating time of the series seal-in-unit shall be sufficiently

shorter than that of the trip coil or trip relay in series with which it
operates to ensure definite operation of the flag indicator of the relay.

25
 ii) Seal-in-unit shall obtain adequate current for operation when one or
more relays operate simultaneously.
iii) Impedance of the seal-in-unit shall be small enough to permit
satisfactory operation of the trip coil on trip relays when the DC
supply voltage is minimum.
iv) Trip-circuit seal-in is required for all trip outputs, irrespective of the
magnitude of the interrupted current. The trip-circuit seal-in logic
shall not only seal-in the trip output(s), but also the relevant initiation
signals to other scheme functions, (e.g. initiate signals to the circuit-
breaker failure function, re-closing function etc.), and the alarm output
signals.
v) Two methods of seal-in are required, one based on the measurement
of AC current, catering for those circumstances for which the
interrupted current is above a set threshold, and one based on a fixed
time duration, catering for those circumstances for which the
interrupted current is small (below the set threshold).
vi) For the current seal-in method, the seal-in shall be maintained until the
circuit-breaker opens, at which time the seal-in shall reset and the
seal-in method shall not now revert to the fixed time duration method.
For this seal-in method, the seal-in shall be maintained for the set time
duration. For the line protection schemes, this time duration shall be
independently settable for single – and three-pole tripping.
vii) Seal-in by way of current or by way of the fixed duration timer shall
occur irrespective of whether the trip command originates from within
the main protection device itself (from any of the internal protection
functions) or from an external device with its trip output routed
through the main protection device for tripping. Trip-circuit seal-in
shall not take place under sub-harmonic conditions (e.g. reactor ring
down).

l) All protective relays and alarm relays shall be provided with one extra isolated
pair of contacts wired to terminals exclusively for future use.

m) Where ever solid static relays are used, the following requirements shall be met
with:

ii) The printed circuit cards shall be of fiberglass type and the contact shall be
gold plated. All connections with the connector pegs shall be through wire
wrapping. All solder joints on the printed circuit boards shall be encapsulated
or covered with varnish.

iii) The components shall be rated to carry at least twice the normal expected
loads. The resistors shall be of carbon composition or metal oxide type and
the capacitors shall be plastic film or tantalum type. Stringent measures
including shielding of long internal wiring should be taken to make relays
immune to voltage spikes. The relays must withstand the requirements of
IEC 255-4 appendix-E class III regarding HF disturbance tests; IEC 255-4
regarding impulse test at 5 kV and fast transient test as per IEC 801-4.
Insulation barriers shall be provided to ensure that transients present in CT &
VT connections due to extraneous sources do not cause damage to static
circuits.

26
iv) All relays shall be designed for satisfactory performance under tropical and
humid conditions specified in the specification. Vide chapter-I of section IX
of this volume. Special mention shall be made in the technical deviations
schedule of the bid for those relays, if any, that Contractor proposes to use
which differ from specified requirements.

v) All devices required for correct operation of each relay shall be provided by
Contractor without any extra cost.

vi) The contractor shall ensure that the terminals of the contacts of the relays are
readily brought out for connections as required in the final approved scheme.
The type of relay case size offered shall not create any restrictions on the
availability of the contact terminals for wiring connections.

vii) DC/DC converter shall be provided in the protective relay wherever necessary
in order to provide a stable auxiliary supply for relay operation. Provision of
DC cells in the protective relays as reliable standby power supply will
however not be acceptable.

vii) The relays shall be stable and suitably protected against transient/induced
over voltages and noise signals. The Contractor shall state clearly in his bid
special requirements, if any, for DC input arrangement or cabling considered
necessary for satisfactory operation of relays offered.

viii) All equipment shall be of modular construction and the modules and sub units
shall be of plug in type for easy replacement. The design shall permit fast
recognition of defects and facilitate easy repair. Appropriate indication shall
be available to enable speedy internal fault location. AC components shall be
readily accessible for easy disassembly and replacement. Readily accessible
and clearly marked test prints shall be provided at all important points in the
circuit. Screw clamp terminals shall be provided for interconnection with
relaying equipment. It shall be possible to test the protection channels with the
equipment fully operational without rendering the equipment ineffective for
genuine signals. Safety equipment such as protection cover and interlocks
shall be provided. Ground terminals with isolating links shall be provided
where required. Numerical relays are acceptable as an alternative to solid state
relays. The following information / confirmation shall also be furnished in the
bid. Numercial relays are provided with built in event / disturbance / fault
recorder features. The bidder shall bring out in the bid that the Numerical
relays providing different protection features / application in a single unit if
any one of the application / feature goes out of service the other feature /
application (s) will remain un-effected.

ix) The contractor shall include in his bid a list of installations where the relays
quoted have been in satisfactory operation.

x) The necessary interface software for programming, interacting with the relays
shall be provided free of cost. Necessary software and hardware to up/down
load the data to/from the relay from to the computer installed in the substation
shall be provided.

27
 xi) The relay shall have suitable communication facility for connectivity t6o
SCADA. The relay shall be capable of supporting IEC-870-5-103 and 61850
protocol.

xii) The necessary hardware/ software support shall be given for at least 15 years
beyond warrantee at reasonable prices.

5.1.12 Annunciation System:

a) Alarm annunciation system shall be provided for the control board by means of visual
and audible alarm in order to draw the attention of the operator to the abnormal
operating conditions or the operation of some protective devices. The annunciation
equipment shall be suitable for operation with 220 V DC voltage.

b) The visual annunciation shall be provided by annunciation facia, mounted flush on

the top of the panels. The audible alarm shall be provided by alarm buzzer and bell
for trip and non-trip alarm respectively.

c) The anunciator facia shall be provided with translucent plastic window for alarm
point with minimum size of 35 mm x 50 mm. The facia plates shall be engraved in
black lettering with respective inscriptions details of which will be furnished to the
Contractor by the PMC.

Alarm inscriptions shall be engraved on each window in not more than three lines and
size of the lettering shall not be less than 5mm.

d) Facia Windows shall be illuminated with LEDs. Each annunciation window shall be
provided with two white lamps in parallel to provide safety against lamp failure. Long
life lamps shall be used. The lamp circuit shall include series resistor of adequate
rating. The cover plate of the facia windows shall be flush with the panel and shall be
capable of easy removal to facilitate replacement of lamps. The transparency of cover
plates and wattage of the lamps provided in the facia windows shall be adequate to
ensure clear visibility of the inscriptions in the control room having high illumination
intensity (500 Lux), from the location of the Operator's desk.

e) TRIP AND NONTRIP facia shall be differentiated. All TRIP shall have red colour
and all NONTRIP facia shall have white colour.
The available alarm shall be provided by Buzzer / Hooter / Bell having different
sounds and shall be used as follows:

Hooter - alaram annunciations

Bell - Annunciation of DC failure
Buzzer - AC supply failure.

28
f) Sequence of operation of the annunciator shall be as follows:

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Alarm condition Fault Visual Audible
contact Annunciation Annunciation
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Normal Open Off Off
2. Abnormal Close Flashing On
3. Acknowledge push Close Steady on Off
button is pressed
4. Reset push button Close/ On/ Off
is pressed Open Off Off
5. Lamp test push button Open Steady on Off
pressed
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

g) Visual and audible annunciation for the failure of DC supply to the annunciation
system shall also be provided and this annunciation shall operate on 240 volts AC
supply with separate fuses. On failure of the power supply to the annunciation system
for more than 3 secs. (adjustable setting) an indicating lamp shall light up and a bell
shall sound. A separate push button shall be provided for cancellation of this audible
alarm alone but the indicating lamp shall remain steadily lighted till the supply to the
annunciation system is restored. The sound of the audible alarm (bell) provided for
this annunciation shall be different from the audible alarm provided for the
annunciation system.

h) A separate voltage check relay shall be provided to monitor the failure of supply (240
V AC) to the scheme mentioned above. If the failure of supply exists for more than 2
to 3 secs. this relay shall initiate visual and audible annunciation. The visual and
audible annunciation for the failure of AC supply shall be connected to the
annunciation system and this shall operated on DC and buzzers shall sound. The
annunciation system described above shall meet the following additional
requirements:

i) The annunciation system shall be capable of catering to all simultaneous

signals at a time.

ii) One self resetting push button shall be provided on each panel for testing the
facia window lamps. Push buttons for testing flasher and audible alarm circuit
of annunciation supply failure monitoring circuit shall also be provided.
These testing circuits shall be so connected that while test is being done it
shall not prevent the registering of any new annunciation that may land during
the test.

iii) One set each of the following push buttons shall be provided on each panel

a) Reset push button for annunciation system

b) Accept push button for annunciation system

29
 iv) The annunciation shall be repetitive type and shall be capable of registering
the fleeting signal. Minimum duration of the fleeting signal registered by the
system shall be 15 milli secs.

v) The annunciator shall be suitable for operation with normally open fault
contacts which close on a fault. For fault contacts which open on a fault, it
shall be possible at site to change annunciators from "close to fault" and vice
versa.

vi) Micro Processor based alarm and annunciation relay schemes are preferable.

vii) In case of static enunciator scheme, special precaution shall be taken to ensure
that spurious alarm condition does not appear due to influence of external
electromagnetic / electrostatic interference on the annunciator wiring and
switching disturbances from the neighboring circuits within the panels and the
static annunciator shall meet the high voltage susceptibility test, impulse
voltage with stand test, high frequency disturbance test – class III and fast
transient disturbance test-level III as per IEC 60255.

5.1.13 Switches:

a) Control and Instrument switches shall be rotary operated type with Escutcheon plates
clearly marked to show operating position and circuit designation plates and suitable
for flush mounting with only switch front plate and operating handle projecting out.
Handles of different shapes and suitable inscriptions on switches as per clause 5.1.7
shall be provided as on aid switch identification. The connection shall be from the
back. The contact assembly at the back of the switch shall be enclosed in a dust proof
removable covers. The access to the cover shall be from the back, by removal of
nuts.

b) The selection of operating handles for the different types of switches shall be as
follows:
i. Breaker and isolator : Control switch with pistol grip(black)/
control switch with discrepancy lamp,
switches
ii. Selector switches : Oval or knob, black
iii. Instrument switches : Round, knurled, black
iv. Protecting transfer : Pistol grip, lockable
switch and black
v. Synchronizing switches : Oval, Black, keyed handle
c) The control switch of breaker and isolator shall be of 3 position 12 ways spring return
to neutral type, with lost motion device with locking facility. The spring return type
shall be provided with target which shall indicate the last operation of the switch. The
control springs shall be strong and robust enough to prevent inadvertent operation due
to light touch. The spring return type switch shall have spring return from close and
trip positions to "after close" and "after trip" positions respectively. Adequate
number of spare contacts shall be provided on breaker control switches for control,
inter locking, annunciation and discrepancy.

30
d) Instrument selection switches shall be of maintained contact (stay put) type Ammeter
selection switches shall have make-before-break type contacts so as to prevent open
circuiting of CT secondaries when changing the position of the switch. They shall be
of 5 position type viz R-Y-B-N-Off. Voltmeter transfer switches for AC shall be
suitable for reading all line-to-line and line-to-neutral voltages for non-effectively
earthed systems and for reading all line to line voltages for effectively earthed
systems.
e) Synchronizing selector switches shall be maintained contact (stay put) type and
provided on the Synchronous Trolley. Synchronising sockets (12 pin type) matching
with the 12 pin Plug of Synchronous Trolley cable shall be fixed on each breaker
panel The synchronizing selector switch ( on the trolley) and socket ( on the panel)
combination shall be arranged to connect the Synchronizing equipment when turned
to the "ON" position. One contact of each socket shall be connected in the closing
circuit of the respective breaker so that the breaker cannot be closed until the switch is
turned to the "ON" position.

f) Lockable type of selector switch which can be locked in particular positions shall be
provided on the trolley. The key locks shall be fitted on the operating handles.

g) The contacts of all switches shall preferably open and close with snap action to
minimize arcing. Contacts of switches shall be spring assisted and contact faces shall
be with rivets of pure silver. Springs shall not be used as current carrying parts.

The contact combination and their operation shall be such as to give completeness to
the interlock and function of the scheme. The contact rating of the switches shall be
as follows:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Description Contact rating in Amps
-----------------------------------------------------------------
220 V DC 50V DC 240 V AC
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a) Make and carry 10 10 10
continuously
b) Make and carry for 30 30 30
0.5 sec.
c) Break
i) Resistive load 3 20 7
ii) Inductive load
with L/R = 40 m sec 0.2 16 7

Discrepancy Switches

As an alternate to the pistol grip type control switch the bidder can offer control
switch with discrepancy lamp.

Control switch with discrepancy lamp shall be used for the remote operations like
closing and tripping the circuit breakers or closing and opening of the isolator. The

31
 built in lamp shall be connected to the annunciation for any discrepancy between the
position of the switches and controlled objects. Suitable flasher relay shall also be
included in the scope. The discrepancy switches shall be black in colour and knob
type with in-built lamp. Wherever discrepancy switches are provided the bidder shall
provide necessary auxiliary relays for interlock schemes.

5.1.14 Indicating Lamps:

a) Indicating lamps shall be panel mounting type with rear terminal connections. Lamps
shall be provided with series connected resistors preferably built in the lamp
assembly. Lamps shall have translucent lamp covers to diffuse lights coloured red,
green, amber, clear white or blue as specified. The lamp cover shall be preferably of
screwed type, un- breakable and moulded from heat resisting material. The lamps
shall be of LED type. The supply for LED shall be from DC station batteries, unless
stated otherwise, at 220V.

b) The wattage and resistance of the lamps shall be as follows:

i) 220/250 V – 5 to 10 W – 4000 to 8000 Ohms
ii) 110 V – 5 to 10 W – 1000 to 2000 Ohms

c) Bulbs and lenses shall be interchangeable and easily replaceable from the front of the
panel. Tools, if required for replacing the bulbs and lenses shall also be included in
the scope of supply.

d) The indicating lamps with resistors shall withstand 120% of rated voltage on a
continuous basis.

e) LED shall be furnished 20% in excess of actual numbers required and caps shall be
furnished 10% in excess of actual numbers used for each colour. The corresponding
breaker position of indicating lamps shall flash for condition of discrepancy between
the last operation of circuit breaker (ON and OFF) and become steady when the
switch is operated to correspond with the position of the circuit breaker. The
discrepancy signal when the breaker is tripped shall also be followed by the sound
signal.

5.1.15 Position Indicators:

a) Position indicators of ‘SEMAPHORE” type shall be provided when specified as part
of the mimic diagrams on panels for indicating the position of circuit breakers,
isolating/ earthing switches etc. The indicator shall be suitable for semi-flush
mounting with only the front disc projecting out and with terminal connection from
the rear. Their strips shall be of the same colour as the associated mimic.

b) Position indicator shall be suitable for either AC or DC operation as specified. When

the supervised object is in the closed position, the pointer of the indicator shall take
up a position in line with the mimic bus bars, and at right angles to them when the
object is in the open position. When the supply failure to the indicator occurs, the
pointer shall take up an intermediate position to indicate the supply failure. The rating
of the indicator shall not exceed 2.5 W. It shall not be possible to displace the position
of the indicator discs due to the accidental touch during the cleaning of the panel.

c) The position indicators shall withstand 120% of rated voltage on a continuous basis.

32
5.1.16 Synchronizing Equipments:
a) 1 No. Synchronizing switch and 1 No. 12 pin Synchronizing socket is to be
provided on 132/33 kV feeder control panels and shall be supplied along with
panels. Depending on the actual requirement either Synchronizing switch or
Synchronizing sockets or both will have to be mounted and wired on the panel.

b) The synchronizing instruments shall be mounted on a synchronizing trolley.

The trolley shall be equipped with double voltmeter, double frequency meter,
synchroscope and lamps fully wired. The trolley shall be of mobile type with
four rubber padding wheels capable of rotating in 360° round the vertical axis.
Suitable bumpers with rubber paddings shall be provided all round the trolley
to prevent any accidental damage to any panel while the trolley is in
movement.

c) The trolley shall have 3 meter long flexible cord comprising stranded tinned
copper conductors fully wired to the instruments and terminated in plug in
order to facilitate connecting the trolley to any of the panels. The trolley shall
be provided with all equipment/accessories necessary for proper
synchronization.

Receptacle to accept the plug shall be provided on each control panel. Suitable
auxiliary voltage transformers wherever necessary shall also be provided for
synchronizing condition.

d) Synchroscope shall be suitable for 110/√3 v phase to neutral VT secondaries

and shall be provided with integral synchronism indicating lamp employing
bright bulb synchronizing method.

The synchroscope shall indicate synchronism between incoming and running

supplies when pointer is at the time ‘twelve O’clock’ position only an shall
have arrows on the face to show that the incoming supply frequency is fast or
slow with respect to the running supply frequency when the pointer is moving
clockwise or anti-clockwise respectively. The instrument pointer shall move at
least 45 ° from the vertical position when either or both supplies are removed
and then remain stationary without any tendency to creep.

The synchroscope shall be 360° type and preferably be larger in size than other
instruments. It shall be capable of withstanding sustained out-of-synchronism
conditions.

In case the synchroscope is not continuously rated, a synchroscope cut-off

switch shall be provided and an indicating lamp to indicate that the
synchroscope is energized, shall also be provided.

e) Synchro check relay with necessary ancillary equipment shall be provided

which shall permit 132 kV breakers to close after checking the requirements of
synchronizing of incoming and running supply. The phase angle setting shall
not exceed 35° and this angle shall be adjustable and take into account the
circuit breaker closing system period. This relay shall have a response time of
less than 200 milliseconds when the two system conditions are met with in

33
 present limits and with the timer disconnected. The relay shall have a
frequency difference setting not exceeding 0.45% at rated value and at the
minimum time setting. The relay shall have a voltage difference setting not
exceeding 10% at rated value. The relay shall have a continuously adjusted
time setting range of 0.5 to 20 sec. A guard relay shall be provided to prevent
the closing attempt by means of synchronizing check relay when control
switch is kept in closed position long before the two systems are in
synchronism. The synchronizing by pass switch shall also be provided.

5.1.17 Trip circuit supervision relays:

f) Trip circuit shall be supervised by means of relays. The scheme shall
continuously monitor each trip coil in both pre-close and after-close of the
breaker. The scheme shall detect. I) Failure of DC supply to each trip coil.
ii) Open circuit of trip circuit wiring and iii) Failure of mechanism to
complete the tripping operation.

g) The relays shall have necessary contacts to be connected to either the alarm
bell or to the annunciator available in the control panel for visual and audible
indication of the failure of trip circuit and for connection to event logger. The
relay shall have time delay on drop off of not less than 200 milli seconds and
be provided with operation indications for each phase. Trip circuit supervision
relay shall be provided for each pole of breaker for each DC source.

h) Also 2 Nos. indicating lamps to act in conjunction with trip circuit supervision
relays for healthy trip indication of 2 sets of trip coils shall be supplied.

i) Necessary external resistors for trip circuit supervision relays shall be

supplied.

5.1.18 High speed tripping relay shall.

i) be instantaneous (operating time not to exceed 10 milli seconds)
ii) Be DC operated
iii) Have adequate hand resetting type contacts, preferably operated by push
button. The resetting time shall be with in 20 milli seconds for self resetting
relays.
iv) Have necessary supervisory relays
v) Be provided with operation indicators for each element/coil.
vi) Have adequate contacts to meet entire requirement of the scheme, with two
spare contacts.

5.1.19 Flag relays shall have

i) Hand reset flag indication

ii) Two elements
iii) Have necessary NO/NC contacts for each element/coil to meet scheme
requirements.

34
5.1.20 Voltage selection scheme for 132 kV circuits:

A suitable scheme shall be provided for each 132 kV circuit to select approximate bus
voltages for protection and metering purpose. The scheme shall use auxiliary contacts
of bus isolators and circuit breakers. It shall ensure that there is no interruption of
supply to the protection and metering circuits while change over is taking place.

5.1.21 Auxiliary Monitoring relays

a) Self reset auxiliary / monitoring voltages relays for specified D.C. voltage shall be
provided for use in the interlocking schemes for multiplication of contacts, and for
monitoring of control supplied and circuit. Monitoring relays for lockout relay circuit
shall be connected in series with lockout relay coils. The bidder shall be responsible
to ensure that the monitoring relay ratings are such that they shall positively pick-up
through the breaker coils / lockout relay coils monitored, but the breakers / lockout
relays shall not operate with such a connection.

b) The supply and circuit monitoring relay shall be connected to initiate an alarm
upon failure of respective supply circuit. They shall preferably have reverse flags,
which drop when the relay is de-energized. Otherwise, an indicating lamp shall be
provided with each monitoring relay for indication of its operation.

5.1.22 D.C. Supply Supervision Relay

The relay shall be capable of monitoring the failure of D.C. supply to which it is
connected. It shall have adequate potential free contacts to meet the scheme
requirement. The relay shall have a ‘time delay on drop-off’ of not less than 100
milliseconds and be provided with operation indicator / flag.

5.1.23 A. Non- directional Over Current relay for back up protection

i) be single pole type

ii) have IDMT characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at
10 times setting.
iii) Have a variable setting range of 50 -200% of rated current with adjustable
time multiplier settings.
iv) Have a characteristic angle of 45° ., directional controlled, low transient
over reach, high set instantaneous unit of continuously variable setting
range 500-2000% of rated current. Both the inverse and high set relays
shall be non-directional.
v) Include hand reset flag indicators per phase.
vi) Shall be electromechanical / static / numerical type.

B. Directional Over Current relay for back up protection (For transmission lines)

i) Be single pole type

ii) Have IDMT characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at
10 times setting.
iii) Have a variable setting range of 50 -200% of rated current with adjustable
time multiplier settings.

35
 iv) Have a characteristic angle of 45° ., directional controlled, low transient
over reach, high set instantaneous unit of continuously variable setting
range 500-2000% of rated current. Both the inverse and high set relays
shall be directional.
v) Include hand reset flag indicators per phase.
vi) Shall be electromechanical / static / numerical type.

5.1.24 A. Directional earth fault relay for back up protection (for lines and
transformers)

i.) be single pole type

ii.) have IDMT characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3.0
seconds at 10 times setting.
iii.) Have a variable setting range of 20-80% of rated current with
adjustable time multiplier settings

iv.) Have a characteristic angle of 45° ., directional controlled, low

transient over reach, high set instantaneous unit of continuously
variable setting range 200-800% of rated current. Both the inverse
and high set relays shall be directional

v.) Include hand reset flag indicators per phase.

vi.) Shall be electromechanical / static / numerical type

B. Non-Directional earth fault relay for back up protection

i.) be single pole type

ii.) have IDMT characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3.0
seconds at 10 times setting.
iii.) Have a variable setting range of 20-80% of rated current with
adjustable time multiplier settings

iv.) Have a characteristic angle of 45° ., directional controlled, low

transient over reach, high set instantaneous unit of continuously
variable setting range 200-800% of rated current. Both the inverse
and high set relays shall be non-directional

v.) Include hand reset flag indicators per phase.

vi.) Shall be electromechanical / static / numerical type

5.2 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF PROTECTIONS:

The protection, auxiliary relay and timers and other equipment that are required to be
provided are included in the detailed equipment schedule of panels vide Annexure-I
of this specification. The detailed description of each protection and the associated
equipment is described below:

The setting ranges of relays given in specification are indicative. The setting ranges of
the equipment offered, if different from the ones specified, shall also be acceptable if
they met the functional requirements.

36
 The bidder shall quote the protection equipment meeting the following requirements.

Separately the bidder may also quote for any additional protections or relays of their
own make considered necessary by him for providing complete, effective and reliable
protection. These equipment shall be quoted separately as an addition to the main
offer stating the price in the price schedule only. The choice of acceptance or
otherwise of this alternative/additional equipment shall rest with the PMC.

5.3 50 MVA 132/33 kV TRANSFORMER (Double winding Transformer)

a) Numerical Differential protection:
It shall be / shall have
i) triple pole high speed percentage biased differential type.

ii) an operating time not more than 30 milli secs. at 5 times operating current
setting of 20%.

iii) three instantaneous high set over current units

iv) second harmonic restraint feature and fifth harmonic by pass /restraint feature
and also be stable under normal over fluxing conditions

v) an operating current setting of 20% or less

vi) suitable for rated current of 1 Ampere

vii) adjustable bias setting range of 20% to 50%

viii) two bias windings per phase

ix) stable on heavy through faults

x) include necessary separate interposing CTs for angle and ratio correction or
have internal features in the relay to take care of angle and ratio correction.
xi) have second harmonic or other inrush proof features and also should be
stable under normal over fluxing conditions. Magnetising inrush proof
feature shall not be achieved through any intentional time delay e.g use of
timers to block relay operation or using disc operated relays

xii) shall have continuous self monitoring and diagnostic feature

b) Over fluxing relay protection (Numerical)

It shall be / shall have

i) Operate on the principle of voltage to frequency ratio

ii) Inverse time characteristics compatible to transformer over fluxing withstand

capability curve

37
 iii) Provide an independent alarm with the time delay continuously adjustable
between 0.1 to 60 seconds at a value of V/F adjustable between 100% to
130% of rated value.

iv) Tripping time shall be governed by V/F vs time characteristic of the relay

v) An accuracy of operating time better than +10%

vi) Resetting ratio of 98% or better

vii) Have a set of characteristics for various time multiplier settings. Maximum
operating time for the relay shall not exceed 3 and 1.5 seconds at V/F values
of 1.4 and 1.5 times rated value, respectively.

viii) For 132/33k V Transformer Protection Over fluxing relay shall be provided
only on HV side.

c) Restricted Earth Fault Protection (64):

i) be single pole type

ii) be of voltage operated high impedance type with a
suitable setting to cover at least 90% of winding.
iii) have a current setting range of 10-40% of 1Amp.
iv) be tuned to the system frequency.
v) have a suitable adjustable non-linear resistor to limit the peak
voltage to 1000 Volts.
vi) have alarm and trip output contacts.
vii) have a high speed operation of 10-20 ms to trip.

NOTE: Each 132/33KV (YN, Yn O) Power transformer is provided

with identical current transformers for R.E.F. protection in the following manner.

i) 3 Nos. on H.V. bushing (one no. per phase)

ii) 3 Nos. on L.V. bushing (one no. per phase)
ii) 1 No. on neutral bushing.
d) Backup over current and earth fault protection on 132 kV side of 50 MVA
transformer of numeric type (as per clause 5.1.23 A and clause 5.1.24 A).

Triple pole non-directional IDMT over current relay with instantaneous high set unit
shall be provided for backup over current protection on the HV side. The high set
instantaneous units shall have suitable settings. For faults on the HV side involving
heavy fault currents the high set units shall clear the faults instantaneously.
Directional IDMT E/F relay with high set instantaneous unit with suitable settings
shall be provided for backup protection on the HV side.

e) Backup over current protection and earth fault protection of 33 kV side of

50MVA Transformer of numeric type:

Triple pole non-directional IDMT over current relay (5.1.23 A) with instantaneous
high set and single pole N/D IDMT E/F relay with H/S (5.1.24 B) shall be provided
for backup over current protection on the LV side of the transformer. Separate high
speed trip relay shall be provided for LV protection.

38
 There shall be high speed master trip hand reset lockout relay which shall receive
inputs from all transformer protections and send the command to the trip coil of the
circuit breaker directly.

f) Auxiliary relays for transformer protection devices:

Auxiliary relays required for bucholtz trip, tap changer bucholtz trip, HV winding
temperature trip, LV winding temperature trip, oil temperature trip and low oil level
trip PRV trip shall be provided. Each auxiliary relay shall have 2 pairs of contacts and
one hand reset flag indicators. The auxiliary relays may be of non-draw out type.

g) Inter tripping relays:

1 No. inter-trip relay to trip HV and LV breakers of the transformer and to isolate the
transformer from supply shall be supplied. The inter trip relay shall be of high speed
and shall be provided with hand reset operation indicator and 4 N/O + 2 N/C hand
reset contacts for 132 kV breaker.

h) Numerical Under Frequency Relay Scheme with df/dt feature.

i) Under frequency relay scheme shall consist of one number under frequency
relay, one number timer relay and one number trip relay with 6 N/O contacts
of hand reset type.

ii) Under frequency relay shall be suitable for operation with 110 V bus P.T.
Secondary rating between phases and 220 V DC supply. The relay shall have
continuously adjustable setting range of 47 to 50 HZ with an accuracy 0.1 to
10Hz per second in steps of 0.1 Hz per second. The relay shall not mal
operate due to any abrupt change in supply voltage from P.T. secondary.

iii) Each frequency relay shall have 4 N/O contacts. One for alarm and other for
energizing the timer relay.

iv) The timer relay shall have timing range of 0.1 to 0.5 seconds adjustable in
steps of 0.05 secs. The timer relay shall have 4 N/O contacts. One N/O
contact will be utilized to energize the trip relay. The other 3 N/O contacts
will be utilized for tripping 3 Nos. 33 kV feeders directly.

v) The trip shall have hand reset type 6 N/O and 6 N /C. contacts for tripping
6 Nos feeders.

i) Flag relays as per clause 5.1.19 shall be provided.

5.4 132 kV BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEMES.

A. 132/33 kV SS Recreation Green:
Bus bar arrangement 132kV - Double main and transfer bus
33 kV - Single bus

39
132kV BUS BAR PROTECTION SCHEME:

a) Three zone numeric or static type bus bar protection scheme is required for 132kV
Bus protection, at Recreation Green Sub-Station where the bus bar arrangement on
the 132kV switchyard is of double main and transfer bus. The bus bar protection
shall cater to 8 nos 132 kV circuits including 3 nos. transformers (1 existing and 2
future) 1 no. Bus coupler, 1 no. transfer bus coupler and 3nos. feeders including 1
no future 132 kV feeder. Drawing showing single line diagrams of 132kV Sub-
Station is enclosed to the tender documents. The bus bar layout arrangement is
such that any in coming or outgoing circuits (from transformers a feeder circuits
respectively) can be connected to either Bus-I or Bus-II by means of Bus-I or Bus-
II isolator connected in each circuit in normal operation. In case of any line clear
on the dedicated circuit breaker of the circuit (line or transformer) then the circuit
can be transferred on to the transfer bus through transfer bus isolator. Transfer bus
can be connected to Main-I bus or Main-II bus through isolator selection.

b) All the equipment like individual tripping relays and CTs required shall be supplied
for 132kV bus bar protection panels. Each trip relay shall have necessary NO/NC
contacts as required for the scheme.

c) The CT ratios contemplated for the 132kV Sub-Stations are indicated in the technical
specification. The bus bar protection schemes shall be suitable for operation with
these main CTs. The over all CT ratio for busbar protection may be 800/1.

However 5 sets of auxiliary CTs shall be included in bus par protection scheme to
take care of any mis-match in the main CT ratios. The price for the bus protection
schemes shall be quoted by the bidder, shall be include the cost of these auxiliary
CTs, in the cost of the panel . The number of auxiliary CTs required for each circuit
shall be indicated. The unit price for 5 Nos. auxiliary CTs required for one circuit
shall be quoted separately for addition//deletion purpose.

The bidder shall specifically confirm whether auxiliary CTs are required or not for
the bus protection schemes quoted by them.

d) The bus bar protection shall not impose stringent requirements on main CTs
regarding burden, knee point voltage and accuracy.

e) Two cores of accuracy class PS are available for bus bar protection in CTs including
bus coupler CTs. CTs are provided on either side of bus coupler breakers. Two cores
of accuracy class PS of a dedicated CT are available for transfer bus breaker in case
of any bus fault on the transfer bus.

f) The bus bar protection shall have facilities for modification and extension when new
circuits are added at a later date over and above the future circuits (3 Nos.) indicated
in the single line diagram..

g) Busbar protection shall be biased differential type and have operate and restraint
features. It shall not be affected by CT saturation’s in case of internal faults. The
scheme shall be provided with suitable means so as to remain insensitive for CT
saturation during external faults. Necessary CT selection auxiliary relays to ensure
that the bus bar protection CT cores are connected to the appropriate zone CT bus

40
 wires shall be supplied. The CT selection shall be carried out through electrically
reset relays which shall be so arranged that the secondary circuits are made before
and broken after the primary circuits.

These relays, as required for all outgoing circuits for Sub-Station with “Double main
and transfer bus”, shall be supplied. CT selection relays shall be housed inside related
relay panels inside the control room only.

h) Bus bar protection shall have the following features.

1) Be of numeric or static type and modular construction.

2) Have maximum operating time upto trip impulse to trip relay for all types of
faults of 15 milli seconds at 5 time setting value.

3) Triple pole type.

4) Individual, independent zone protection relay for each bus including transfer
bus. Include check feature by means of in built relay or by a separate check
zone relay for overall zones.

5) Detect both phase and earth faults.

6) Sensitive for internal faults and highly stable for external faults with currents
up to the short circuit rating of the Switchgear, CT saturation, permissible CT
errors, normal load flows, and growing fault level.

7) Shall operate selectively for each zone of bus faults and trip the minimum
number of circuits, but shall ensure isolation of fault completely and reliably.

8) The bus bar protection shall give clear zone indication and give visual and
audible alarm.

9) The protection scheme shall include continuous supervision for each zone
over the various CT secondary pilot wires, so that in the event of open circuit,
short circuit and crossed bus wires in the pilots, the relevant zone of
protection shall be shorted and appropriate alarm initiated. The supervision
shall not give false alarms due to normal load flows in the bus bars. The CT
secondary circuit shall have sensitivity to detect the open circuiting of CT
secondary of the least loaded circuit.

10) The bus bar protection scheme shall include continuous supervision of DC
auxiliary supply and shall raise necessary visual indication and shall raise
alarm for DC fail.

11) Individual tripping relays for each breaker shall be provided.

12) Bus bar protection OUT and IN switches with protective cover or removable
handle for each zone with indicating lamps for bus bar protection in/bus bar
protection out indications shall be supplied.

41
 13) 12-way Annunciation for the bus bar protection scheme shall be wired up to
the facia windows provided on common annunciation panel for 132kV
circuits.

14) DC fail alarm and indication scheme shall be supplied for each bus bar
protection panel.

15) Give 100% security the detailed description of bus bar protection schemes
offered shall be given and necessary descriptive literature shall be enclosed.

16) Shall have sufficient contacts on trip relay to provide for energising two trip
coils of the breaker through the two separate DC sources.

17) The bidder shall high-light all salient points of their offer and the deviations,
if any from technical specification and furnishes detailed comments on
deviations from specification.

18) The scheme shall include zone selection relays for CT switching. It shall be
suitable for adding or deleting any feeder.

19) During live changeover operation of a circuit from any of the bus bar, the bus
fault relay should not operate due to mismatch of CT currents corresponding
to the load current of the circuit. The bidder shall explain his method for
achieving this.

20) However, if a bus fault occurs during the changeover operation, then the
scheme shall operate to clear the fault. In case of a transfer to transfer bus trip
both the breakers, i.e. the breaker being by-passed and the transfer breaker if
the bus fault occurs during the changeover operation.

21) Transient free in operation.

22) The bus bar protection schemes required shall be in accordance with
specification. The equipment for bus protection panels specified in the bill of
materials is only indicative. Bidder shall quote all equipment required as per
specification and as per the manufacturing practice. The bidder shall furnish
detailed equipment schedule for the mounted equipment on the bus bar
protection panels.

23) The bidder may quote any additional relays considered necessary by them for
providing complete reliable and effective bus protection scheme.

B. 132 /33 kV SS at Village Gharbara

Bus bar arrangement 132 kV - Double bus arrangement with single

breaker
33 kV - Single bus

42
 132kV BUS BAR PROTECTION SCHEME

a) Two zone numeric type bus bar protection scheme is required for 132kV bus bar
protection for double bus substations (without by pass breaker features with one bus
coupler. The bus protection shall cater to 8 Nos. 132 kV circuits (1No.50 MVA
transformer feeder, 2 nos. 132 kV incoming feeder and 1 No. bus coupler besides 2
No. line feeders and two transformer feeders likely to come in future). The layout
arrangement of “Double bus” substations is such that any outgoing circuit can be
connected to either bus I or bus II by means of bus I or bus II isolator for each
outgoing circuit.

b) All the equipment like individual tripping relays for all circuits (including bus
coupler) and CT Zone switching relays and auxiliary CTs for outgoing circuits shall
be supplied for two zone bus bar protection panels. Each trip relay shall have
necessary N/O and N/C contacts as required.

c) The CT ratios contemplated for 132kV substations are indicated in cluase-4 of the
technical specification. The bus bar protection schemes shall also be suitable for
operation with main CTs having unequal magnetizing characteristics and unequal
secondary resistance and unequal ratios

The main CT have identical turns ratio of 800/1. However 5 sets of auxiliary CTs
shall be included in the bus protection scheme to take care of mismatch of main CT
ratios.

The bidder shall specifically confirm whether auxiliary CTs are required or not for
the bus protection schemes quoted by them.

d) The bus bar protection shall not impose stringent requirements on main CTs
regarding burden, knee point voltage and accuracy.

e) Two cores of accuracy class PS are available for bus bar protection in CTs including
bus coupler CTs. CTs are provided on either side of bus coupler breakers.

f) The bus bar protection shall have facilities for modification and extension when new
circuits are added at a later dated (over and above the 4 nos future. circuits i.e., two
for future incoming feeders and another two for future transformers, in that double
bus substation)
g) Bus bar protection shall be based on circulating current principle and shall not be
affected by CT saturation in case of internal faults. The schemes shall be provided
with suitable means so as to remain in sensitive for CT saturation during external
faults. Necessary CT selection auxiliary relays to ensure that the bus bar protection
CT cores are connected to the appropriate zone CT bus wires shall be supplied. The
CT selection shall be carried out through electrically resent relays which shall be so
arranged that the secondary circuits are made before and broken after the primary
circuits. These relays as required for all outgoing circuits for this double bus
substation with a bus coupler, shall be supplied. CT selection relays shall be housed
inside related relay panels inside the control room only.
h) Bus bar protection shall have the following features.
1) Numeric, fast acting with operating time of less than 1 cycle.
2) Triple pole type.
3) Individual independent zone protection relay for each bus of the two zones.

43
4) Each zone of bus bar protection with a check feature operating on different
principle or independent, additional check features common to all zones.
5) Detect both phase and earth faults.
6) Sensitive for internal faults and stable for external faults with currents upto
the short circuit rating of the switch gear, CT saturation, permissible CT
errors, normal load flow, and growing fault level.
7) Shall operate selectively for each zone of bus faults and trip the minimum
number of circuits, but shall ensure isolation of fault completely and reliably.
8) The bus bar protection shall give clear zone indication and give visual and
audible alarm. Necessary alarm and annunciation scheme shall be quote.
9) The protection scheme shall include continuous supervision for each zone
over the various CT secondary pilot wires, so that in the event of open circuit,
short circuit and crossed bus wires in the pilots, the relevant zone of
protection shall be shorted and appropriate alarm initiated. The supervision
shall not give false alarms due to normal load flows in the bus bars. The CT
secondary circuit shall have sensitivity to detect open circuit of CT secondary
of the least loaded circuit.
10) The bus bar protection scheme shall include continuous supervision of DC
auxiliary supply and shall give necessary visual indication and alarm for DC
fail.
11) The scheme shall include built in automatic test facility. This shall be
confirmed in the tender.
12) Individual tripping relays for each breaker shall be provided.
13) Bus bar protection OUT and IN switches for each zone will indicating lamps
for bus bar protection in/bus bar protection out indications shall be supplied.
14) 12-way Annunciation for the bus bar protection scheme shall be wired up to
the facia windows provided on common annunciation panel for 132kV
circuits.
15) DC fail alarm and indication scheme shall be supplied for each bus bar
protection panel.
16) The detailed description of bus bar protection schemes offered shall be given
and necessary descriptive literature shall be enclosed.
17) The bidder shall high-light all salient points of their offer and the deviations,
if any from technical specification and furnish detailed comments on
deviations from specification.
18) The bus bar protection schemes required for panel shall be in accordance with
specification.
19) Shall have sufficient contacts on trip relay to provide for energising two trip
coils of the breaker through the two separate DC sources.
20) The scheme shall include zone selection relays for CT switching. It shall be
suitable for adding or deleting any feeder.
21) During live changeover operation of a circuit from any of the bus bar, the bus
fault relay should not operate due to mismatch of CT currents corresponding
to the load current of the circuit. The bidder shall explain his method for
achieving this.
22) However, if a bus fault occurs during the changeover operation, then the
scheme shall operate to clear the fault. In case of a transfer to transfer bus trip
both the breakers, i.e. the breaker being by-passed and the transfer breaker if
the bus fault occurs during the changeover operation.
23) Transient free in operation.
24) The bidder may quote any additional relays considered necessary by them for
providing complete reliable and effective bus protection scheme.

44
5.5. 132 kV Bus coupler breaker protection :

Both the substations have a bus coupler with CTs on either side of the respective breakers.

The following protection schemes are required for Bus Coupler breaker panels.

a) Triple pole, non-directional IDMT over-current relays and single pole non-
directional IDMT earth fault relay shall be supplied for Bus Section breaker
protection.

Setting required:
O/C relay range 0.5 to 2 amps
E/L relay range 0.2 to 0.8 amps.

5.6 132kV TRANSFER BUS PROTECTION :

Transfer bus facility is available at 132 /33 kV Recreation Green SS on 132 kV side.
Transfer bus will have a CVT connected either in R or Y phase for synchronisation
purposes. Transfer bus will have a breaker with a dedicated CT for catering to bus
bar protection when any circuit is transferred on to the same. The CT will also have
one core for METERING for Ammeter connection. However the transfer bus breaker
will not have any dedicated CT cores for the protection of the transferred feeder and
hence protection scheme of the transferred circuit itself shall be utilized for tripping
the transfer bus breaker in the event of any fault. Necessary relays and trip transfer
and other switches shall be provided to transfer the tripping impulse of the circuit
protection from the original breaker to the transfer bus breaker.

5.6.1 Trip Transfer Switch :

The trip transfer scheme shall employ a two position (NT) i..e. Normal/Transfer,
switch in the following manner :-

a) the protection tripping of own breaker shall not be routed through the trip
transfer Switch and shall remain connected to the own breaker irrespective of
the trip transfer switch position.

b) the protection trip shall get connected to the transfer breaker when trip
transfer switch is taken to ‘T’ (Transfer) position.

5.6.1 Suitable manual scheme should be offered with necessary interlocks to carry out
operation of concerned breakers and isolators in such a sequence that at no time the
supply to the circuit proposed to be transferred is affected.

5.7 132 kV Line Protection :

General
• The line protection relays are required to protect the line and clear the faults
on line within shortest possible time with reliability, selectivity and full
sensitivity to all type of faults on lines. The general concept is to have two

45
 main protections having equal performance requirement
especially in respect of time as called Main and back up protection for 132
KV transmission lines.
• The maximum fault current could be as high as 31.5 kA but the minimum
fault current could be as low as 20% of rated current of CT secondary. The
starting & measuring relays characteristics should be satisfactory under
these extremely varying conditions.
• The protective relays shall be suitable for use with capacitor voltage
transformers having non-electronic damping and transient response as per
IEC.
• Disturbance recorder and Distance to fault Locator functions if offered as
an integral part of line protection relay shall be acceptable provided these
meet the technical requirements as specified in the respective clauses.
• There shall be a facility for the addition of 3 phase auto re-closing feature
to the Main protection at a later date, if required.

5.7.1 The detailed description for the Main and back up protection for 132 kV feeder is
given here under

a) The Main distance protection shall be/shall have

i) Numeric type protection

ii) The basic scheme (without considering carrier protection scheme) shall have a
Zone-I operating time up to trip impulse to breaker (complete protection time
including the trip relay operating time) not more than 40 milli seconds

iii) Include power swing blocking protection which shall

a) be of triple pole type

b) have suitable setting range to encircle the distance protection

described above

c) have a continuously adjustable time delay on pick up of setting range

0-2 seconds

d) block tripping during power swing conditions

iv) include fuse failure protection which shall

a) Monitor all the three fuses of CVT and PT and associated cable
against open circuit

b) inhibit trip circuits on operation and initiate annunciation

c) have an operating time less than 7 milli seconds

d) remain inoperative for system earth faults.

46
 v) Operate instantaneously when circuit breaker is closed to Zero-volt 3 phase
fault

vi) be suitable for three phase tripping.

vii) have a continuous current rating of two times rated current. The voltage
circuit shall be capable of operation at 1.2 times rated voltage. The relay shall
also be capable of carrying a high short time current of 70 times rated current
without damage during a period of 1 sec.

viii) be selective between internal and external faults

ix) protect 100% of the line section

x) suitable shaped characteristic to prevent relay operation during maximum

load conditions without reducing the reach of relays

xi) fourth zone back up timer with independent timing range of 0.5 to 5 seconds.
The fourth zone setting shall have the facility to set for directional or non-
directional operation

xii) operate on carrier inter trip feature

xiii) be provided with necessary high speed relays for single phase faults and
multiphase faults. Each of these shall have adequate contacts to meet the
complete scheme requirement.
xiv) Have high speed non switched distance relays for 3 phase system to clear all
types of line faults within the set reach of the relay. Have 6 nos. non switched
measuring elements for each zone of protection (3 for phase to phase fault and
3 for phase to earth faults).

xv) Disturbance recorder shall be provided with all the features as per clause
5.1.10 d of this chapter.

xiv) Distance to fault locator shall be provided with all the features as per
clause 5.1.10 e of this chapter.

xv) Necessary provision shall be made to add 3 phase auto-reclosing feature

separately to be acquired at a later date if necessary.

xvi) be provided with voltage selection relay for the selection of Bus I PT / Bus –II
PT as per clause 5.1.20.

b) The back up protection shall consist of the following simple numerical relays
separately.

i) 3 Nos. IDMT directional over current relays with high set as per clause
5.1.23.B.

ii) 1 No. IDMT directional earth fault relay with high set as per clause 5.1.24.

47
5.7.2 A. 33 kV feeder: Scheme for protection of 33 kV line feeder. Indoor type twin feeder
control panel shall cater to independent 33 kV feeders and shall be provided with
equipment as per Panel – K 1 and K 2 – of the Annexure-I. The relays shall be of
numerical type.

B. 33 kV Bus sectionalizer breaker protection:

a) Both the substations have a bus sectionalizer in there 33 kV main bus

arrangement (single main arrangement), with CTs on either side of the respective
breakers.

b) The following protection schemes are required for Bus sectionalizer breaker
panels.

Triple pole, non-directional IDMT over-current relays and single pole non-
directional IDMT earth fault relay shall be supplied for Bus sectionalizer
breaker protection.
Setting required:
O/C relay range 0.5 to 2 amps
E/L relay range 0.2 to 0.8 amps.

5.7.3 CAPACITOR BANKS

The detailed protection requirements of capacitor banks are given in the technical
specification. i.e. chapter –XV, section IX of this volume.Salient features are given
below. The equipment required to be provided is detailed in Panel K 2 of Annexure.1
(a twin panel to cater to 1no. 33 kV feeder and other feeding capacitor bank). In
addition the bidder shall provide any other relay, protection, or equipment required
for the safe and efficient operation of capacitor banks. The costs of all such items are
deemed to have been included in the cost quoted for the panel K 2.

(a) The bidder shall offer one control panel for each capacitor bank provided in
one33 KV bay of 132/33 KV substations Control and relay panel for the
relevant 33 kV bay shall be a part of 33 Twin feeder panels as covered under
this specification.

(ii)Window type (Twelve No. windows) annunciation scheme should be provided for
the following fault indication along with the alarms and flickering LED bus for each
capacitor bank:

- OVER VOLTAGE
- D.C. supply failure
- Capacitor neutral displacement high
- Breaker tripped.
- Power factor leading .
- UNDER VOLTAGE
- Balance spare windows
- Over current
. - Earth fault

48
(iii)Provision shall be made for remote electrical closing/tripping the circuit breaker controlling
capacitor banks. Provision for lamp test of all the windows by a single push button may
be provided.

(iv) INSTRUMENTS (covered under technical specification and price schedule of

Control and Relay panels) :

- A.C. ammeter with 5 position selector switch.

-A.C. voltmeter with 6 position selector switch.
MVAR meter.
Power factor meter.
All the meters will be digital type.
Name plate for easy identification with Specification Number, MVAR capacity etc.

(v) PROTECTION AND INTERLOCKS :

a) Over current in all three phases and earth fault :- IDMT Triple pole non directional
over current relay (1 No.) and single pole non-directional high set instantaneous earth
fault relay.

b) Over voltage relay: An over voltage relay shall be provided to ensure isolation of the
bank whenever system voltage exceeds 110% of capacitor rated voltage or
permissible maximum capacitor voltage. The settings of over voltage relay shall be
110 to 130%. The relay should operate with time delay through a timer of suitable
range to take care of switching surges.

c) Alarm to indicate failure of capacitor unit resulting in nearly 10% over-voltage in

other parallel capacitors in the Bank.

d) Under voltage protection relay: Once supply fails, the capacitor Bank should trip and
should not be recharged till it is discharged to safe residual voltage value of 50 volts
or less. To ensure this an under voltage relay of setting 60 to 90% is to be provided.
A timer is to be provided to block re-close of the breaker for five minutes to prevent
SWITCHING ON capacitor bank before capacitors are discharged to a residual
voltage of 50 V.

e) Master tripping relay with Hand Reset for electrical tripping with adequate number of
NO/NC contacts.
f) Power factor measurement and alarum for leading power factor operation.
g) Trip circuit supervision Scheme.

h) For the disconnection of capacitor from service, if the unbalance current is more than
10%, a neutral unbalance current operated relay shall be provided with a timer to
have time delay short enough to minimize the damage due to arcing type fault within
the bank structure and yet long enough to avoid false operation due to inrush ground-
faults on the lines, lightning, switching off nearby equipment or non-simultaneous
pole operation of the energizing switch. The capacitor are connected in double star
formation with neutrals interconnected through a neutral CT with a ratio of 10-5A/
1-1A. A current imbalance relay to suit 1A rated secondary of CT with a rage of 10
to 40% is to be provided to trip the Capacitor Bank in the event of failure of specified

49
 numbers of capacitor units or imbalance current is more than 10%. The timer shall
have range of 0.1 to 1 second with 3 contacts for alarm and trip in stages (with a
spare contact).
i) Automatic voltage relay to switch–in and switch–off the capacitor banks
automatically at pre-set voltages for 33 KV Capacitor bank.

j) Any other protection relays suitable for satisfactory operation of capacitor bank shall
also be included and specified in the offer with details.
5.7.4 LT AC panels required for supplying AC power to C&R panels is covered separately
under Technical Specification for AC.

6.0 I. TESTS:

The contractor shall carryout routine tests on all associated equipment as per relevant
Indian Standards/IEC Standards free of cost to the PMC /Owner. The bidder shall
submit along with the bid type test reports for protective relays, instruments and
panels, switches and other devices of the type and class being offered to asses the
suitability of the equipment. Type tests must have been conducted not earlier than
January 2001. The bids received without type test reports will be treated as non-
responsive. In case, the type test reports pertain to a period earlier than 5 years, the
contractor, on award of contract shall carry out the type tests free of cost in the
presence of the PMC’s representative.

Cost of type tests charges, as requested for, shall be quoted. These shall be applicable
in cases where the bidder has submitted necessary type test reports (test reports of
dates not earlier than January 2001) along with the bid, never the less the PMC wants
to repeat some of them. The quoted type test charges will be considered for
evaluation. Please refer to clause 44 , chapter -I GTC of section –IX of volume (III).

A. Type Tests

The reports for following type tests shall be submitted by the bidder for the
Protective relays, Fault locator.

c) Insulation tests as per IEC 60255-5

d) High frequency disturbance test as per IEC 60255-4 (Appendix -E) -Class III
(not applicable for electromechanical relays)
e) Fast transient test as per IEC 1000-4, Level III(not applicable for
electromechanical relays)
f) Relay characteristics, performance and accuracy test as per IEC 60255.
• Steady state Characteristics and operating time
• Dynamic Characteristics and operating time for distance protection
relays and current differential protection relays
g) Tests for thermal and mechanical requirements as per IEC 60255-6
h) Tests for rated burden as per IEC 60255-6
i) Contact performance test as per IEC 60255-0-20 (not applicable for Event
logger, Distance to fault locator and Disturbance recorder)

50
 B. Control and relay panels shall be subjected to the following tests:

a) Mechanical operation tests

b) Verification of degree of protection as per IS:13947- Part-1

c) High voltage test (2 kV for 1 minute) or as per relevant IS.

d) Insulation resistance test

e) Electrical control, interlock and sequential operation test

f) Verification of wiring and general arrangement as per approved

schematic/G.A. diagrams.

II. SUPERVISION OF COMMISSIONING CHARGES:

It is obligatory on the part of the contractor to make available services of their testing
and commissioning engineers (with necessary testing equipment) to assist the Owner
/ PMC in commissioning their equipment as and when their services are
requisitioned.

The bidder shall quote unit rates and lumpsum amount for supervision of
commissioning charges which shall remain firm for any reason , even that not
attributable to the contractor. The same will be considered for evaluation.

7.0 INSPECTION:

7.1 i) All routine tests shall be conducted at the time of inspection and inspection
shall be made at the place of manufacturers unless otherwise specifically
agreed upon by the bidder and Owner at the time of award of contract. The
manufacturer shall offer the PMC representing the Owner all reasonable
facilities without charges to satisfy him that the panels/materials are
manufacturers/supplied as per the specification/final approved drawings.

ii) The contractor shall give 15 days advance intimation, to enable the PMC to
depute his representative for witnessing acceptance and routine tests.

iii) The panels shall be manufactured and offered for inspection as per the final
approved General Arrangement Drawing and schematic drawing which will
be binding both on contractor and PMC.

iv) The panels shall not be despatched from its point of manufacture unless the
same are satisfactorily inspected and tested.

v) The acceptance of any material shall in no way relieve the contractor of his
responsibility for meeting all the requirements of the specification and shall
not prevent subsequent rejection of such material later found to be defective.

51
8.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN: Refer to relevant clause of GTC, Section IX of this
volume (III)

9.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

The guaranteed technical particulars of the equipment offered shall be furnished by

the contractor in the format enclosed.

10.0 DOCUMENTATION:

10.1 The bidder shall furnish the dimensioned drawings along with the bid indicating the
details like components, make, quantity, ranges of meters, relays etc., in case the
bidder quotes different makes of relays he shall furnish copies of wiring scheme and
literature of all relays and sets of drawings and manuals shall be supplied along with
each panel. For further details on drawings and documentation please refer to clause
4 and 5 of GTC chapter-I section IX of this volume

11.0 PACKING AND FORWARDING: Refer Clause- 45 of GTC (Chapter-1)

Section- IX of volume-III
11.1 The panels shall be packed in suitable sized strong and weather resistant wooden
cases / crates.

11.2 Suitable cushioning, protective padding or spacer shall be provided to prevent

damage to or deformation of the components during transit and handling.

11.3 All packing cases shall be marked legibly and correctly with the contractors name and
consignee's address so as to ensure their safe arrival at their destination and to avoid
possibility of goods being lost or wrongly dispatched on account of faulty or illegible
marking.

11.4 For further details refer to clause no 45 of GTC Chapter-I section –IX of this volume

12.0 COORDINATION:

12.1 132 kV lines are being erected under separate contract with single zebra ACSR.
Details of Line configuration and other characteristics including communication
facility will be furnished to the successful contractor of this package, so that scheme
of protection can be coordinated.

Any matching current transformers required may be provided and the scheme of
protection made reliable in operation. The Secondary ratings of current transformers
are of 1A/5 Amps. and potential transformers' secondary voltages are:110 V / 1.732
and 110 V.

12.2 The contractor shall also prepare and supply the coordination wiring diagrams
between the control and relay panels and control switch gear as part of this contract.

12.3 The contractor shall coordinate in all respects with the manufacturers of associated
equipment and shall freely exchange all relevant information to ensure satisfactory
and economic over all design. No extra charge shall be payable for these services.

52
12.4 The contractor shall furnish full detailed instructions, complete with drawings and
leaflets to enable satisfactory erection and commissioning of the plant. Such
instructions should reach the PMC sufficiently in advance of the receipt of the
equipment in order that all the preliminary arrangement for the erection of the
equipment can be made in advance so that there will be no delay in regard to erection
as soon as the equipment is received.

13.0 TROPICAL TREATMENT:

13.1 Under the climatic conditions prevalent at the site, the equipment furnished under the
specification will be subjected to operation under ambient temperatures of 50 deg. C
and very high relative humidity. All equipment shall therefore, be suitably designed
and treated for normal life and satisfactory operation under the hot and humid
climatic conditions prevalent at site and shall be dust and vermin proof. All parts and
surfaces which are subject to corrosion shall be made of such material and shall be
provided with such protective finishes as would protect the equipment installed from
any injurious effects of excessive humidity. All electrical auxiliary equipment shall be
specifically treated for tropical conditions, and the materials and methods for this
treatment shall be approved in advance by the PMC.

14.0 FOUNDATIONS AND FIXTURES:

Foundations will be finalised, in accordance with the data to be supplied by the
contractor. All fixtures necessary for proper erection of the embedded parts shall be
supplied by the contractor.

15.0 SPARES:
The bidder shall quote for the spare parts as indicated in Annexure-II. The bidder
shall quote for individual items as indicated in Annexure-III for the purpose of
addition / deletion. The rates given in Annexure-II for individual items will be
considered for evaluation.

16.0 TESTING INSTRUMENTS:

16.1 A list of all instruments, equipments and meters required for testing and
commissioning of CR Panels specified other than those specified in Clause No.16.2
of this Section shall be submitted as enclosures to the tender. The prices of
individual items shall be given along with the details of each equipment and
instrument. This will not be considered for evaluation. However PMC reserves the
right to order for the items and quantities at his discretion at the rates quoted in the
bid.

16.2 Relay Test Kit:

Relay test kit for 132 / 33 kV Sub-Station covered under the specification, comprising
of the equipment as detailed hereunder shall be supplied by the Contractor as a part of
the main offer.

a. Relay tools kits. - 1 set.

b. 1 set Relay test kit. It shall have following features:

53
 i) Test kit / kits necessary to test all types of distance, over current,
transformer, relays of line and bus bar protection of major
manufacturers as being offered in manual mode.

ii) It shall include all the accessories required for making the complete
test set up.

iii) It shall have three phase current output range 0-50 Amps. (rms) and
three phase voltage range 0-110 voltage (Ph-P)/ or single phase output
of adequate current and voltage ratings.

iv) It shall work on single phase 240V, 50 Hz + 10% variation / or 3

phase 415 V 50 Hz ± 10% variation.

v) It shall be able to carry out the testing at power frequencies between

45-55 Hz.

vii) The accuracy of relay test kit shall be as follows:

1% on voltage and current output and resolution of time measurement

of 1 ms or better.

viii)
a. 1 No. phase sequence indicator.

b. Test plugs for use with testing equipment.

c. Special type test plugs/test cards for using with numeric

distance schemes quoted as Main I.

17.0 TOOLS & SCIENTIFIC INSTRUMENTS:

A list of all Tools and scientific instruments required under this specification are
given in Annexure-V of this volume. The substations for which these tools and
instruments are to be supplied are also indicated in Annexure-V. The quantities
indicated are tentative and are liable to change. The unit prices quoted by
contractor shall be valid for any variation. Exact quantities would be indicated at
the time of placement of order. Bids would, however, be evaluated based on
tentative quantities given in Annexure-V.

The contractor shall quote for all the equipment called for under Tools and Scientific
Instruments. The contractor may quote for the items, which are not manufactured by
him as an authorized agent. Further he shall submit in all such cases a manufacturer's
authorization. The contractor shall specifically indicate the make and type, name of
the manufacturer, guaranteed technical details for all the items. If price for any item is
not quoted, the highest amount quoted for that item among others bids will be
considered purely for the purpose of evaluation. However for the purpose of supply
/order it will be construed that the item is being offered free of cost.

54
17.1 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY:

The equipment shall be suitable for use on the following AC/DC supplies and as
noted in the specification.

a) AC Supply:-

i) 1 Phase 240V + or - 10% voltage variation

ii) 3 Phase 415V + or - 10% voltage variation

iii) Frequency 50Hz + or - 3% frequency variation.

b) DC Supply:-
220 Volts Voltage variation -15% to + 10%

17.2 50 k- Ohms EARTH TESTER

1. The Earth tester should be battery powered. It is to measure earth resistance,

earth continuity and to determine soil resistivity.

2. It should have the following features.

Measuring Resistance 0 - 20 ohms in steps of 0.01 ohms

Range to be selected by

a rotary switch 0 - 200 ohms in steps of 0.01 ohms

completed with an
off position 0 - 2 K ohms in steps of 1 ohms

0 - 20 K ohms

Accuracy 2% of reading or +/- 2 decimals.

Test Current 10 mA A.C. RMS on 20 ohms range

1 mA A.C. RMS on 200 ohms range
0.1 mA A.C. RMS on 2 K ohms range
0.01 mA A.C. RMS on 20 K ohms range

i) Ambient temperature Less than 5% of indicated value at the

influence central scale mark for temperature
change by 5 deg. C to 50 deg. C.

ii) External magnetic No noticeable change in 400 A/M field

field influence influence

iii) Insulation The insulation resistance between the

resistance electrical circuit and the body of the
instrument shall be more than 50 mega
ohms.

55
 It should have maximum current/voltage spike resistance upto 50 K-ohms on
2 K-ohms range. The tester should have a capability to withstand upto 3 KV for 1
minute.

It should employ 4 terminal measurement method and should be free from all high
levels of interfering stray voltages high ground current or high value auxiliary plate
resistance. For safety the maximum test volt shall be limited to 50 V.

The display should be LED type, Batteries should be rechargeable type. The
battery shall have battery check feature with automatic switch off. A suitable charger
shall also be provided. All the necessary leads should be provided. Weight should not
exceed 0.5 Kg.

No hold down button shall be provided and accurate readings shall be displayed on digital
display. The display shall also indicate.

- If the current test spike resistance is too high.

- If the potential test spike resistance is too high.
- If the battery power is too low.

Each instrument shall be housed in a robust weather proof case complete with test spikes,
insulated cables on reels, connectors and suitable carrying case.

17.3 INSULATION TESTER (5 kV)

1 The insulation tester is to measure insulation resistance of motors,

generators, transformers, switchgear, insulators, cables, etc. It should be
portable, rugged and battery operated. The equipment shall be suitable for
motor operation. The motor shall be suitable to run on 240 V, 1 Ph., 50 Hz
AC supply.
2 The voltage ranges available shall be 500V, 1 kV, 2.5 kV and 5 kV. The
ranges shall be clearly indicated and without multiplying factor. It should
have insulation resistance range of 100 K ohm to 100 Gega ohms. The
instrument shall have an accuracy of + or - 2% or better and be free from
induction effects.

It shall be suitable for ambient temperature 5-50 deg. C.

There shall be provision for infinity adjustment.
3 A built in charger should be provided along with battery check feature.
Battery life should be 7 hrs. minimum. All protection facilities to protect
both equipment and personnel should be incorporated. An automatic
discharge feature after completion of the test shall be provided with
indication of discharging voltage.
4 It should be packaged in a rugged and waterproof case. All necessary
accessories shall be provided.
5 The construction shall be robust to withstand vibrations at site.
Lock down test button shall be provided.
6 The tester shall generally comply with the requirements IS:2992/1987
and IS:11994/1986.

56
17.4 DIGITAL MULTIMETERS

1 The Contractor shall supply digital multimeters with auto ranging features complete
with carrying case, test leads, probes and clips.

i) AC/DC voltages 0-1000 V

ii) AC/DC amps 0-10 amp

iii) Resistance range 0-500 K ohms

iv) Continuity range 0-5 ohms with audible

indication

2 The equipment shall

i) be portable

ii) have LCD display of 4 1/2 digits

iii) have excellent response time

iv) be provided with full protection against inadvertent

overload.

17.5 PORTABLE PRIMARY CURRENT INJECTION TEST KIT:

Air cooled type, easily movable in the switch yard, continuous rated and step less
output, trolley mounted :
a) To be used for testing of circuit breakers, CTs and Relays etc.

KVA : 15 KVA
Input : 230V
Output : 0-20V ; 750 A
0-10V ; 1500 A
0- 5V ; 3000 A
b) Two test leads of capacity 2000 A each, with suitable length for
reaching CTs in the yard (after erecting the CTs on the structure)
i.e. 15-20 meters.

17.6 ANALOG MULTIMETERS:

The Contractor shall supply analog Multi-meters complete with durable and
weather proof carrying case, test leads, probes and clips.

i) AC/DC Voltage 0 –1000V

ii) AC/DC Current 0 –10 Amps
iii) Resistance Range – 0-2kohms-200kohms-20Megaohms
iv) shall be able to read low range AC currents (milli Amps range)
v) shall have good resolution and accuracy.

57
17.7 VACCUM CLEANERS :
i) The instrument shall be heavy duty suitable for cleaning of Control &
Relay Panels
ii) shall operate on 230V single phase AC supply
iii) Air flow shall be 36 lit/sec or better
iv) shall have thermal cut off feature
v) shall have suction capacity of 2200mm water column or better
17.8 Portable Calibration Equipment for Energy Meter :
The equipment offered shall be suitable for calibrating Energy Meters as detailed
below :
1. To be used to calibrate energy meters in 3 phase A.C. system with continuous
current capacity upto 200 % of basic current, suitable for energy meters, to be
supplied in terms of clause No 3.16 of ‘Erection of Substations (Part-A
Electrical) of chapter -XIV of Section IX of Volume -III with an Accuracy
≤0.2.
2. Normal Current : IA, 5 A.
17.9 Hand held device for data collection from Energy meters as specified vide cl.
3.16 of ‘Erection of Substations (Part-A Electrical) of chapter -XIV of Section IX of
Volume -III
17.10 Phase sequence indicators :- Portable type with working voltages of 220volts &430
volts A.C., 50Hz used to check up phase sequences.

18.0 (A) MANUALS:

1 no. reproducible in original and 6 copies of “Instructions Manuals” shall be
provided with each piece of equipment supplied. The manuals shall be bound and
contain all information and drawings necessary for the satisfactory operation and
maintenance of the equipment, including spare part information. Please refer to
chapter 5 of GTC, Section –IX of this volume.
(B) DRAWINGS:
The contractor shall provide drawings detailed with important dimensions and
construction materials as appropriate, including descriptive literature, operation and
maintenance instructions and other information for a full understanding of the
equipment offered. Please refer to chapter 4 of GTC, Section –IX of this volume.
(C) TRAINING:
Contractor shall provide hands on training course to the personnel of the substation
on the salient features of the protection provided, operation and maintenance of the
C& R panels erected at these Substations and on the tools and scientific instrument
that are being supplied against this contract. The location of the training shall be at the
substations and manufacturer’s factory and training shall be free of cost.

19.0 LIST OF EQUIPMENTS:

The detailed Bill of Materials to be provided in the various control panels is listed in
Annexure-I. The detailed Bill of Materials for protection panels is given Annexure-I.
The detailed Bill of Materials for Mandatory spares and Tools Scientific Equipment
are given in Annexure-II respectively. The bidder shall give a complete list of
equipment provided in each panel. Unit price of all equipment as listed in
Annexure-III of this chapter –IX, Section –IX Vol.-III shall also be furnished along
with the bid in Price Schedule IA-5 of Vol-III. The Bidder shall clearly indicate any
additional equipment found necessary to give a complete and comprehensive offer.
He shall however substantiate his reasons for such additional equipment in his bid
proposal.

58
 ANNEXURE -1
A. SCHEDULE OF DETAILED EQUIPMENT
GENERAL SPECIFICATION OF SIMPLEX PANEL

Each simplex type integrated control relay panel / control panel / relay panel shall consist of the
following:

Circuit label 1 set

Door operated cubicle illumination 1 No.

Terminal blocks with stud type terminal and 20% spare terminal 1 set

AC and DC fuses 1 set

Cable glands. 1 set

3 pin 15 AC plug socket with switch control 1 No.

Thermostat operated cubicle heater with switch control 1 No.

Earth bus 1 No.

Name plate for mounted equipment both on front panel and inside. 1 No.

The No. of empty simplex/other types panels required to accommodate various equipment as
specified in case of each of the panels designated below shall be supplied by the contractor at no
extra cost. The price quoted for each type of panel is deemed to have included the price of number
of empty panels required to accommodate above relays and protection.

B. CONFIGURATION OF C & R PANELS

The following is the general criteria for the selection of the equipments to be provided in each
type of panel.

CONTROL PANEL
Various types of control panels shall consist of the following

a Ammeter with selector switch 1 set for each Line, BC, TBC
Bus sectionalizer , and Transformer

b Wattmeter 1 set for each line, transformer

c Varmeter 1 set for each line, transformer,

d CB Control switch 1 no. for each Circuit breaker

e Isolator Control switch 1 no. for each isolator

f Semaphore 1 no. for each breaker, isolator and earth switch

59
g Red indicating lamp 1 no. for each Circuit breaker

h Red indicating lamp 1 no. for each isolator

i Green indicating lamp 1 no. for each Circuit breaker

j. Green indicating lamp 1 no. for each isolator

k. Blue lamp for isolator Interlock for each line and transformer
supply ON position

l White indicating lamp 2 nos for each feeder

(DC healthy lamp)

m Annunciation windows with 18 nos for each feeder

associated annunciation relays

n Indicating lamps for line CVT live 2 nos.

o. Push button for alarm 3 nos for each control panel

Accept/reset/lamp test

p Synchronising Socket (12 pin) 1 no. for each Circuit Breaker

q Protection Transfer schemes 1 no. for each breaker in case of DMT /

(Except TBC and BC breaker)

r Mimic to represent SLD Lot in all control panels

s Voltmeter with 4 position selector Switch 1 no for each line, transformer ,

t. Cut out, mounting and wiring for Lot for transformers

RWTI and selector switch

u. Cutout mounting and wiring for transformers

for tap position indicator
OLTC control switch
Tap changer in-progress / OLTC supply healthy

Note:
1. For transformer feeders, all equipments of control panel shall be provided separately for HV
and LV sides.
2 The above list of equipments mentioned for control panel is generally applicable unless it is
defined elsewhere.
3 Common synchronising switch to be provided in Synchronising trolley for new Substations. In
this case, individual synchronising selector switch is not required for each Circuit Breaker in
control panel.
4 Each line /HV side of transformer/LV side of transformer /TBC /BC/ Bus Sectionalizer shall
be considered as one feeder for above purpose.
5 Any other component required for satisfactory operation shall deemed to have been included
in the quoted price.

60
Item No. 1 - 132 kV FEEDER CONTROL PANELS:

Simplex panels as required equipped with the following and fully wired:

PANEL DESIGNATION PANEL ‘A’ PANEL ‘B’

USAGE for double bus for double main
arrangement and transfer bus

Circuit identification label 1 No. 1 No.

Digital Ammeter class of accuracy 1.0. 1 No. 1 No.

5 position Ammeter selector switch 1 No. 1 No.

Digital Megawatt meter class of accuracy 1.0. 1 No. 1 No.

Digital MVAR meter class of accuracy 1.0. 1 No. 1 No.

Electronic Trivector Meter of 0.2s class accuracy

for both export and import of MWH 1 No. 1 No.
and MVARH as per clause 3.16 of Part-A/1 of Chapter-XIV
of Volume-III (Covered under separate Price Schedule).

3 phase, 4 wire test terminal block wired and with cutout. 1 No. 1 No.
for the above

LED type Indicating lamps for the following functions: 15 17 .

For breaker close permission indication of breaker 1 No. 1 No.

For breaker open and close indication 2 No. 2 No.

For healthy trip indication of the two sets of trip coils of the 2 No. 2 No.
breaker

Indicating lamps for bus isolator and line isolator 6 No. 8 No.
open/close indicators.

for line VT on indication 3 No. 3 No.

For capacitor charged indication of Circuit Breaker. 1 No. 1 No.

Push button for capacitor charge testing 1 No. 1 No.

painted and overload mimic diagram representing 1 No. 1 No.

bus bars, connections and symbols and layout.

3 position 12 way control switch for C.B. 1 No. 1 No.

3 position 12 way control switch forIsolator. 3No. 4 No

61
Semaphore indicators : for bus and line isolators, 3 No. 4 No.
earth switches of isolator 2 No. 3 No.

Semaphore indicator for breaker 1 No. 1 No.

Indication lamp for Isolator interlock supply 1 No. 1 No.

ON indication (blue)

Digital Volt meter class of accuracy 1.0 1 No. 1 No.

Volt meter selector switch 6 way 1 No. 1 No.

3 pole DC auxiliary with flag indicators. 1 No. 1 No.

Synchronizing socket switch (12 pin ) 1 No. 1 No.

2 pole MCB for DC supply control with N.C 1 No. 1 No.

contact for annunciation

Protection trip transfer switch ---- 1 No.

24 way annunciation scheme comprising the following: 1 set. 1 set.

a) Annunciation windows for 24 way

b) 3nos. Push buttons for alarm accept, rest, lamp
test and alarm test.
c) Alarm relays for 24 ways.

Door operated internal cubicle illumination lamp 1 No. 1 No.

3 pin 15 AC plug socket with switch control and 3 pin plug 1 No. 1 No.

Cable glands 1 set 1 set

AC and DC fuses 1 set 1 set

Thermostat operated cubicle heater with switch control 1 set 1 set

Earth bus 1 No. 1 No.

Name plates for the mounted equipment both on front panel 2 sets 2 sets
and inside

Terminal blocks with required stud type terminals and 1 set 1 set
20% spare terminals with required bolts and nuts.

Note: Any other component required for satisfactory operation shall be deemed to have been
included in the quoted price.

This panel shall be connected to common annunciation panel no. ‘O’ or ‘P’ for alarm and
annunciation as the case may be.

62
132kV feeder Relay protection panel

Simplex panels as required equipped with the following and fully wired.

PANEL DESIGNATION PANEL ‘C’ PANEL ‘D’

USAGE for double bus for double main
arrangement and transfer bus
Trip circuit supervision relays for continuous
supervision (pre-close and after close supervision) 1 No. 1 No.
of trip coil I & II circuit breaker having 2 coils
of trip coils ( each trip coil is common to all 3 phases)

Flag relays, auxiliary relay, timers etc as required by the 1 LOT 1 LOT
Scheme.

Numerical distance relay scheme with carrier inter-trip

features as described in technical specification in clause 5.7.1(a)
complete with carrier aux relays, for inter tripping out of step 1 set 1 set
blocking relay, fuse failure relay for CVT and PT fuse failure
and 4th zone backup protection relay and test terminal blocks
(Main-I protection)

Distance to fault locator as per clause 5.7.1(b) for measuring

And displaying distance to fault for phase to phase and phase to 1 set 1 set
Earth faults along with pre-fault and post fault data

Disturbance Recorder as per clause no.5.1.10d 1 set 1 set

Breaker contact multiplication relay (Latch type) 1 No. 1 No.

Back up protection scheme of numerical type as per technical 1 set 1 set

specification as per clause 5.2, consisting of
a) 3 Nos. directional over current relays
b) 1 No. directional IDMT earth fault relay
Voltage selector relay scheme to operate NO and NC
Contacts of bus 1 and bus 2 isolators for proper extension of 1 set 1 set
PT supply as per clause 5.1.20
Door operated cubicle illumination 1 No. 1 No.
Terminal blocks with stud type terminal and 20% spare terminal 1 set 1 set
AC and DC fuses 1 set 1 set
Cable glands. 1 set 1 set
3 pin 15 AC plug socket with switch control 1 No. 1 No.
Thermostat operated cubicle heater with switch control 1 No. 1 No.
Earth bus 1 No. 1 No.
Name plate for mounted equipment both on front panel and inside. 1 No. 1 No.
Flag relays of two element type for circuit breaker trouble 6No 6 No.
Indications as per specification
Breaker contact multiplication relay (latch type) 1No. 1 No
Necessary provision for adding auto recluse future at a later date
Note: Any other component required for satisfactory operation shall be deemed to have been
included in the quoted price.

63
 50 MVA 132/33kV Power Transformer Control & Relay Panel

50 MVA, 132/33 kV Transformer HV & LV Control, Relay, Alarm and Annunciation

panel. Equipped and wired with the following equipment

Simplex panels as required equipped with the following and fully wired.

PANEL E.: Designated panel suitable for double main bus bar arrangement (132/33kV SS at
Village Gharbara).

1 No. PVC circuit label suitably engraved in white letters.

2 Nos. Digital Ammeters - one for the HV side and one for the LV side. Class of
accuracy 1.0.

2 Nos. 5 position, Ammeter selector switches R-Y-B-N-OFF

1 No. Digital Megawatt Meter class of accuracy 1.0.

1 No. Digital MVAR meter class of accuracy 1.0.

1 set. Electronic Trivector Meters of 0.2s class accuracy for both export and import of
MWH and MVA RH on LV side as per clause 3.16 of Part-A/1 of Chapter-XIV
of Volume-III (Covered under separate Price Schedule).

1 No. 3 phase 4 wire test terminal block for the above.

1 No. Painted and over laid mimic diagram representing bus bars, connections, symbols
and layout.

2 Nos. Circuit Breaker control switches, 3 position 12 way with pistol grip handle,
lockable pattern for the remote control of HV and LV Breakers.

2 Nos. Semaphore indicator for the position indication of HV and LV breakers of

transformers

4 Nos. Semaphore indicators for the position indication of 2nos HV and 2 nos. LV
isolators (as per no. of isolators in the busbar arrangement).

3 Nos. Semaphore for position indication for the earth switches of isolators

4 Nos. 3 position, 8 way spring return to neutral type isolator, control switch with lock
facility for 2nos. HV and 2nos. LV isolator as per bus bar arrangement.

1 No. Synchronizing socket (12 pin )

1 set of 19nos. LED type Indicating lamps for the following indications in each case:
2 Nos. for HV & LV Breaker closing indication
2 Nos. for HV & LV breaker Open indication
2 Nos. for HV Breaker Trip circuit healthy indication
2 Nos. for LV Breaker Trip circuit healthy indication

64
 2 Nos. for HV & LV breaker Spring charge/breaker close
permissible indication
4 Nos. for HV & LV isolator Open indication
4 Nos. for HV & LV isolator Close position.
1 No. HV breaker capacitor charge indication

1 No. Push button for capacitor charge test of HV breaker

1 Set Trip circuit supervision relay scheme for continuous supervision (both pre-close &
after close supervision) for individual supervision of 3 phases of HV breaker
having 2 sets of trip coils (each trip coil common to all three phases, of breaker)

1 Set Trip circuit supervision relay scheme for continuous supervision (both pre-close &
after close supervision) for individual supervision of 3 phases of LV breaker
having 2 sets of trip coils (2 Nos. trip coils. Each trip coil common to all three
phases of breaker)

2 Nos. MCBs (with N/C contact for alarm) for DC supply control, one for HV circuits and
the other for LV circuits.

1 No. Instantaneous, biassed differential protection relay scheme with 2nd Harmonic
Restraint features for differential protection of HV & LV winding of 132/33 kV
Transformer as described in Technical Specification. Clause no.5.2 (a)

1 No. Triple pole IDMT non-directional over current relay with high set instantaneous
features for backup protection of HV side of transformers. Clause no.5.2 (d)

1 No. Triple pole IDMT non-directional over current relay with high set instantaneous
element for backup protection of LV side of transformer. Clause no.5.2 (e)

1 No. Single pole directional IDMT E/F relays with high set instantaneous element for
backup protection of HV side of transformer. Clause no.5.2 (d)

1 No. Single pole non-directional IDMT E/F relays with high set instantaneous element
for backup protection of LV side of transformer. Clause no.5.2 (e)

1 No. Over-fluxing relay schemes to prevent over fluxing in the transformer and to
isolate the transformer by tripping the HV & LV after a predetermined setting of
V/F to be connected on HV side. Clause no.5.2 (b)

1set. Restricted E/F relay as per relevant clause of Technical specification. Cl no.5.2 (c)

1 No. Under frequency relay scheme as per relevant clause of this specification. Clause
no.5.2 (h)

3 Nos. DC operated 3 element auxiliary relays each element provided with 2 pairs of
contacts and hand reset operation indicator for the following functions.
a) Bucholtz trip
b) HV winding temperature trip
c) LV winding temperature trip
d) Oil temperature trip

65
 e) Low oil level trip
f) Tap changer bucholtz trip
g) PRV trip

1 No. High speed tripping relay with 4 N/O contacts for HV backup protection trip
1 No. Inter trip relay with 3 NO + 3 NC contacts with hand reset operation indicator for
inter tripping of HV side and LV side breakers of Transformers.
1 No. Trip relay for LV protection
1 set Voltage selector relay scheme to operate NO and NC Contacts of bus 1 and bus 2
isolators for proper extension of PT supply as per clause 5.1.20.
2 No Breaker contact multiplication relay (Latch type) one no. for HV and LV
12 Flag relays of two element type for circuit breaker trouble Indications as per
specification
2 Nos. Digital Voltmeters for indicating 132 kV and 33 kV bus voltages. Class of
accuracy 1.0.
2 Lot Flag relays and auxiliary relays 1 lot each for HV and LV.
2 Nos. Voltmeter selector switches, 6 way for the above.
1 No. Digital Power factor meter.
1 No. Digital Frequency meter
1 Set 24 way Annunciation scheme comprising of the following:
a) Annunciation windows for 24 ways.
b) Push button switches for alarm accept, reset, lamp test and Alarm test
facilities.
c) Alarm relays for 24 ways.

1 Set Name plates for all the equipment mounted on panel front side inside.
1 No. Door operated cubicle illumination with lamp
1 Set Terminal Blocks with required stud type terminals and 20% spare terminals.
1 Set AC and DC Fuses.
1 Set Cable Glands
1 Set Space Heater with thermostat control
1 Set Switches for space heaters
1 Set. 3 pin plug socket with switch control for AC supply

Note: Any other component required for satisfactory operation shall be deemed to have been
included in the quoted price.

This panel shall be connected to common annunciation panel panel no. ‘O’ for alarm and
annunciation.

66
 132/33 kV 50 MVA TRANSFORMER HV/LV CONTROL & RELAY PANEL

50 MVA, 132/33 kV Transformer HV & LV Control, Relay, Alarm and Annunciation panel.
Equipped and wired with the following equipment

Simplex panels as required equipped with the following and fully wired.

PANEL F.: Designated panel suitable for double main and transfer bus.

1 No. PVC circuit label suitably engraved in white letters.

2 Nos. Digital Ammeters - one for the HV side and one for the LV side. Class of
accuracy 1.0.

2 Nos. 5 position, Ammeter selector switches R-B-Y-N-OFF

1 No. Digital Megawatt Meter class of accuracy 1.0.

1 No. Digital MVAR meter class of accuracy 1.0.

1 set. Electronic Trivector Meters of 0.2s class accuracy for both export and import of
MWH and MVA RH on LV side as per Clause 3.16 of Part-A/1 of Chapter-XIV
of Volume-III (Covered under separate Price Schedule).

1 No. 3 phase 4 wire test terminal block for the above.

1 No. Painted and over laid mimic diagram representing bus bars, connections, symbols
and layout.

2 Nos. Circuit Breaker control switches, 3 position 12 way with pistol grip handle,
discrepancy switch with lamp lockable pattern for the remote control of HV and
LV Breakers.

1 No. Synchronizing socket (12 pin )

2 Nos. Semaphore indicator for the position indication of HV and LV breakers of

transformers

6 Nos. Semaphore indicators for the position indication of HV and LV isolators (as per
no. of isolators in the busbar arrangement).
5.Nos. Semaphore indicators for the position indicators of HV and LV isolators earth
switches.
6 Nos. 3 position, 8 way spring return to neutral type isolator, control switch with lock
facility for HV and LV isolator as per bus bar arrangement.

1 set of 23 nos. LED type Indicating lamps for the following indications in each case:
2 Nos. for HV & LV Breaker closing indication
2 Nos. for HV & LV breaker Open indication
2 Nos. for HV Breaker Trip circuit healthy indication
2 Nos. for LV Breaker Trip circuit healthy indication
2 Nos. for HV & LV breaker Spring charge/breaker close

67
 permissible indication

6 Nos. for HV & LV isolator Open indication

6 Nos. for HV & LV isolator Close position.
1 No. HV breaker capacitor charge indication

1 No. Push button for capacitor charge test of HV breaker

1 Set Trip circuit supervision relay scheme for continuous supervision (both pre-close &
after close supervision) for individual supervision of 3 phases of HV breaker
having 2 sets of trip coils (each trip coil common to all three phases, of breaker)

1 Set Trip circuit supervision relay scheme for continuous supervision (both pre-close &
after close supervision) for individual supervision of 3 phases of LV breaker
having 2 sets of trip coils (2 Nos. trip coils. Each trip coil common to all three
phases of breaker)

2 Nos. MCBs (with N/C contact for alarm) for DC supply control, one for HV circuits and
the other for LV circuits.

1 No. Instantaneous, biased differential protection relay scheme with 2nd Harmonic
Restraint features for differential protection of HV & LV winding of 132/33 kV
Transformer as described in Technical Specification. Clause 5.2 (a)

1 No. Triple pole IDMT non-directional over current relay with high set instantaneous
features for backup protection of HV side of transformers. Clause 5.2 (d)

1 No. Triple pole IDMT non-directional over current relay with high set instantaneous
element for backup protection of LV side of transformer. Clause 5.2 (e)

1 No. Single pole directional IDMT E/F relays with high set instantaneous element for
backup protection of HV side of transformer. Clause 5.2 (d)

1 No. Single pole non-directional IDMT E/F relays with high set instantaneous element
for backup protection of LV side of transformer. Clause 5.2 (e)

1 No. Over-fluxing relay schemes to prevent over fluxing in the transformer and to
isolate the transformer by tripping the HV & LV after a predetermined setting of
V/F to be connected on HV side. Clause 5.2 (b)

1set. Restricted E/F relay as per relevant clause of Technical specification. Cl no.5.2 (c)

1 No. Under frequency relay scheme as per relevant clause of this specification. Clause
no.5.2 (h)

3 Nos. DC operated 3 element auxiliary relays each element provided with 2 pairs of
contacts and hand reset operation indicator for the following functions.
a) Bucholtz trip
b) HV winding temperature trip
c) LV winding temperature trip
d) Oil temperature trip

68
 e) Low oil level trip
f) Tap changer bucholtz trip
g) PRV trip

1 No. High speed tripping relay with 4 N/O contacts for HV backup protection trip

1 No. Inter trip relay with 3 NO + 3 NC contacts with hand reset operation indicator for
inter tripping of HV side and LV side breakers of Transformers.
1 No. Trip relay for LV protection
1 Set Voltage selector relay scheme to operate NO and NC Contacts of bus 1 and bus 2
isolators for proper extension of PT supply as per clause 5.1.20
1 No. Protection trip transfer switch.
2 Nos. Digital Voltmeters for indicating 132 kV and 33 kV bus voltages. Class of
accuracy 1.0.
2 No Breaker contact multiplication relay (Latch type) one no. for HV and LV

2 lots Flag relays and auxiliary relays as required 1 lot each for HV and LV side.

2 Nos. Voltmeter selector switches, 6 way for the above.

1 No. Digital Power factor meter.
1 No. Digital Frequency meter

1 Set 24 way Annunciation scheme comprising of the following:

a) Annunciation windows for 24 ways.
d) Push button switches for alarm accept, reset, lamp test and Alarm test
facilities.
c) Alarm relays for 24 ways.

1 Set Name plates for all the equipment mounted on panel front side inside.
1 No. Door operated cubicle illumination with lamp
1 Set Terminal Blocks with required stud type terminals and 20% spare terminals.
1 Set AC and DC Fuses.
1 Set Cable Glands
1 Set Space Heater with thermostat control
1 Set Switches for space heaters
1 Set. 3 pin plug socket with switch control for AC supply
1 Set Under frequency relay scheme as per relevant clause of technical specification

Note: Any other component required for satisfactory operation shall be deemed to have been
included in the quoted price.

This panel shall be connected to common annunciation panel panel no. ‘P’ for alarm and
annunciation.

69
PANEL G: 132kV BUSBAR PROTECTION PANELS (for double main bus bar
arrangement at Gharbara Village 132 /33 kV Substation)

Simplex panels as required equipped with the following and fully wired.

i) Two zone bus bar protection scheme as described in technical specification wide
clause 5.4 B for 8 Nos. 132kV Circuits including bus coupler breaker, and future
facilities complete with built in automatic test facility is required for 132/33 kV SS
at Village Gharbara .

ii) CT – Zone switching relays as required for the outgoing 8 Nos. 132kV circuits
complete with separate indoor type panels for mounting these relays.

iii) Individual Bus bar protection tripping relays for 8 Nos. 132kV circuits.
iv) 8 way alarm scheme complete. (The corresponding annunciation facia called for
has to be provided on the common annunciation and alarm panels i.e., Panel ‘O’
and wired up)
v) Following panel accessories shall be supplied
a) Heater with switch.
b) Door operated cubicle illumination lamp
c) 1 set of test terminal block with stud type terminals and 20% spare
terminals.
d) 1 set disconnecting type terminals with shorting links for CT terminals.
e) 1 set cable glands.
f) 1 set AC and DC fuses.
g) 1 No. 3 pin 15 Amp AC plug socket with switch control 3 pin plug.

vi) 8 sets of Auxiliary CTs shall be provided. For matching unequal CT ratios in each
panel.
vii) Bus-I and Bus-II inter connection relays.
viii) Bus bar protection D.C. Supervision relays for bus bar protection zone-I and
zone –II as required.
Name plates for the equipment mounted on panels from side and inside.

This protection caters to the Bus bar arrangement feeding the following feeders of
132 kV SS at Village Gharbara:
132kV Pali to Village Gharbara circuit 1
132 kV Pali to Village Gharbara circuit 2
132 kV side of 50 MVA transformer No.1
132 kV side of 50 MVA transformersNo 2&.3 (future)
132 kV bus coupler
132 kV feeder bay –2nos. (future)
The alarm and annunciation system for this panel must be wired up for annunciation and
alarm through annunciation facia and alarm system located on Common alarm and
annunciation panel (panel ‘O’).

Note: Any other component required for satisfactory operation shall be provided and its price is
deemed to have been included in the quoted price.

70
PANEL H: 132kV BUSBAR PROTECTION PANELS (for double main and transfer bus
arrangement to be located at 132/33 kV SS at Recreation Green)

i) Three zone bus bar protection relay scheme as described in technical specification
(vide clause no 5.4A for bus protection of bus-1, bus-2 and transfer bus at
132/33 kV SS at Recreation Green as per SLD diagram.
ii) The protection shall cover 8 no. 132 kV circuits including bus coupler and transfer
bus future feature and it shall be with built in automatic test facility with provision
to add one more circuit at a later date as and when required.
iii) CT – Zone switching relays as required for the outgoing 8 Nos. 132kV circuits
complete with separate indoor type panels for mounting these relays.
iv) Individual tripping relays for 8 Nos. 132kV circuits.
v) 12 way alarm scheme complete. (To be located on common annunciation and
alarm panel ‘P’ and wired up.
vi) Following panel accessories shall be supplied
a. Heater with switch.
b. Door operated cubicle illumination lamp
c. 1 set of test terminal block with stud type terminals and 20% spare
terminals.
d. 1 set disconnecting type terminals with shorting links for CT terminals.
e. 1 set cable glands.
f. 1 set AC and DC fuses.
g. 1 No. 3 pin 15 Amp AC plug socket with switch control 3 pin plug.

vii) 8 sets of Auxiliary CTs shall be provided. For matching unequal CT ratios in each
panel.
viii) Bus bar protection trip relays 8 nos.
ix) Bus -1 and bus-2 inter-connection relays one set.
x) Bus-1 and transfer bus inter-connection relays one set.
xi) Bus-2 and transfer bus inter-connection relays one set.
xii) DC supervision relays for bus bar protection zone-1,zone-2 and transfer bus zone-3
xiii) Any other equipment as required one set.
xiv) Name plates for the equipment mounted on panels from side and inside.
This protection caters to the Bus bar system feeding the following feeders of 132
kV SS at Recreation Green:
132kV Pali to Recreation Green circuit 1
132 kV Pali to Recreation Green circuit 2
132 kV side of 50 MVA transformer No.1
132 kV side of 50 MVA transformer No.2 (future)
132 kV side of 50 MVA transformer No.3 (future)
132 kV bus coupler
132 kV Transfer bus coupler bay
132 kV feeder bay – 1 No. (future)

The alarm and annunciation system for this panel must be wired up for annunciation and
alarm through annunciation facia and alarm system located on Common alarm and
annunciation panel (panel ‘P’).
Note: Any other component required for satisfactory operation shall be provided and its price is
deemed to have been included in the quoted price.

71
 132kV CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS FOR BUS COUPLER AND TRANSFER BUS

PANEL DESIGNATION PANEL ‘I’ PANEL ‘J’

USAGE for bus coupler for transfer bus

Circuit identification label 1 No. 1 No.

Digital Ammeter class of accuracy 1.0. 1 No. 1 No.

5 position Ammeter selector switch R-Y-B-N-OFF 1 No. 1 No.

LED type Indicating lamps for the following functions: 1 No. 1 No.

for breaker close permission indication of breaker 1 No. 1 No.

for breaker open and close indication 2 No. 2 No.

for healthy trip indication of the two sets of trip coils of the 2 No. 2 No.
breaker

indicating lamps for isolator 4 No. 6 No.

open/close indicators.

for line VT on indication 3 No. 3 No.

for capacitor charged indication of Circuit Breaker. 1 No. 1 No.

Push button for capacitor charge testing 1 No. 1 No.

painted and overlaid mimic diagram representing 1 No. 1 No.

bus bars, connections and symbols and layout.

3 position 12 way control switch for C.B.for breaker 1 No. 1 No.

3 position 12 way control switch for isolators 2 No. 3 No

Synchronizing socket switch (12 pin ) 1 No. 1 No.

Semaphore indicators : for isolators, 2 No. 3 No.

earth switches of isolator 2 No. 2 No.

Semaphore indicator for breaker 1 No. 1 No.

Indication lamp for Isolator interlock supply

ON indication (blue) 1 No. 1 No.

Indication lamp for protection DC supply ON 1 No. 1 No

Trip circuit supervision relays for continuous

supervision (pre-close and after close supervision) 1 set. 1 Set.
of trip coil I & II circuit(breaker having 2Nos.

72
of trip coils ( each trip coil is common to all 3 phases)
as per clause 5.1.17

Digital Volt meter class of accuracy 1.0 1 No. 1 No.

Volt meter selector switch 6 way 1 No. 1 No.

3 pole DC auxiliary Relays with flag indicators. 2 No. 2 No.

2 pole MCB for DC supply control with N.C 1 No. 1 No.

contact for annunciation

24 way annunciation scheme comprising the following: 1 set. 1 set.

Annunciation windows for 24 way

Push buttons for alarm accept, reset, lamp
test and alarm test 3 nos.

Alarm relays for 24 ways.

Frequency meters 1 Nos. --

Door operated internal cubicle illumination lamp 1 No. 1 No.

3 pin 15 AC plug socket with switch control and 3 pin plug 1 No. 1 No.

Cable glands 1 set 1 set

AC and DC fuses 1 set 1 set

Thermostat operated cubicle heater with switch control 1 set 1 set

Earth bus 1 No. 1 No.

Name plates for the mounted equipment both on front panel 2 sets 2 sets
and inside

Terminal blocks with required stud type terminals and 1 set 1 set
20% spare terminals with required bolts and nuts.

Back up protection scheme of numerical type as per technical 1 set 1 set

specification consisting of
a) 3pole.non- directional over current relays as per
as per
b) Single pole. Non- directional IDMT earth fault relay clause 5.5
clause5.6

Trip circuit supervision relays 6 Nos. 6 Nos.

DC supply supervision relays as per clause 5.1.22 2 Nos. 2 Nos.

Auxiliary relay for the above for alarm 1 No. 1 No.

73
High speed 3 phase trip relay as per clause 5.1.18 1 set 1 set

Supervision relay for the above 1 No. 1 No.

Flag relay for two element type for circuit breaker trouble 6 Nos. 6 Nos.
as specified as per clause 5.1.19

Contact multiplication relay latch type for breaker 1 No. 1 No.

Contact multiplying relays latch type for Bus-1 earth switch

and Bus-2 earth switch 2 Nos. ---

The alarm and annunciation system for this panel must be wired up for annunciation and
alarm through alarm system located on Common alarm and annunciation panel (O or P).

Note: Any other component required for satisfactory operation shall be deemed to have been
included in the quoted price.
.

74
 33 kV TWIN FEEDER CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS

PANEL- K-1 Indoor 33 kV twin feeder control and relay panels for two 33 kV feeders

Simplex panels as required to be equipped and wired with the following equipment.

2 Nos. Digital Ammeter dual scale (0-300 Amps. suitable for CT ratio 400/1 A) class of
accuracy 1.0

2 Nos. Digital Volt Meters

2 Nos. Ammeters selector switches 5 position R-Y-B-N-Off

2 Nos. Digital Megawatt meter - 3 phase, 3 wire ,2 element or 3 phase 4 wire 3 element
type End zero MW meters to work on 110V AC ,50 Hz 1 A and scaled to suit a
CT ratio 400/1 A and PT ratio of 33 kV/110 V or 33 /√3 kV /110 √3 V.

2 Nos. Digital MVAR meter - 3 phase 3 wire 2 element or 3 phase 4 wire 3 element and
Centre zero type MVAR meters to work on 110V AC 50 Hz and 1 A scaled to
suit a CT ratio 400/1 A and PT ratio of 33 kV/110 V or 33 /√3 kV /110 √3 V.

2 Nos. Circuit breaker control switches 4 ways

4 Nos. Isolator control switch 4 ways

2 Nos. Electronic Energy Meters of 0.2s class accuracy as per 3.16 of Part-A/1 of
Chapter-XIV of Volume-III (Covered under separate Price Schedule).

2 Nos. 3 phase 4 wire test terminal blocks to energy meters.

2 Nos. Semaphore indicators for bus side isolators.

2 Nos. Semaphore indicators for line side isolators.

4 Nos. Semaphore indicators for isolators earth switches

2 Nos. Semaphore indicators for circuit breakers.

2 Nos. LED type Indicating lamps green (Circuit breaker Open)

2 Nos. Indicating lamps red (Circuit breaker closed)

4 Nos. 2 Nos. indicating lamps white (for each circuit breaker healthy trip for two trip
coils)

2 Nos. LED type Indicating lamps blue (circuit breaker spring charged)

2 Nos. Digital Power Factor meters

75
2 Nos. Annunciation schemes (12 ways) each comprising of:

a) 12 ways Annunciation windows

b) 1 No. Alarm relay (to be mounted inside the panel)

c) Push buttons for:

Alarm accept - Red coloured

Alarm reset - Black coloured
Alarm test - Green coloured
Lamp test - Yellow coloured

1 No. Painted mimic diagram with symbols name plates for equipment mounted on
panels

1 Set 15 Amps. 3 pin power socket with switch

1 Set Door switch operated cubicle illumination with fluorescent lamp

2 Sets one set of A.C. and D.C fuses required for each feeder.

2 Sets Terminal blocks (each with stud type terminals and with 10% spare terminals
consisting minimum of 70 terminals)

22 Nos. Cable glands

2 Sets Space heater with thermostat and switch

2 Nos. Numerical triple pole IDMT non-directional with instantaneous high set elements
of at least
2 O/L + 1 E/L combined unit.
2Nos Master Trip Relay.

12 Flag relays of two element type for circuit breaker trouble Indications as per
specification

2 No. Contact multiplication relay latch type

1 No. Earth bus 3 x 25m copper

2 Sets Name plates for mounted equipment (both on front panel and inside of the panel.

The alarm and annunciation system for this panel must be wired up for annunciation and
alarm through alarm system located on 33kV Common alarm and annunciation panel (Panel
‘N’).

Note: Any other component required for satisfactory operation shall be deemed to have been
included in the quoted price.

76
 33 kV TWIN FEEDER CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS

PANEL- K-2 Indoor 33 kV twin feeder control and relay panels for one 33 kV feeder and
other feeding a Capacitor Bank

Simplex panels as required to be equipped and wired with the following equipment.
2 Nos. Digital Ammeter dual scale (0-300 Amps. suitable for CT ratio 400/1 A on feeder
side and 0-250 Amps suitable for CT ratio 240/1A for capacitor banks feeder) class
of accuracy 1.0
2 Nos. Digital Volt Meters
2 Nos. Ammeters selector switches 5 position R-Y-B-N-Off
2 Nos. Digital Megawatt meter - 3 phase, 3 wire, 2 element or 3 phase 4 wire 3 element
type End zero MW meters to work on 110V AC ,50 Hz 1 A and scaled to suit a
CT ratio 400/1 A in case of feeder and CT ratio of 240/1 A for capacitor bank
feeder and PT ratio of 33 kV/110 V or 33 /√3 kV /110 √3 V.
2 Nos. Digital MVAR meter - 3 phase 3 wire 2 element or 3 phase 4 wire 3 element and
Centre zero type MVAR meters to work on 110V AC 50 Hz and 1 A scaled to
suit a CT ratio 400/1 A in case of feeder and CT ratio of 240/1 A for capacitor
bank feeder and PT ratio of 33 kV/110 V or 33 /√3 kV /110 √3 V.
2 Nos. Circuit breaker control switches 4 ways
4 Nos. Isolator control switch 4 ways
2 Nos. Electronic Energy Meters of 0.2s class accuracy as per 3.16 of Part-A/1 of
Chapter-XIV of Volume-III (Covered under separate Price Schedule).
2 Nos. 3 phase 4 wire test terminal blocks to energy meters.
4 Nos. Semaphore indicators for isolators.
4 Nos. Semaphore indicators for isolators earth switches.
2 Nos. Semaphore indicators for circuit breakers.
2 Nos. LED type Indicating lamps green (Circuit breaker Open)
2 Nos. Indicating lamps red (Circuit breaker closed)
4 Nos. 2 Nos. indicating lamps white (for each circuit breaker healthy trip for two trip
coils)
2 Nos. LED type Indicating lamps blue (circuit breaker spring charged)
2 Nos. Digital Power Factor meters
2 Nos. Annunciation schemes (24 ways) each comprising of:
a) 24 ways Annunciation windows
b) 1 No. Alarm relay (to be mounted inside the panel)
c) Push buttons for:
Alarm accept - Red coloured
Alarm reset - Black coloured
Alarm test - Green coloured
Lamp test - Yellow coloured
d) Alarm to indicate failure of capacitor unit resulting in nearly 10% over-voltage in
other parallel capacitors in the Bank.1 No.

77
 Painted mimic diagram with symbols name plates for equipment mounted on
panels
1 Set 15 Amps. 3 pin power socket with switch

1 Set Door switch operated cubicle illumination with fluorescent lamp

2 Sets one set of A.C. and D.C fuses as required for each feeder.
2 Sets Terminal block (stud type terminals and with 10% spare terminals consisting
minimum of 70 terminals)

22 Nos. Cable glands

2 Sets Space heater with thermostat and switch

2 Nos. Numerical triple pole IDMT non-directional with instantaneous high set elements
of at least
2 O/L + 1 E/L combined unit.(for feeder) and 3 O/L+ 1 E/F combined unit.(for
Capacitor bank)
2Nos Master Trip Relay with hand reset for electrical tripping with adequate no. of NO /
NC contacts.
1 set Over voltage relay, with time delay for taking care of switching surges as per
cl.5.7.3(v) (b)

1 No. Under voltage relay, with time delay for under voltages ranging from 60-90 % in
steps of 10%. With a timer as per cl.5.7.3(v) (d)
2 sets Trip circuits supervision relay.
1 No. Earth bus 3 x 25m copper
12 Flag relays of two element type for circuit breaker trouble Indications as per
specification
2 No. Contact multiplication relay latch type
2 sets DC supply supervision relay.

1 No. Timer for closing interlock to prevent switching ON of the capacitor bank before
capacitors are discharged to a residual voltage of 50 V.
1 No. Neutral unbalanced current operated relay with a timer for alarm and tripping as
per cl.5.7.3(v) (h).
1No. Automatic voltage relay to switch in and switch out capacitor banks automatically
at preset voltages for 33 kV capacitor banks and with a provision for bi-passing the
relay as per cl.5.7.3(v) (i).
2 Sets Name plates for mounted equipment (both on front panel and inside of the panel.

1 set Other equipment and protection relays required, if any, for satisfactory and
efficient operation of capacitor banks.

The alarm and annunciation system for this panel must be wired up for annunciation and
alarm through annunciation facia and alarm system located on 33kV Common alarm and
annunciation panel(Panel ‘N’).

Note: Any other component required for satisfactory operation shall be deemed to have been
included in the quoted price

78
 33 kV BUS SECTIONALISER FOR CONTROL RELAY PANEL

PANEL DESIGNATION PANEL ‘L’

USAGE for bus coupler

Circuit identification label 1 No.

Digital Ammeter class of accuracy 1.0. 1 No.

5 position Ammeter selector switch 1 No.

LED type Indicating lamps for the following functions: (16 No).

for breaker close permission indication of breaker 1 No.

for breaker open and close indication 2 No.

for healthy trip indication of the two sets of trip coils of the 2 No.
breaker

indicating lamps for isolators open/close indicators 4 No.

for Bus PT1 and Bus PT2 on indication 6 No.

Indication lamp for Isolator interlock supply

ON indication (blue) 1 No.

painted and overlaid mimic diagram representing 1 No.

bus bars, connections and symbols and layout.

3 position 12 way control switch for C.B. 1 No.

3 position 12 way control switch for Bus isolators 2 No.

Semaphore indicators : for bus isolators, 2 No.

earth switches of isolator 2 No.

Semaphore indicator for breaker 1 No.

Trip circuit supervision relays for continuous

supervision (pre-close and after close supervision) 1 set.
of trip coil I & II circuit(breaker having 2Nos.
of trip coils ( each trip coil is common to all 3 phases)

3 pole DC auxiliary Relays with flag indicators. 2 No.

Synchronizing socket switch (12 pin) 1 No.

2 pole MCB for DC supply control with N.C 1 No.

contact for annunciation

79
12 way annunciation scheme comprising the following: 1 set.

a) Annunciation windows for 12 way

c) 3nos. Push buttons for alarm accept, rest, lamp
test and alarm test.
d) Alarm relays for 12 ways.

Door operated internal cubicle illumination lamp 1 No.

3 pin 15 AC plug socket with switch control and 3 pin plug 1 No.

Cable glands 1 set

AC and DC fuses 1 set

Thermostat operated cubicle heater with switch control 1 set

Earth bus 1 No.

Name plates for the mounted equipment both on front panel 2 sets
and inside

Terminal blocks with required stud type terminals and 1 set

20% spare terminals with required bolts and nuts.

Back up protection scheme of numerical type as per technical 1 set

Specification clause 5.7.2 B consisting of
a) 3pole. Non-directional over current relays
b) Single pole non-directional IDMT earth fault relay
3 O/L + 1 E/L combined unit.

Trip circuit supervision relays (clause 5.1.17) 6 Nos.

DC supply supervision relays (clause 5.1.22) 2 Nos.
Auxiliary relay for the above for alarm 1 No.

High speed 3 phase trip relay (clause 5.1.18) 1 set

Supervision relay for the above 1 No.

Flag relay for two element type for circuit breaker trouble 6 Nos.
as specified (clause 5.1.19)

Contact multiplication relay latch type for breaker 1 No.

Contact multiplying relays latch type for Bus-1 earth switch

and Bus-2 earth switch 4 Nos.

The alarm and annunciation system for this panel must be wired up for annunciation and
alarm through annunciation facia and alarm system located on 33kV Common alarm and
annunciation panel(Panel ‘N’).
Note: Any other component required for satisfactory operation shall be deemed to have been
included in the quoted price.

80
M SYNCHRONISING TROLLEY:

Mobile Synchronising trolley fitted with wheels conforming to Clause 5.1.16 of

Chapter-IX of Vol. III, equipped with the following

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sl.No. Item Description Quantity in Nos.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. Voltmeters with a dual scale 2

2. Frequency meter (45-50-55 Hz) 2

3. Synchroscope 1

4. Synchroscope cut off switch 1

5. Synchronising selector switch(Lockable type with keys) 1

6. Indicating lamps for the following

i) Bright lamp synchronising 2

ii) synchroscope on 1
iii) synchronism in limits 1
iv) synchronism by pass 1

7. Check synchronising relay 1

8. Guard relay for above 1

9. Auxiliary relay for Synchro check relay 1

10. Reversing phase VT for bright lamp 1

synchronism

11. Auxiliary VTs 63.5/110 V ratio for 2

synchroscope.

12. 8 core flexible synchronising 1

trolley cable 3 meter length
with plug suitable for 12 pin
socket

81
PANEL N : Common alarm and annunciation equipment, recorders and meters for 33kV
Switch yard to be provided on one separate panel for each of the substations.

Simplex panels as required to be equipped and wired with the following equipment.

Sl No. Item Description Quantity in Nos.

1 Common annunciation equipment consisting of the
following
Flasher relay with heavy duty contacts 1
Push buttons for flasher bus test / DC hooter test 2
Indicating lamp for flasher bus healthy indication 1
DC hooter for alarm circuits 1
2 DC fail alarm scheme consists of the following
Indicating lamp for DC faill indication 1
Push buttons for DC fail alarm accept & test 2
Alarm DC supply supervision relay 1
AC relay for accepting DC fail alarm 1
AC Bell for alarm DC fail 1
3 AC fail alarm scheme consisting of the following
Indicating lamp for AC fail indication 1
Push buttons for AC fail alarm accept & test 2
AC supply supervision relay 1
DC relay for accepting AC fail alarm 1
DC Buzzer for AC fail alarm 1
4 Digital frequency meters for Bus- 1
5 Digital volt meters for Bus 2
6 Voltage recorders for Bus as per clause 5.1.10.c.5 with 2
chart roll
7 Frequency recorders for Bus as per clause 5.1.10.c.5 with 2
chart roll
8 Control switch for isolators for BusPT1 and Bus PT2 2
9 Indicating lamps for ON/OFF indication of above isolators 4
10 Semaphore indicators for Bus PT1 and Bus PT2 isolator 4
earth switches (Double earth switch)
11 Bus Volt Meters 2
12 4 Position volt meter selector switches for above 2
13 a) Mimic to represent SLD for Bus PT1 and Bus PT2 with 1 set
Bus sectionliser and station Transformer
14 Indication lamps for Bus live indication 2
15 Annunciation facia 20
16 Push Button for alarm accept and reset 3

82
Common annunciation, alarm panel with accessories like recorders and meters for 132 kV
switch yard to be provided on one separate panel to be equipped with the following and
fully wired.

Quantity in Nos.
PANEL ‘P’
PANEL ‘O’
for double main and
Sl.No Item Description for double bus
transfer bus
arrangement
arrangement
(Gharbara)
(Recreation Green)
1 Digital frequency meters for Bus-1 and
2 2
Bus-2
2 Digital volt meters for Bus -1 and Bus-2 2 2
3 Voltage recorders for Bus-1 and Bus-2 as
2 2
per clause
4 Frequency recorders for Bus-1 and Bus-2
2 2
as per clause
5 Control switch for isolator for Bus-1 PT
2 2
and Bus-2 PT
6 Indicating lamps for ON/OFF indication
4 4
of above isolators
7 Semaphore indicators for Bus-1 PT / Bus-
II PT isolator earth switch (Double earth 4 4
switch)
8 Bus-I / Bus-II Volt Meters 2 2
9 4 Position volt meter selector switches for
2 2
above
10 a) Mimic to prepresent SLD for Bus-I PT
1 set -
and Bus-II PT
b) Mimic to represent SLD for Bus-I PT
- 1 set
and Bus-II PT and transfer bus
11 Frequency meters 2 2
12 Indication lamps for Bus-I, Bus-II Live
3 3
indication
13 Indicating lamp for transfer bus live
- 1
indicator

83
 Quantity in Nos.
PANEL ‘P’
PANEL ‘O’
for double main and
Sl.No Item Description for double bus
transfer bus
arrangement
arrangement
(Gharbara)
(Recreation Green)
14 Annunciation facia 20 20
15 Push Button for alarm accept and reset 3 3
16 Common annunciation equipment
consisting of the following
a Flasher relay with heavy duty contacts 1 1
b Push buttons for flasher bus test/ DC 2 2
hooter test
c Indicating lamp for flasher bus healthy 1 1
indication
d DC hooter for alarm circuits 1 1
17 DC fail alarm scheme consist of the
following
a Indicating lamp for DC fail indication 1 1
b Push buttons for DC fail alarm accept & 2 2
test
c Alarm DC supply supervision relay 1 1
d AC relay for accepting DC fail alarm 1 1
e AC Bell for alarm DC fail 1 1
18 AC fail alarm scheme consisting of the
following
a Indicating lamp for AC fail indication 1 1
b Push buttons for AC fail alarm accept & 2 2
test
c AC supply supervision relay 1 1
d DC relay for accepting AC fail alarm 1 1
e DC Buzzer for AC fail alarm 1 1

84
PANEL Q : Common Equipment For The Energy Meters

Sl.No. Item Description Quantity in Nos.

1 Hand held device for data collection from Energy 1 Set
meters
2 Calibration Equipment for Energy Meters. as per 1 Set
Specification Clause No.17.8

85
Panel ‘R’: COMMON EQUIPMENT FOR DISTURBANCE RECORDER:

DISTURBANCE RECORDER EVALUATION UNIT COMPRISING OF

Sl.No Item Description Quantity in Nos.

1 PC Desk top Pentium –IV @ 3.2GHz, 512 MB 1 set
RAM, 120 GB HDD, 1.44’FDD 17’’ SVGA Colour
Monitor, 105 keys key board and 1 optical scroll
mouse along with 1 parallel port and 2 serial ports
Evaluation software 1 set
High speed 132 Column with Colour option Laser 1
printer
Packets of Z fold paper, each packet with 500 sheets 10
Inverter for PC / Monitor / Printer 1
Furniture for PC 1
Furniture for printer 1
Shielded cables as required for connection between 1 set
acquisition units and evaluation unit
Any other common equipment accessories for 1 set
evaluation unit for Disturbance recorder as required

*Disturbance recorder as specified shall be an integral part of IED specified vide the
technical specification for Substation Automation (Chapter XIII of section IX) and as such
gets covered in the price schedule therein. If so, the cost of those items shall not be included
in the cost to be quoted against panel ‘S’ in the price schedule (1A) relevant to CR panels.

86
PANEL S : EVENT LOGGER PANEL

Simplex panels as required to be equipped and wired with the following equipment.

Sl No Item Description Quantity in Nos.

1 *Event logger as per clause No.5.1.10.f of Technical 1 Set*
specification
2 *DC converter for event logger 1
3 DC supervision relay 1
4 PC Desk top Pentium – 4 @ 3.2 GHz, 512 MB RAM,80 1 Set
GB HDD, 1.44FDD 17”0 SVGA Colour monitor,105
Keys keyboard and 1 scroll mouse along with 1 parallel
port and 2 serial interface.
5 High speed 132 column with color option Laser printer. 1
6 Packets of Z-fold paper, cash packet with 500 sheets 10
7 Inverter for PC/Monitor/Printer 1
8 Furniture for PC 1
9 Furniture for printer 1
10 Any other equipment as required 1 Set.

The bidder shall indicate the detailed bill of material on these panels in the quotation.

* Event logger and DC converter as specified shall be an integral part of IED specified vide
the technical specification for Substation Automation (Chapter XIII of section IX) and as
such gets covered in the price schedule therein. If so the cost of those items shall not be
included in the cost to be quoted against panel ‘S’ in the price schedule (1A) relevant to CR
panels.

87
 Annexure -II

A - SPARES FOR 132 KV FEEDER CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS

FOR EACH 132 kV SUBSTATION

DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

Numerical distance relays complete 1 Nos.

(full scheme)

Single pole numerical Dir. IDMT O/C relays with high set. 3 Nos.

Single pole numerical Dir. IDMT E/F relays with high set. 1 Nos.

High Speed Master Trip Relays 3 Nos

Digital Ammeters 1 Nos.

Ammeter Selector Switches 1 Nos.

Digital Voltmeters 1 Nos.

Voltmeter Selector Switches 1 Nos.

Digital Power factor Meters 1 Nos.

Digital Frequency Meters 1 Nos.

LED Indicating lamps 10 Nos.

Digital Multimeters for 3 – ph voltage, current, 1 Nos.

MW, MVAR and PF

88
 B - SPARES FOR 50 MVA 132/33 KV TRANSFORMER PANELS
AT EACH 132 kV SUBSTATION

DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

Numerical Transformer differential relays 1 Nos.

Over fluxing relays 1 Nos.

Triple pole Numerical IDMT non directional O/C 1 Nos.

relays with high set AND

Single pole numerical IDMT directional E/F relays with high set 3 Nos.

OR
Four pole Numerical Dir. Cum Non. Dir.IDMT (3 O/C + 1 E/F relay 3 Nos.
with high Set.
Restricted earth fault scheme complete 1 No.
Digital Ammeters 1 Nos.

Ammeter Selector Switches 1 Nos.

Digital Voltmeters 1 Nos.

Voltmeter Selector Switches 1 Nos.

LED Indicating lamps 10 Nos.

Digital Millimeters for 3 – ph voltage current, 1 Nos.

MW, MVAR and PF

* The relays shall be confirming to those offered in the offer i.e. if triple pole relays are
offered, triple pole relays shall be quoted as spares.

C - SPARES FOR 132KV BUS BAR PROTECTION PANEL

DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

Trip Relays - 4 Nos.

Voltage recorder as per clause 5.1.10.c.5 - 1 Nos.
Frequency recorder as per clause 5.1.10.c.5 - 1 Nos
Chart rolls (at the speed of 60 mm/hour)and
Ink required for the recorders 1Lot
Commissioned for a further period of two years

89
 D - SPARES FOR 33 kV TWIN FEEDER PANEL
FOR EACH SUBSTATION

DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

Triple pole numerical non directional IDMT relay 3 Nos.

With high set ( 2 nos. O/C + 1 nos. E/F)

LED indicating lamps 10 Nos

E - SPARES FOR 33 kV SECTIONALISER PANEL AND COMMON ALARM AND

ANNUNCIATION PANEL FOR EACH SUBSTATION

DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

LED indicating lamps 6 Nos.

Protection scheme of numerical type as per technical

Specification clause 5.7.2B consisting of 1 set
a) 3 pole Non-directional over current relays
b) Single pole Non-directional IDMT earth fault relay

Voltage recorder as per clause 5.1.10.c.5 - 1 Nos.

Frequency recorder as per clause 5.1.10.c.5 - 1 Nos
Chart rolls (at the speed of 60 mm/hour)and
Ink required for the recorders 1Lot
Commissioned for a period of two years

F- SPARES FOR 33 kV TWIN FEEDER PANEL K-2

FOR EACH SUBSTATION

DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

Triple pole numerical non directional IDMT relay 1 Nos.

With high set ( 2 nos. O/C + 1 nos. E/F) offered against
Capacitor bank feeder

LED indicating lamps 6 Nos

The following relays as offered for the protection of

Capacitor banks
i. Over voltage trip relay 1 No.
ii. Under voltage trip relay 1 No.
iii. Neutral unbalance current alarm and trip relay 1 set
iv. Master trip relay 1 No.
v. AVR relay 1 No.

90
 ANNEXURE - II (A)

REQUIREMENT OF ADDITIONAL RELAYS FOR TRANSFORMER PROTECTION

1) Auxiliary relays for internal faults:

Transformer relay panel shall be provided with adequate number of auxiliary relays
needed for main Buchholz trip, winding temperature trip, oil temp. trip, pressure
relief device trip, OLTC Buchholz trip and low oil level trip. The contacts of these
relays shall be used for annunciation (i.e. for Local, DAS (Data Acquisition
System) and SCADA (Substation Control & Data Acquisition), and tripping. The
contacts of these relays shall be wired up for energizing the master trip relay. These
auxiliary relays shall be provided with hand reset operation indicators.

2) Auxiliary relays for supervisory alarms:

Transformer relay panel shall be provided with adequate number of auxiliary relays
needed for, winding temp. high, oil temp. high, main buchholz, low oil level and
cooling system Supervision, annunciations. These relays shall have sufficient
No. of potential free contacts to cater for local annunciation, DAS and SCADA.

3) Master trip relay for transformer:

Transformer relay panel shall be provided with two sets of master trip relays to trip
the circuit breakers through the two separate D.C. sources. Operating time of
master trip relay shall be less than 10 ms. The master trip relay shall be wired up to
intertrip both the H.V. and I.V. circuit breakers.

The relay shall have adequate number of contacts as will be required for the scheme.

91
 Annexure - III
UNIT PRICES FOR ADDITION/DELETION OF COMPONENTS

Unit prices for the following equipment shall be quoted for purpose of additions/deletions shall be
quoted. The rates offered shall be valid for period of 5 years.

1) Digital Ammeter
2) Digital Volt Meter
3) Digital MW Meter
4) Digital MVAR Meter
5) Electronic Energy Meter for registering both import and export of a MWH (0.2 class)
and MVARH ( 1 class)
6) 3 phase 4 wire test terminal block for energy meter.
7) Ammeter selector switch, 5 position
8) Volt meter selector switch , 6 way.
9) LED Indicating lamp complete with fittings
10) Push button with 1 N/O + 1 N/C contacts
11) Breaker control switch
12) Isolator control switch
13) Semaphore for breaker
14) Semaphore for isolator
15) Synchronizing switch
16) Synchronizing socket (12 pin/6 pin)
17) Check Synchronizing selector switch
18) 2 pole MCB for DC supply contact
19) 12 way annunciation facia with lamps
20) Annunciation relay for 4 ways
21) Annunciation relay for 6 ways
22) Extra for providing for one annunciation way
23) Alarm bell relay
24) Flasher relay
25) Alarm bell for trip alarm
26) Hooter for non-trip alarm
27) DC Bell
28) DC fail alarm relay (AC/DC relay)

92
29) Single pole Aux. Relay with 6 pairs
30) 2 pole DC Aux relay with 6 pairs contacts
31) Contactors with flag relay two element type for CB trouble, Transformer trouble&6
pairs of contacts.
32) Auxiliary relay with 3 pairs for heavy duty contacts
33) High speed tripping relay with 8 N/O contacts
34) Auto re-closer relay
35) Check Synchronizing relay
36) Dead line charging relay
37) Pole discrepancy relay
38) Auto re-closer selector relay
39) Guard relay for check synchronizing
40) Local breaker back up protection scheme
41) Carrier in/out selector switch
42) PT supply selector switch
43) Trip circuit Supervision relay.
44) Voltage selector relay for selecting Bus-I PT/Bus-II PT supply
45) Distance (basic scheme) to fault locator
46) Printer for fault locator
47) VT fuse failure relay for Main-I/Main-II distance scheme
48) Power swing blocking relay of Main-I Main-II distance scheme
49) Fourth zone feature for Main-II protection distance scheme
50) PT/CVT supply selector switch

Prices of individual relays modules required for the schemes provided shall also be
indicated here.

Any other spares if required shall also be indicated here.

93
 ANNEXURE-IV
ANNUNCIATOR WINDOW DETAILS
50 MVA, 132/33kV Transformer
Panel
Differential Protection Operated (T)
HC O/C Protn Operated (T)
HV E/F Protn Operated (T)
HV Over fluxing Operated (T)
Transformer Bucholtz Trip (T)
HV Winding Temp. trip (T)
LV Winding Temp. trip (T)
Oil Temp. trip (T)
Low oil level trip (T)
Tap Changer Bucholz trip (T)
PRD Trip (T)
Under Frequency Trip (T)
HV – TC-1 Faulty (NT)
HV – TC-2 Faulty (NT)
LV O/C Protn Operated (T)
LV E/F Protn Operated (T)
LV – TC-1 Faulty (NT)
LV – TC-2 Faulty (NT)
DC Fail (NT)
HV/LV MCB Tripped (NT)
SF6 Gas pressure low
Breaker General lockout (NT)
Air Pressure Low (NT)
Restricted earth for protection operated

132kV Feeder Panel

Distance Protn operated (T)
O/C Protn operated (T)
E/F protn operated (T)
Power Swing Blocking operated (NT)
PT fuse fail (NT)
Carrier supply fail (NT)
Distance Protn Power supply fail (NT)
TC-1 Faulty (NT)
TC-2 Faulty (NT)
DC Fail (NT)
HV/LV MCB tripped (NT)
SF6 Gas pressure low
Breaker General lockout (NT)
Air pressure low (NT)
Carrier intertrip operated (T)

94
 ANNEXURE - V
Quantity Requirement and Delivery Schedule

s.no Details of Panels Qty Recreation

Gharbhara
al Green
village SS
SS
Control Panels.

1 Control panel for 132kV Circuits completely wired No.

and equipped as per specification and as per panel
designation 'A' of Annexure-I. suitable for Double - 2
Main Bus bar arrangement
2 Control panel for 132kV Circuits completely wired No
and equipped as per specification and as per panel
2 -
designation 'B' of Annexure-I suitable for Double
main and transfer Bus Arrangement.
3 Relay and protection panel for 132kV Circuits No
completely wired and equipped as per specification
- 2
and as per panel designation 'C' of Annexure-I.
suitable for Double Main Bus bar arrangement
4 Relay and protection panel for 132kV Circuits No.
completely wired and equipped as per specification
and as per panel designation 'D' of Annexure-I 2 -
suitable for Double main and transfer Bus
Arrangement.
5 Control, Relay & Protection Panel for 50 MVA, No.
132/33kV Power Transformer HV &LV Relay &
Control panel completely wired and equipped as per - 1
panel designation 'E' of Annexure-I and as per
specification
6 Control, Relay & Protection Panel for 50 MVA, No.
132/33kV Power Transformer HV &LV Relay &
Control panel completely wired and equipped as per 1 -
panel designation 'F' of Annexure-VIII and as per
specification
7 Protection panels for 132kV bus bar protection with No.
double Main bus arrangement completely wired and
- 1
equipped as per panel designation of G of Annexure-
I and as per specification.
8 Protection Panel for 132kV Bus Bar protection with Set
2 Nos. Main and 1 No Transfer Bus scheme,
completely wired and equipped as per panel 1 -
designation H of Annexure-I and as per
specification.
9 Control, Relay & Protection Panel for 132kV Bus No.
Coupler Breaker completely wired and equipped as
1 1
per panel designation 'I’ of Annexure-I and as per
specification

95
s.no Details of Panels Qty Recreation
Gharbhara
al Green
village SS
SS
10 Control, Relay & Protection Panel for 132kV Set
Transfer Bus Breaker completely wired and
1 -
equipped as per panel designation 'J of Annexure-I
and as per specification
11 Control Relay panel for 33kV feeders twin panel No.
completely wired and equipped as per panel
4 4
designation 'K-1’ of Annexure-I and as per
specification
12 Control Relay panel for 33kV feeders twin panel No.
completely wired and equipped as per panel
1 1
designation 'K-2’ of Annexure-I and as per
specification
12 Control Relay panel for 33kV Bus sectionalzer No
breaker completely wired and equipped as per panel
1 1
designation 'L’ of Annexure-I and as per
specification
33kV common panel for alarm, annunciation, No.
equipment, recorders and meters to be provided in
simplex panels completely wired and equipped as 1 1
per panel designation ‘N’ of Annexure-I and as per
specification
132kV common panel for alarm, annunciation, No.
equipment, recorders and meters to be provided in
simplex panels completely wired and equipped as - 1
per panel designation ‘O’ of Annexure-I and as per
specification
132kV common panel for alarm, annunciation, No.
equipment, recorders and meters to be provided in
simplex panels completely wired and equipped as 1 -
per panel designation ‘P’ of Annexure-I and as per
specification
13 Synchronizing trolleys fully wired and equipped as No.
per specification and as per panel designation 'M' as 1 1
per Annexure-I for 132kv circuits.
14 Supply of relay test kits with accessories as per lot
Cl.16.2 of Section IX Chapter-IX of Technical of 1
Vol-III.
15 Supply of mandatory spares as per Annexure-II
as per ‘A’ for 132kV feeder control relay panels Lot 1 1
as per ‘B’ for Transformer control relay panels Lot 1 1
as per ‘C’ for Bus bar control panels Lot 1 1
as per ‘D’ for 33kV feeder Lot 1 1
as per ‘E’ for 33 kV sectionalizer Lot 1 1
as per ‘F’ for 33 kV capacitor bank panel Lot 1 1
16 Tools and Scientific Instruments as per Specification
and Annexure-V
a) Earth Tester No. 1 1
b) Insulation Tester (5kV) No. 1 1

96
s.no Details of Panels Qty Recreation
Gharbhara
al Green
village SS
SS
c) Digital Multi Meters No. 1 1
d) Portable Primary current Injection test kit No. 1 -
e) Phase Sequence Indicator No. 1 1
f) Digital Clamp Meters No. 1 1
g) Analog Multi Meters No. 1 1
h) Vacuum Cleaners No. 1 1
i) Energy meter calibrating instrument as per 17.8 set. 1 -
j) Hand held device for data collection from Energy set 1 -
meters as per cl no.17.9
Common equipment for Disturbance recorder as
stated vide panel designation ‘R’ of Annexure-I as
given below;
1 PC Desk top Pentium –IV @ 3.2GHz, 512 MB set 1 1
RAM, 120 GB HDD, 1.44’FDD 17’’ SVGA Colour
Monitor, 105 keys key board and 1 optical scroll
mouse along with 1 parallel port and 2 serial ports
Evaluation software set 1 1
High speed 132 Column with Colour option Laser No. 1 1
printer
Packets of Z fold paper, each packet with 500 sheets Pac 10 10
ket
Inverter for PC / Monitor / Printer No 1 1
Furniture for PC No 1 1
Furniture for printer No 1 1
Shielded cables as required for connection between set 1 1
acquisition units and evaluation unit
Any other common equipment accessories for set 1 1
evaluation unit for Disturbance recorder as required
Common equipment for Event Logger as stated vide Set 1 1
panel designation ‘S’ of Annexure –I as given
below;
Event Logger as per clause No. 5.1.10.f of Technical No 1 1
specification
DC converter for event logger No. 1 1
DC supervision relay No. 1 1
PC Desk top Pentium –IV @ 3.2GHz, 512 MB Set 1 1
RAM, 40 GB HDD, 1.44’FDD 17’’ SVGA Colour

97
s.no Details of Panels Qty Recreation
Gharbhara
al Green
village SS
SS
Monitor, 105 keys key board and 1 optical scroll
mouse along with 1 parallel port and 2 serial ports
High speed 132 Column with Colour option Laser No. 1 1
printer
Packets of Z fold paper, each packet with 500 sheets No. 1 1
Inverter for PC / Monitor / Printer No. 1 1
Furniture for PC No. 1 1
Furniture for printer No. 1 1
Any other equipment as required Set 1 1
17 Dummy Panels (optional) No
2 2

All Control and Relay as stated above in complete shape with all accessories, fittings and
mandatory spares along with Relay Kit and Testing Instruments specified shall be delivered
within 6 months from the date of Letter of Award failing which Liquidated Damage as
specified vide clause No. 5 of Section-IV, Financial of Volume-I of this specification will get
attracted.

98
 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
CONTROL AND RELAY PANLES
(TO BE FILLED IN AND SIGNED BY THE TENDERER)
SCHEDULE - A --- GENERAL

A CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS

(To be furnished for different types of panels
separately)
1 Make & Type :
2 Type of sheet steel :
3 Thickness of sheet steel :
a) Front :
b) Back :
c) Sides :
4 Details of Paint treatment procedure :
5 Weight of each panel section :
6 Overall dimensions of each panel section in :
mm (width x depth x height)
7 Total weight of Panel :
8 Space required for installation of all panels :
9 Details of Tropicalisation :
10 Largest package for Transport :
a) Gross weight :
b) Overall dimensions :
11 Details of painting :
a) Exterior :
b) Interior :
12 Details of shock absorbing material :
provided
13 General arrangement drawing attached :
14 Ref.No. of descriptive leaflet :
15 Type and no. of terminal blocks used in the :
panel
16 Internal wiring of the panel
17 Degree of Protection :
18 Ref.No. and date of type test certificate
submitted
B SEMAPHORE INDICATORS:
1 Make :
2 Type :
3 Diameter of the disc :
4 Operating voltage :
5 Burden :
6 Is the color similar to mimic ? :
7 Is the coil continuously rated? :
8 Ref.No. of descriptive leaflet :
9 Ref.No. and date of type test certificate :
submitted

100
C TERMINAL BLOCK
1 Make :
2 Type & construction :
3 Applicable standards :
4 No. of terminal studs per way :
5 Rated current :
6 Rated voltage :
7 Materials used :
i) Body :
ii) Terminal studs :
iii) Connecting links :
iv) Support springs :
v) Cover :
vi) Lable :
vii) End stop :
8 Weight in Kgs :
9 Minimum No. of conductors of area 2.5 :
Sq.mm suitable for connection
i) All circuits except C.T. :
ii) C.T. Circuits :
10 % of spare terminals of each panel :
11 Whether shrouding provided for terminals :
of voltages more than 110 V AC/DC
12 Whether stud type brass terminals provided : YES/NO
13 Marking :
14 Ref.No. of descriptive leaflet :
15 Ref.No. and date of type test certificate :
submitted
D. (a) CONTROL SWITCHES
1 Make :
2 Type of the Switch :
3 Type of Handle :
4 No. of possible positions provided :
a) No. of contacts available in each position :
i) Open :
ii) Close :
b) Maximum No. of contacts which can be :
accommodated for each position
5 Rating of contacts :
a) Voltage :
b) Make and carry current continuously :
c) Make and carry current for 0.5 sec :
d) Break resistive load :
e) Break inductive load with L/R = 40 m. :
sec.
6 Whether locking arrangement provided :
7 Mounting details and drawing No :
8 Dimensions :
9 Other information, if any :
10 No. of slip contacts (lost motion type) :
a) after close :
b) after trip :

101
 c) maximum No. of slip contacts possible :
11 Standard to which conforms :
12 Detailed technical literature furnished : YES/NO
13 Ref. No. and date of type test certificate :
D. (b) MCBs. :
1 Type :
2 Continuous current rating :
3 Rated breaking capacity :
4 Wire size which the terminal can :
accommodate
5 Pad locking facility provided :
E. INDICATING LAMPS:
1 Make :
2 Type :
3 Ratings :
a) Current :
b) Voltage :
c) Wattage :
4 Type :
5 Permissible voltage variation :
6 Whether series resistance is provided, if so :
a) Ohmic value :
b) Power loss :
7 Life of lamp in burning hours :
8 Other information, if any :
9 Type of lens :
10 Identification inscription :
11 Dimension and mounting details :
12 Voltage withstand on continuous basis as a :
percentage of rated voltage
13 Ref.No. of descriptive leaflet submitted :
14 Ref.No. and date of type test certificate :
submitted
F. PUSH BUTTONS
Make :
Contact type momentary/maintained :
Whether shrouding provided to prevent :
inadvertent operation
Whether integral engraved inscription :
plates provided
No. of NO/NC contacts :
Make and carry capacity in amps at 250 :
VDC
Break capacity (in amps) :
Ref.No. of descriptive leaflet submitted :
Ref.No. and date of type test certificate :
submitted

102
G. ANNUNCIATORS
Make and type :
No. of windows :
Dimensions of each window (Length x :
height x depth)
No. of lamps per window :
Auxiliary supply voltage :
Power consumption :
Details of auxiliary equipment such as :
relays etc.
No. of lines of inscriptions :
Type of reset-manual/self :
Overall dimensions . of annunciators :
Size of lettering :
Technical literature :
Brief write-up of the scheme furnished :
H. INDICATING METERS:
(To be furnished separately for each type of
meter)
1 Make and type :
2 Type of movement :
3 Type of mounting :
4 Range :
a) Effective range :
b) Fiducial value :
5 C.T. Ratio :
6 P.T. Ratio :
7 Details of shunt, if any :
a) Rated Current :
b) Rated voltage drop :
8 Accuracy class :
9 Total deflection angle :
10 Total scale length :
11 Overall dimensions :
12 Reference condition of influencing :
quantities
13 Limits of influencing quantities for its :
application
14 Limit of error for variation of each of the :
influencing quantities
15 Limits of error in effective range :
16 Power consumption :
a) Current coil :
Burden :
a) Current coil :
b) Voltage coil :
17 Short time rating :
a) Current coil :
b) Voltage coil :
c) Time :
18 Other details :

103
19 Detailed literature furnished :
20 Weight :
21 Whether magnetically shielded or not :
22 Continuous over loading :
a) Current coil :
b) Potential coil :
23 Temperature at which calibrated :
24 Ref. No. and date of type test certificate :
submitted
I. ENERGY METERS:
1 Make and size :
2 Type of measurement :
3 Measuring range :
4 C.T. Ratio :
5 P.T. Ratio :
6 Current coil rating :
7 Voltage coil rating :
8 Accuracy at 125%, 10% and 250% of rated :
a) active energy measurement :
b) reactive energy measurement :
9 Power consumption :
a) Current coil :
b) Potential coil :
10 VA burden of current coil :
11 VA burden of potential coil :
12 Limits of error at UPF and :
a) rated current :
b) 125% of rated current :
c) 25% of rated current :
d) 10% of rated current :
e) 5% of rated current :
13 Limits of error at 0.5 PF (lag) and :
a) rated current :
b) 125% of rated current :
c) 25% of rated current :
d) 10% of rated current :
e) 5% of rated current :
14 Continuous overload rating of current coil :
a) For thermal limit :
b) For accuracy limit :
15 Short time overload rating of current coil :
a) Current :
b) Time :
16 over voltage rating of potential coil :
(i) Continuous
(ii)30 seconds
(iii) 30 minutes
17 Reverse running stop provided :
18 Short time over voltage rating of potential :
coil
19 Standard to which it conforms :
20 Mounting details :

104
21 Whether tropicalised :
22 Auxiliary supply :
23 Suitability for measurement on unbalanced :
- 3 phase wire system
24 No. of digits upto which meter can register :
without requiring to reset
25 Starting watts at UPF :
26 Reference conditions of influencing :
quantities
27 Limits of influencing quantities for its :
application
28 Temperature at which calibrated (degree C) :
29 Weight :
30 Whether magnetically shielded or not? :
31 Limits of error in the effective Range :
32 Variation of air temperatures maximum
temperature co-efficient of error in
percent per Deg. C at
i) Unity pf
ii) 0.5 pf (lag)
33 Variation of frequency percent error due
to 5% variation in frequency
i) At unity pf
ii) At 0.5 pf (lag)
34 Reference Nos. of descriptive leaflets :
submitted.
35 Testing facilities and other details, if any. :
36 Ref.No. & date of type test certificate :
submitted.
37 Whether meter can be synchronized With :
GPS time syn.equipment .
38 Whether front end optical port is :
Available for data collection
39 Whether meter can communicate with :
SMS/SCADA
40 Whether meter has ABT compatibility in
terms of CEA’s ‘Metering code’ and ‘Grid
code’ of CERC
J. RECORDING INSTRUMENTS:
(Information to be given for each type of
recorder separately)
1 Make and type :
2 Type of Mounting :
3 Range of parameter that can be Recorded :
4 Range of basic movement (in case of :
transducer- operated system)
5 Accuracy :
6 Range and choice of speeds :
7 Paper width :
8 Length of chart :
9 Auxiliary supply :
- voltage :

105
 - current :
- watts :
10 Permissible variation in auxiliary supply :
11 VA burden :
12 Type of case (draw-out/non draw-out) :
13 Detailed technical literature furnished :
14 Chart driving mechanism :
15 Reserve power for chart drive :
16 Strip type chart provided, of so speed of :
the chart in max/min
17 Standard to which the recorder conforms :

106
 SCHEDULE-B SPECIFIC

50 MVA 132/33kV TRANSFORMER HV/LV CONTROL & RELAY PANELS.

TECHNICAL PARTICULARS MW/MVAR Meters Volt Meter Ammeter

A INSTRUMENTS AND METERS
A (i) Type and make of instrument
(ii) Reference of GTP of this instrument
under Schedule-A
B Size
C Range
(i)Effective Range
ii) Limits of error in the Effective range
VA Burden
i) Current Coil
ii) Potential Coil
ISS Grade of Acccuracy
Description leaflet Reference Nos.
submitted
B ELECTRONIC ENERGY METERS
A (i) Type and make of instrument
(ii) Reference of GTP of this meter
under Schedule-A
B Rating of Current Coil & Potential coil
C Continuous with stand
D capacity of the above coils
E Variation of voltage to cause a change of
not more than 1% at any load from full
to 1/10
F Type of register mechanism
With register constant
C DETAILS OF THE PANELS
(i) Type and make of the panel
(ii) Reference of GTP of this panel under
Schedule-A
D ANNUNCIATORS
Make, type and number of windows
Particulars of wiring
Rated voltage
Power consumption
Instantaneous making capacity contacts
Breaking capacity
E 50 MVA 132/33 kV TRANSFOMER
DIFFERENTIAL RELAY
Make and Type
Current Coil Rating
Tap Range
i) Coil - 1
ii) Coil - 2
Maximum VA Burden

107
 i) Operating Coil:
ii) Restraining Coil
E Is the slope setting variable? if so, range
of slope setting
F (i) Are the Second Harmonic Restraining
features provided or not
(ii)Is 5th Harmonic by pass provided?
A Stability at through fault Current of 15
times tap setting
b Range of HT / LT current ratio over
which the Relay can be used.
Operating time Cycles Min Max
a) At 2 x In :
b) At 10 x In
Trip contact rating (Amps)
Whether seal in contacts provided or not
Power consumption of
i) Operating coil :
ii) Restraining coil :
Details of auxiliary CTs.
Reference No. of the Descriptive leaflet
enclosed
Contact rating
i)Make and carry continuously
ii) Make and carry 0.5 sec.
iii) Break resistive load and inductive load
with 40 milli sec. time constant.
Type of mounting
No. of pair of make and break Contacts
Pick up/drop off ratio
Resetting time
Normal voltage
Permissible variation in voltage
Nominal current (in case of current
operated relay)
Permissible variation in current:
Type of casing and available number of
terminals
Whether three instantaneous units provided
Bias setting range
Operating current setting
Detailed literature furnished
C PROTECTIVE RELAYS OVER
CURRENT & EARTH FAULT RELAYS
a.Non-Directional
1.Make
2.Type &Reference Standard
3.Current coil rating
4.Tap range
VA Burden :

108
 i) Highest tap
ii) Lowest tap
5. Rated d.c voltage
6. Operating principle
7.Thermal rating
8.Rated current or (&) voltage
9.Power Consumption
i) Highest tap
ii) Lowest tap
10. Time of operation at maximum Time
setting at .
i) 5 times tap setting current
ii) 10 times tap setting current
11.Type of characteristics
12.Whether draw out type or not
13. Trip contact rating
(i) Make and carry continuously
(ii) Make and carry for 0.5 sec.
(iii)Break resistive load and Inductive load
with 40 milli sec. Time constant
14. No. of pair for make and break
contacts
15.Whether seal in contacts are provided
16.Reference No. of the Descriptive leaflet
enclosed
B DIRECTIONAL
1. Maker's name
2. Type
3. Polarisation
i) Current :
ii) Potential :
4. Current coil rating
5. Potential coil rating
6. V.A. Burden
i) Current coil :
ii) Highest tap :
iii) Lowest tap :
iv) Potential coil :
7. Time of operation at
i) 5 times tap setting :
ii) 10 times tap setting :
8. Type of characteristic
9. Directional sensitivity
10. Over current unit setting range
i) Inverse time :
ii) High set inst. unit :
11. Earth fault unit setting range :
i) Inverse time :
ii) High set inst. unit :
12 Maximum forque angle
13 Descriptive leaflet Ref. (to be enclosed).

109
P. TRANSFORMER OVERFLUXING
RELAY
1. Make
2. Type
3. Reference Standards
4. Rated current or (&) voltage :
5. Rated d.c. voltage :
6. Operating principle :
7. Solid state or Electro mechanical
8. Thermal rating :
9. Number of contacts :
i) Normally open :
ii) Normally closed :
10. Contacts - Self reset/hand reset
11. Burden :
12. Operating indicator provided? :
13. Contact ratings
i) Make and carry continuously:
ii) Make and carry for 0.5 sec.:
iii) Break
I. Resistive load :
II. Inductive load with L/R = 40
milli seconds)
14. Setting ranges
i) V/F
ii) Time for alarm
iii) Time for tripping
15. Whether inverse time operating
characteristics provided
16. Whether different time multiplier
settings provided
17. Max. operating time of the relay:
i) at 1.4 times the rated
value of V/f
ii) at 1.5 times the rated
value of V/f
18. Detailed literature enclosed :
RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT
RELAY
1. Make
2. Type
3. Reference Standards
4. Rated current or (&) voltage
5. Rated d.c. voltage
6. Operating principle
7. Solid state or Electromechanical
8. Thermal rating
9. Number of contacts
i) Normally open
ii) Normally closed
10. Case dimensions (overall) in mm

110
11. Cut out dimensions in mm height x
width
12. Weight in Kgs.
13. Contacts - Self reset/ hand reset
14. Burden
15. Operation indicator provided
16. Contacts ratings
i) Make and carry continuously
ii) Make and carry for 0.5 sec
iii) Break
I. Resistive load
II. Load (with L/R = 40 milli
seconds)
17. Operating time at 2 x setting current
18. Tuned to system frequency?
19. Setting range
20 Is it with high impedance with
stabilising resistor or not?
21. Detailed literature

111
 132 KV BUS BAR PROTECTION PANEL (Double Main Bus bar arrangement)

TECHNICAL PARTICULARS MW/MVAR Meters Volt Meter Ammeter

A INSTRUMENTS AND METERS :
a) Type of instrument
b) Reference of GTP of this instrument
under Schedule-A
c) scale length
d)Short time over load Capacity
e)Description leaflet
Reference Nos. submitted

B) DETAILS OF THE PANELS :

a) Make and type of the panel
b) Reference of GTP of this panel
under Schedule-A
c) Guage of the panel
d) Height, width and depth
of the panel
e) Weight of the panel

C) ANNUNCIATORS :
a) (i) Make, Type and particulars
of window
(ii) No, of windows
b) Reference of GTP of this panel
under Schedule-
c) Particulars of wiring
d) Rated voltage
e) Power consumption
e) Instantaneous making capacity
contacts
f) Breaking capacity

D. BUS BAR PROTECTION SCHEME

1 Make and type designation :

2 General design (Numeric) :
3 Impedance type (low/high/moderately :
high)
4 Principle of operation :
5 Maximum operating time :
6 Maximum resetting time :
7 DC supply :
8 Whether relay is suitable for all types of :
faults
9 Whether separate CT core required? :
10 Whether aux. CTs required, if any, are :
built in or being provided separately?
11 Whether relays can perform correctly even :
under CT saturation condition?

112
12 Whether relay remains stable for severe :
through faults?
13 Whether check feature available built in? :
14 Type of indicators provided? :
15 Output contact ratings and configuration? :
16 Maximum number of feeders/circuits that :
can be connected to the relay
17 Whether CT secondary open circuit :
supervision facility available
18 Whether isolator auxiliary contact :
monitoring provided
19 Does the scheme give 100% security and :
reliability during all system operating
conditions?
20 Any other relevant information :
21 Current rating
22 Maximum permissible loop resistance
23 typical setting and range of selection.
24 Whether seal in contacts are provided
25 CT zone selection relays
26 CT requirements, if any

113
 132 KV BUS BAR PROTECTION PANEL
(Double Main & Transfer Bus bar arrangement)
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS MW/MVAR Meters Volt Meter Ammeter
A) INSTRUMENTS AND METERS :
a) Type of instrument
b) Reference of GTP of this instrument
under Schedule-A
c) scale length
d) Short time over load Capacity
e) Description leaflet
Reference Nos. submitted
B) DETAILS OF THE PANELS :
a) Make and type of the panel
b) Reference of GTP of this panel
under Schedule-A
c) Guage of the panel
d) Height, width and depth
of the panel
e) Weight of the panel
C) ANNUNCIATORS :
a) (i)Make, Type and particulars
of window
(ii) No, of windows
b) Reference of GTP of this panel
under Schedule-
c) Particulars of wiring
d) Rated voltage
e) Power consumption
e) Instantaneous making capacity
contacts
f) Breaking capacity

D. BUS BAR PROTECTION SCHEME

1 Make and type designation :

2 General design (Numeric) :
3 Impedance type (low/high/moderately :
high)
4 Principle of operation :
5 Maximum operating time :
6 Maximum resetting time :
7 DC supply :
8 Whether relay is suitable for all types of :
faults
9 Whether separate CT core required? :
10 Whether aux. CTs required, if any, are :
built in or being provided separately?
11 Whether relays can perform correctly even :
under CT saturation condition?
12 Whether relay remains stable for severe :
through faults?

114
13 Whether check feature available built in? :
14 Type of indicators provided? :
15 Output contact ratings and configuration? :
16 Maximum number of feeders/circuits that :
can be connected to the relay
17 Whether CT secondary open circuit :
supervision facility available
18 Whether isolator auxiliary contact :
monitoring provided
19 Does the scheme give 100% security and :
reliability during all system operating
conditions?
20 Any other relevant information :
21 Current rating
22 Maximum permissible loop resistance
23 typical setting and range of selection.
24 Whether seal in contacts are provided
25 CT zone selection relays
26 CT requirements, if any

115
 132 kV FEEDER CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS

TECHNICAL PARTICULARS MW/MVAR Meters Volt Meter Ammeter

A) INSTRUMENTS AND METERS :
a) Type of instrument
b) Reference of GTP of this
instrument under Schedule-A
c) scale length
d) Short time over load Capacity
e) Description leaflet
Reference Nos. submitted
B) DETAILS OF THE PANELS :
a) Make and type of the panel
b) Reference of GTP of this panel
under Schedule-A
c) Guage of the panel
d) Height, width and depth of the
panel
e) Weight of the panel
C) ANNUNCIATORS :
a) (i)Make, Type and particulars
of windows
(ii) No, of windows
b) Reference of GTP of this panel
under Schedule-A
c) Particulars of wiring
d) Rated voltage
e) Power consumption
e) Instantaneous making capacity
contacts
f) Breaking capacity

D. ELECTRONIC ENERGY METERS :

1 Make and size :
2 Type of measurement :
3 Measuring range :
4 C.T. Ratio :
5 P.T. Ratio :
6 Current coil rating :
7 Voltage coil rating :
8 Accuracy at 125%, 10% and 250% of rated :
a) active energy measurement :
b) reactive energy measurement :
9 Power consumption :
a) Current coil :
b) Potential coil :
10 VA burden of current coil :
11 VA burden of potential coil :
12 Limits of error at UPF and :

116
 a) rated current :
b) 125% of rated current :
c) 25% of rated current :
d) 10% of rated current :
e) 5% of rated current :
13 Limits of error at 0.5 PF (lag) and :
a) rated current :
b) 125% of rated current :
c) 25% of rated current :
d) 10% of rated current :
e) 5% of rated current :
14 Continuous overload rating of current coil :
a) For thermal limit :
b) For accuracy limit :
15 Short time overload rating of current coil :
a) Current :
b) Time :
16 over voltage rating of potential coil :
(i) Continuous
(ii)30 seconds
(iii) 30 minutes
17 Reverse running stop provided :
18 Short time over voltage rating of potential :
coil
19 Standard to which it conforms :
20 Mounting details :
21 Whether tropicalised :
22 Auxiliary supply :
23 Suitability for measurement on unbalanced :
- 3 phase wire system
24 No. of digits upto which meter can register :
without requiring to reset
25 Starting watts at UPF :
26 Reference conditions of influencing :
quantities
27 Limits of influencing quantities for its :
application
28 Temperature at which calibrated (degree C) :
29 Weight :
30 Whether magnetically shielded or not? :
31 Limits of error in the effective Range :
32 Variation of air temperatures maximum
temperature co-efficient of error in
percent per Deg. C at
i) Unity pf
ii) 0.5 pf (lag)
33 Variation of frequency percent error due
to 5% variation in frequency
i) At unity pf
ii) At 0.5 pf (lag)
34 Reference Nos. of descriptive leaflets :
submitted.

117
35 Testing facilities and other details, if any. :
36 Ref.No. & date of type test certificate :
submitted.
37 Whether meter can be synchronized With :
GPS time syn.equipment .
38 Whether front end optical port is :
Available for data collection
39 Whether meter can communicate with :
SMS/SCADA
40 Whether meter has ABT compatibility in
terms of CEA’s ‘Metering code’ and ‘Grid
code’ of CERC
E) DISTANCE RELAY :
MAIN - I
Make and type
Type and number of distance measuring
Elements
i) Reactance
ii)Impedance
iii) MHO type
Starting unit :
i) Is a separate differential
relay provided or not ?
ii) Is the distance element
directional ?
iii) Type and number of measuring
elements
Number of Zones
First zone element taps are variable in
steps of
Second zone element taps are variable in
steps of
i) 3rd zone element taps are variable in
step
ii) MHO unit, if any off-set setting
possible and its range
Operating times
Max Min
i) Ist zone timing
ii) 2nd zone timing adjustable between
iii) 3rd zone timing adjustable
g) Out of step blocking relay provided
h) Have targets been provided for all
3 zones ?
i) Contact rating :
i) 1st zone
ii) 2nd zone
iii) 3rd zone
j) Can all carrier auxiliary relays be
provided
k) Recloser out off switch provided or not

118
 ?
l) VA burden of each phase
i) Current circuit
ii) Potential circuit
iii) D.C. circuit
m) Have seal in contacts been provided in
the trip circuit ?
n) Whether the relays are of
draw out type

O Required minimum AC voltage at relay :

terminals
P Required compensation setting Range :
Completely non-switched or Switched :
Q Numeric type :
R Type of shaped characteristic :
S Suitable for 3-phase trip :
T Technical literature furnished :

F PROTECTIVE RELAYS OVER CURRENT AND EARTH FAULT RELAYS

a) Type
b) Current coil rating
c) Tap range
d) VA burden
i) Highest tap
ii) Lowest tap
e) Power consumption
i) Highest tap
ii) Lowest tap
g) Time of operation at
h) max. time dial setting at :
i) 5 times tap setting
ii) 10 times tap setting
i) Type of characteristic
j) Whether draw out type or not
k) Trip contact rating
l) Whether seal in contacts are provided

F GENERAL
a) Panel sheet thickness
b) Over all dimensions :
i) Width
ii) Depth
iii) Height
c) Total weight of each type of panel
d) Internal finish
e) External finish

119
H. DISTURBANCE RECORDER
1 Name of manufacturer :
2 Manufacturer's type Designation :
3 Standards according to which disturbance :
recorders are manufactured
4 Operating voltage :
5 Frequency :
6 Data Acquisition Unit :
i) Resolution time for data acquisition :
ii) Whether Microprocessor based or not :
iii) Rate of scanning of analogue and :
digital quantities
iv) Analysis of recording of analogue :
quantities
-------------------------------------------------------------
Type of Channel Deflection Maximum
Sensitivity Deflection
-------------------------------------------------------------
AC/DC Current
AC/DC Volts
Watts/Var carrier
Zero seq.voltage
Multiphase Voltage
Period/freq.
Neg. seq.
------------------------------------------------------------
v) Rate of sampling :
7 Sensor's Details :
8 Recorder :
i) Type :
ii) Type of paper used :
iii) Recorder chart speed (% of rated speed :
for pre-fault & post fault period)
iv) Response time :
a) Transient response time suitable to :
resolve breaker pole timing and restrike
wave forms
b) % over shoot :
v) Phase accuracy at 50 Hz :
vi) 50 Hz interference(P-P) :
vii) Fluctuations due to zero trace noise :
(Peak to Peak)
viii)Full scale & division :
ix) Trace width :
x) Record clarity :
xi) Gain stability (%) :
xii) Linearity & Distortion :
xiii)Amplitude resolution :
9 Details of Event Tracer
i) Type :

120
 ii) Width space occupied on chart :
iii) Operating input current :
10 Isolation Levels :
11 Circuit Hi-Pot. Level :
AC Input :
Events :
DC Power :
Alarms :
AC sync. :
Overload Ratings :
Channel Continuous 1 Min. 1 Sec. Rating :
Rating Rating
AC Current :
AC Potential :
12 Printer Characteristics :
i) Type :
ii) Type of paper used :
iii) Test freq. of oscillation :
iv) Test pulse repetition period :
v) Test duration :
vi) Peak test voltage :
13 Calibration Devices: :
i) Current :
ii) Voltage :
iii) Accuracy :
14 Real Time Clock :
i) Type :
ii) Accuracy :
15 Type of controls provided for maintenance :
and calibration
16 Power Supply :
i) Power consumption :
ii) Frequency variation :
iii) Voltage fluctuations :
for A.C. - % and :
for D.C. - %
17 Service life of the equipment :
18 Overall dimensions of the Equipment :
Weight :
19 Whether type test certificates submitted :
20 Whether details of principles, details of :
individual equipments have been
submitted
I. DISTANCE ON-Line FAULT
LOCATORS:
1 Make :
2 Type :
3 Reference Standards :
4 Rated current or (&) voltage :
5 Rated d.c. voltage :
6 Operating principle :
7 Whether microprocessor based :

121
8 Thermal rating :
9 Number of contacts :
i) Normally open :
ii) Normally closed :
10 Contacts - Self reset/ hand reset :
11 Burden :
12 Operation indicator provided :
13 Contact ratings :
i) Make and carry continuously :
ii) Make and carry for 0.5 sec. :
iii) Break :
a) Resistive Load :
b) Inductive Load (with L/R = 40 milli :
sec.)
14 Maximum registering time :
15 Whether direct display unit provided? If :
so, details to be given.
16 Whether a printer included? if so, details to :
be given
17 D.C./D.C. Converter included? :
18 Separate phase to phase and phase to earth :
fault measurement units provided
19 Accuracy for all types of faults :
20 Descriptive literature (to be enclosed) :

33kV TWIN FEEDER CONTROL AND RELAY PANEL

A) INSTRUMENTS AND METERS :

a) Type of instrument
b) Reference of GTP of this instrument
under Schedule-A
c) scale length
d) Short time over load Capacity
e) Description leaflet
Reference Nos. submitted
B) DETAILS OF THE PANELS :
a) Make and type of the panel
b) Reference of GTP of this panel
under Schedule-A
c) Guage of the panel
d) Height, width and depth
of the panel
e) Weight of the panel

C) ANNUNCIATORS :
a) (i)Make, Type and particulars
of windows
(ii) No, of windows
b)Reference of GTP of this under Schedule-
A

122
 c) Particulars of wiring
d)Rated voltage
e)Power consumption
e)Instantaneous making capacity
contacts
f)Breaking capacity

D) ELECTRONIC NERGY METERS

a)Reference of GTP of this panel under
Schedule-A
b) Rating of Current Coil &
Potential coil.
c) Continuous with stand
capacity of the above coils
d) Variation of voltage to cause change of
not more than 1% at any load from full to
1/10
e) Type of register mechanism With register
constant
E) PROTECTIVE RELAYS OVER
CURRENT AND EARTH FAULT RELAYS
1 Makers Name
2 Type and reference standard
3 Current coil rating
4 Tap range
5 VA burden
i) Highest tap
ii) Lowest tap
6 Power consumption
i) Highest tap
ii) Lowest tap
7 Rated D.C voltage
8 Operating Principle
9 Thermal Rating
10 Rated current or (&) voltage
11 Time of operation at max. time dial
setting at :
i) 5 times tap setting
ii) 10 times tap setting
12 Type of characteristic
13 Whether draw out type or not
contact rating
i) Make and carry continuously
ii) Make and carry for 0.5 sec
iii) Break resistive load and Inductive
load with 40 Milli sec. Time constant
14 No. of pair for make and break
contacts.
15 Whether seal in contacts are provided

123
33kv Bus Sectionalizer Control Relay Panel:

A INSTRUMENTS AND METERS :

a) Type of instrument
b) Reference of GTP of this instrument
:
under Schedule-A
c) scale length
d) Short time over load Capacity
e) Description leaflet
Reference Nos. submitted
B)
DETAILS OF THE PANELS :
a) Make and type of the panel
b) Reference of GTP of this panel
under Schedule-A
c) Guage of the panel
d) Height, width and depth
of the panel
e) Weight of the panel

C) ANNUNCIATORS :
a) (i)Make, Type and particulars
of windows
(ii) No, of windows
b)Reference of GTP of this
under Schedule-A
c) Particulars of wiring
d) Rated voltage
e) Power consumption
e) Instantaneous making capacity
contacts
f) Breaking capacity

D) ELECTRONIC NERGY METERS

a) Reference of GTP of this panel under
Schedule-A
(b)Rating of Current Coil &
Potential coil.
c). Continuous with stand

124
 capacity of the above coils
d) Variation of voltage to cause change of
not more than 1% at any load from full to
1/10
e) Type of register mechanism With register
constant
E PROTECTIVE RELAYS OVER
CURRENT AND EARTH FAULT RELAYS
Makers Name
a) Type and reference standard
b) Current coil rating
c) Tap range
d) VA burden
i) Highest tap
ii) Lowest tap
e) Power consumption
i) Highest tap
ii) Lowest tap
Rated D.C voltage
Operating Principle
Thermal Rating
Rated current or (&) voltage
f) Time of operation at
max. time dial setting at :
i) 5 times tap setting
ii) 10 times tap setting

g) Type of characteristic
h) Whether draw out type or not
i) contact rating
i) Make and carry continuously
ii) Make and carry for 0.5 sec
iii) Break resistive load and Inductive
load with 40 Milli sec. Time
constant
t) No. of pair for make and break
contacts.
j) Whether seal in contacts are
provided

125
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF OVERCURRENT RELAYS,
E/F RELAYS, OVERVOLTAGE RELAYS, UNDER VOLTAGE RELAYS AND
UNBALANCE CURRENT RELAYS FOR 33KV, 5 MVAR CAPACITOR BANKS.
Item Description 33 KV
No.
1 Make and Type :
2 Reference standard :
3 Whether draw out type or not :
4 Type of case :
5 Case and cover whether supplied in single :
pole or three pole elements
6 Constructional characteristics of relays :
7 Time/Current or voltage Characteristics :
a) Rated current or voltage :
b) Range of current or voltage settings :
i) O/L :
ii) U/V :
iii) O/V :
iv) Current unbalance relays :
v) E/F :
9 Range of :
a) Time multiplier setting :
b) Definite minimum time of operation for :
heavy fault
c) Time delay relay :
10 Reset time :
11 Voltampere consumption at different :
current or voltage settings
12 Thermal rating of relay coils :
13 Contact ratings :
Making Amps :
Breaking Amps :
14 Whether provided with instantaneous :
tripping feature under heavy fault
15 Whether flag indications provided or not :
16 Rated breaking capacity of tripping circuit :
17 Operational indicators Whether :
mechanically or Electrically operated
18 Mounting – Whether flush or projected. :
19 Terminals :
20 Insulation :
21 Facilities provided for Testing :
22 Dimensions :
23 Weight :
a) Quantity required :
b) O/L :
c) U/V :
d) Current unbalance :
e) E/F :

126
 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION :
RELAY
1 Make : :
2 Type :
3 Reference Standards :
4 Rated current or (&) voltage :
5 Rated d.c. voltage :
6 Operating principle :
7 Solid state or Electro- mechanical
8 Thermal rating :
9 Number of contacts
i) Normally open :
ii) Normally closed :
10 Contacts - Self reset/ hand reset
Burden :
11 Operation indicator provided? :
12 Contact ratings
i) Make and carry continuously:
ii) Make and carry for 0.5 sec.:
iii) Break
I. Resistive load :
II. Inductive load (with L/R = 40 milli
sec.)
13 Whether pre-closing and post closing
supervision provided?
14 Time delay :

V SYNCHRONISING TROLLEY :
1 Make : :
2 Type :
3 Reference Standards :
4 Double voltmeter provided? :
5 Double frequency meter provided?
6 Synchroscope provided? :
7 Lamps provided? :
8 Reversing voltage transformer mounted
inside?
9 Flexible chord with synchronising plug
provided?
10 Back reset for chord with plug provided?
11 Swivel type wheel provided? :
12 Bumper pads provided all round?:
13 Handles provided? :

127
W AUX. C.T.s AND V.T.s. :
1 Make : :
2 Type & Standard to which it conforms.
3 Ratio :
4 Rated output VA :
5 Class of accuracy :
6 Short time rating :
i) Current :
ii) Voltage :
7 Minimum Knee point voltage for class 'PS'
CTs.
8 Max. Excitation current for class 'PS' CTs.
i) at KPV :
ii) at 25 percent KPV :
9 Internal impedance of
i) Primary :
ii) Secondary :
10 Temperature rise :
11 Mounting details :
12 Overall dimensions :
13 Any other details :
14 One minute power frequency withstand
voltage
15 Weight :

X PANEL WIRING: :
1 Insulation of wiring : :
2 Size of wiring conductor for the following
i) P.T. Circuits :
ii) C.T. Circuits :
iii) D.C. Supply Circuits :
iv) Other Circuits :
3 Size of earthing bar for safety earthing
4 Type of terminals provided on wiring
5 Wiring conductor aluminum/ copper.

Z RELAY TESTING SET: :

1 Maker's name : :
2 Type :
3 Capacity of loading transformer :
4 Primary voltage :
5 Secondary current and voltage :
6 Electric/Electronic Timing meters
(Seconds)
i) Operating voltage :
ii) Accuracy :

128
7 Instruments
i) Make :
ii) Current range :
iii) Voltage range :
iv) Accuracy class :
v) Standards to which applicable
8 Descriptive Literature Ref.No.
(to be enclosed).

AA BUS-BAR TRIP RELAY:

1 Make & Type designation :
2 General design :
3 Time of operation :
4 Number & rating of trip contacts:
5 Rating & burden :
6 Any other feature :

AB SUPERVISION RELAY FOR TRIP

RELAY
1 Make & Type designation :
2 General design :
3 DC ratings :
4 Burden :
5 Type of indication :
6 Any other relevant details :

AC DC SUPPLY SUPERVISION RELAY:

1 Make & type designation :
2 General design :
3 DC rating (voltage) :
4 VA burden :
5 Output contacts :
6 Any other data :

AD TRIP RELAYS (for T/F HV & LV

intertrip):
1 Make & type designation :
2 General design :
3 DC rating (voltage) :
4 VA burden :
5 Operating time :
6 Number of output contacts and contact
ratings
7 Any other details :

129
AE SELECTOR SWITCHES:
For Carrier IN/OUT: Auto reclose
1 Make & type designation :
2 Current rating of contacts :
3 Number of contacts in each position
a)Open
b) Close
4 Number of ways :
5 Number of positions :
6 Type of handle :
7 Whether stay put type :
8 Whether locking facility provided.

AF BREAKER/ISOLATOR AUXILIARY Latch type : Non-latch type

CONTACT MULTIPLICATION
RELAYS:
1 Make & type designation :
2 Rating & Burden :
3 No. of NO/NC contacts :
4 Rating of contacts :

AG EARTHING:
1 Material of conductor :
2 Size :
3 Type of end connection :

AH CIRCUIT LABLE:
1 Material, size, colour

AI MISCELLANEOUS:
a) Tools:
Whether following tools included in the
scope
i) Special erection tools : YES/NO
ii) Routine maintenance tools included YES/NO
b) Spares:
Whether list of recommended spares for YES/NO
normal maintenance for a period of 5 years
furnished
c) Drawings:
Whether following items includes
submitted
i) General arrangement drawings YES/NO
ii) Schematic drawings YES/NO
iii) Technical & descriptive literatures of all YES/NO
the components supplied
d) Test Certificates:
Whether all the test-certificates as listed YES/NO
below are furnished

130
 i) Type test certificates for the following YES/NO
1. All protection relays :
(as quoted)
2. All auxiliary relays :
(as quoted)
3. Other equipment :
like disturbance
recorder/Event logger/
Time synchronising
Equipment
AK Event Logger:
1 Name and Country of Manufacturer
2 Manufacturer's type designation
3 Whether literature enclosed
4 Number of elements for event logger
5 No. of points available with sequential
memory
6 No. of changes that the logger can cope in
10 m sec. :
7 PC and Printer included
8 Whether message printout is in English
form :
9 Time resolution
10 Type of memory used
11 Whether built in self check facility
provided :
12 How many characters can be printed per
point :
13 Total number of modules used
14 Details of the modules

EARTH TESTER
a) Manufacturer :
b) Operating voltage : V
c) Measuring ranges provided Ohms
d) Ambient temperature influence
for a range from 0 - 50 deg.
e) External Magnetic field influence:
f) Insulation resistance : M ohms
g) Dielectric strength : V
h) Accuracy :
i) Test Current :
j) Max current/ volt spike resistance
k) Capability to withstand (HV) : KV/Min
l) Max test Voltage : V
m) Method of measurement :
4 terminal method
n) Display LED : Yes/No
o) Battery Rechargeable : Yes/No
p) Battery check feature with : Yes/No
Automatic switch Off

131
 q) Display provided for
a, Current test spike resistance : Yes/No
is too high
b. Potential test spike : Yes/No
resistance too high
c. Battery power low : Yes/No
r) No hold button provided : Yes/No
s) Supply included weather proof : Yes/No
case, test spikes, Insulated cable on reels,
connectors and suitable carrying case

AN Insulation tester (5 KV)

a)Name of manufacturer :
b)Manufacturers type :
c)Standard to which the equipment
conforms
d)Overall size(LxBxH) :
e)Whether magnetically shielded? :
YES/NO
f) Whether tropicalised? : YES/NO Yes/No
g)Total weight (Kg.) :
h)Accuracy :
i) Test voltage (dc) :
j) Insulation range (M - ohm) :
k)Voltage tolerance (%) :
l) Voltage stability (%) :
m)Ripple content (V pk-pk) :
n) Short circuit terminal current : (mA)
o) Voltage source :
p)Maximum scale length(mm) :
q)Total deflection angle (degree) :
r) Suitable for 240V single phase AC Yes/No
motor and manual operation
s) Suitable for Ambient temperature range Yes/No
0-50 deg.
t) Automatic discharge feature with Yes/No
discharged voltage and indication
u) Lock out test button provided Yes/No

AO Digital Multi meters:

a)Name of manufacturer :
b)Manufacturers type :
c)Standard to which the equipment
conforms
d)Overall size(LxBxH) :
e) Total weight (Kg.) :
f)Whether magnetically shielded? Yes/No
g)Whether tropicalised? : Yes/No
h)Accuracy :
i) Current :
ii) Voltage :

132
 iii) Resistance :
i)Range
i) Current (A) AC/DC :
ii) Voltage (V) :
iii) Resistance (ohms) :
iv) Continuity range with audible
indication
j) Protection against inadvertent :
Provided/ Not overload
k) LCD display digits :
AR. Primary current injection test kit:
1) Capacity (KVA):
2) Input Voltage:
3) Output current:
4) Specification of cable leads:
5) Test Leads capacity
a.Capacity
b.Length

AV. Energy meter calibration equipment:

1)Accuracy:
2)Other details:
3)Whether suitable for testing/calibrating of
all electro mechanical/static type meters.

AW Phase sequence indicator:

1)Type:
2)Working Voltages:

AY Analog Multimeters
a) Name of manufacturer :
b) Manufacturers type :
c) Standard to which the :
equipment conforms
d) Overall size(LxBxH) :
e) Total weight (Kg.) :
f) Accuracy
i) Voltage
ii) Current
iii) Resistance
g) Range
i) Voltage
ii) Current
iii) Resistance

133
AZ Vacuum Cleaners
1 Air flow capacity
2 Suction capacity
3 Availability of thermal cut of feature Yes/No
4 Weight

Name of the Firm: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Signature of the Tenderer: . . . . . . . . .
Designation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seal of company: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Signature of the Manufacture’s/Suppliers

Name and Address of the Manufacture’s/Suppliers

Note: The following Guaranteed Technical Particulars shall be indicated for all the above items.

1) Name & Address of Manufacturer

2) Name & Address of Supplier
3) Governing Standards

134
 SCHEDULE-C
CONTROL AND RELAY PANLES
(TO BE FILLED IN AND SIGNED BY THE TENDERER)

SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS
S.No TITLE OF THE DRAWING DRAWING No Time period for
submission

Date: Signature:

Place: Name:

Status:

Whether authorised Power of

attorney of the tendering
Company isenclosed:

Name of the tendering Company:

135
 SCHEDULE - F

CONTROL AND RELAY PANLES

(TO BE FILLED IN AND SIGNED BY THE TENDERER)

PROFORMA FOR STATEMENT OF TECHNICAL DEVIATIONS

The following are the particulars of deviations from the requirements of the technical specifications.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

SNo. CLAUSE DEVIATION REMARKS

------------------------------------------------------------------ ----------------------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

NOTE: Where there is no deviation, the statement should be filed duly signed with an
endorsement indicating "No Deviations".

Date: Signature:

Place: Name:

Status:

Name of the Company:

136
SECTION – IX
CHAPTER - X
B&BC 1

Section IX
Chapter-X

BATTERY & BATTERY CHARGERS WTH DCDB

220V/200AH BATTERIES

1.0 SCOPE 1.1 This specification covers design, manufacture, testing before despatch, supply and
delivery at site / CIP destination and comminissioning of lead acid conventional indoor type battery sets
of the following capacities 132 / 33 kV Recreation Green and Village Gharbara substations in Greater
Noida of U.P. State with all materials, DC DBs. and accessories required for efficient and trouble free
operations.

(i) 220 Volts - 200 AH Battery with suitable Battery charger - 2 sets (1Set for each SS) (ii) 48 V /
250 AH sealed maintenance free VRLA battery set
with 48 V /50 A battery charger - 2sets ( 1Set for each SS)

1.2 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of the design and construction of equipment.
However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering, design and
workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation. The PMC will
interpret the meanings of drawings and specification and shall have the power to reject any work or
material which, in his judgement is not in accordance therewith. The offered equipment shall be
complete with all components necessary for their effective and trouble free operation. Such, components
shall be deemed to be within the scope of contractor's supply irrespective of whether those are
specifically brought out in this specification and / or the commercial order or not.

1.3 Climatic conditions and Auxiliary Power Supply facilities are as per: clauses 1.2 and 1.3 of section GTC
(Chapter 1 of section IX) respectively.

1.4 The EPC contractor should procure the Batteries and Battery Chargers from reputed firms like M/s. HBL,
Hyderabad , M/s. EXIDE Industries, Hyderabad, M/s STATCON Power Controls Ltd., Noida, M/s
Chubby Electricals, Jalgaon, Gujarat and other reputed manufacturer with the prior approval obtained
from PMC.

2.0 STANDARDS:

2.1 The material shall conform in all respects to the relevant Indian Standard Specifications with latest
amendments thereto.

Indian Standard Title

ISS – 1885/1986 (Part-VIII) Electro Technical vocabulary secondary cells and Batteries.

ISS – 1651/1991 (Third Revision) Stationary Cells and Batteries Lead Acid type (with tubular
Positive plates.

ISS – 1069/1964 Water for storage Batteries

ISS – 8320/1982 General requirements and methods of test of lead acid storage
Batteries (Latest version thereof)
B&BC 2

Equipment conforming to other internationally accepted standards, which ensure equal or higher quality than
the standards mentioned above, would also be acceptable. In case the Contractors who wish to offer material
conforming to the other standards, salient points of difference between the standards adopted and the specific
standards shall be clearly brought out in relevant schedule. Four copies of such standards with authentic
English Translations shall be furnished along with the offer. In case of conflict the order of precedence shall
be (i) IS, (ii) IEC, (iii) Other standards. In case of any difference between provisions of these standards and
provisions of this specification, the provisions contained in this specification shall prevail.

3. ADDITIONAL QUALIFYING REQUIREMENTS

The Batteries to be supplied under this shall be of a manufacturer who has designed, manufactured,
tested at factory and supplied DC batteries of the type specified and being offered having a
capacity of at least 600 AH and they shall be operating satisfactorily for two years in power sector /
Industrial Installations as on the date of bid opening.

All the batteries being supplied must have been fully type tested and contractor shall enclose copies of
type test to the bid failing which the bid will be treated as incomplete and non-responsive and will be
rejected. The type test reports shall be of dates not earlier than 5 years from the date of bid
opening. If type tests reports pertain to a period earlier than 5 years the contractor on award has to
carry out those tests free of cost in the presence of PMC’s representative.
This requirement is in addition to the qualifying requirement specified for the contractor in the
section Instructions to Bidder (ITB).

4. PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:

4.1 The battery sets to be supplied .

Sl.No. Item Specification

Item No. 1 Item No.2
1. Type of Installation Indoor Indoor

2. DC voltage 220 V / 200 AH 48V / 250 AH

The equipment shall conform to the following specific parameters: (details of 48 V / 250 AH battery are
given separately in Annexure -A).

Description 220 V,200 AH

a) No. of Cells per battery bank. . 110 Nos
b) Nominal voltage of each cell . 2 volts
c) Nominal voltage of the complete 220 Volts
bank

d) Type of plates in each cell Tubular plate positive and pasted negative plates.
required.

e) Capacity of batteries (in Amp. 200 AH at 27 Deg. C

hours at 10 Hour rate to an end
voltage of 1.85V per Cell)
B&BC 3

f) Cell dimensions and designation
in accordance with the standard
g) Proposed method of working
Designation to be specified by the bidder and maximum
over all dimensions as per relevant standards.The contractor
shall provide adequate thickness for the container to avoid any
damages in transit & during installation particularly outer sides of the
container where name plate and other details are pressed.
Float charge and boost charge as specified.

h) Type of stands required and Wooden / metallic, stands/ racks are required and Batteries are
arrangement system for the to be arranged in double row & double tier system.
batteries.
i) Float voltage : 2.05 to 2.25
Optimum float voltage to be specified by the manufacturer
j) Boost voltage : 2.25 to 2.7 V/ cell
k) AH efficiency : Not less than 95 %
l) WH efficiency : Not less than 85 %
m) Minimum voltage of the set : 203.5 V
(ECV @ 1.85 V/cell)
n) Life of the battery : Shall be more than 20 years.
o) Cycle life : 1200 cycles at ECV:1.85 of DOD at 27° C.
p) Connectors
1) Cell to cell and tier to tier : Heavy duty, lead plated copper strip connectors.
2) Inter stack : Heavy duty, copper cable connectors.
q) Maximum ambient temp. : 50° C
r) Rated voltage of battery : 220 V
(Nominal)
Minimum : 209 V
Maximum : 231 V
s) Float charge current : 20 Amp

t) Time required for boost charging : 14 hours

from fully discharged condition to
fully charged condition..
u) Type
v) Insulation class
w) Magnetics
1) Temp. rise above ambient
2) High voltage Insulation
x) Tapping arrangement
: Solid state full wave full controlled rectifier
: Class ‘B’
: 70° C
: 2.5 kV for 1 minute with Max. leakage current of 5mA.
: 84th cell positive for 110 cells.

5.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMNTS:

The Batteries required under this specification are for supplying D.C. supply to control circuit, other
D.C auxiliary power circuits. The batteries shall be capable of withstanding large discharge currents
for operating various equipments. It shall be of rugged construction designed for long life and for
working satisfactorily without much alternation under the severest operating conditions and shall
conform to the relevant ISS of latest issue.

5.1 The battery bank shall be supported on teakwood / metallic, stand /rack in two tier formation
on battery insulator supports and supplied complete with all accessories including electrolyte,
B&BC 4

distilled water jars and trays, separators, cell insulators, spray arrestors, bolts, inter cell, inter
row and inter bank connectors. One set of special tool for each substation has to be supplied.
Necessary quantity of electrolyte for the initial filling of all the cell plus 10% extra in non-
returnable acid resisting jars and 3 Nos. spare cells shall be included in the scope of supply and
the electrolyte shall be supplied in non-returnable un-breakable and leak proof containers.

5.2 The Battery shall be offered complete with all parts that are necessary or usual for their efficient
operation. Such parts shall be deemed to be within the scope of this specification, whether
specifically mentioned or not.

5.3 All parts particularly removable ones shall be inter changeable with each other.

5.4 The rating of the Batteries is specified at 27 deg. C. However, the battery shall be capable of operating
satisfactorily (at reduced capacities) between Zero (0) deg C and 50 deg. C and in locations where the
relative humidity varies between 12% and 100%.

5.5 Auxiliary Power supply: The following auxiliary supply (A.C) will be available at the substations
where these batteries are to be located.

5.6 415 Volts (+ 10 or –15%), 3 phase, 4 wire 50C/S A.C with a solidly grounded neutral system for
supply to the Battery Charger.

5.7 240 Volts (+ 10 or -15%), single phase, 50 C/S A.C. with solidly grounded neutral system for space
heaters and A.C. control circuits.

5.8 Each cell of the battery covered by the specification shall be assembled with tubular positive and
pasted negative plates for conventional batteries in a Hard rubber container. Thickness of positive and
negative plates shall be suitable enough to meet the AH capacitor of the cell. Each container shall be
provided with built in acid level indicators. The electrolyte shall be prepared from the battery rate
H2SO4 conforming to IS:266.

The container shall be fire retardant and shall have an Oxygen Index of at least 28 %. The tensile
strength of the material of the container shall be such as to handle the internal cell pressure of the cells
in the worst working condition. Cell shall not show any deformity or bulge on the sides under all
working conditions. The container shall be capable of withstanding the rigours of transport, storage
and handling. The containers shall be enclosed in a steel tray.

The cell covers shall be made of suitable material compatible with the container material and
permanently fixed with the container. It shall be capable to withstand internal pressure without
bulging or cracking. It shall also be fire retardant. Fixing of terminal posts in the cover shall be such
that the seepage of electrolyte, gas escapes and entry of electro-static spark are prevented.

The separators shall be of wood or synthetic material having high acid absorption capability, resistant
to sulphuric acid and good insulating properties. The design of separators shall ensure that there is no
misalignment during normal operation and handling. Glass separators shall not be used.

The stands / frames shall be insulated from the floor by suitable porcelain insulators or by other
means. The wood used for the stands shall be of well seasoned and treated first class teakwood and
free from shakes, knots and joints shall be mortised and tenanted. The Insulator supports shall be
made of white glazed porcelain. Wooden / metallic, stands / frames shall also be coated with two
costs of anticorrosive and acid resisting black enamel paint.
B&BC 5

The quality and durability of the wood as well as the paint (in cases of both wooden and metallic
stand) shall be such that they do not deteriorate during the entire life span of the battery. The wood or
paint shall not corrode due to chemical reaction caused by acid spills. The spacing between 2 tiers
shall be so as to permit taking of readings by a hydrometer in vertical position.

The surface of the terminal post extending above the cell cover including bolt hole shall be coated
with an acid resistant and corrosion retarding material. Terminal posts or any other metal part which is
in contact with the electrolyte shall be made of the same alloy as that of the plates or of a proven
material that does not have any harmful effect on cell performance. Both +ve and –ve posts shall be
clearly and unambiguously identifiable.

Where it is not possible to bolt the cell terminals directly to assemble a battery, separate non-
corroding lead or copper connectors of suitable size shall be provided to enable connection of the
cells. Copper connections shall be suitably lead coated to withstand corrosion due to sulphuric acid at
a very high rate of charge or discharge.

Cell inter-connectors shall be of lead or lead coated copper flats or rods. All inter cell bolts and nuts
and those to be provided at the cell terminal posts shall also be lead coated. The lead plating shall be
adequate and tenacious. Thickness of lead coating shall conform to Clause 5.5 of IS: 1651-1979.
Interior inter-connections shall be insulated lead rods or lead coated copper flats or rods. Current
density shall not exceed 15 A/mm2 at 1 minute rate. All connectors and lugs shall be capable of
continuously carrying the 30 minutes discharge current of battery and through short circuit current
produced by the battery. The bidder shall furnish necessary calculation in support of this
requirement.

5.9 The cells shall be suitably marked as per I.S.S.

5.10 The design of the cells shall be such that when they are fully charged they should be capable of
receiving a trickle charge or an equalizing charge if necessary without excessive gassing or causing an
abnormal rise in the temperature of he electrolyte. The contractor shall furnish the recommended
interval at which equalizing charge are to be applied.

5.11 VOLTAGE: The cell voltage shall not exceed 2.25 volts with a continuous low rate floating charge
and shall not be less than 1.85 volts at the end of the emergency discharge.

5.12 A OPERATION:

The D.C Battery shall be operated without an intentional ground fault. For indicating the incidence
and degree of a ground fault on the D.C control circuitry, the mid point of the battery shall be earthed
through an ammeter of high resistance. The high resistance shall be so proportional that the current
flowing under the worst earth fault shall not exceed 250 mA.

5.12 B Expected Battery Life

The battery shall be capable of giving 1200 or more charge/discharge cycles at 80% Depth of
discharge (DOD) at an average temperature of 27º Celsius. DOD (Depth of Discharge) is defined as
the ratio of the quantity of electricity (in Ampere-hour) removed from a cell or battery on discharge to
its rated capacity. The battery sets shall have a minimum expected life of 20 years at float operation.

5.13 ACCESSORIES AND SPARES REQUIRED

5.13.1 The following accessories shall be supplied along with each battery set.
i) Hydrometers capable of indicating S.G. readings in : 3 Nos.
steps of 0.005
B&BC 6

ii) Thermometers for measuring room temparatures : 2 Nos.

iii) Vent Plugs (Ceramic) : 3 Nos.

iv) Centre Zero 3-0-3V DC Cell testing voltmeter with : 2 Nos.

two spikes.
Digital cell testing Voltmeters 2 Nos.
v) Suitable wrenches for the Battery Terminals and bolts : 1 Set.

vi) Non-corrodable cell number plates for fixing to stands : 1 Set.

vii) Acid topping up jugs : 2 Nos.

viii) Funnels : 2 Nos.

ix) Inter Cell, inter row, inter bank connectors of adequate : 1 Set.
Size and mechanically strong of hard drawn copper
Rods or strips, lead coated.

x) Sufficient copper leads from Battery Bank (Positive : Total 50 Mtrs.

negative and 84th cell) to the charger with the
required terminals.

xi) Stand insulators and cell insulators : 1 lot

10% of that required for a battery set
xii) Battery record book : 2 Nos.

xiii) Spare Cells complete with separators, support insulators : 3 Nos.

and connectors

xiv) Rubber apron : 2 Nos.

xv) Rubber gloves : 2 Sets.

xvi) Cell lifting straps : 2 Nos.

xvii) Acid Level indicating floats. : 3 Nos.

xviii) Pippette 1 No.

xix) Bridging Clamps for cutting out individual

Cell in event of defect : 1 set.
xx) Protective Goggles, Tool box : 1 set

5.14 Ventilation

The bidder shall indicate the requirement of ventilation of the battery room. The loss of battery life
when operated at different temperatures upto a maximum ambient of 50° C and duration shall be
furnished by the bidder with the bid.
B&BC 7

5.15 The following information shall be indelibly marked on the outside of each cell:

a) Manufacturer’s name, address and trade mark.

b) Country and month & year of manufacture
c) Serial number
d) Nominal voltage
e) AH capacity at 10 hr. discharge rate, ECV etc.
f) Polarity marking
g) Voltage of float operation.

6.0 TESTS :
6.1 All the offered equipment shall be fully type tested by the contractor as per the relevant standards
including the type tests mentioned below. The type tests must have been conducted on the similar or
higher capacity from recognized test laboratory within 5 years prior to the date of bid opening. The
bidder shall furnish two sets of type tests reports as per the relevant standards for each equipment
offered along with bid. The offers received without these type tests reports shall be treated as non -
responsive.

i) Test for capacity and test for voltage during discharge.

ii) Ampere hour and Watt hour efficiency tests.
iii) Test for loss of capacity on storage.
iv) Endurance test.

6.2 The bidder shall quote the prices for the following type tests. The type tests shall be conducted on
first battery in each lot if required by the PMC which shall be considered for evaluation.

i) Ampere hour and Watt hour efficiency tests.

ii) Test for loss of capacity on storage.
iii) Endurance Test.

6.3 All the routine and acceptance tests shall be carried as per relevant standards( IS) free of cost.

6.4 Site Tests for Battery

• Physical Verification
• C/10 Capacity test on the cell
• 8 Hrs. Charge and 15 minutes discharge test at full rated load

7.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

The Guaranteed Technical particulars for the equipment being supplied shall be provided with the Bid as
specified in this technical specification at Annexure-I. The Bids received without guaranteed technical
particulars shall be treated as Non-responsive.
B&BC 8

8.0 QUANTITY AND DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS:

220v, 200AH 48 V 250 A H

Name of the 132 / 33 Battery complete Battery complete
Delivery
kV Substation with accessories as with all accessories
S.No specified as specified
Battery Complete
1 Recreation Green 1 Set 1 Set with all accessories,
fittings etc., as
specified within
nine (9) months
2 Village Gharbara 1 Set 1 Set
from the date of
LoA.

9.0 All deviations shall be specifically brought out in the ‘Schedule of Deviations’ (Annexure- III).
Deviations brought out elsewhere will not be considered.
B&BC 9

ANNEXURE–1

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

FOR BATTERIES

S.No Description 220V 200AH

1 Manufacturer's Name

2 Applicable Standards

3 Battery Voltage

4 Battery Rating

5 Designation as per ISS

6 Manufacturer's type Design.

7 A.H. Capacity at 10Hrs. Rate of

discharge.

8a No. of Positive plates/cell

b Material of Positive plates
9a No. of Negative plates/Cell
b Material of Negative plate
10 Total No. of Plates/Cell.
11 Separators
(i) Type
(ii) Material and thickness
(iii) Governing standards
12 Vent plugs
a Construction details
b Material
c Operating pressure range
d Governing standards
13 Capacity in Ampere of battery
Amps/end voltage
a) 1 Minute load
b) 1 Hour load
c) 2 Hour load
d) 3 Hour load
e) 5 Hour load
f) 8 Hour load
g) 10 Hour load.
14 Containers
a Type
b Material and thickness
c Governing standards

15 Nominal cell voltage

16 No. of Cells in each bank
B&BC 10

S.No Description 220V 200AH

17 Internal resistance for each cell
a Fully charged
b Fully discharged
18 Resistance of the battery including
with connection between the cells
19 Open circuit voltage of each cell when
Completely discharged at 27° C
(a) At 10hr discharge rate
(b) At 1 H discharge rate
20 Maximum temperature that cell (deg. C.) shall withstand continuously
without affecting the service life of cell over ambient temp. of
- 27° C
- 50° C
21 Loss of life when battery operated various temperatures corresponding to
ambient temp. of
- 27° C
- 50° C
22 Size and material of connectors with method of connection between cells.
(installation & connection diagrams to be enclosed)
23 Max. Recommended period of storage before refreshing charge.
24 Battery Enclosures/Modules
i) Type of Material
ii) Out line dimensions
iii) Process of painting and Type of coating
iv) Net weight (Kg.)
25 Insulator material for isolating battery stack from ground and cell
26 Short circuit current at battery terminals
27 Time for which the battery can withstand short circuit at terminals
28 Recommended maximum rating of fuse for protection of battery
29 Size of the cable recommended for connections of battery charger to
battery & DC distribution board.
30 Recommended interval at which battery should be discharged at 10 hour
discharge rate and boost charged.
31 Inter connectors
a) Type of inter cell to cell and tier to tier connectors
b) Material of inter cell to cell and tier to tier connectors
c) Type of inter stack connectors
d) Material of inter stack connectors
iv) Whether acceptance letter for stage wise inspection of battery is enclosed
as per Cl.No.4.1.11 of Section - II
16 Shunt circuit current (Amps)
17 Electrolyte required for first
filling (Incl. 10% extra)
18 Special gravity of the electrolyte
At 27 Deg. C.
b) Special gravity of the electro-
lyte at the end of discharge
at 10 Hrs. rate.
19 a) Construction details, dimension including thickness

a) Positive
b) Negative
B&BC 11

S.No Description 220V 200AH

b) Method of supporting elements
20 Surface area of plates, sq.mm
21 Wt. Of Electrolyte/cell in kgs.
22 Clearance between edges of
plates and wires surface of
container.
23 clearance between bottom of
negative plates and bottom of
container mm.
24 Clearance between lap of plates
and top of container mm.
25 Sediment space (depth) mm
26 Dimensions of each cell
a) Length mm
b) Width mm
c) Height mm
d) Thickness of container mm
27 Distance between centres of
cells where erected mm.
28 Net Weight of the cell complete
with acid.
29 a) AH. Efficiency %
b) W.H. efficiency %
30 Recommended float charge
current and voltage (Amp, volts)
31 Recommenced boost charge
current and voltage (Amp, Volts)
Time required for boost charge
from discharge condition.
Amount of H2 Gas evolved during bush charging.
32 Maximum charging current/cell
Amp.
33 Nominal charging rate Amp.
34 Maximum charging rate Amp.
35 Type of all connection
36 Type of spray arrestors
37 Type of standard
38 Type of supporting insulators
39 Whether explosion proof or
plugs provided.
40 Expired life span of battery
41 Rack details
a) No. of circles
b) Description
c) Unit weight. Kgs.
d) Unit length mm
e) Unit width mm
f) Unit height mm.
42 Ventilation required in battery
room.
32 Charging characteristics (enclosed) Yes/No
33 Capacity retention characteristics (enclosed) Yes/No
B&BC 12

S.No Description 220V 200AH

34 Cleaning shall be as per Seven Tank Process Yes/No
35 Painting shall be as per IS:5 (shade 631) Yes/No
37 Enclosures
i) Whether all the drawings and technical literature relevant ISS/IEC for Yes/No
Battery enclosed
ii) Whether type test reports enclosed Yes/No
iii) Supporting calculation for AH capacity at different ratings at an ECV of Yes/No
1.85 Volts enclosed

Place : Signature of the Bidder :

Date : Name :

Business address :
B&BC 13

Annexure III

SCHEDULE OF DEVIATION

TECHNICAL ( Batteries)
Sl. No. Requirements / Specification Deviations Remarks
Equipment Clause No.

It is hereby conformed that except for deviations mentioned above, the offer conforms to all the other
features specified in Technical Specification Section ____ of this Bid Document

Place : Signature of the Bidder :

Date : Name :

Business address :
B&BC 14

220V, 200AH Battery charging Equipment and D.C. Distribution Boards

1.0 SCOPE : This specification covers design, engineering, manufacture, stage testing, inspection and testing
before supply and delivery at site/CIP destination of Battery charging equipment comprising separate
boost charger & separate float charger suitable for 220 Volts 200 AH conventional indoor type lead acid
batteries along with DC Distribution boards and others as specified.

2 sets of Identical Battery charging equipment, one as a standby and with both chargers inter
connected through a switching cubicle and 220V DC distribution Panel have to be supplied to each
Substation facilitating manual change over of DC loads on to the stand by charger in the event of
fault in the charger that was originally in service.

1.1 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of the design and construction of equipment.
However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering, design and
workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation. The PMC will
interpret the meanings of drawings and specification and shall have the power to reject any work or
material which, in his judgment is not in accordance therewith. The offered equipment shall be complete
with all components necessary for their effective and trouble free operation. Such, components shall be
deemed to be within the scope of contractor's supply irrespective of whether those are specifically
brought out in this specification and / or the commercial order or not.

2.0 STANDARDS:
2.1 The material shall conform in all respects to the relevant Indian Standard Specifications with latest
amendments thereto.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Indian Standard Title
ISS – 7204/1980 Stabilized Power Supplies D.C. Out put
ISS – 2208/1962 H.R.C cartridge fuse links for voltage above 650 volts
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Equipment conforming to other internationally accepted standards, which ensure equal or higher
quality than the standards mentioned above, would also be acceptable. In case the Bidder who wish to
offer material conforming to the other standards, salient points of difference between the standards
adopted and the specific standards shall be clearly brought out in relevant schedule. Four copies of
such standards with authentic English Translations shall be furnished along with the offer. In case of
conflict the order of precedence shall be (i) IS, (ii) IEC, (iii) Other standards. In case of any
difference between provisions of these standards and provisions of this specification, the provisions
contained in this specification shall prevail.

3. ADDITIONAL QUALIFYING REQUIREMENTS

The Battery charging equipment to be supplied under this contract shall be of a manufacturer who
has designed, manufactured and tested and supplied battery charging equipment of the type
specified and being offered catering to a total battery capacity of at least 600 AH at 220V level and
they shall be operating satisfactorily for two years in power sector / Industrial Installations as on
the date of bid opening. Documentary evidence from the clients towards supply and satisfactory
performance of the Battery charging equipment shall be enclose to the bid failing which the bid will
be treat as incomplete and non responsive and rejected.

All the batteries being supplied must have been fully type tested and contractor shall enclose copies of
type test to the bid failing which the bid will be treated as incomplete and non-responsive and will be
rejected. The type test reports shall be of dates not earlier than 5 years from the date of
B&BC 15

opening. If type tests reports pertain to a period earlier than 5 years the contractor on award has to
carry out those tests free of cost in the presence of PMC’s representative.

This requirement is in addition to the qualifying requirement specified for the contractor in the
section Instructions to Bidder (ITB).

4. PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:

4.1 The equipment shall conform to the following specific parameters:

Sl.No. Item Specification

1. Type In door solid state full wave fully controlled rectifier
2. AC voltage 415 V +10% to –15% (for220 V batteries)
3. No. of phases Three
4. Frequency 50 c/s + 5%
5. Regulation + 1%
6. Ripple content not more than 1%
7. Insulation class Class ‘B’
8. Magnetics
a) Temp. rise above ambient 70° C
b) High voltage insulation 2.5 kV for 1 minute with Max. leakage current of 5 mA
9. Protection:
a) Input & Output MCCBs (M/s. GE make as per IS: 13947)
b) Rectifier Bridge High speed semi conductor fuse
10. Output current rating 25A
Output voltage drop When the total current )battery +load) of the charger goes
beyond 100% of the rated current, the output terminal
voltage should fall sharply at or before 105% of the rated
current not to value below 203.5 V (1.85 V/cell)
11. Voltage Regulation DC ±1% for current s between zero and full load and AC
mains voltage variations of ±10% and frequency variation
of ±5 % .
12. Overshoot 5V with recovery time 180m. sec
13. Under shoot 5.2 V with recovery time 200m.sec
14. Efficiency Not less than 75 % at full load
15. Insulation Not less than 5 M.ohms with 500 V DC megger between
a) output terminals and AC input terminals
b) DC output terminals
c) AC input terminals
16. Protection & Control a. AC input rotary switch (ON-OFF)/ MCBs or MCCBs.
b. HRC fuses for SCR’s & Diodes
c. DC output adjust potentiometer
d. Battery isolation switch
e. Low voltage sensitive relay to isolate load from the
battery during main voltage failure when the battery is
discharged to the level of 203.5 V( i.e, 1.85 volts / cell)
B&BC 16

5.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMNTS:

5.1 GENERAL:
The Battery charging equipment shall comprise of a float Charger and a Boost charger. 2 sets of
Identical Battery charging equipment, one as a standby, have to be supplied to each Substation with
both chargers inter connected through a switching cubicle and 220V DC distribution Panel. In the
event of fault in the charger that is in service, DC loads shall get transferred on to the stand by charger
through the manual change over facility provided in the switching cubicle.
The DC system for 220 V DC is unearthed and for 48 V DC is +ve earthed. The Battery Chargers as
well as their automatic regulators shall be of static type and shall be compatible with offered batteries.

5.1.1 FLOAT CHARGER: -

The float charger is to operate on three phase A.C. supply of 415 Volts with +10% to –15%
variations, 50 C/S. The float charger shall be capable of continuous operation at the respective rated
load float charging the Battery i.e., trickle charge the Battery comprising of 110Nos. 2 Volts 200AH
lead acid cells at 2.05 to 2.25 volts per cell at the desired rate and simultaneously supplying a constant
load of 25 Amperes for 200AH in an average Ambient temperature of 50° C. The float Charger shall
be of 3 phase full wave semi-controlled thyrister bridge rectifier type with automatic voltage
regulator unit and with necessary printed circ5it boards, transformers and relays etc

5.1.2 BOOST CHARGER

The Boost charger is to operate on a three phase supply of 415 Volts with + 10% -15% variation 50
C/S. The Boost charger shall be capable of boost charging the battery comprising of 110 Nos. 2V
200AH lead acid cells upto a maximum cell voltage at 2.25 to 2.7v per cell at a maximum charging
current of 16A for 200AH batteries in maximum ambient temperature of 50° C. The Boost charger
shall be capable of boost charging the battery comprising of 110 Nos., 2Volts, 200AH lead acid cells
from fully discharged condition to fully charged condition within 14 hours.
However, the terminal voltage of battery across the load shall be limited to ±5% of the rated
battery voltage.

5.1.3 All battery chargers shall have a constant voltage characteristic throughout the range (from zero to full
load) at the floating value of the voltage so as to keep the battery fully charged but without harmful
overcharge.

5.1.4 OUTPUT CONTROL

(A) The charger shall be provided with a facility for both automatic and manual control of output
voltage and current. A selector switch shall be provided for selecting the automatic or manual mode
of output voltage/current control. When on automatic control mode during Float charging, the Charger
output voltage shall remain within +1% of the set value, for AC input voltage variation of +10%,
frequency variation of +5%, a combined voltage and frequency variation of +10%, and a DC load
variation from zero to full load including in the conditions when all the three variations occur
simultaneously.

(B) The float charger shall be provided with an automatic load limiter having drooping characteristics such
that when float charger out put current exceeds 10% above the rated current when the voltage control
is in automatic mode, the float charger voltage should be brought down automatically so that the float
charger output current does not exceed the set value. The Load-limiter characteristics shall be such
that any sustained overload or short circuit in DC System shall not damage the Charger, nor shall it
cause blowing of any of the Charger fuses. The Charger shall not trip on overload or external short
circuit. Soft start feature should be invariably provided to minimize the inrush current from the float
charger to the discharged battery.
B&BC 17

5.1.5 Uniform and step less adjustments of voltage setting (in both manual and automatic modes) shall be
provided on the front of the Charger panel covering the entire float charging output range specified.
Step less adjustments of the Load limiter setting shall also be possible from 80% to 100% of the rated
output current for charging mode.

5.1.6 During Boost Charging, the Battery Charger shall operate on constant current mode (when automatic
regulator is in service). It shall be possible to adjust the Boost charging current continuously over a
range of 50 to 100% of the rated output current for Boost charging mode.

5.1.7 The Charger output voltage shall automatically go on rising, when it is operating on Boost mode, as
the Battery charges up. For limiting the output voltage of the Charger, a potentiometer shall be
provided on the front of the panel, whereby it shall be possible to set the upper limit of this voltage
any where in the output range specified for Boost Charging mode.

5.1.8 Charger shall regulate the float/boost voltage in case of prescribed temperature rise of battery as per
manufacturer’s recommendation to avoid thermal runaway. Necessary temperature sensors shall be
provided in mid location of battery banks and shall be wired up to the respective charger for feedback
control. This feature shall be demonstrated during testing of each charger.

5.1.9 Suitable filter circuits shall be provided in all the chargers to limit the ripple content (Peak to Peak) in
the output voltage to 1%, irrespective of the DC load level, when they are not connected to a Battery.

5.1.10 PROTECTION

During the period the main AC voltage is cut-off and the battery feeding the load current, a voltage
relay should be provided to cut off the battery from load once it is drained to sensing level of 203.5 V
(1.85 V/cell). All battery shall have AC contactors on the input side. It shall be of air break type and
suitable for continuous duty. A thermal overload relays incorporating a distinct single phasing
protection (using differential movement of bimetal strips) shall also be provided for the AC input. The
relay shall trip the above contactor. The operating coil shall be rated for 415 volts AC.

5.1.11 MCB /MCCB

i) AC input and DC output MCB/MCCBs shall be provided to, in all chargers as an alternative
to switch, fuse, contactor and thermal over load relay (clause 5.1.10) and they shall be heavy
duty single through group operated quick make, quick break type complying with IS: 8828 &
IEC: 898-1987 and suitable for 415 / 240 V AC and 220 V DC. All MCCBs shall be suitable
for continuous duty. MCCBs should have auxiliary contacts for annunciation.

ii) MCB/MCBs shall be so designed with suitable breaking capacity in conformity with above
IEC & ISI. The bidder shall ensure that all MCCB/MCBs are adequately rated so as to be
fully protected during all abnormal operating conditions. Alternatively AC contactors with
HRC fuses and DC contactors with HRC fuses also may be offered

iii) MCCB/MCB shall be flush mounted on Battery Chargers Panels.

iv) Suitable door inter locking lamps shall be provided with micro switches

v) MCCB shall be provided with bimetallic & magnetic type release for over current & short
circuit protection. The setting of the thermal release shall be adjustable between 50% to 100%
of the rated current.
B&BC 18

vi) MCBs for A.C and D.C control supply and heaters wherever required shall be mounted in side
the chargers.

5.1.12 Rectifier Transformer

The rectifier transformer shall be copper wound, resin cast continuously rated, dry air cooled (A.N)
and of class F insulation type. The rating of the rectifier transformer shall have 10% overload
capacity. Temperature rise of the transformer during fully loaded condition shall not cause damage to
the electronic components of the charger. Necessary ventilation arrangements have to be made to limit
the temperature rise to safe limits.

5.1.13 Rectifier Assembly

The rectifier assembly shall be fully/half controlled bridge type and shall be designed to meet the duty
as required by the respective Charger. The rectifier shall be provided with heat sink having their own
heat dissipation arrangements with natural air cooling. Necessary surge protection devices and
rectifier type fast acting HRC fuses shall be provided in each arm of the rectifier connections.

5.1.14 Instruments
One AC voltmeter and one AC ammeter along with selector switches shall be provided for all
chargers. One DC voltmeter and DC ammeter (with shunt) shall be provided for all Chargers. The
instruments shall be flush type, dust proof and moisture resistant. The instruments shall be
approximately 96 mm square with 270 deg. C scale or alternatively 144 mm square with 90°.C scale.
Dials shall be white with black numbers and lettering. The instruments shall have easily accessible
means for zero adjustment. The instruments shall be of 1.5 accuracy class. In addition to the above a
centre zero voltmeter with selector switch shall also be provided for 220 V chargers for testing
purpose.

5.1.15 Air Break Switches

One DC output switch shall be provided in all chargers. They shall be air break type suitable for 500
volts AC/ 250 DC. The contacts of the switches shall open and close with a snap action. The operating
handle of the switch shall be fully insulated from circuit. `ON’ and `OFF’ position on the switch shall
be clearly indicated. Rating of switches shall be suitable for their continuous load. Alternatively,
MCCB’s of suitable ratings shall also acceptable in place of Air Break Switch.

5.1.16 Fuses
All fuses shall be HRC Link type. Fuses shall be mounted on fuse carriers which are in turn mounted
on fuse bases. Wherever it is not possible to mount fuses on carriers, fuses shall be directly mounted
on plug-in type base. In such case one insulated fuse pulling handle shall be supplied for each charger.
Fuse rating shall be chosen by the Bidder depending on the circuit requirement. All fuses in the
chargers shall be monitored. Fuse failure annunciation shall be provided on the failure of any fuse.

5.1.17 Name Plates and Marking

The name plates shall be white with black engraved letters. On top of each Charger, on front as well
as rear sides, larger and bold name plates shall be provided to identify the Charger. Name plates with
full and clear inscriptions shall also be provided on and inside of the panels for identification of the
various equipments and ease of operation and maintenance.
.
5.2 The Battery charging equipment shall be complete with all parts that are necessary for their efficient
operation. Such parts shall be deemed to be within the scope of this specification whether specifically
mentioned or not.

5.3 The float charger for 220 Volts, 200AH batteries shall comprise of the following components but
not limited to them.
B&BC 19

i) AC 3-pole miniature circuit breaker : 1 No.

of suitable capacity

ii) a) Pilot lamps to indicate A.C. mains supply : 3 Nos.

b) D.C. supply on : 1 No.

iii) A.C. Contactor with ON/OFF push

button with O/L relay : 1 No.

iv) 3 phase full wave semi-controlled

thyristor bridge rectifier with fuses : 1 No.

v) Automatic voltage regulator unit with

necessary printed circuit boards
transformers and relays, etc. : 1 Set

vi) Filter choke and filter condenser : 1 Set

vii) Double wound impregnated natural air

cooled three phase mains transformer
of suitable rating : 1 No.

viii) D.C.Rotary switch/2 pole MCB : 1 No.

ix) HRC fuses with fittings, if it is

rotary switch : 2 Nos.

x) Moving coil ammeter of suitable range and

size to measure the D.C output current : 1 No.
of float charger

Though not specifically included in the above list, the contractor shall supply all the required
control and equipment for trouble free operation of the chargers, along with 220 volts, 200AH
Station batteries.

5.4 The boost charger for 220 volts, 200AH batteries shall comprise of the following components but not
limited to them. The boost charger shall be turned on only when both coarse and fine switches are at
minimum position.

i) A.C. 3-pole miniature circuit : 1 No.

breaker of suitable capacity

ii) Pilot lamps to indicate A.C. : 3 Nos.

main supply position

iii) A.C. Contactor with ON/OFF push : 1 No.

buttons & over load protection

iv) Ballast chokes to give tapered : 3 Nos.

charge
B&BC 20

v) Double wound impregnated natural : 1 No.

air cooled 3 phase mains transformer
with OFF lod taps at + 5% and + 10%
with tap changing links on the primary
side and suitable number of steps on
the secondary.
vi) Coarse and fine control triple : 1 No.
pole, 4 position rotary switch
to give step control the D. C.
output voltage.

vii) 3 phase full wave bridge : 1 No

connected silicon rectifier stack

viii) Moving coil ammeter of suitable : 1 No.

range and size to measure charging
current in the D.C. output circuit
of boost charger.

ix) Double pole rotary ON/OFF switch/ : 1 No.

2 pole MCB

x) HRC fuses with fittings, if it is : 2 Nos.

rotary switch

5.5 The battery chargers shall also comprise the following equipment.

i) 1 No. moving coil voltmeter of suitable range and size, with selector switch to measure the
following voltages.

a) Battery Voltage

b) Boost Charger output Voltage.

c) Float charger output Voltage.

ii) 1 No. silicon blocking diode connected to 84 th cell and the D.C. positive bus to maintain
continuity of D.C. supply to the D.C. bus in the event of A.C. failure while boost charger
in service and to avoid short circuit of 110th cell positive and the 84th cell positive.
Blocking diode shall be provided in the positive pole of the output circuit of each charger to
prevent current flow from the DC Battery into the Charger.

iii) D.C. contactor of suitable rating for connecting 110th cell to the Positive D.C. bus,
inter-locked with A.C. contactor provided in the boost charger.
(iv) Ripple filtering devices.

v) 1 No. tripple pole moulded case circuit breaker of 100Amps capacity for connecting to
110thcell positive and 1st cell negative and 84th cell.

vi) 3 Nos. of HRC fuses for the above with fittings.

vii) 1 No. moving coil centre zero milli Ammeter for earth leakage circuit.
B&BC 21

viii) A suitable volt meter with selector switch shall be provided on the panel to indicate
phase to phase and phase to ground voltage of the incoming supply.

ix) One centre zero D.C. Ammeter to be provided in the negative terminal of the battery
for reading charge/ discharge current of the battery.

x) Internal light operated on 230 Volts single phase, 50 C/S, A.C. system with door
opening/closing ON/OFF switch.

xi) 2 Nos. earthing lugs suitable for receiving 120 sq.mm copper conductors.

xii) Space heaters suitable for operation AC 230 V, 1 Amp, 50 c/s.

xiii) Heater ON/OFF switch.

xiv) Cable glands for all the external cables.

xv) Single phase preventor

xvi) Built-in automatic voltage control and load limiting features

5.6 Load limiting features shall automatically reduce the output voltage of the charger on loads more
than the rated load.

5.7 The ripple content of the charger D.C. output shall not exceed 2% when the battery is not connected.

5.8 Alarm and fault indicating lamps shall be arranged in the following.

a) DC supply "ON"
b) A.C. input fuse failure for boost charger.
c) A.C. input fuse failure for float charger
d) D.C. output fuse failure for boost charger
e) D.C. output fuse failure for float charger
f) Mains failure, phase failure
g) D.C. output over voltage
h) D.C. under voltage
i) Rectifier fuse failure after float charger
j) Rectifier control supply failure
k) Filter condenser fuse failure
l) Battery earth leakage.
m) DC under voltage/ load limiter operated
n) Other necessary annunciations required

5.9 Necessary relays for annunciation for faults mentioned above shall be provided. They shall be
suitable for operation of 220 V D.C. supply with + 10% to –15% variations. Necessary circuitry for
canceling alarm shall be provided. On canceling the alarm, the sound only should go and lamp
should continue till the fault is rectified/cleared.
B&BC 22

.
5.10 Necessary relays for the above shall be provided wherever required.

5.11 The D.C. system shall be provided with a continuous earth leakage indicating milli-Ammeter, suitable
for operation with an earth fault on either pole together with a relay to give alarm and visual
indication for an earth fault on the D.C. system.

5.12 A block diagram to indicate the general protection features provided for the charger shall be furnished
along with the Bid.

5.13 a) In the event of A.C. supply failure, when the battery is on boost charge, the available battery
capacity shall be automatically connected to the D.C bus.

b) A change over device shall be provided for automatically change the charger operating mode from
boost charge to float charge for a predetermined voltage condition.

5.14 All fuses shall be HRC non-deteriorating type. Unless otherwise specified, the fuses shall be of class-4
(80KA prospective breaking current) for A.C. circuits and class-2 (33 KA prospective D.C. current)
for D.C. circuits.

5.16 Each charger shall be furnished completely wired upto power cable lugs and terminal blocks ready for
external connections. The internal wiring of the charger shall be carried out with PVC insulated 1100
V grade stranded copper conductor. The control wiring shall be carried out with 2.5 sq.mm copper
conductors. All cables shall bare ISI marking. All wiring for external connections shall be brought to
1100 V grade single piece mounted terminal blocks with barriers. Suitable vertical terminal blocks
shall be provided. Terminal connectors provided for wiring shall be stud type and not screw type.
Control terminals shall be suitable for connecting two wires, with 2.5sq.mm stranded copper
conductors. All terminals shall be numbered for ease of connections and identification. Atleast 20%
spare terminals shall be provided for control circuits. All cables and wires carrying AC supply shall be
kept separate from other cables. The color code employed for cabling and wiring shall be shown in
suppliers instruction manual. The colour scheme shall be
(i) For A.C. circuits – Gery
(ii) For the D.C. circuits – Red,Blue
(iii) Earth - Green
Each wire shall bear a ferrule or tag on each end for identification.

a. The insulation of all circuits except the low voltage electronic circuits shall withstand test
voltage of 2kV AC for one minute. An air clearance of at least ten (10) mm shall be
maintained throughout for such circuits, right up to the terminal lugs. Whenever this
clearance is not available, the live parts shall be insulated or shrouded.

b. The low voltage electronic circuits test shall be as per relevant standards and the bidder has to
furnish supporting documents for low voltage electronic circuits.

5.17 All the external cables to be connected to the charger shall be arranged for bottom entry.

5.18 Consturction
The float charging equipment and boost charging equipment shall be mounted in a metal enclosed,
sheet steel cubicle, indoor floor mounting, free standing type. It shall be totally enclosed, completely
dust tight, weather and vermin proof. The cubicle shall be tropicalised, vermin proof and adequately
ventilated with louvers to facilitate the cooling of transformers and rectifiers. The ventilating
openings shall be less than 3 mm size and shall be provided with screens. The panel shall be
complete with internal wiring, terminal board for internal and external connections. The panel shall
B&BC 23

be fabricated out of suitable 2.0mm cold rolled sheet steel and shall have folded type of construction.
Removable gland plates for all cables and lugs for power cables shall be supplied by the Contractor.
The lugs for power cables shall be made of electrolytic copper with tin coat. The Contractor shall
supply all necessary base frames, anchor bolts and hardware. The height of the panel shall be 1800
mm and depth 600 mm and panel shall have suitable width to accommodate the charging equipment.
i.e., adequate clearance / space should be provided between item to item in the charger, to facilitate
easy handling at the time of attending on repairs. The charger shall be provided with hinged type rear
doors which shall be properly earthed all doors and covers shall be fitted with synthetic rubber
gaskets. The panel shall have the degree of protection of IP-42 as per IS – 13947 (Part – I) or
equivalent standards

5.18a The equipment shall be efficiently screened against interference to radio as also other communications
equipment which may be installed in the same building. All the sources of noise shall be fitted with
Re-Suppressors generally in accordance with Rs.613 or relevant ISS.

5.18b The frame work and the surface of the steel panels shall be sand blasted to remove rust, scales and
foreign adhering matters. Then the parts shall be given primary coat of rust resisting paint which shall
be followed by two coats of opalene green corresponding to shade No.275 of 15.5.1978. The finishing
coat shall be polished cellulose or equivalent. Any other standard approved method regarding painting
could be adopted.

5.19 D.C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD:

5.19.1 The D.C. Distribution boards shall be provided with 2Nos. bus-bars out of electrolytic copper of
adequate capacity duly tinned supported by bus-bar supporters.

These bus-bars will be connected to 220V D.C. 2 wire systems consisting of 220V, 200AH batteries
or battery charger rated for 220V D.C. output.

The D.C. distribution boards required under this specification are to feed control circuits, and other
auxiliary DC equipment of the Substations.

5.19.2 The D.C. distribution boards shall be of rugged construction, designed for working satisfactorily
under the severest operating and climatic conditions and shall conform to the relevant ISS of latest
issue.

5.19.3 The D.C. distribution boards shall be complete with all accessories and fittings necessary for the
efficient and satisfactory operation whether they are specifically mentioned or not in the
specification. The D.C. distribution boards shall be provided with the necessary reputed make
switches, fuses, in the incoming and outgoing circuits and the equipment offered shall be
complete in itself.

5.19.4 The D.C. distribution board shall comprise the following components for 220V & 200AH.

a Double pole rotary switch

for incoming DC supply 1 No.
b. Suitable HRC fuses for
the above with fittings 2 Nos.
c. Double pole 10 A ON/OFF
Rotary switches (10A) 20 Nos.
B&BC 24

d. Suitable HRC fuses for the

above with fittings 40 Nos.
e. Double pole ON/OFF Rotary 8 Nos.
switches (20A)
f. Suitable HRC fuses for the above 16 Nos.

5.19.5 All the D.C. circuit breakers, rotary switches and HRC fuses shall be mounted on the front of the
panel. All the rotary switch interiors shall be inside front panel and the operating handle alone
protrude out of the panel.

5.19.6 The D.C. distribution Board shall be of simplex type, sheet steel cubicle, indoor type, floor mounted
and self supporting. It shall be totally enclosed, completely dust tight, weather and vermin proof.

5.19.7 The D.C. distribution board shall be fabricated out of 2.0mm cold rolled sheet steel or 2.5mm hot
rolled sheet steel and shall have folded type of construction. The contractor shall supply all necessary
base frames, anchor bolts and hardware. The D.C. distribution board height shall be 1800mm,depth
shall be 600 mm and suitable width to accommodate all components i.e., adequate clearance/space
should be provided between item to item to facilitate easy handling at the time of attending on repairs.
The D.C. distribution Board shall be provided with hinged type rear doors. It shall have a protection
of IP-42 as per IS 13947 or its equivalent.

5.19.8 All the fuses shall be of HRC non-deteriorating type. Unless otherwise specified the fuses shall be of
class-2 (33 KA breaking DC current).

5.19.9 The internal wiring of the D.C. distribution board shall be carried out with PVC insulated 1100V
grade stranded copper conductor. The control wiring shall be carried out with 2.5 Sq.mm copper
conductors. All wiring for external connections shall be brought to 1100V grade single piece
moulded terminal blocks with barriers. Suitable terminal blocks with stud type terminals shall be
provided. The cables used shall have ISI marking on them.

5.19.10 The DC distribution board shall be provided with indicating lamps to indicate DC supply ON
position, for all circuits.

5.19.11 The DC distribution boards shall be complete in all respects with all internal wiring incoming and
out-going terminals, labels, earthing connections and required cable glands.

5.19.12 The battery chargers shall be tested for its ratings before despatch. All acceptance and routine tests as
per relevant IS shall be carried out free of cost.

5.20 PAINTING: Regarding painting of the panel, Contractor may please note that outside visible
portion of the panel (when doors are closed) must be painted with light gray shade No.631 of
IS-5 and inside of the panel with Brilliant white and Base channel with black paint after necessary
primary coats of red-oxide.

6.0 TESTS :
6.1 Type Tests :
6.1.1 All the offered equipment shall be fully type tested by the contractor as per the relevant standards
including the type tests mentioned below. The type tests must have been conducted on the similar or
higher capacity from recognized test laboratory within 5 years prior to the date of bid opening. The
contractor shall furnish two sets of type tests reports as per the relevant standards for each equipment
B&BC 25

offered along with bid. The offers received without these type tests reports shall be treated as non –
responsive and rejected.

a) Regulation Test
b) HV Test
c) Ripple Test

6.1.2 All the routine and acceptance tests shall be carried as per relevant standards( IS) free of cost, both on
chargers and D.C distribution board.

7.0 INSPECTION (common for batteries and chargers)

7.1 The inspection may be carried out by the PMC at any stage of manufacture. The Contractor shall
grant free access to the PMC’s representative at a reasonable time when the work is in progress.
Inspection and acceptance of any equipment under this specification by the PMC, shall not relieve the
Contractor of his obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance with the specification and shall not
prevent subsequent rejection if the equipment is found to be defective.

7.2 The Contractor shall keep the PMC informed in advance, about the manufacturing programme so that
arrangement can be made for inspection.

7.3 The PMC reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance/routine testing of the bought out
item.

7.4 The contractor shall give 15 days (for local supply)/30 days (in case of foreign supply) advance
intimation to enable the PMC to depute his representative for witnessing the acceptance and routine
tests.

7.5 NOTE FOR FOREIGN SUPPLY:

The Contractor shall indicate the name(s) or reputed inspection agencies and the inspection charges
clearly for each lot. The inspection charges will be borne by the PMC. However the PMC reserves
the right to appoint at its cost any inspection agency to carry out inspection.

8.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN: (common for batteries and chargers)

Refer to relevant Clause of GTC, chapter I of Section-IX.

9.0 DOCUMENTATION: (common for batteries and chargers)

9.1 All drawings shall conform to International Standards Organization (ISO) 'A' series of drawing
sheet/Indian Standards Specification. All drawings shall be in ink and suitable for micro filming. All
dimensions and data shall be in S.I. Units.

9.2 List of Drawings and Documents:

The Contractor shall furnish four sets of the following along with his bid.

a. Layout drawing of battery giving details of terminal posts and arrangement of cable termination
including general arrangement of cell.

b. Charge and discharge performance curves of battery.

B&BC 26

c. Technical and description literature giving details of the equipment offered and sub-assemblies.

d. General arrangement drawing of Battery & Battery Chargers.

e. Typical schematic diagram of Battery & Battery Chargers.

f. Voltage vs Current characteristic curve of automatic voltage regulator on Float-cum-Boost

Chargers.
g. All drawings in latest Auto CAD version and the entire Bid particulars shall be submitted in a
soft copy along with the original Bid.

h. Type test reports

i. Test reports, literature and pamphlets of the bought out items & raw materials.

9.3 The Contractor shall within 2 weeks of placement of order submit four sets of final version of all the
above drawings for PMC's approval. The PMC shall communicate his comments/approval on the
drawings to the contractor within two weeks of receipt of drawings. The contractor shall, if necessary,
modify the drawings and resubmit four copies of the modified drawings for PMC's approval .The PMC
shall communicate approval with in two weeks of receipt of modified drawings. After receipt of PMC's
approval, the contractor shall, within three weeks, submit 20 prints and two good quality re-producibles
of the approved drawings for PMC's use.

9.4 The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the approved drawings and no
deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the PMC. All manufacturing and fabrication
work in connection with the equipment prior to the approval of the drawing shall be at the Contractor’s
risk.

9.5 Approval of drawings by the PMC shall not relieve the supplier of any of his responsibility and
liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the drawings for meeting the
requirements of the latest revision of the applicable standards, rules and codes of practices.
The equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering, design, workmanship
and latest revisions of relevant standards at the time of supply and PMC shall have the power to
reject any material which, in his judgment, is not in full accordance therewith.

9.6 Six sets of the type test reports, duly approved by the PMC, shall be submitted by the Contractor for
distribution before commencement of supply. Adequate copies of acceptance and routine test certificates,
duly approved by the PMC, shall accompany the dispatch consignment.

9.7 The Contractor shall also furnish twenty copies of bound ‘Instruction manuals’ covering erection,
commissioning, operation and maintenance instructions in English Language and all relevant information
and drawings pertaining to the main equipment as well as auxiliary devices. Marked erection drawings
shall identify the component parts of the equipment as shipped to enable PMC to carryout erection with
his own personnel. Each manual shall also contain one set of all the approved drawings, type test reports
as well as acceptance reports of the corresponding consignment dispatched.

10.0 PACKING, FORWARDING AND UNLOADING: (common for batteries and chargers)
Refer to relevant Clause of Chapter-I of GTC, Section-IX of this volume.
B&BC 27

11.0 QUANTITY AND DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS:

Battery charger 48 V 50 A Battery

complete with charger complete
Name of the 132 / 33 accessories with all accessories
S.No Delivery
kV Substation Suitable for 220 V Suitable for 48 V
200 AH Battery as 250 AH Battery as
specified specified
2 Sets 2 Sets Battery charger
interconnected interconnected complete with all
through a switching through a switching accessories, fittings
1 Recreation Green
cubicle with manual cubicle with manual as specified within
change over facility change over facility nine (9) months
as specified. as specified. from the date of
2 Sets 2 Sets LoA.
interconnected interconnected
through a switching through a switching
2 Village Gharbara
cubicle with manual cubicle with manual
change over facility change over facility
as specified. as specified.

Battery set and associated battery chargers along with all accessories, fittings and other material as
specified shall be delivered in the respective substations site stores within 9 months from the date of
LoA failing which the penal clause of section of Financial shall apply.

12.0 SPECIAL TOOLS & TACKLES

A set of special tools and tackles which are necessary or convenient for erection, commissioning
maintenance and overhauling of equipment shall be supplied.

13 . MANDATORY SPARES:-

The following mandatory spares shall be supplied for each substation

ITEM QTY
S.NO.

1 RECTIFIER FUSES 6 Nos.

2 Filter condenser fuses 6 Nos.
3 Control fuses 6 Nos
4 SCRs 2 Nos.
5 Diodes 2Nos
6 Charger blocking Diodes 2Nos
7 Indicating lamps 5 Nos of each type
8 Contactor of each rating & type 1set
9 Lamos for annunciation window 6 Nos.
10 Selector switches 3Nos
11 Potentiometer 2Nos
12 Micro switches 2Nos
13 Shunts for DC Ammeters 1No
14 Set of control cards, Power supply cards, AVR cards, 1No.
Amplifier cards, Earth fault defective
B&BC 28

14.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

The Guaranteed Technical particulars for the equipment being supplied shall be provided with the Bid as
specified in this technical specification at Annexure-II. The Bids received without guaranteed technical
particulars shall be treated as Non-responsive.

15.0 All deviations shall be specifically brought out in the ‘Schedule of Deviations’ (Annexure-III-A).
Deviations brought out elsewhere will not be considered.

16.0 SUPERVISION SERVICES: (common for batteries and chargers)

16.1 The service of an engineer experienced in erection and commissioning of the equipment of similar type
has to be arranged, if necessary. However charges for the same shall be included in the erection charges
quoted for batteries and chargers vide price schedule-
B&BC 29

A N N E X U R E – I1

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

FOR BATTERY CHARGING EQUIPMENT

S.No. Description 220V 200AH

1 Type of rectifier

2) No. of units

3) Manufacturer's type designation

4) A.C. supply
a) Voltage (Volts)
b) Current (Amps)
c) No. of phases
d) Frequency, cycles/Sec
e) Power factor

5) Percentage taps provided on transformer

6) Rated D.C. output for

a) Boost charger (KW)

b) Float Charger (KW)

7) Rated D.C. output voltage for

a) Boost charger (Volts)

b) Float charger (Volts)

8) Rated D.C. output current for Max. Min.

a) Boost charger (Amps)

b) Float charger (Amps)

9) Rate of D.C. voltage control for

a) Boost charger (Volts)

b) Float charger (Volts)

10) D.C. output voltage regulation from

no load to full load volts

11) Maximum ripple content %

B&BC 30

S.No. Description 220V 200AH

12) Maximum permissible temperature

rise over an ambient
temperature of 50 ° .C

13) Overall efficiency

14) Unit dimensions: Width x Height x Depth mm

15) Unit shipping weight Kgs

16) Load limiting feature (Please attach

characteristics showing variation of voltage
with increase in load)

17) Automatic voltage regulator (Float Mode)

i) Manufacturer’s & Address
ii) Type
iii) Governing Standards
iv)Percentage stabilization of the output DC
Voltage
v) Voltage setting range
vi) Response time of automatic voltage regulator

18) Manual voltage regulator (Float Mode)

i) Manufacturer’s Name & Address
ii) Type
iii) Governing Standards
iv) Voltage setting range

19) Boost charging current setting range

20) Boost charging limit setting range

21) Fail-safe current limits in over load conditions

(Minute)
i) 105%
ii) 125%
iii) 150%
B&BC 31

S.No. Description 220V 200AH

22) Rectifier assembly

i) Manufacturer’s Name & Address
ii) Governing Standards
iii) Type of semiconductor material
iv) Rated direct current per SCR
v) Rated D.C. Voltage.
vi) Rated input Voltage
vii)Type of connections of rectifier elements

23) Rectifier transformer

i) Manufacturer’s Name & Address
ii) Type
iii) Governing Standards
iv) Rated KVA & % impedance
v) Input line winding connection in vector
representation.
vi) Winding connection in vector representation
vii) One minute power frequency withstand
voltage (KV)

24) Instruments
i) Manufacturer’s Name & Address
ii) Type
iii) Governing Standards
iv) DC voltmeter range
v) DC Ammeter range
vi) Dial size
vii) Accuracy class

25) Contactor
i) Manufacturer’s Name & Address
ii) Type
iii) Governing Standards
iv) Rated voltage
v) Rated current
vi) No. of power contracts
vii) No. of type and rating of aux contacts

26) Thermal Overload relay

i) Manufacturer’s Name & Address
ii) Governing Standards
iii) Tripping current range
iv) Whether single phasing protection provided
B&BC 32

S.No. Description 220V 200AH

27) Air Break Switches:

i) Manufacturer’s Name & Address
ii) Type
iii) Governing Standards
iv) Rated voltage
v) Rated current
vi) Type and material of contacts
28) Fuses
i) Manufacturer’s Name & Address
ii) Type
iii) Governing Standards
iv) Rupturing capacity

29) MCB/MCCB
i) Manufacturer’s Name & Address
ii) Governing Standards
iii) Continuous current capacity (A)
iv) Rupturing capacity

30) List of documents, Literature and relevant ISS/IEC Yes/No

etc. Enclosed

31) Cleaning process as per Seven Tank Process Yes/No

32) Painting as per IS: 5 (Shade 631) Yes/No

33) Recommended settings for thermostat

a) Operation temperature Deg. C set temperature Deg. C

34) List of major accessories provided

35) Recommended spares

Place : Signature of the Bidder :

Date : Name :

Business address :
B&BC 33

Annexure III-A

SCHEDULE OF DEVIATION

TECHNICAL ( Battery Chargers)

Sl. No. Requirements / Specification Deviations Remarks
Equipment Clause No.

It is hereby conformed that except for deviations mentioned above, the offer conforms to all the other
features specified in Technical Specification Section ____ of this Bid Document

Place : Signature of the Bidder :

Date : Name :

Business address :
B&BC 34

ACRONYMS

Reference Abbreviations Names & Address

IEC International Electro Technical

Commission Bureau Central de la
Commission electro Technique
International
1. Rue de cerembe
Geneva, Switzerland.

ISO International Organisation for

Standardization Danish Board of
Standardization
Aurehoegyej-12
Dk-290, Heel Prup
DENMARK

ISS Indian Standard Specification.

Bureau of Indian Standards
Nanak Bhavan,
9, Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg
NEW DELHI – 100 002
INDIA

AC Alternate current

DC Direct current

V Volt

VAC AC Volts

A Amps

Hz Hertz

mV milli Volts

M.Ohms Mega Ohms

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B&BC 35

ANNEXURE-A

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 48V SEALED MAINTENANCE

FREE VRLA BATTERIES AND 48V FLOAT CUM BOOST CHARGERS (1+1)

1.0. SCOPE:

1.1. This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, inspection and testing before supply and
delivery at destination stores located at 132/33kV sub-station at Recreation Green and Village
Gharbara in the Greater Noida, U.P. State basis of following 48V Sealed Maintenance free VRLA
battery sets and 48V Float Cum Boost Chargers with standby and D.C. Distribution / Switching
cubicle required for communication equipment at substations stated above.

(i). 48V/50A Float Cum Boost Charger (1+1) with D.C. Distribution/ Switching Cubicle
(ii). 48V/250AH Sealed Maintenance Free VRLA Battery set

1.2. It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of the design and construction of
material. However the material shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering design
and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation up to the
Bidder's guarantee, in a manner acceptable to the PMC, who will interpret the meanings of drawings
and specification and shall have the power to reject any work or material which, in his judgment is not
in accordance therewith. The offered material shall be complete with all components necessary for
their effective and trouble free operation. Such, components shall be deemed to be within the scope of
Bidder's supply irrespective of whether those are specifically brought out in this specification and/or
the commercial order or not.

2.0 STANDARDS:

2.1 The design, manufacture and testing of various equipments covered by this specification shall comply
with the following Indian standards unless other-wise specified in the specification.
__________________________________________________________________
Indian standards Title
___________________________________________________________________
Battery charger
IS 7204(Part-1)/1974/1991 Stabilized power supplies DC output
Part: Terms and definitions
IS 7204(Part-2)/1990/1991 Stabilized power supplies DC output
Part-2: Rating and performance

IS 7204(Part-3)/1980/1991 Stabilized power supplies DC output

Part-3 Radio frequency interference test

IS 7204(part-4)/1980/1991 Stabilized power supplies DC output

Part-4 Tests other than for Radio Frequency
interference

IS 3895/1961 Monocrytalline semiconductor rectifier

cells and stacks

IS4540/1968/1991 Monocrytalline semiconductor rectifier

Assemblies and equipment
B&BC 36

DC Distribution
IS5039/1983/1991 Distribution feeders for voltages not exceeding 1000V
AC and 1200 V DC(first revision) (amendment I)

IS2675/1983/1991 Enclosed distribution fuse board and

(Second revision) output for voltages not exceed 1000V AC or 1200V
DC
Fuses:
IS13703 (part-4) Low voltage fuses Supplimentary requirement for fuse
link for the production of semi conductor devices

IS13703(part-1)/1993 Low voltage fuses for voltages not

IEC 269-1/1986 Exceeding 1000V AC or 1500V DC.
Part:1: General requirement(superseding IS9224 (Part-
1)/1979)
Battery sets:
ISS1885/1986 (Part-VIII) Electro Technical Vocabulary
ISS 1651/1991 secondary cells and Batteries. Stationary
(Third Revision) cells and Batteries, Lead Acid type (with IS1652-1984
tubular positive plates) Sealed
maintenance free batteries
IEC: 896-2/Part-II Valve Regulated type BSEN 60896-2
_______________________________________________________________________

Material conforming to other internationally accepted standards, which ensure equal or higher quality
than the standards mentioned above would be acceptable. In case the Bidders who wish to offer
material conforming to the other standards, salient points of difference between the standards adopted
and the specific standards shall be clearly brought out in relevant schedule. Four copies of such
standards with authentic English Translations shall be furnished along with the offer.

4.0. PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:

4.1. BATTERY

a) No. of cells per battery bank 24 Nos.

b) Nominal voltage of each cell 2 volts
c) Nominal voltage of the complete bank 48 volts
d) Type of plates in each cell
Positive plates Low corrosion and low self
discharge alloy
Negative plates Low corrosion & Maintenance
Free alloy
e) Terminals Integral solid copper core
f). Connectors Lead plated copper connectors
g). CapacityofBatteries(in Amp. 250AH at 27 deg.C for
Hours at 10 Hour rate to an end voltage 48V/250AH battery set.
of 1.85V per Cell)
B&BC 37

h) Cell dimensions and designation Designation to be specified

in accordance with the standard
by the Bidder and maximum over all dimensions as per
Relevant Standards. The Bidder shall provide adequate
thickness for the container to avoid any damages in
transit & during installation particularly outer sides of
the container where name plate and other details are
pressed

i) Proposed method of working Float charge and boost charge

j) Mounting Rack mounted stack
k) Type of Installation In-door

4.2. FLOAT CUM BOOST CHARGER:

4.2.1. AC input:
i.Voltage: 230 AC + 40V - 70V AC.
(From 160V AC to 270V AC)

ii. Frequency: 50Hz ± 5%

4.2.2. OUTPUT VOLTAGE

i. Constant voltage- float mode: 50 to 56V
ii. Constant current-float mode : 25% to 100% of the charging current upto
58V
Boost mode: 20 to 60% of the battery charging
current for boost charging the battery from
56 to 65V
iii. Output current rating : 50A for 48V/50A FCBC

4.2.3. Current limit

i. Battery path : 20 to 50A for 48V/50A FCBC
ii. Total current limit : 105% of the current capacity of the charger

4.1.3 OUTPUT
1. Float Voltage :
a. Load path : 48 to 52V
b. Battery : 50-56

2. Boost Voltage
a. Load path :48-52V
b. Battery path :56-65V
Suitable number of dropper diodes shall be connected in the load path
in a string with a 4 position selector switch to select appropriate
number of Diodes to maintain the above load voltage of 48 to 52 V
under any battery charging voltage conditions. Dropper Diodes
shorting contactor shall be provided to feed the battery direct to the
load in case of AC supply/charger fail conditions..

3. Ripple : Not more than 4m(max)

Psophometric
4. Voltage Regulation : ± 1%
B&BC 38

5. Efficiency : Not lees than 75% at full load

6. Power Factor : Not less than 0.80 lag at full load

7. Insulation : Not less than 5M ohms with 500V

DC Meggar between
a)DC output terminals and AC input terminals
b) DC output terminals to body
c) AC input terminals to body

4.1.4 GENERAL:

a)Cabinet : i. 48V/50A DC supply system comprising of Float cum boost charger

with 1 + 1 standby, DC distribution/switching cubicle. The system
shall be based on thyristor control design with two identical float cum
boost chargers interconnected through a switching cubicle and 48V
DC distribution panel. In case of fault in any one of the chargers
feeding the load, the switching cubicle shall be provided with manual
change over facility to transfer the load to the other charger. The
charger shall suit to connect the 48V SMF batteries or Lead Acid
battery system.

ii. FCBC-2Nos. and DC distribution/switching cubicle

( 1 No.) shall be supplied in three cabinets of uniform height and depth
so as to be aligned and bolted together on the same foundation channel
side by side. They shall be fastened together with bolts and nuts so as
to enable them to be separated when required for repairs. Free
standing type floor mounting type bottom cable entry, rear side access
for wiring and connections.

b)Type of cooling :Natural air cooling

c)Temperature range :0 to 50 deg C. of operation
d)Humidity : 0% to 95%
e) Colour :Silver Ash

5.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

5.1 BATTERY:

5.1.1. The batteries required under this specification are for supplying DC supply to Communication
equipment. The battery shall be capable of withstanding large discharge currents for operating
various equipments. It shall be of rugged construction designed for long life and for working
satisfactorily without much alteration under the severest operating conditions and shall conform to the
relevant standards.

5.1.2. The battery shall be supplied complete with all accessories including inter cell, inter row and inter
bank connectors and bolts, nuts & washers.

5.1.3. The battery shall be offered complete with all parts that are necessary or useful for their efficient
operation. Such parts shall be deemed to be within the scope of this specification
.
B&BC 39

5.1.4. The Guaranteed Technical Particulars (GTP) to be ensured is enclosed in Annexure I. Bidders are
requested to indicate GTP separately in the same format.

5.2. FLOAT CUM BOOST CHARGER

5.2.1. The battery charging plant consists of

1)Float cum Boost chargers with manual change over facility.
2) D.C. Distribution/Switching cubicle.

5.2.2. Requirements of Battery charging plant:

The Battery charging plant shall ensure 48V DC supply to communication equipment and Telephone
switching equipment and should be able to charge the battery floating across the DC output terminals.

5.2.3. Equipment Ratings and Electrical Parameters:

5.2.4. FLOAT CUM BOOST CHARGERS:

Input 230V AC+ 40 volts to -70 volts/single phase (ie. Varying AC from 160V AC
To 270 VAC)

5.2.4.1. i. In addition to the above, the unit should have facility to Boost charge the 48v
station Batteries under manual control in constant current mode of charging at
any rate of charge between 20% and 60% of the rated charging current from a
terminal voltage of -58V (2.4V/cell) to a terminal voltage of -65v (upto
2.7v/cell)

ii. Under all the battery charging voltage conditions, Load voltage shall be maintained between
49V to 53 V through suitable number of dropper diodes.

5.2.4.2 Output: Constant Voltage mode: Constant voltage in the range of -50 to 56 V DC
at any value of load current, from 0 % to 100% of the rated full load. Facility to
manually adjust the output voltage (by potentiometer) is to be provided.

5.2.4.3 In case of using with Maintenance free sealed Lead Acid Batteries, constant voltage for charging the
Battery will be set in the range 53 to 55V. Battery charging current limit in the Battery path should be
provided for this application and this will be set in the range 20 to 50A for 48V/50A FCBC. The Unit
shall have soft start features and should not have any tendency to hunt irrespective of the input and
load conditions.

5.2.4.4 Constant current Mode: In addition to the above, the Unit should have the facility to charge the 48V
Stationary Batteries under manual control to a terminal voltage of 2.4V/cell (-58V) from the
discharged condition of 1.85V/cell (-44.4V) under constant current mode at any rate of charge
between 25% and 100% of the rated charging current.

5.2.4.5. Current Rating : 50Amps for 48V/50A FCBC(1+1)

5.2.4.6.Output Voltage When the total current(Battery + load) of the charger goes
Drop beyond 100% of the rated current, the output terminal voltage should fall
sharply at or before 105% of the rated current, to a value below-47v.

5.2.4.7.Ripple Voltage Less than 4mv on resistive load without battery and 2 mv with
battery
B&BC 40

5.2.4.8.Voltage Regulation + /- for currents between zero and full load and mains voltage
variations of + /- 10%

5.2.4.9. i. Efficiency Not less than 75% of full rated load

ii. Power Factor Not less than 0.8% lag
iii.Total current limit (Load + battery) Fixed at 105% of the rated
current capacity of the charger.

5.2.4.10. Insulation Not less than 5 Meg ohms in any of the following cases.
i) between DC output terminals and AC input terminals
ii) between DC output terminals and Earth
iii)between AC input terminals and Earth

5.2.4.11. Protection & Control: The following protection & Controls should be provided
1). AC input rotary switch (ON-OFF)
2). HRC Fuses for DC output
3) HRC fuses for SCR's & Diodes
4). DC output adjust potentiometer
5). Battery isolation switch
6). Dropper diodes selector switch
7). Low voltage sensitive relay to isolate load from the battery during main Voltage
failure or chargers failure when the battery is drain to the level of -44 .4 V(i.e. 1.85 per
cell).

5.2.4.12. Equipment over voltage(EOV): The FCBC charger should trip and give an EOV indication by
LED flash 'ON' and an alarm when the Load Voltage exceeds 55v. It can be switched. "ON"
only after manual resetting of the EOV - Reset push button.

5.2.4.13. Supervision and Alarms: The following Visual LED indications should be
Provided on units with marking.
a) ON-Green
b) Off/mains fail-Amber
c) Fault-Red

5.2.4.14. Fault alarms should be actuated in any one or more of the following conditions.
a) SCR/Diode Fuse failure.
b) DC output High/low beyond limits (EOV/Battery low)
c) Over load
d) A.C. input failure
e) Float cum Boost charger I&II fail
f) Filter capacitor fuse fail

5.2.4.15. (i). Analog DC voltmeter (0-75V Range) to be connected across the battery and load through a
switch.
(ii). Analog DC Ammeter (0-50A range for 48V/50A FCBC)
(iii).Battery Ammeter (50-0-50A for 48V/50A FCBC)) (Central zero)

5.2.5. D.C. Distribution/Switching Cubicle

5.2.5.1. Switching arrangement should be essentially provided for

a) Termination of Communication equipment loads.
b) Termination of 48V stationery battery/SMF Batteries.
B&BC 41

5.2.5.2. a) Adequately rated, insulated copper bus bars should be provided for charging bus
and load bus.
b) Switch is to be provided to isolate the battery from the charging bus.
c) Suitable cable glands are to be provided for all the external cables.
d) 12 Nos. of 6A MCB's in negative potential line, feeding various DC loads are to be provided.
The positive wires are to be brought to a common terminal.
e) 4 Nos. of 230V/AC 6A single phase outputs with MCB protection in each circuit to be
provided.

f) Both the chargers are generally in ON condition with one of the chargers feeding the load.
Battery is always floated across the charging bus load & battery should be transferred to the
hot stand by unit automatically without any break of DC supply even for milliseconds.

5.2.6. During the period the main AC Voltage is cut-off and the battery feeding the load current a voltage
sensitive relay should be provided to cut off the supply to the battery, once it is drained to the level of
-44.4V(i.e) 1.85 per cell)

The Guaranteed Technical Particulars to be ensured is enclosed in Annexure I . Bidders are requested
to indicate Guaranteed Technical Particulars separately in the same format.

6.0. TYPE TESTS

6.1 The equipment offered shall be fully type tested by the bidder or his collaborator as per the relevant
standards. The bidder shall furnish four sets of the type test reports along with the bid. The bids
received without type test reports shall be treated as non-responsive.

6.1.1 All the type tests for batteries shall be conducted as per the relevant standard specification and a copy
of test certificate shall be furnished along with the bid. All the type tests for battery chargers shall be
conducted as per the relevant standard specification and a copy of test certificate shall be furnished
along with the bid.

6.1.2. Following tests shall be specifically conducted as type tests for each of 250AH
Batteries.

-Verification of constructional requirements

-Verification of markings
-Verification of dimensions
-Test for capacity and test for voltage during discharge
-Ampere-hour and watt-hour efficiency tests
-Test for loss of capacity on storage
-Endurance test.

6.2. Acceptance Tests:

6.2.1 The following shall constitute the acceptance tests as per relevant standards for
Batteries.

-Marking and Packing

-Verification of dimensions
-Test for capacity
-Test for voltage during discharge
B&BC 42

6.2.2. The following shall constitute the acceptance tests as per relevant standards for battery chargers.

i. Marking and packing

i. Verification of dimensions
ii. Insulation resistance
6.3 Testing Expenses

6.3.1 The type test specified if necessitated for re-conduction shall be conducted free of cost
to the purchaser.

6.3.1 Bidders shall indicate the laboratories in which they have conducted the type tests.

6.3.2 The entire cost of testing for the acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture specified
herein shall be treated as included in the quoted unit price.

6.4 Test Reports:

6.4.1 Copies of test reports shall be furnished in a t least six(6) copies along with one original. One copy
shall be returned duly certified by the PMC only after which the material will be despatched.

6.4.2 Record of routine test reports shall be maintained by the Bidder at his works for periodic inspection by
the PMC 's representative.

6.4.3 Test Certificates of tests conducted during manufacture shall be maintained by the Bidder. These
shall be produced for verification as and when desired by the PMC.

7.0. INSPECTION

7.1 The inspection may be carried out by the PMC at any stage of manufacture. The successful bidder
shall grant free access to the purchaser's representative at a reasonable time when the work is in
progress. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment under this specification by the PMC, shall not
relieve the contractor of his obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance with the specification
and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the equipment is found to be defective.

7.2 The Bidder shall keep the PMC in advance, about the manufacturing programme so that arrangement
can be made for inspection.

7.3. The PMC reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance/routine testing of the bought out
items, if any

7.4. The contractor shall give 15 days in advance intimation to enable the PMC to depute his
representative for witnessing the acceptance and routine tests.

8.0. PACKING & FORWARDING:

8.1 The equipments shall be packed in crates suitable for vertical/horizontal transport as the case may be,
and suitable to withstand handling during transport and outdoor storage during transit. The contractor
shall be responsible for any damage to the equipment during transit, due to improper and inadequate
packing. The easily damageable material shall be carefully packed and marked with the appropriate
caution symbol. Wherever necessary, proper arrangement for lifting, such as lifting hooks etc., shall
be provided. Any material found short inside the packing cases shall be supplied by contractor
without any extra cost.
B&BC 43

Each consignment shall be accompanied with a detailed packing list containing the
following information.

-Name of the consignee

-Details of consignment
-Destination
-Total weight of consignment
-Sign showing upper/lower side of the orate
-Handling and packing instructions
-Bill of Material indicating contents of each package
B&BC 44

ANNEXURE-I
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR
48V/250AH SEALED MAINTENANCE FREE VRLA BATTERY SETS
(TO BE FILLED BY BIDDER)
________________________________________________________________________
S.NO. Description 48V/250AH
Battery set
_________________________________________________________________________
1. Type of designation as per ISS
2. Manufacturer's type designation
3. Manufacturer’s Address
4. Ampere hour capacity at 10 Hours rate
of discharge
a) No. of positive plates per cell
b) No. of Negative plates per cell
5. Total No. of plates per cell
6. Discharge current and cell end voltage
for the battery
a).1 minute load
b).1 hour load
c).2 hour load
d).3 hour load
e).5 hour load
f).8 hour load
g).10 hour load
(Please furnish a graph showing Amps against time for the type of battery offered)
7. Nominal cell voltage(Volts)
8. No. of cells in each bank
9. Internal resistance for each cell (micro ohms)
10. Resistance of the battery including
inter-connection between the cells(Ohms)
11. Short circuit current (Amps)
12. Material of containers
13. Thickness, type and material of separators
14. a. Construction details and dimensions
i.Positive plate
ii.Negative plate
b. Method of supporting elements
15. Surface area of plates, sq.mm
16. Clearance between edges of plates and
17. inner surface of container (incase of lead
lined Wooden container clearance between
edges of plates and hangers) mm
18. Clearance between bottom of negative plates
and bottom of container mm
19. Clearance between top of plates and top
of container mm
20. Sediment space (depth)mm

21. Dimensions of each cell

Length, mm
B&BC 45

Width, mm
Height, mm
22. Thickness of container, mm
23 Distance between centres of cells where erected mm
24 Nett. weight of the cell complete with acid Kg
25 a) Ampere hour efficiency %
b) Watt hour efficiency %
26 Recommended float charge current and voltage Amps volts
27 Recommended boost charge current and voltage Amps volts
28 Time required for boost charging from discharged
condition
29 Maximum charging current/cell Amps
30 Nominal charging rate Amps
31 Maximum charging rate Amps
32 Type of inter-cell connection
33 Type of spray arrestors
34 Type of stand
35 Type of supporting insulators
36 Whether explosion proof or vent plugs provided
37 Expected life span of battery
38 Proposed layout
39 Rack details
a) No. of units
b) Description
c) Unit weight(shipping) Kgs
d) Unit length mm
e) Unit width mm
f) Unit height mm
40 Ventilation required in battery room

SIGNATURE OF THE BIDDER

B&BC 46

ANNEXURE-II

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR FLOAT CUM BOOST CHARGER

(TO BE FILLED BY THE BIDDER)

_________________________________________________________________
S.NO. Description 48V/50A charger
_________________________________________________________________
1. Type and Make

2. Input voltage Volts

3. Out put voltage Volts

1. OUTPUT RATINGS

Float cum Boost charger

i. Voltage on load side Volts

ii. Voltage on battery side Volts
iii. Current on load side Amps.
iv. Current on Battery side Amps.

5. Alarms & Indicators

6. Protections provided

________________________________________________________________

SIGNATURE OF THE BIDDER

SECTION – IX
CHAPTER - XI
 1

SECTION – IX

CHAPTER- XI

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

FOR

33kV, 5 MVAR CAPACITOR BANK

 2

1.0 SCOPE:

1.1 This specification covers design, engineering, manufacture, assembly, stage testing,
inspection and testing before supply, packing, forwarding and delivery at site CIP
destination of Outdoor 33KV SHUNT CAPACITORS WITH INTERNAL FUSES
ALONGWITH ALL ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES specified
herein for services at 132/33 kV substation at RC Green and Garbhara Village of
Greater Noida of U.P.. State.

1.2 The Capacitors and accessories shall conform in all respects to high Standards of
Engineering, design, workmanship and latest revisions of relevant Standards at the time of
offer and PMC shall have the power to reject any work or material, which in his
judgement is not in full accordance therewith.

1.3 Climatic Conditions :

Please refer to clause 1.2 of GTC, chapter-I of section IX of this volume.

1.4 Auxiliary supply conditions: Please refer to clause 1.3of GTC, chapter-I of section IX
of this volume.

1.5 It is not the intent to specify completely here all the details of design and construction of
the Capacitor Banks. However, the Capacitor Banks shall conform in all respects to the high
standard of engineering design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in
continuous commercial operation. The PMC will interpret the meanings of drawings and
specifications and shall have power to reject any material which in his judgment is not in
accordance therewith. The Capacitor Banks offered shall be complete with all components
necessary for their effective and trouble free operation. Such components shall be deemed to
be within the scope of the Bidder irrespective of whether they are specifically brought out in
this specification and/or in the commercial order or not.

1.6 The EPC contractor should procure the Capacitor Banks from reputed firms like M/s. ABB,
Chennai, M/s BHEL, Bhopal, M/s Shreem Capacitors Pvt. Ltd., Kolhapur,(MP), M/s.
Nokian, Finland and M/s. Coopers, USA with the prior approval obtained from PMC.

2.0 ADDITIONAL QUALIFYING REQUIREMENTS:

33 kV 5 MVAR Capacitor banks to be supplied shall be of a reputed manufacturer.

Who has Designed, manufactured , tested and supplied at least 10 nos. of 33 kV
Capacitor banks of the specified or above rating and voltage class in the last five years
out of which at least 5 nos. are in successful operation during the last 2 years as on the
date of the bid opening. Documentary evidence for supply and satisfactory operation as
specified above from the clients (Only SEBs, State transmission utilities, Central
transmission utility, distribution utilities and Public Sector undertakings like NTPC
etc.) had to be enclosed to the bid, failing which the bid will be liable for rejection.

33 kV 5 MVAR Capacitor banks to be supplied should have been fully type tested.
Bidder shall enclose copies of type test reports to his bid failing which the bid will be
treated as incomplete and non-responsive and will be rejected. Type test reports shall be
of dates not earlier than 5 years from the date of bid opening. In case type test reports
 3

pertain to a period earlier than 5 years type tests must be carried out in the presence of
PMC’s representative free of cost.
.

3.0 STANDARDS:

3.1 Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this specification the capacitors and accessories
shall conform to the latest revisions and amendments thereof of the following Standards:
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SL. MATERIAL/ STANDARD TITLE
No. EQUIPMENT NUMBER
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Capacitors IEC 871-2 Shunt Capacitors for
IS:13925(Part-I) Power System
2. Breakers IEC 56(Part-I High voltage Alternating
to IV) Current Circuit Breakers.
IS: 13118-1991.
Part-I - General and
Definition
Part-II - Rating
Part-III - Design & Construction
Part-IV - Type Tests and
Routine Tests
3. Series Reactor IECA 289 Specifications for Reactors
IS : 5553 Series Reactors
(Part-III)

4. Bushing IEC DOCUMENT-26A Bushing for alternating

IS:2099 voltages above 1000 volts

5. Instrument Trans- IEC 51 Protective Current Trans-

formers IS:2705 formers for Special Purpose
(Part-IV) application

6. Internal Fuse IS:12672 Internal fuses and internal

over pressure dis-connectors
for Shunt Capacitors.

7. H.R.C. Fuse IS:13703 (Part-I) Specification for low

(Part-II)-1979 voltage fuses

8. General Requirement IS:13947 (Part-V) General Requirement for switchgear and

Switch gear Control gear & Control gear for Voltage not exceeding for
voltages not exceeding 1000 V 1000 V AC or 1200 V D C

9. Degree of protection IEC DOCUMENT Degree of protection

for enclosures of IS : 13947-I providedby enclosures for
Control gear (for Low voltage Switch gear
Voltage not exceeding and Control gear.
1000 V)
 4

10. Electrical Relays IEC 255 Specification for Electrical

IS: 3231 Relays for Power System
(part-II) protection

11. Electrical Wiring IS:732 Code of practice for

(1989) Electrical wiring installations.
(Third revision).

12. Current Limiting IEC 282-1 Specification for high

Fuses IS: 9385 voltage fuses.
(part-I)
13. Isolators IS: 9921 Specification for double
IEC:129 break center rotating switch.

14. Lightning Arrestors IS:3070 Specification for LAS for

part-III alternating current.(Metal Oxide gapless
IEC-99-4 surge arrestors)
IS : 15086
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

3.2 Equipment/Material meeting with the requirements of other authoritative Standards, which
ensure equal or better performance than the Standards mentioned above, shall also be
considered when the equipment/material offered by the bidder conforms to other Standards
adopted and the Standards specified in this specification shall be clearly brought out in the
relevant Schedule. Two copies of such standards with authentic translation in ENGLISH
shall be furnished along with the offer.

4.0 SYSTEM PARTICULARS :

33KV Shunt Capacitor Bank

- Nominal System Voltage : 33 KV

- Rated Voltage : 38KV(for capacitors)

36 KV (for all other
associated equipment)
-
Number of phases : 3 ( Three)

- Frequency : 50 + 5% C/s.

- System Grounding : Solidly Earthed

- System Fault Level : 25 KA

- Basic insulation level.

i) Impulse withstand : 170 KV peak

Voltage
 5

ii) Power frequency : 70 KV rms

withstand Voltage

5.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:

The capacitor units and other associated equipments/materials covered in this

specification shall meet the technical requirements listed hereunder:-

I. CAPACITOR UNITS :
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SL. ITEM SPECIFICATION
NO.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Nominal System Voltage 33 KV

2. MVAR Capacity required 5.0

at nominal system voltage

3. Rated Voltage of the 38 KV

capacitor bank
4. MVAR output at rated voltage 7.2
5. Rating of individual Capacitor Unit 125 KVAR, 150 KVAR, 200 KVAR, 400KVAR,
should be any one of the following
6. Rated voltage of individual
Capacitor unit 10.4KV; 11KV; 7.3KV; 7.3KV

7. Connection of capacitor bank Double Star

8. No. of series groups Not more than two
9. Power Loss (Tan delta) Not to exceed 0.2
including loss in the fuse watt per KVAR subject
to tolerance as per
applicable standards
10. Type of Grounding Ungrounded

11. Capacitor impregnant Non-toxic/i.e applicable chlorinated

biphenyl type.

12. Type protection Internal fuse

13. Type of discharge Internally through resistor provided within the

capacitor unit.

14. Capacity to receive inrush current Not less than 100 times rated current.
15. Temperature Category The capacitors shall be suitable for
maximum ambient temp. of 50 Deg C
16. System frequency 50 Hz
17. Voltage variation + 10% / - 15%
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 6

SL. ITEM SPECIFICATION

NO.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
18. Frequency variation ± 5%
19. No. of phases 3
20. BIL 170 KVp
21. Power frequency 70 KV (rms)
withstand voltage
II. NEUTRAL CURRENT TRANSFORMERS:
1. Rated voltage : 36KV
2. Type : Outdoor
3. Ratio : 10-5/1-1Amp.
4. Rated Burden:
i) Core -I : 15 VA
ii) Core -II : 15VA
5. Accuracy Class:
i) Core - I : 5P
ii) Core -II : 5P
6. Accuracy Limit Factor :
i) Core – I : Not less than 10

ii) Core -II : Not exceeding 5

7. Short time rating : 100 times rated current
For 3 sec.
8. Minimum total creepage : 900 mm
distance.
9. No. of NCTs per bank 1 No.

III.SERIES REACTORS (Single phase) :

1. Rating of Series reactors : 14.4 KVAR ( 6 Nos

2.4 KVAR reactors
on neutral side of
double star ) Dry type
2. Temperature rise : As per IS : 5553
Part-III

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SL. ITEM SPECIFICATION
 7

NO.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

3. Short-time withstand : 16 times of 130%

current and duration capacity rated
current of capacitor
bank for 3 secs.

4. Minimum creepage distance: 900 mm

5. Insulation level:
(a) Winding 70 KV/170 KVp
(b) Support insulator 70 KV/170 KVp

6. Winding material: Aluminium

IV. CIRCUIT BREAKERS : ( Covered under technical specification and price schedule
for Circuit breakers)

1. Rated Voltage (KV rms) : 36 KV

frequency (Hz) : 50 Hz
2. Continuous Current Rating : 800A
3. Type : VCB
4. Number of Poles : 3
5. Type of Operation : Gang Operation
of 3 poles
6. Operating mechanism : Motor Operated Spring closing Mechanism.
7. Rated Operating : 0-0.3 Sec.-CO-3 Min-CO
duty Cycle
8. Max. Closing time (ms) : 150
9. Max. Break time (ms) : 60
10. Rated breaking current capacity
i) Small inductive current (Amps rms) 0.5 to 10
ii) Short Circuit Current
a)A.C. Component (KA) : 25
b)D.C. Component : Corresponding to min.
opening time as per IEC -56
11. Rated short circuit making : 62.5
current capacity (KA)
12. Min. creepage distance of : 900
support insulator (mm)
13. Short time current carrying: 25
capability for 3 seconds(KA)
14. Rating of auxiliary contacts : 10 A

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SL. ITEM SPECIFICATION
 8

NO.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15. Capacitor Breaking current : 200 A
16. Phase to phase spacing in the 400
switch yard i.e. inter pole spacing
for breaker (mm).
17. Required ground clearence lowest 2820
live terminal if both the terminals
are not in the same horizantal plane (mm).
18. Minimum height of the lowest 2550
part of the support
insulator form ground level (mm).
19. Operating mechanism Spring charged
20. No. of closing and tripping Two trip coils one close coil
coils with anti pumping arrangement

V. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS:

1. Rated Voltage : 36 KV

2. Type : Out door oil cooled

3. No. of cores : 2

4. No. of primary winding : 1

5. Primary rated current : 480- 240-120 A
6. Secondary rated current : 1A

7. Rated burden (VA)

a)Core-I : 15
b) Core - II : 15

8. Accuracy Class :
a)Core -I : 5P
b)Core -II : 1

9. Accuracy limit factor : Not less than 10

Core - I

10. Instrument security : Not exceeding 5

factor Core - II

11. Rated short time current. : 25 KA for 1 Sec.

12. No . required per Bank : 3 Nos.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SL. ITEM SPECIFICATION
NO.
 9

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VI. LIGHTNING ARRESTORS: ( Covered under technical specification and price
schedule forSurge Arrestors)

1. System voltage (KV) : 36

2. Type
3. Rated voltage (KV)
4. Continuous operating
voltage (KV)
5. Nominal discharge current :
6. Rated frequency
7. Discharge class
8. No . required per Bank :
: Gapless station type
: 30
: 25
10 KA
: 50 Hz.
: 2
3 Nos.

VII ISOLATORS : ( Covered under technical specification and price schedule for
Isolators)
1. Rated voltage (KV) : 36
2. Rated continuous current. : 800 Amps
3. Type . : Off load double break

4. Rated short circuit : 25

withstand current for
3 seconds (KA)
5. Rated peak withstand : 62.5
current (KA)
6. Operating mechanism : Motor operated spring machanism
7. Basic insulation level : 170
Lightning impulse
withstand voltage KV peak
8. Creepage distance (mm). : 900
9. Auxiliary switch. : 6 NO + 6 NC
10. No . required per Bank : 1 No.
11. Earth Blade. : 1 No.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SL. ITEM SPECIFICATION
NO.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 10

VIII.CONTROL AND RELAY PANEL(Covered under technical specification and Price

schedule for control and relay panels):

1.Rated voltage : 36 KV
2.Type : Indoor

3.Overall dimensions (mm): 800x2250

(Depth x Height)
Width as required
4. Annunciation windows : 12

5. Meters : Ammeter,Volt Meter with 6 position

selector switch, VAR meter, P.F. meter etc.

6. Protection Main Relays 3 O/L & One E/L with high set instantaneous
O/V,U/V Trip supervision, Master trip with
adequate NO-NC contacts 2 Nos. for 33
KV, Neutral displacement Relays, AVR
Relay for 33 KV Capacitor Bank
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----
Note: The above shall be provided in one part of the 33 kV twin feeder control relay & panels
covered under technical specification and price schedule of control relay panels.

The following make of the 33kV equipment shall be supplied:

Circuit Breaker ABB/BHEL/CGL/S&S

Control & Relay Panel. ABB/ Venson/ALSTOM/
Siemens/Easun Reyrolle

All other associated equipment any reputed make.

6.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:

6.1.0 Capacitor Units:

6.1.1 Capacitor should be designed for satisfactory operation even with presence of harmonics
in the system. For the purpose of design, values of 2%, 4% and 2% respectively of 3rd,
5th and 7th harmonic level should be assumed.

6.1.2 The container shall be made from sheet steel of thickness not less than 2 mm/cold rolled
annealed steel of thickness not less than 1.25 mm.

6.1.3 The container shall be hermetically sealed by controlled arc welding process. The metal
flanges of the bushing should be soldered / welded to the container and covered with
epoxy compound, providing a strong hermetically seal to the container.
 11

6.1.4 The outside of capacitor units and other structures should have smooth and tidy look and
should be coated with weather-proof, corrosion resistant epoxy paint of light grey shade
(shade No.631 of ISS).

6.1.5 The bushings of capacitor units and the connecting links shall be provided with suitable
insulating covers in order to avoid bird, snake faults.
6.1.6 Tinned copper links of suitable size and number should be supplied for interconnection
of capacitor units.

6.1.7 The capacitor units shall be provided with rating plate and terminal marking as stipulated
in IS:13925.

6.1.8 Suitable discharge resistors shall be provided to discharge the capacitor bank to voltage
not exceeding 50 volts in 10 minutes after the capacitor bank is disconnected from the
source of supply. Switching 'ON' of the capacitors shall be ensured only after the residual
voltage on the terminals of the capacitor is reduced to less than 50 V after self
discharged.
6.1.9 Quality Assurance Tests conducted by the Manufacturer on manufacturing of capacitor
units including Endurance Test shall be enclosed with the Bid.
6.1.10 Complete mounting racks, Elevating structure, supporting insulators and all other
components required for formation of capacitor bank racks shall be supplied along with
the capacitor units. All the above structures should be hot dip galvanized. The capacitor
bank structure shall be bound with barbed wire for about 300mm height from ground to
prevent creeping of vermins like lizards, Squirrels etc., along the structure to the live
portion. The capacitor banks are to be elevated to a minimum height of eight feet from
ground level by providing elevating structures which shall be earthed as per standards.
Adequate clearances shall be maintained. as per B.S.162 ( Out door: Phase to
Phase:- 432 and Phase to Earth:-381)
6.1.11 The capacitor shall be of low loss type. The losses in the capacitor including the losses in
the fuses shall be guaranteed if the loss figures obtained during testing are found to be
more than the guaranteed values, penalty will be levied as per Clause-12. If the losses
however, exceed 0.2 watt/KVAR, then the offer shall be treated as non-responsive.
6.1.12 The BIDDERS shall give calculations for rise in voltage on other units in the event of
failure of elements of a capacitor unit. The maximum rise in voltage shall not be more
than 10% of the rated voltage even if the entire capacitor unit failed/short circuited.
6.1.13. The capacitor bank shall have facility for extension at a future date for the enhancement
of its capacity.

6.2 FUSES:
6.2.1 The fuses shall withstand repeated application of transient conditions associated with
normal duty of capacitor unit.

6.2.2 It shall be capable of limiting the arc energy within the case of faulty capacitor to such
small proportion, that the danger of case rupture is eliminated.

6.2.3 It shall have adequate rupturing capacity for the fault level at the terminals of the
capacitor.

6.2.4 It shall discriminate with each other such a way that the fuses of healthy units are not
blown.
 12

6.2.5 It shall have adequate Thermal capacity to cater for increased heating which may occur
due to harmonics.

6.2.6 It shall have an ampere rating which will provide proper co-ordination between its total
clearing time-current curve and capacitor unit rupturing characteristics.

6.3.0 NEUTRAL CURRENT TRANSFORMERS: (N.C.T.)

6.3.1 One number N.C.T shall be supplied for each capacitor bank. The neutrals of two
portions of the capacitor bank (Connected in double star formation) shall be connected
through the N.C.T.

6.3.2 The ratio of the N.C.T. shall be selected such that the failure of one unit in any group is
detected by an instantaneous current operated relay with setting of 20%.

6.3.3 The N.C.T. shall have adequate rating and burden. It shall be Outdoor type. The
N.C.T. have been type tested for short time rating.

6.4.0. SERIES REACTORS:

6.4.1 The series reactors are required to protect the capacitor banks from inrush currents due
to switching. 0.2% of the capacitor bank rating reactor is envisaged on the neutral
side of the capacitor bank to limit the inrush current.

6.4.2 The series reactors should capable of carrying 130% of rated current continuously.

6.4.3 The The series reactors are required to protect the capacitor banks from inrush
currents. Reactors shall be dry, air cooled type.

6.4.4 The short time rating of the series reactors shall be as indicated in clause No.5.0
(Sl.No.III, item No.3)
6.4.5 The methods proposed to reduce vibration in air core reactor and maintaining
minimum clearance required from live parts shall be indicated clearly. The method
of clamping so as to reduce current losses shall also be mentioned clearly.Sufficient
magnetic clearance shall be provided for the Reactor

6.5.0 CIRCUIT BREAKERS:

The circuit breakers are meant for control of capacitor banks. For 33 KV system
Vacuum circuit breaker is required.

33 KV Vaccum Circuit Breaker (VCB): Special features

6.5.1 The value of D.C components shall be calculated in accordance with the
recommendation of IS:13118.

6.5.2 The circuit breaker shall be re-strike free, and shall be capable of carrying maximum
inrush current of capacitor bank.
 13

6.5.3 The circuit breaker should have been type tested for capacitor bank switching.

6.5.4 All making and breaking contacts shall be sealed free from atmospheric effects.
Contacts shall be designed to have adequate thermal and current carrying capacity for
the duty specified and to have a life expectancy so that frequent replacements due to
excessive burning will not be necessary. Provision shall be made for rapid dissipation
of heat generated by the arc on opening.

6.5.5 Porcelain Housing:

The porcelain housing shall be of single piece construction without any joint or
coupling. It shall be made of homogeneous, vitreous porcelain of high mechanical
and dielectric strength. Glazing of porcelain shall be uniform brown or dark brown
colour with a smooth surface arranged to shed away rain water or condensed water
particles (fog), free from blisters, burns and similar other defects.

6.5.6 Terminal Connectors:

The terminal connectors suitable for Single Moose ACSR (31.77 sq. mm) conductor 6
Nos. per circuit breaker shall supplied and shall meet the following requirements.

a) Terminal connectors shall be manufactured and tested as per IS:5561.

b) All castings shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities.
All sharp edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.

6.5.7 This is covered under price schedule of 33 kV circuit breakers as part of chapter –
V of section – IX.

6.6.0 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (covered under technical specification and price

schedule of Control and Relay panels):

6.6.1 The current transformers of suitable current ratio and burden for measuring the capacitor
current shall be of outdoor type.

6.6.2 The accuracy class for the purpose of measuring the current shall be 1.0.

6.7.0 CONTROL AND RELAY PANEL:

6.7.1 The bidder shall offer one control panel for each capacitor bank provided in 33 KV
bus of 132/33 KV substations. Control and relay panel for the relevant 33 kV bay,
as covered under CR panel specification must be made use of, for this purpose.

6.7.2 Window type (Twelve No. windows) annunciation scheme should be provided for the
following fault indication along with the alarms and flickering LED bus for each
capacitor bank:

-OVER VOLTAGE
-D.C. supply failure
-Capacitor neutral displacement high
-Breaker tripped.
 14

-Power factor leading .

-UNDER VOLTAGE
-Balance spare windows

6.7.3 Provision shall be made for remote electrical closing/tripping the circuit breaker
controlling capacitor banks. Provision for lamp test of all the windows by a single
push button may be provided.

6.7.4 INSTRUMENTS :

- 10mm LED indication for ON, OFF, spring charged position of breaker.
- A.C. ammeter with 5 position selector switch.
- A.C. voltmeter with 6 position selector switch.
- MVAR meter.
- Power factor meter.
- Name plate for easy identification with Specification Number, MVAR capacity etc.
- All the meters will be digital type.

6.7.5 PROTECTION AND INTERLOCKS :

a) Over current in all three phases and earth fault.
b) Over voltage with time delay to take care of switching surges.
c) Alarm to indicate failure of capacitor unit resulting in nearly 10% over-voltage in
other parallel capacitors in the Bank.
d) Provision for disconnection of capacitor from service, if the unbalance current is
more than 10%.
e) Timer for closing interlock to prevent SWITCHING ON capacitor bank before
capacitors are discharged to a residual voltage of 50 V.
f) Master tripping relay with Hand Reset for electrical tripping with adequate
number of NO/NC contacts.
g) Power factor measurement and alarum for leading power factor operation. The
power factor measurement 3 phase 3 wire or 3 phase 4 wire.
h) Under voltage relay with time delay with under voltage from 60% to 90% in
steps of 10%
i) Trip circuit supervision Scheme.
j) Any other protection relays suitable for satisfactory operation of capacitor bank
shall also be included and specified in the offer with details.
k) The unbalance relay shall have time delay short enough to minimise the damage
due to arcing type fault within the bank structure and yet long enough to avoid
false operation due to inrush ground-faults on the lines, lightning, switching off
nearby equipment or non-simultaneous pole operation of the energising switch.
 15

l) Neutral unbalance current operated relay

m) Automatic voltage relay to switch – in and switch – off the capacitor banks
automatically at pre-set voltages for 33 KV Capacitor bank.

6.7.6 TYPE OF PANEL :

Type of panels, indicating lamps, internal wiring, terminal connectors,

space heaters, fuses, indicating instruments etc., shall be as specified vide
relevant clauses in the technical specification for C & R Panel (chapter IX
section IX of this volume)

6.8.0 LIGHTNING ARRESTER:

6.8.1 10KA, 30KV for 33 KV capacitor bank heavy duty station class zinc oxide gapless
surge arrestor conforming to the latest issue of IEC TC 37 WG4
Jan.1987/Aug.1988 shall be used for protection of entire capacitor bank for each
sub-station and will form part of the equipment to be supplied.

6.8.2 The surge arrestor shall be of transmission line discharge Class-II for 33 KV.

6.8.3 Surge arrestors shall be capable of discharging long duration surges of multiple
lightning strokes, severe switching surges and temporary power frequency surges.

6.8.4 Surge arrestors shall be adequately designed to withstand specified dynamic over
voltages after discharge of two surges of class-II duty.

6.8.5 Surge Arrestor shall be of hermetically sealed type with pressure relief devices and
arc diverting ports at either ends suitable for preventing shattering of porcelain
housing.

6.8.6 Surge arrestor shall be supplied with all standard accessories including the line and
earth terminal connectors.

6.8.7 The Supplier shall furnish detailed dimensional drawings indicating all fixing details
and electrical clearance diagrams for installation.

6.8.8. Surge Arrestor shall be provided with non-rusting and non-corroding name plate
bearing all particulars listed in IEC Draft including the year of manufacture and
purchase order Reference. The scope of supply of these surge arrestor are
covered under the technical specification and price schedule of surge arrestors,
chapter –VIII, section –IX of the volume.

6.9.0 ISOLATORS WITH EARTH SWITCH:

6.9.1 36KV, 800A 50 cycles horizontal upright 3 pole double break center
rotating meter operated isolator for Outdoor mounting with terminal pads and P.T.
Insulators shall be supplied and will form part of the equipment to be supplied.
 16

However this is covered under technical specification for Isolators under GTC
chapter-I of section-IX of volume III and Price Schedule.

6.9.2 Height of operating handle above the ground level shall be 1000mm.

6.9.3 Operating vertical G.I. pipe shall be 40mm dia, class-B, G.I.Pipe and 4000 mm in
length. Suitable supporting guides to the operating vertical pose shall also be
supplied.

6.9.4 The fixed contacts hard drawn electrolytic copper flat of suitable size shall be high
pressure type with pressure relieving springs and have a wiping action during closing
and opening. They shall be silver surfaced or equivalent.

6.9.5 Moving blade of hard drawn electrolytic copper of suitable size shall be supplied.

6.9.6 Terminal pads shall be of tinned hard drawn electrolytic copper flat of required
thickness.

6.9.7 Tappered roller bearing for rotating insulator stack and thrust ball bearing guide for
operating handle shall be provided.

6.9.8 The bases shall be of heavy duty 100 mm x 50 mm G.I. channel. The required G.I.bolts,
washers, nuts etc., For mounting the isolator and for operating from ground shall be
supplied.

6.10 OPERATION OF CAPACITOR BANK:

6.10.1 Capacitor Bank is to be CUT-IN manually. However, cut-off of the bank is controlled
by over voltage/under voltage/automatic voltage regulating relay automatically.
Provision shall be made for these parameters in control panel.

6.10.2 In no case switching ON operation will take place within a period of less than 10
minutes after the capacitor bank is switched OFF due to any reason.

7.0 TESTS :
7.1 TYPE TEST :

7.1.1 All the equipment offered by the bidder shall be fully type tested as per the relevant
standards not earlier than 5 years from the date of bid opening. The bidder shall
furnish two sets of the type test reports along with the offer. The offers received
without type test reports shall be treated as Non-responsive.

7.1.2 The bidder shall indicate in his offer cost of conducting the following type tests on the
capacitor bank and associated equipment under each item. Cost of each type test shall be
indicated clearly which will be considered for bid evaluation. In case any bid does not
indicate cost of or any type test stated herein it will be construed that the test is being
offered free of cost. However for the sake of evaluation the highest cost quoted among
other bids will be considered. If the PMC seeks the repetition of the type test it shall be
carried out free of cost. Payments for the type test sought to be repeated at the rates
quoted in the bid, will be made only in such cases where the said type test has already
 17

been carried out and relevant test report has been enclosed to the bid, never the less the
test is got repeated at the specific request of PMC and there is a specific rate quoted for
that test in the bid.

Type Tests for 33 KV 5 MVAR Shunt Capacitors with Associated Equipment

(Capacitor Banks):
1. Capacitor Units.
i ) Thermal stability test.
ii) Impulse lighting test between terminal and container
iii) Short circuit discharge test.

2. Circuit Breakers: ( Covered under the specification for Circuit breakers.)

3. Series Reactors:
i) Short circuit test
ii) Temperature rise test

4. Current Transformers:
i) Short time current test
ii) Lightning impulse test
5. Neutral Current Transformers:
i) Short time current test
ii) Lightning impulse test
6. Isolators: ( Covered under the specification for Isolators.)
7. Lightning Arrestors: ( Covered under the specification for surge arresters.)

7.2.0 ACCEPTANCE AND ROUTINE TESTS :

7.2.1 All acceptance and routine tests as stipulated in the relevant standards shall be
carried out by the supplier in presence of PMC at free of cost.
i. Immediately after finalisation of the programme of type/acceptance/ routine
testing, the supplier shall give sufficient advance information to the PMC, to
enable deputation of its representative for witnessing the tests.
8.0 INSPECTION:
i) The PMC shall have access at all reasonable times to the works and all other
places of manufacture, where the Isolators, earth switches and associated
equipment are being manufactured and the contractor shall provide all facilities
for unrestricted inspection of the works, raw materials, manufacture of all the
accessories and for conducting necessary tests as detailed herein.
ii) The contractor shall keep the PMC informed in advance of the time of starting and
of the progress of manufacture of equipment in its various stages so that
arrangements could be made for inspection.
iii) The contractor shall give 15 days for local Supplies(30 days (for foreign supplies)
advance intimation to enable the PMC to depute their representative for
witnessing acceptance and routine tests. All charges in connection with
inspection by PMC Personnel such as travel, accommodation and incidentals
shall be borne by the contractor.
 18

iv) No material shall be despatched from its point of manufacture unless the material
has been satisfactorily inspected , tested and cleared for despatch.
The acceptance of any quantity of the equipment shall in no way relieve the
Contractor of the responsibility for meeting all the requirements of this
specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if such equipment are
later found to be defective.

9.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN:

Please to relevant clause in GTC chapter of this volume.

10.0 DOCUMENTATION:

10.1 All drawings shall conform to international standards organisation (ISO) 'A' series
of drawing sheet/Indian Standards Specification IS:656. All drawings shall be in ink
and suitable for micro filming. All dimensions and data shall be in S.I. Units.

10.2 List of Drawings and Documents:

The Bidder shall furnish four sets of following drawings along with his offer:

a) General outline and assembly drawings of the equipment.

b) Graphs showing the performance of equipments in regard to
magnetization characteristics.
c) Sectional views showing:
i) General constructional features.
ii) Materials/Gaskets/Sealing used.
iii)The insulation of the winding arrangements, method of connection of
the primary/secondary winding to the primary/secondary terminals
etc.
d) Schematic drawing.
e) Type test reports.
f) Test reports, literature and pamphlets of the bought out items and raw material
.

10.3 The contractor shall within 2 weeks of the placement of order, submit four sets of
final versions of all the above drawings for PMCs approval. The PMC shall
communicate his comments/approval on the drawings to the contractor within a
reasonable time. The contractor shall if necessary modify the drawings and resubmit
four copies of the modified drawings for PMC 's comments. After receipt of PMC 's
approval the contractor shall within three weeks, submit 20 prints and two good
quality reproducible of the approved drawings for PMC 's use.
10.4 The manufacturing of equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the approved
draw-ings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the
PMC. All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with equipment prior to
the approval of the drawings shall be at the contractor 's risk.
 19

10.5 One reproducible and Six (6) copies of printed and bound volumes of Instruction
Manual containing operation, maintenance and erection details in ENGLISH language
each type and rating of equipment supplied shall be submitted by the supplier for
distribution prior to the despatch of equipment. One copy with each capacitor bank
shall be supplied to the consignee. The manual shall also contain a set of all approved
drawings, type test reports etc.For further compliance please refer to clause 5 of GTC,
chapter-I, Section –IX of this volume.

10.7 Three sets of the type test reports, duly approved by the PMC shall be submitted by
the contractor for distribution, before commencement of supply. Adequate copies of
acceptance and routine test certificates, duly approved by the PMC shall accompany
the dispatched consignment.

11.0 PACKING AND FORWARDING:

11.1 The equipment shall be packed in crates suitable for vertical/horizontal transport, as the
case may be and suitable to withstand handling during transport and outdoor storage
during transit. The Supplier shall be responsible for any damage to the equipment
during transit due to improper and inadequate packing. The easily damageable
material shall be carefully packed and marked with the appropriate caution symbols.
Wherever necessary, proper arrangement for lifting, such as lifting hooks etc., shall be
provided. Any material found short inside the packing cases shall be supplied by
Supplier without any extra cost.
11.2 Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the
following information.
a) Name of the consignee.
b) Details of consignment.
c) Destination.
d) Total weight of consignment.
e) Handling and unpacking instructions.
f) Bill of material indicating contents of each package.
11.3 The Contractor shall ensure that the packing list and bill of material are approved by
the Purchaser before despatch.

12.0 QUANTITY AND DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS:

i)
Sl. Item 132 /33kV RC 132/33 kV Delivery
No Green SS Gharbara SS schedule
33 kV 5 MVAR capacitor 2 sets 2 sets Within 6 months
banks with all fitting, from the date of
accessories, mounting racks, LoA.
elevating structure, support
insulators, terminal
connectors, mandatory
spares , all other relevant
 20

Sl. Item 132 /33kV RC 132/33 kV Delivery

No Green SS Gharbara SS schedule
components associated
equipment including 3 nos.
current transformers, 1no.
neutral current transformer ,
6 nos. 2.4 KVAR series
single phase reactors, and
other as specified but
excluding circuit breakers,
lighting arrestors and 33 kV
isolators
ii) The scope of supply shall include a supply of 2.5% extra quantity of bolts, nuts,
washers, split pins, cotter pins and such other small loose items free of cost.

13.0 CAPITALISATION OF LOSSES :

a) The Power losses of capacitors, I2 R losses of Series Reactors etc., will be capitalised
during evaluation of the Bid at the rate of Rs.83,260 per kW in each case.
b) Penalty for exceeding losses during Manufacture:
On testing if it is found that actual losses are more than the values quoted, undisputed
liquidated damages shall be recovered from the bidder at double the cost of losses
indicated at clause 12.0 (a).
For fraction of a kW evaluation will be on prorata basis.

14.0 MANDATORY SPARES:

Mandatory spares as mentioned in the Annexure I for 33 KV Capacitor Banks shall be supplied.

15.0 SUPERVISION SERVICES:

The contractor is expected to provide services of qualified personnel for the supervision
of erection, testing at site for commissioning of the capacitor banks at no extra cost.

16.0 The bidder shall furnish the Guaranteed Technical particulars as per Annexure
enclosed. The bids received without the filled in Guaranteed Technical particulars
(Annexure-III) shall be treated as non responsive and rejected.

16.0 All deviations shall be specifically brought out in the ‘Schedule of Deviations’
(Annexure-III). Deviations brought out elsewhere will not be considered.
 21

Annexure - I

Mandatory Spares

Sl.No Description Qty Delivery.

R.C. Green Gharbara
1 spare capacitor units 10% of Total 10% of
with unit rating same Unit Total Unit
as the unit supplied supplied for supply for 2
with main set. 2 No. 5 No. 5
MVAR MVAR
capacitor capacitor
banks banks
2 36 KV Circuit
Breaker spares
(a) Closing coils 2 Nos. 2 Nos.
(b) Tripping coils 4 Nos. 4 Nos.
(c ) Spare Pole 1 No. 1 No.
Complete
3 33 KV Neutral 1 Nos. 1 Nos.
Current transformers
4 36 KV, 2.4 KVAR 1 Nos. 1 Nos.
current limiting
Series Reactors
5* Set of spare relays
(a) 3 O/L + 1 E/L 1 Nos.
(With instantaneous
high set)
(b) Over voltage trip 1 Nos.
(c ) Under voltage 1 Nos.
trip
(d) Neutral 1 Nos.
unbalance current
relay
(e) AVR current
Relay
(e) Master trip 1 Nos.
6 33kV CTs 480-240- 1 No
120/1-1
.

* Item No.5 is covered in the price schedule of control and relay panels, chapter IX of
Section-IX of this volume.
 22

Annexure - II
1. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR CAPACITORS
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item Description Bidder’s Proposal
No.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Make and type :
2. Reference standards :
3. Rated capacity of the
bank at rated voltage
& rated frequency (MVAR) :
Capacity of the bank at
nominal system voltage
and rated frequency (MVAR) :
4. Rated voltage for each :
Capacitor unit
5. Rated frequency :
6. KVAR (at rated voltage and :
frequency of each unit)

7. No. of bushings :
8. Type of bushing terminals :

9. No. of capacitor units in :

each phase

10. Total No.of capacitor units :

for each Bank
11. Connection of capacitor units :
12. Maximum permissible :
over voltage and duration
corresponding to the same
13. Maximum permissible current :
a) Continuous :
b) Short term-duration in secs :
14. Maximum permissible operating :
over voltage(continuous)
15. Residual voltage :
16. Discharge time :
17. Minimum time interval required :
Between de-energisation and
Re-energisation of the bank
18. Temperature rise under maximum :
voltage
19. Limiting Ambient temperature :
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 23

Item Description Bidder’s Proposal

No.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
20. Capacitance variation due to :
temperature

21. Loss per KVAR (Maximum)

22. Voltage withstand tests :

(capacitor Units)

a) Terminal to Terminal :
50 c/s 1 min. dry KV (RMS)
b) Terminal to case 50 c/s :
1 min. dry KV (RMS)

23. Impulse withstand voltage KV (Peak) :

24. Individual fuse rating and :
characteristics

25. Physical and Electrical

properties of capacitors:
a) Nominal thickness of
polypropylene:
b) Tensile strength of
polypropylene:
i) Length wise :
ii)Cross wise :
c) Percentage Elongation :
i) Length wise :
ii)Cross wise :
d) ShrinKAge :
i) Length wise :
ii)Cross wise :
e) Dielectric breakdown voltage :
f) Capacitor Dielectric :
i) Length wise :
ii)Cross wise :
26. Quantity of insulating oil/liquid :

27. Capacitor oil used in the container :

a. Viscosity :
b. Specific gravity :
c. Tan delta :
d. Breakdown voltage :
e. Flash point :
f)Acidity :
g)Volume resistivity :
h)Gas content of oil :
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 24

Item Description Bidder’s Proposal

No.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
28. Arrangement of Bank :

29. Mounting arrangement,

Elevating structures, arrangement :

30. Dimension of each unit :

31. Weight of each unit :

32. Thickness of container :

33. Details of discharge device :

34. Protection schemes for :

capacitor Bank
a. Under voltage :
b. Over voltage :
c. Neutral displacement alarm and trip :
d. Whether timer introduced :
for switching operation
e. Over current :
f. Earth fault :
g. Schematic drawing enclosed :
h. Whether control for power factor :
and voltage envisaged in the scheme
i No. of modules used in control :
panel
j List out the annunciation :
arrangement
k. Breaker switching time interval :
l. Minimum and maximum voltage and :
power factor setting
m. Whether auxiliary relay for :
controlling voltage and power
factor available
n. Whether master tripping relay :
provided if so, No. of NO and NC
available
35. Weight of control panel :
36. Dimensions of control panel :
37. Maximum difference of :
capacitance between capacitor
units in a bank

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 25

Item Description Bidder’s Proposal

No.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
38. a. Rated output of capacitor :
unit and voltage
b. Capacitance of unit :
c. Elements in parallel per :
series group in each unit
d. No. of series groups :
e. Element capacitance :
f. output of capacitor if one :
element fails, two element
fails etc.,
g. Tolerance for KVAR output

39. Voltage and current rating :

of capacitor bushing
40. Percentage of overvoltage :
due to failure of each bank
for different ratings.
41 Maximum ambient temperature :
capacitor can withstand
42. Whether fuse current Vs time :
curve indicated in the tender
and if so, how is co-ordinated
with capacitor bank protection.

2. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR SERIES

REACTORS FOR CAPACITORS
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item Description Bidder’s Proposal
No.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. Make and type :

2. Reference standard :

3. a) Insulation level with post

insulators :
b) Insulation level of winding :

4. Rated KVAR :

5. Rated current and voltage :

6. Rated Reactance/Phase (ohms) :

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item Description Bidder’s Proposal
 26

No.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. Rated frequency :

8. Over current factor :

9. Compensation percent of series :

reactors

10. Maximum temperature rise of coil :

over ambient specified for which
reactor is designed.

11. Number of phases :

12. Dimensions (Overall) :

13. Total weight/weight of coil and :

assembly unit

14. Rated short time circuit :

15. Duration of short circuit :

16. Type of cooling :

17. Losses at rated current and

Frequency at 75 Deg. C :

18. Winding resistance (Cold/Hot) :

19. Voltage and rating of :

reactor bushing/support
insulator

20. Terminal arrangement :

i) Incoming :
ii) Outgoing :

21. Maximum system voltage for which :

reactor is designed

22. Choke voltage per phase at rated :

current

23. Whether reactor designed for :

a) Harmonics :
b) Inrush current :
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item Description Bidder’s Proposal
 27

No.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

24. Material of winding :

25. Maximum current density :

3. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33 KV

VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKERS
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item Description Bidder’s Proposal
No.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. a) Make and type :

b) Reference standard :

2. Number of phase :
3. Number of poles :
4. Normal current :
5. Rated voltage :

6. Maximum service voltage :

7. Insulation level :

8. Method of closing :

9. Method of tripping :

10. Breaker Operating mechanism :

i. Type :
ii. Spring charging motor details :

11. Operating sequence :

12. Power at normal voltage for

a) Closing coil – watts :
b) Shunt trip-coils (watts) :

13. Making capacity peak current :

kilo Amps.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item Description Bidder’s Proposal
No.
 28

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15. Breaking capacity :
a) Symmetrical – KA & MVA :
b) Asymmetrical – KA & MVA :
c) Corresponding P.F.

16. Short time withstand current :

(1 sec. and 3 secs. kilo Amps.

17. Short circuit breaking current :

and duration

18. Opening time from the instant at :

which trip coil receives its
tripping impulse to the instant
at which contacts separate

a. Without current:
b. For given breaking current:
10%, 30%, 60% &100% (secs.)

19. Arc duration from separation of :

arcing contact to instant of arc
extinction stated for given breaKAge
10%, 30%,60% &100% (secs.)

20. Time of closing of control switch :

to completion of closing stroke
with rated making current including
closing of series break, if any

21. No. of current interrupting breaks :

in series per phase

22. Voltage distribution between breaks :

percent

23. Speed of break/breaking time. :

24. Length of stroke of moving contacts :

25. a) Dry withstand voltage :

b) Impulse withstand voltage :

26. Type of :
a. Main contacts :
b. Arcing contacts :

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item Description Bidder’s Proposal
 29

No.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

27. Whether contacts are silver :

plated or not

28. Type of arc control device :

29. Whether breaker is re-strike free.

If not type of device if any, used to :
limit rate of rise of re-striking voltage.

30. Minimum clearance in air :

a. Between phases :
b. Live parts to earth :
c. Live parts to ground :

31. Type of bushing terminals :

32. Thrust caused during the opening :

of the breaker

33. Thrust caused during the closing :

of the breaker

34. Capacitor breaking current :

of breaker

35. Maximum value of peak voltage :

for which breaker is designed and
corresponding frequency

36. Maximum voltage across pole for :

re-strike free operation

37. Dimensions of breaker (LXBXH) :

38. Weight of breaker :

39. Type of interlock :

 30

6. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF OUTDOOR

INSULATORS USED IN CAPACITOR BANK
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item Description Bidder’s Proposal
No.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Reference standard :
2. Insulator material :
3. Insulator type :
4. Pitch circle diameter and drilling :
for flange (cm)
5. Length of insulator (over all) :
6. Weight of insulator (kg.) :
7. Electrostatic capacity of :
complete bushing
8. Gap between arcing horns of ring(cm) :
9. Material of fittings :
10. Material and construction of :
arcing horns
11. Wet power frequency withstand :
voltage
12. Dry flash over voltage of bushing :
with arcing horns removed (KV)
13. Minimum voltage for voltage :
routine test (KV)
14 Voltage at which corona shall not :
be visible (KV)
15. Impulse flash over voltage (crest KV :
on a 1/50 micro wave) (KV)
16. Minimum voltage for a bushing :
insulator voltage type tests(KV)
17. Minimum wet flash over voltage :
of insulator with arcing horns
removed (KV)
18. Minimum voltage for flash over under oil type test (KV):
 31

7. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF NEUTRAL

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS FOR CAPACITORS
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item Description Bidder’s Proposal
No.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Make and type :
2. Reference :
3. Rated terminal voltage/ Highest :
Voltage (KV)

4. Rated primary current (Amps) :

5. Secondary core details :
6. a) No of secondary cores :
b) Rated secondary current (A) :
a) Rated burden (VA) :
b) Accuracy class :
c) Accuracy limit factor :
d) Knee point voltage (Volts) :
e) Excitation current (mA) :
f) Secondary resistance at
75 deg. C (ohms) :
7. Instrument security factor :
8. Short time thermal current and :
its duration KA. secs,

9. Rated dynamic current (Peak) KA :

10. a) Rated continuous thermal current (A):

b) Temperature rise over ambient deg. C :

11. Creepage distance :

a) Total :
b) Protected :
12. Insulation level :
a) Impulse with stand test voltage :
(KV Peak) :
b) One minute Power frequency :
withstand test voltage of
primary (KV rms) :

c) One minute power frequency

withstand test voltage of
secondary (KV rms) :

13. Quantity of insulating oil (litres) :

14. Total weight including oil (kg) :

 32

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item Description Bidder’s Proposal
No.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

15. Magnetization curve of CT cores :

16. Mounting details :

17. Live part to ground clearance (mm) :

19. Material of primary winding :

20. Current transformer design

(live tank or dead tank) :

21. Whether all ferrous parts are

hot dip galvanized :

21. Details of terminal connectors :

Place Signature of the Bidder :

Date : Name :

Business address :
 33

Annexure III

SCHEDULE OF DEVIATION

TECHNICAL
Sl. Requirements / Specification Deviations Remarks
.No. Equipment Clause No.

It is hereby conformed that except for deviations mentioned above, the offer conforms
to all the other features specified in Technical Specification Section ____ of this Bid
Document

Place : Signature of the Bidder :

Date : Name :

Business address :

.
SECTION – IX
CHAPTER - XII
 SECTION – IX
CHAPTER – XII

PART-- I

OPTICAL LINE TERMINAL EQUIPMENT WITH INTEGRATED

ACCESS MULTIPLEXER

1.0 SCOPE:
The scope of the specification covers design, manufacture, supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of optical line terminal equipment and associated multiplexer equipment,
digital cross connect and Network Management system to provide Optical Fibre
communication between a) 400/220/132kV Pali SS and 132/33kV at Gharbara and b)
400/220/132kV Pali SS and 132kV SS at Recreational Green (R.C. Green) c) From Main
Control Room i.e. Remote Control Centre (RCC) to 132/33kV R.C. Green and 132/33kV
Gharbara sub-stations. OPGW cable required for the above line section is covered in package
A.. The EPC contractor shall coordinate with EPC Contractor of Package A for the final
testing of the system for establishing fibre optic communication.

1.1 The EPC contractor should procure the optical line terminal equipment and associated
multiplexer equipment, digital cross connect and Network Management system from reputed
firms like M/s ABB Ltd., India, M/s SIEMANS, India, M/s Nokia, Finland, M/s Alcatel, France
with the prior approval obtained from PM C.

2.0 General requirements

2.1 The equipment shall provide a range of access interfaces for telephony, data and LAN.
Transport facilities shall include optical and electrical STM-1 SDH & ATM aggregate
interfaces (155Mbit/s) and a range of PDH optical and electrical interfaces.

2.2 The digital multiplex equipment shall be universal, software-controlled, and provide various
interface cards to connect tributary interfaces signals such as voice, teleprotection and data to
aggregate interfaces. On aggregate level 2Mbit/s electrical and 8Mbit/s optical interfaces
complying with ITU-T recommendations G.703 / G.704 shall be provided. Optical STM-1
aggregate interfaces on 155Mbit/s shall be available. The eqipment shall be modular in
construction and shall form an integrated part of a 19” shelf.

2.3 The platform shall have means to cross-connect, drop and insert VC 12 (with termination),
2Mbit/s G.703 unframed signals, and 2Mbit/s G.704 framed signals and individual 64kbit/s
timeslots. Path protection on VC12, 2Mbit/s and 64kbit/s shall be supported.

2.4 The equipment shall be suitable for operation in electrical environment in EHV substations
with high Electromagnetic Interference. The equipment shall be highly reliable and provide
secure communications for real time signals such as voice, SCADA, teleprotection and
status/control signals. The equipment offered shall already be working successfully in
telecommunication networks operated by power utilities at least for two years as on the date of
bid opening. It shall comply with the latest ITU-T recommendations and ETSI standards.

1
2.5 Each network element shall be manageable from an operation centre and there shall be means
to supervise external/existing equipment. It must be possible to access the platform over a
common TCP-IP network.

2.6 To adapt transmission to higher bit rates, the equipment shall allow the integration into STM-4
or STM-16 networks by adding higher order SDH equipment.

2.7 Modules for the following user signals shall be available as plug-in units for the equipment:

• Analogue subscriber interface: subscriber and exchange side

• 4-wire E&M voice interface
• G.703, 64kbit/s data Interface
• X.24/V.11 (RS-422), nx64kbit/s data interface
• V.24/V.28 (RS-232), data interface
• V.35, nx64kbit/s data interface
• Data interface V.36 (RS-449), nx64kbit/s data interface (V.10)
• Alarm collection interface
• Teleprotection command interface
• Optical protection relay interface
• Binary signal (status and control) interface
• 2Mbit/s electrical interface for unframed signals acc. to ITU-T G.703 and framed signals acc.
to G.703 and G.704.
• LAN interface 10/100BaseT Ethernet
• ISDN U interface

The equipment shall provide the following integrated aggregates:

• Up to four STM-1 SDH optical ports for medium and long distances, with automatic laser shut
down programmable on each interface.
• Up to four STM-1 SDH electrical ports
• Up to two STM-1 ATM optical port
• Up to eight 8Mbit/s optical ports

3.0 Teleprotection Requirements

The Teleprotection and communication system has to ensure the easy and secure function of
the teleprotection. Therefore following features have to be provided:

• At least a 8 bit command addressing for teleprotection signal shall be provided to prevent
tripping if the signal is inadvertently re-routed through the telecommunication network.
• An automatic and periodic loop test (<100s) has to be provided for a signal delay measurement.
• A switch-over of the teleprotection command in less than 10 ms has to be guaranteed
• The configuration of the teleprotection has to be integrated into the communication
configuration tool in order to ensure an easy maintenance

2
4.0 General Conditions

The equipment shall be capable of functioning as a terminal, in ‘through connection’ (transit,

repeater) mode and as add-drop multiplex. First order multiplexing (2Mbps), second order
multiplexing (8Mbps) and STM-1 multiplexing shall be integrated. Conference for voice
channels and point to multipoint function for data signals shall be possible. The equipment
shall be of fully modular design.

4.1 Channel capacity: Digital Cross Connection

The equipment shall be equipped with redundant, decentralised cross-connection functions. The
cross-connect capacity shall be at least 40x 2Mbit/s (i.e. 1200x 64kbit/s) and non-blocking. It
shall cross-connect 64kBit/s as well as 2Mbit/s (G.703 unframed and G.704 framed) and VC12.
The cross-connect shall be capable of cross-connecting the SDH overhead with any 64kBit/s
timeslot on the system.
On addition the equipment shall offer an SDH cross-connect capacity of at least 4xVC-4 in the
same equipment.

4.2 Redundant centralised functions

The equipment shall be equipped with redundant circuits for all centralised functions.

4.3 Power Supply

The equipment shall operate from a nominal 48Volt-dc battery with positive ground. The
equipment shall work satisfactorily over battery voltage variations of + or – 15% (40.8 volts
through 55.2 volts). Redundant power-supply (N+1 protection) shall be provided. The
equipment shall support dual power feed i.e. that two power sources can be connected directly
to the equipment. Furthermore an integrated power module for direct powering from 230VAC
shall be available.

4.4 Safety
The equipment shall be safe to use and shall comply with EN 60950 class V1.

4.5 Electromagnetic compatibility and safety regulations

The equipment shall comply with the EN50022 class A, EN50082, IEC 801-2, IEC 801-6.

4.6 Ambient Conditions

Storage and transport: -40 ... +70°C; 98% (no condensation)
Operation temperature range for operational applications:
-5°C up to 55°C, humidity of max. 95% (no condensation)

4.7 Mechanical construction

The equipment shall be available as a 19” shelve to be mounted in a 19” rack or 19” cabinet. It
shall be of robust design. All tributary and aggregate units shall be integrated in the same shelf.
All connectors shall be accessible from the front and comply with international specifications.
The minimum cabinet depth required shall be indicated.

4.8 Network configuration/management system

The Network Management System shall be used to supervise the PDH, SDH and teleprotection
system. For teleprotection the configuration and management has to be fully integrated and

3
 comprehensive alarm information (severity and exact alarm description) shall be available in
the same management system.

The network management system (NMS) shall have facilities to supervise, monitor, control and
configure the network. It shall have capabilities of fault, configuration, performance and
security management. It shall provide various views to the network such as geographical
overview, logical network structure, and hierarchical view. The network management system
shall allow defining different user profiles.

A comprehensive alarm management shall show current alarms such, that icons of the network
elements change their colours according to the alarm level. The alarms shall be categorised as
critical, major, minor alarms and of the warnings and a summary shall indicate the total number
of them in the entire network. An alarm list shall list all alarms of the entire network according
to the time of their occurrence. It shall be possible to filter alarms with various filter criteria.
Operators shall be able to add comments to the alarms.

The NMS and the Network Element shall support connections over a TCP-IP based network.

The management system shall offer a SNMP interface for alarm integration into higher order
networks.
The facility of alarms over an extended period shall be preferred.

4.9 Local User Terminal

It shall be possible to connect the craft terminal to any network element in the network using
the TCP-IP protocol. The craft terminal shall support configuration, maintenance, and status
information. It shall provide a ‘windows’ oriented user interface.

4.10 1+1 Path protection

The equipment shall provide means to protect 64kBit/s channels. The protection shall be end to
end from one interface (telephone or data) to the other. It shall switch automatically from the
main channel to the standby channel. It shall be configurable whether the system switches back
to the main channel (reversible switching) or not (non-reversible).

If a path has switched to its standby route because the main route is disturbed this shall be
indicated with an alarm. The switching shall be done within the multiplexer without using the
Network Management System.

4.11 1+1 Section protection

The equipment shall provide means to protect STM-1 and 8M bit/s connections. It shall be
possible to use two independent links: one as the main and the other as the standby. The system
shall automatically switch to the standby connection and generate an alarm if the main
connection is disturbed.

The switching shall be done within the multiplexer without using the Network Management
System.

4.12 Network Topology

It shall be possible to build point-to-point, linear, ring, T, and meshed networks.

4
4.13 Synchronisation
It shall be possible to synchronise the equipment using an external clock source, derived from a
network or with an internal oscillator. The synchronisation shall be configurable and it shall be
possible to distribute the synchronisation to other equipment as well. The system shall have the
means of switching to select the synchronisation source as well as a means of preventing the
system from creating synchronisation loops. The equipment shall be capable of selecting the
source of synchronisation by means of the SSM (Synchronisation Status Messaging) feature
according to ITU-T G.704 or priority a based sequence.

For tele-protection event recording it shall be possible to synchronise the clock of all
teleprotection interfaces with one GPS in one station. The GPS time shall be distributed over
the teleprotection channel.

4.14 Alarms
Each module shall supervise its functions and shall have an alarm-indication LED on its front.
All alarms shall be collected by the NMS. Each node shall be capable of collecting up to 50
external alarms.

4.15 Test Loops

The equipment shall provide means to loop signals on 64kBit/s level as well as on 2Mbit/s
level. It shall indicate an alarm if a loop is activated.

4.16 Maintenance facilities

Every Network Element shall have a built-in Signal Generator and Analyser to analyse
communication paths. It must be possible to connect the Generator and Analyser to the
communication channels and terminate the signal on other Network Elements. It shall be
possible to configure circuits locally with the craft terminal and remotely from the NMS or the
craft terminal. It shall be possible to loop-back signals locally and remotely using the craft
terminal or the NMS.

5.0 Requirements for Transport Level

5.1 SDH Aggregate Units

The interface shall be designed for use on single mode fibre (conforming to ITU-T G.652) at
1310nm the optical connectors shall be E2000.
The following main functions shall be supported:
Termination of the OS-, RS-, MS- and VC-4 layer
Extraction and insertion of the SOH communications information
Through connections of VC-12 and VC-3

The following maintenance functions shall be supported:

Status indications
Loops
Restart after ALS
TTI monitoring
BIP Error Insertion

5
 The following SDH interfaces shall be available:
STM-1 (155Mbit/s) optical 1-port interface
STM-1 (155Mbit/s) optical 2-port interface
This interface shall provide Multiples Section Protection (MSP):
1+1 Section Protection
STM-1 (155Mbit/s) electrical 1-port interface
Furthermore optical ATM STM-1 interfaces at 1310nm shall be available.

Following main functions shall be supported:

Termination/generation of ATM cells using AAL1/CCS, AAL2/LES
Multiplexing and cross connecting of ATM VCs/VPs

5.2 PDH Aggregate Units

Up to four 8Mbit/s optical interfaces (1310nm) shall be available. Each interface shall provide
at least 2 x 2Mbit/s (G.703) electrical interfaces and have an integrated switch matrix to convert
the incoming optical stream directly into an electrical G.703 stream.
On addition up to four 34Mbit/s electrical interfaces shall be available.

6.0 Tributary Units

6.1 4-Wire Interface (VF interface)

This interface shall provide 8/16 voice channels with a bandwidth of 300 HZ –3.4 KHZ. and 2
signalling channels (M => E, M’ => E’) per voice channel. Each interface shall be configurable
to operate with or without CAS. With CAS it shall use the “a” and “b” bits for the two
signalling channels, as per CCITT recommendations G711 and G712.

The level shall be software adjustable within the following range:

Input: +7.5 to -16dBr
Output: +7.0 to -16dBr
Modules where each interface can be individually configured with 1+1 path protection shall be
available.

6.2 Analogue Subscriber Interface

An interface with at least 10 subscribers as well as high-density analogue subscriber card with up
to 30 subscribers shall be available. The ringing generator shall be integrated in the subscriber
module interface. The ringer frequency shall be adjustable for 20Hz, 25Hz, and 50Hz. The
following main functions shall are supported:

Downstream signalling
Ringing
Metering
Polarity reversal
Reduced battery
No battery

6
 Upstream signalling
On/off-hook
Pulse and DTMF dialling
Flash impulse
Earth key

General:
Constant current line feeding
Line test
Permanent line checks
CLIP (On-hook VF transmission)
Metering after on-hook

6.3 Exchange Interface

This interface shall provide at least 10 ports for connection to remote analogue subscribers
to an exchange. It shall provide the following functions:
pulse dialling
tone dialling (DTMF)
earth key function
metering function(12 kHz or 16 kHz)
flash impulse
polarity reversal
indication of busy lines

The following parameters shall be configurable by software:

input voice level -5 .. +4dBr
output voice level -7.5 .. -1dBr
metering pulse enable/disable
signalling bit definition
loop back of voice to the telephone

6.4 Party line Telephone System (Engineering Order Wire)

An engineering order wire (EOW) facility shall be provided at each multiplexer.
Following options shall be available:
(1) The EOW shall be configured as a party line and use inband DTMF signalling to call another
EOW-Terminal. The Terminal shall have an integrated DTMF decoder allowing to program a
subscriber call number (1..4 digits), and two group call numbers (1..4 digits each).
(2) EOW based on Voice over IP (VoIP). The EOW traffic shall be routed over the management
channel.

6.5 V. 24/V.28 RS232 Interface

It shall support the following bit rates:
0 to 0.3 kbit/s transp. (V.110)
0.6 to 38.4kbit/s synchronous / asynchronous (V.110).
Modules where each interface can be individually configured with 1+1 path protection shall be
available.

7
6.6 V.11/X.24 Interface
This interface shall comply to the ITU-T X.24 recommendation for signal definition and to
V.11 for electrical characteristics.
It shall support the following bit rates:
48, 56, nx64kbit/s (n = 1 to 31) synchronous
0.6 - 38.4kbit/s synchronous / asynchronous (X.30)
Modules where each interface can be individually configured with 1+1 path protection shall be
available.

6.7 V.35 Interface

This interface shall comply with the ITU-T V.35 and V.110 recommendations.
It shall support the following bit rates:
48, 56, nx64kbit/s (n = 1 to 31) synchronous
0.6 - 38.4kbit/s synchronous / asynchronous
Modules where each interface can be individually configured with 1+1 path protection shall be
available.

6.8 V.36 / RS 449 Interface

This interface shall comply with the ITU-T V.36 and V.110 recommendations.
It shall support the following bit rates:
48, 56, nx64kbit/s (n = 1 to 31) synchronous
0.6 - 38.4kbit/s synchronous / asynchronous
Modules where each interface can be individually configured with 1+1 path protection shall be
available.

6.9 64kBit/s Co-directional Interface

This interface shall comply with the ITU-T G.703 part 1.2.1 for co-directional data transfer. A
module shall have at least 8 interfaces. Modules where each interface can be individually
configured with 1+1 path protection shall be available.

6.10 10/100BaseT Ethernet Interface

A10/100BaseT interface shall be available. Following specification shall be covered:
- Ethernet connection: 10/100BaseT
- Switching: bypass mode for IEEE Std 802.3 frame or based on port or VLAN tag ID
- WAN capacity: 63xVC-12 or 3xVC-3
- Logical WAN ports (LWP): minimum 8
- Framing: according General Framing Procedure GFP (ITU-T G.7041)
- Features: Virtual Concatenation (VCAT) acc. ITU-T G.707
Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) acc. ITU-T G.7043

On addition an Ethernet Router interface shall be available with following function:

- Ethernet connection: minimum 10BaseT
- Routing Protocols: static IP route, OSPF2 V2
- WAN protocols: PPP, Frame Relay (including RFC 1490)
- WAN capacity: nx64kbit/s (n=1 to31)

8
6.11 Alarm Interface
This interface shall provide means to collect various alarms, which will be displayed, on the
Network Management System. It shall be used to manage non-PDH equipment with the PDH
Network Management System.

It shall have at least 24 binary inputs and at least 4 outputs, which can be switched by the
Network Management System. It shall be possible to connect an input to an output so that if an
alarm occurs, the output contact will be switched.

It shall be possible to label an alarm. The label-text shall be read from the interface module so
that it can be indicated on the Network Management System as well as on the local craft
terminal.

6.12 Teleprotection Interface

This interface shall provide means to transmit four bi-directional command channels. The
signals shall be adjustable from 24 to 250VDC by means of software. All inputs and outputs
shall be isolated and with EMC immunity for harsh environment. Security, Dependability and
Transmission speed shall be selectable and programmable. It shall be able to drop and insert
commands, transfer commands as a transit station, it shall be possible to have AND- and OR-
connections between commands. The interface shall support T-node configurations.

The Teleprotection interface shall provide an integrated non-volatile event-recorder, which

shall be synchronisable either internally or by Global Positioning System (GPS) and a
command counter, which counts trip commands.

The teleprotection interface shall provide means for signal delay measurement. 1+1 protection
must be available; the switching shall be done within less than 4ms (typical value). The
interface shall do automatic loop test periodically (preferably every 60s). The bidder shall
confirm that under no circumstances will the interface cause trip-commands in case of power
supply failure or when equipment is put into or taken out of service.

Command addressing shall be used to prevent tripping if the signal is inadvertently re-routed
through the telecommunication network.

6.13 Optical Protection Relays Interface

This interface shall have an optical port to connect protection relays for teleprotection to the
multiplexer. It shall operate according IEC 870-5-1, format class FT 1.2 on 1300nm using
MCMI line coding.

6.14 Binary Contact Interface

This interface shall provide means to transmit binary signals.
The inputs and outputs shall be isolated.
The inputs shall be suitable for 24VDC to 60VDC.
Outputs shall be solid-state relays.
The interface shall provide a 24VDC short circuit proofed auxiliary power supply.
It shall be able to drop and insert commands, transfer commands, as a transit station and it shall
be possible to have AND- and OR-connections between commands. The Teleprotection

9
 interface shall provide an integrated event recorder, which shall be synchronisable either
internally or by GPS.

6.15 Mbit/s G.703 / G.704 Interface

This interface shall comply with the ITU-T G.703 and G.704 recommendations. The interface
module shall have at least four interfaces, each of which may be individually activated. It shall
be possible to have up to 126 x 2Mbit/s interface modules in a multiplexer.

In order to connect different equipment, the interfaces shall be available with the impedance of
120 ohms and 75 ohms. The interface shall support CRC-4 multi-frame according to ITU-T
G.704 (enabled and disabled by software).

The CAS signalling according to ITU-T G.704 table 9 shall be activated optionally.
The interface shall be able to extract the 2.048MHz clock, which can be used to synchronise the
multiplex equipment. The interface module shall support 2Mbit/s loop-back of the incoming
signal as well as the loop-back of the internal signals.

6.16 ISDN U interface

There shall be ISDN U interfaces available for subscriber and exchange side. The interface
shall be based on 2B1Q code and provide at least 8 ISDN U lines.

7.0 DIGITAL DISTRIBUTION FRAME

At each terminal site, a digital distribution frame (DDF) shall be provided. The DDF shall be
used to interface and / or cross – connect the digital multiplex equipment at 2 Mb/s, 8 Mbps,
155 Mb/s manually in the first instance for the present. Provision shall be made in the DDF to
effect the interface/cross connect changes by software also.
The following basic functions of the DDF are required.
- circuit Re-routing / jump ring
- circuit Disconnection
- patching and test connections
- Bridging measurements
- Terminating measurements.

Individual Distribution Circuits shall use Co-axial type of jacks / Uplinks, and shall permit
bridging measurements. No break circuit patching (Re-routing) shall be possible. Plug-in
connection shall be used, and the transmit and receive direction of transmission should be
segregated. The capacity of the DDF shall accommodate the maximum capacity of
Communication system equipment i.e., 155 M bit/s.

8.0 It is not intent to specify completely herein all the details of the design, and construction of
OLTE and Multiplexer system.However equipment shall confirm in all respects to high
standards of engineering, design and workman ship and shall be capable of performing in
continuous commercial operation upto the Bidder’s guarantee, in a manner acceptable to the
PMC, who will interpret the meanings of drawings and specification and shall have final
authority to accept any work or equipment. Not withstanding to any thing contained above, the

10
 offered equipment shall be complete with all components necessary for their effective and
trouble free operation.Such, components shall be deemed to be within the scope of bidder’s
supply irrespective of whether those are specifically brought out in this specification and / or the
commercial order or not. The bidder shall not be eligible for extra charges for such material.
Further the minimum principal parameters mentioned in the technical specification should be
fulfilled.

9.0 Guarantee:
The system shall be guaranteed for trouble free operation for eighteen (18) months from the
commissioning date. In case of failure within this period, the contractor shall replace the faulty
equipment at no extra costs to the PMC.

10.0 System Availability

The total system shall satisfy two types of availability: calculated availabilty and demonstrated
availability.The calculated availability will be the theoretical availability determined by a
statistical calculation based on the mean – time – between – failure (MTBF) and the mean –
time – to – repair(MTTR) of the components and subsystems comprising the fibre optic system.
The demostrated availability will be an actual measured value determined during the System
Availability Test (SAT).

11.0 Calculated Availability

The contractor shall submit detailed MTBF and MTTR data and the resulting availability
analysis for OLTE and associated equipment. The calculated failure rates of the units shall be
listed and using these unit failure rates, the calculated availabilities of the equipment offered in
the Bid shall be calculated .The contractor’s recommended maintenance and repair philosophy
and spare parts inventories shall minimise MTBF and MTTR numbers in support of the
calculated availability.
The calculated system availability for fibre optic system shall be not less than 99.95% .

12.0 Operational Life

The equipment shall be designed for an operating life of not less than 15 years with
recommended servicing and replacement of parts. Such recommended services and
replacement of parts shall be brought out in the bid. The contractor shall provide technical
support and spare parts for a minimum period of 5 years from the date of final acceptance. The
contractor shall demonstrate a specified level of functionality of the equipment during tests in
the factory. After the equipment is installed, the contractor shall demonstrate all of the
functions and availability characteristics during well- structured field tests.

13.0 Summary of Standards

The Equipment shall comply with the latest ITU-T recommendations for the plesiochronuous
and synchronuous hierarchies. The equipment shall be KEMA type tested. In particular the
mentioned recommendations shall be covered:

ETSI
- ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2 (2003-05)
Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM);
Telecommunication network equipment; Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements

11
IEC
- IEC 61000-6-2 (1999-01)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-2: Generic standards - Immunity for industrial
environments.
- IEC 61000-6-5 (2001-07)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-5: Generic standards - Immunity for power
station and substation environments. Test: 1.2, 1.3, 2.3 and 2.5

IEEE
- IEEE C37.1 (1994)
IEEE Standard Definition, Specification and Analysis of Systems Used for
Supervisory Control, Data Acquisition, and Automatic Control
6.6 Electromagnetic interference (EMI) and electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).
- IEEE C37.90.2 (1995)
IEEE Standard for Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to Radiated Electromagnetic
Interference from Transceivers.

The PDH interfaces shall conform to the following recommendations:

ITU
- ITU-T G.702: General aspects of digital transmission systems – Terminal equipment - Digital
hierarchy bit rates
- ITU-T G.703: Digital transmission systems – Terminal equipment – General
Physical/electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces
- ITU-T G.704: Digital transmission systems – Terminal equipment – General Synchronous
frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and 44 736kbit/s hierarchical levels
- ITU-T G.706: General aspects of digital transmission systems – Terminal equipment - Frame
alignment and cyclic redundancy check (CRC) procedures relating to basic frame structures
defined in recommendation G.704
- ITU-T G.711: Pulse code modulation (PCM) of voice frequencies
- ITU-T G.712: Transmission performance characteristics of pulse code modulation channels
- ITU-T G.732: General aspects of digital transmission systems – Terminal equipment -
Characteristics of primary PCM multiplex equipment operating at 2048kbit/s
- ITU-T G.735: Characteristics of primary multiplex equipment operating at 2048kbit/s and
offering synchronous digital access at 384kbit/s and/or 64kbit/s
- ITU-T G.736: General aspects of digital transmission - Characteristics of a synchronous
digital multiplex equipment operating at 2048kbit/s
- ITU-T G.737: Characteristics of external access equipment operating at 2048kbit/s and
offering synchronous digital access at 384kbit/s and/or 64kbit/s
- ITU-T G.823: The control of jitter and wander within digital networks, which are based on the
2048kbit/s hierarchy
- ITU-T G.826: Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit rate
digital paths at or above the primary rate

The architecture of optical SDH interfaces shall conform to the following recommendations:

ETS/EN
- ETS 300 147: Synchronous digital hierarchy multiplexing structure
- ETS 300 417: Transmission and Multiplexing (TM); Generic requirements of transport
functionality of equipment
12
- ETS 300 417-1-1 / EN 300 417-1-1 V1.1.2: Generic Processes and Performance
- ETS 300 417-2-1 / EN 300 417-2-1 V1.1.2: SDH and PDH Physical Section Layer
Functions
- ETS 300 417-3-1 / EN 300 417-3-1 V1.1.2: STM-N Regenerator & Multiplex Section
Layer Functions
- ETS 300 417-4-1 / EN 300 417-4-1 V1.1.2: SDH Path Layer Functions

ITU
- ITU-T G.707: Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy
- ITU-T G.783: Characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH): equipment
functional blocks
- ITU-T G.803: Architecture of transport networks based on the synchronous digital
hierarchy (SDH)
- ITU-T G.805: Generic functional architecture of transport networks
- ITU-T G.826: Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit
rate digital paths at or above the primary rate
- ITU-T G.841: Types and characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) network
protection architectures
- ITU-T G.957: Optical interfaces for equipment and systems relating to the synchronous
digital hierarchy
- ITU-T G.958: Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on
optical fibre cables
- ITU-T M.2101.1: Performance limits for bringing into service and maintenance of
international SDH paths and multiplex section
- ITU-T T.50: International Reference Alphabet (IRA) - Information technology 7 bit coded
character set for information interchange

The synchronisation and timing of optical SDH interfaces shall conform to the following
recommendations:
ETS/EN
- ETS 300 417-6-1 / EN 300 417-6-1 V1.1.2: Synchronisation Layer Functions
- ETS 300 462-1 / EN 300 462-1-1 V1.1.1: Transmission and Multiplexing (TM); Generic
requirements for synchronisation networks; Part 1: Definitions and terminology for
synchronisation networks
- EN 300 462-4-1 V1.1.1: Transmission and Multiplexing (TM); Generic requirements for
synchronisation networks; Part 4-1: Timing characteristics of slave clocks suitable for
synchronisation supply to Synchronuous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) and Plesiochronuous
Digital Hierarchy (PDH) equipment
- ETS 300 462-5 / EN 300 462-5-1 V1.1.2: Transmission and Multiplexing (TM); Generic
requirements for synchronisation networks; Part 5: Timing characteristics of slave clocks
suitable for operation in Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) equipment

ITU
- ITU-T G.813: Timing characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) equipment
slave clocks (SEC)

13
4 Abbreviations
AAL ATM Adaptation Layer
ADM Add-drop multiplexed
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
BIP Bit Interleaved Parity
CAS Channel Associated Signalling
CAP Carrier-less Amplitude and Phase
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
DTMF Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
EN European Norm
EOW Engineering Order Wire
ETS European Telecommunications Standards
GPS Global
IEC International Electrical Commission
ITU International Telecommunication Union
IP Internet Protocol
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
MCMI Multi Coded Mark Inversion
MS Multiplex Section
NE Network Element
NMS Network Management System
LAN Local Area Network
OS Optical Section
OSPF Open Shortest Path First
PDH Plesiochronuous Digital Hierarchy
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
RS Regenerator Section
SDH Synchronuous Digital Hierarchy
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SOH Section Overhead
STM Synchronous Transport Module
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TTI Trail Trace Identifier
VC Virtual Container
VF Voice Frequency

14
 Data about offered integrated equipment to be filled in by the bidder.
Name of Manufacturer: ______________________________________
Model: ______________________________________
Type: ______________________________________

REQUIRED OFFERED
GENERAL:
Type of multiplexer SDH: ADM
Complying to ITU-T rec. Yes
Transmission Capacity Mbit/s STM-1: 155
Access capacity on 64 kbit/s channels Minimum 200
Access capacity on 2 Mbit/s channels Minimum 40
Shall be available
Redundant central processor
Fully non-blocking
Digital cross connect function
Minimum40x2Mbit/s
PDH cross connect capacity
Minimum 4xVC4
SDH cross connect capacity
List of 10 reference
Equipment used in substation environment
substation projects
YES
The equipment is KEMA type tested
Teleprotection functionality:
Integrated distance teleprotection YES
functionality
Integrated optical teleprotection functionality YES
Addressing system for commands YES
Loop test for delay time YES
Switch-over less than 10ms YES
Available STM-1 AGGREGATES:
Optical SDH aggregates (ITU-T G.957) S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2
Electrical SDH aggregates YES
Optical ATM aggregates (ITU-T G.957) S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2
Available TRUNK INTERFACES:
Optical 8Mbit/s interface Yes
Electrical 34/35Mbit/s interface Yes
Available USER INTERFACES
Voice interfaces for trunk lines:
YES
1 + 1 com path protection, available for all
Analogue, 4wire with E&M: Input level dBr +7.5 to –16
Output level +7.0 to –16.5
Analogue, 2wire with E&M: Input level dBr +6.5 to –12.5
Output level –1.0 to -20
YES
Digital, 2Mbit/s CAS or PRI
Voice interfaces for remote subscriber:
2wire, subscriber side dBr -5 .. +4 / -7.5 .. -1

15
 REQUIRED OFFERED
Minimal number of subscriber No. 10
2wire, PABX side dBr -5 .. +4 / -7.5 .. -3
Minimal number of PABX No. 10
Integrated teleprotection
Interface for Commands:
Number of independent commands No. 4
Transmission time max. ms 6
Signal voltage volts 250 volts DC
YES
1 + 1 com path protection
Interface(s) for Differential Protection:
kbit/s 64
Electrical interface: G.703
kbit/s Minimum 64
Optical Interface
Data: channels per module
YES
1 + 1 com path protection, available for all
V.24/V.28 (RS-232): up to 38.4kbit/s No. 4
V.11/X.24 (RS-422): 64kbit/s No. 4
V.35: 64kbit/s No. 4
V.36 (RS-449): 64kbit/s No. 2
G.703: 64kbit/s No. 8
Ethernet: 10/100BaseT No. 4
WAN capacity Mbit/s 63xVC12 or 3xVC3
Logical WAN ports No. Minimum 8
GFP (acc. ITU-T G.7041) Yes
VCAT (acc. ITU-T G.707) On VC-12 and VC-3
LCAS (acc. ITU-T G.7043) Yes
Ethernet: Router functionality YES
Routing protocols static IP route
OSPF2 V2
WAN capacity nx64kbit/s(n=1 to31)
WAN protocol PPP, Frame Relay
(incl. RFC1490)
No. Min. 5
Integrated Ethernet Hub 10/100BaseT
Integrated alarm gathering module:
Number of external alarms per module No. Min. 20
Auxiliary power supply for ext. contacts YES
Configuration Management
Type/Name of configuration tool
YES / YES
For local / remote operation
Data communication network Ethernet / IP or
(DCN) Ethernet / OSI
Integrated Management of YES
Teleprotection Commands

16
 REQUIRED OFFERED
Network Management System
Type/Name of configuration tool
YES / YES
For fault / configuration management
Data communication network Ethernet / IP or
(DCN) Ethernet / OSI
Integrated Management of YES
Teleprotection Commands
Remote Access package YES, please provide
details
Ambient Conditions:
°C / % -25 .. + 55 / class 1.2
Storage: ETS 300 019-1-1, class 1.2
hum
°C / % -25 .. + 70 / class 2.2
Transport: ETS 300 019-1-2, class 2.2
hum
Operation: ETS 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E
For operational applications -5 .. +55 / class 3.1E
For xDSL, ISDN and ATM applications °C / % -5 .. +45 / class 3.1E
hum
°C / %
hum
Power Supply
VDC 48 / 60 (-15/+20%)
Operation
YES
Fully redundant power supply
YES
Dual power feeder
VAC 115/230
AC power supply

Emission of the equipment (substation environment)

No Test Name Description Basic standard Class Comply

1.1 Radiated radio 30 MHz to 1 GHz EN 55022 A
frequency
interference
1.2 Conducted radio 150 kHz to 30 MHz EN 55022 A
frequency
interference
AC/DC Power
supply

17
Immunity of the equipment (substation environment)

No Test Name Description Basic standard Level Comply

2.1 ESD test Contact/air discharge IEC 61000-4-2 6 / 8 kV
2.2 Radiated 80 to 1000 MHz, 80% IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m
electromagnetic fieldAM, 1 kHz modulated
2.3 Radiated 1.0 to 2.5 GHz, 80% IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m
electromagnetic fieldAM, 1 kHz modulated
2.4 Fast transient test AC/DC Power supply: IEC 61000-4-4 4 kV
all other ports: 2 kV
2.5 Surge test (1.2/50 AC/DC Power supply: IEC 61000-4-5
µs) Common mode 2.0 kV
Differential mode 1.0 kV
DC Power supply 48
V: 0.5 kV
Common mode 0.5 kV
Differential mode
Signal terminals: 2.0 kV
Common mode 1.0 kV
Differential mode
Telecommunication 1.5 kV
ports:
Common mode
2.6 Conducted radio 0.15 to 80 MHz, 80% IEC 61000-4-6 10 V
frequency AM, (e.m.f.)
interference 1 kHz modulated
2.7 Power frequency Continuous IEC 61000-4-8 30 A/m
magnetic field Short (1 to 3 s) 300 A/m
2.8 Damped oscillatory AC/DC Power supply: IEC 61000-4-12
waves Common mode 2.5 kV
Differential mode 1.25 kV
Signal terminals:
Common mode 2.5 kV
Differential mode 1.25 kV
Telecommunication
ports: 2.5 kV
Common mode
1 MHz, 400 Hz
repetition rate, 2 s burst
duration
2.9 Conducted common Frequency 50 Hz, IEC 61000-4-16 10 / 30
mode disturbance continuous mode Vrms

18
Bidder shall provide all necessary information that deems to be necessary to complete the project in all
respects.

Synchronisation and Test Equipment

1. Master clock for the synchronisation of SDH equipment: Type XL-DC or similar.

2. Optical Power Meter for 1300nm and 1550 nm handheld: OLP-6 or similar

3. Digital Communication Analyzer: PFA-35 or similar

for signal analysis on 64kbit/s and 2Mbit/s level

4. optical Time Domain Reflectometer OTDR

5. Test equipment for Telprotection Module: Test set or similar

19
 SECTION –IX
CHAPTER—XII PART-II
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRONIC
PRIVATE AUTOMATIC EXCHANGE AND ELECTRONIC PUSH
BUTTON TELEPHONES

1.0. SCOPE:

This specification covers design, manufacture, testing, packing, forwarding

and delivery FOR destination of Electronic Private Automatic Exchanges
(EPAX (8/8)) and Electronic push button telephones.

1.1 The EPC Contractor should procure EPAX and Telephones from reputed
firms like
M/s BPL Telecom, Bangalore, M/s Alcatel, France, M/s Siemens, Germany,
etc with prior approval obtained from PMC.

1.2 The EPAX shall be wired for a capacity of 8 nos.4 wire E&M trunks and 16
nos. subscribers,

1.3 The E&M trunk requires 2 wires for signaling E & M and 4 wires for Tx/Rx
speech. The subscriber line supports 2-wire loop signaling.

1.4 The EPAX should support both pulse and DTMF signaling and compatible
with the existing switching equipment in the system.

.1.5 The CPU card and PSU cards shall be duplicated for redundancy with Hot
Stand- by facility

1.6 The EPAX shall support E 1 interface

1.7 The Electronic Push Button Telephones are intended to be connected to the
EPAX for providing speech on dialing network.

1.8 The telephones shall support dialing on 2 wire loop mode.

1
2.0 STANDARDS:

2.1. The EPAX and telephones proposed for purchase as per clause 1.0 shall
conform to the relevant CCITT recommendation and TEC specification
including latest revisions, amendments / changes adopted and published as
detailed below:

The EPAX and Telephones shall however be tested thoroughly for the
EMC/EMI compatibility as per the IS standards mentioned below:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
Standards Title
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
EPAX
TEC Specn.G/PBX TEC specification approved by DOT
-01/01/May'90.

Electronic Push Button Telephones

TEC Specn.G/TEL- TEC Specification approved by DOT

01-02/June'96

IS 6873 Series or its latest

version Methods of measurement of
Electromagnetic interference from
various electrical disturbance

IEC 60255-21-1-1988 Vibration tests (sinusoidal)

IEC 255-21-2-1988 Shock and bump tests.

IEC 60255-22-1-1988 1 MHz burst disturbance test.

IEC 60255-22-2-1996 Electrostatic discharge tests

IEC 60255-22-3-2000 Radiated electromagentic field
disturbance tests.
IEC 255-22-4-1992 Fast Transient Disturbance Test.
IEC 60870-(P1-P6). 1984-2000 Telecontrol Equipment And System

EN 55022 Radiated emission & conducted

emission
CISPR Publication 22 (class A)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2
PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS

4.1. EPAX

1) Type: Microprocessor based Electronic

Private Automatic Exchange with
4 wire E&M signaling.

2) Power -48 V DC +20%, -15%

3) Priority facility: Shall be provided

4) Alarm on indication: Self diagnostics with alarm

on fault condition.

5) Protection : All the trunk lines and

subscriber lines shall be provided
with surge arresters on the
MDF.
6) Fully wired capacity : 4 wire E & M Trunks = 8
of E&M trunks/subscribers Subscribers =16

6) The EPAX shall be compatible

to the following codes for pulses
in various signaling circuits :

i) Coded engaged pulse (in order: 200ms - 250ms make

to hold far end EPAX on dialing: 70ms - 90 ms break
access code 0 or 8 followed by: 70 ms - 90ms make
far end station ID no.)
ii) Priority pulse : 200ms - 250ms make
70ms - 90 ms break
70 ms - 90ms make
iii) Digit pulse : 50ms +/- 10ms make
: 50ms +/- 10ms break
iv) Inter digit pause : 500ms minimum
v) Release pulse : 800ms min.

3
4.2. ELECTRONIC PUSH BUTTON TELEPHONES
a) Type : Electronic Push button
Telephones (Decadic)
supporting both pulse and
DTMF signaling and ring
LED.

b) Dial speed : 10 PPs + 5%

c) Break make Ratio : 2:1

d) Inter digit pause : 500 ms.

f) Reliability : The performance of the
instrument should be very
reliable and accurate with large
Mean Time Between Failure
(MTBF) as per TEC
requirements.
g) Ringing voltage : 35V DC to 75V DC.(75V to 100V
rms,17-23 Hz, 70+/-10mA)
h) Hook switch endurance: 300000 operations.

i) Operating temperature: 5 to 50 oC

5.0. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

5.1. EPAX

5.1.1. The microprocessor based EPAX should directly interface with

communication transmission systems like Optical fibre, Satellite and
Microwave radio communication links. The subscribers must be able to
communicate with local subscribers and far end subscribers through trunk
lines. The EPAX should form an integral part of Communication system
and should be capable of switching speech paths on trunk routes.

5.1.2. The exchange should be compatible with the existing switching systems for
its operation in conjunction with electronic four wire group selectors and
EPAXs of any other make at far end stations.

5.1.3. The exchanges shall be of the state of art technology and employ the stored
program technique by utilizing the principles of TDM/PCM. The system
software shall be posted in flash memory as per the international standards.
The equipment should be reliable and capable of giving service in adverse
tropical temperature climatic condition. .

4
5.1.4. Exchanges are to be self contained and provided with conventional facilities
like
dial tone, busy tone, ringing tone, ring back tone etc. The dialing pulse rate
of subscriber for make and break ratio 1:2 (33.3msec./ 66.66msec.) and for
trunk dialing 1:1 (50 m sec./ 50 m sec). The EPAX should be capable of
working to single, two digit and three digit numbering schemes.

5.1.5. Main Distribution Frame shall be provided. Subscriber lines and junction
lines are to be terminated on the MDF on one side of the terminal-block
with the legend of the terminal connections clearly indicated in
alphanumerics.

5.1.6. Krone tag blocks are preferred to be used for the MDF. Relevant wire
terminating tool shall be supplied with EPAX.

5.1.7. The EPAX should be provided with self checking diagnostic facility to
monitor the exchange continuously through a software controlled program.
The status of the call being established is to be visually displayed suitably as
the call is progressing and faults by audible and visual indications.
Reliability, security and quality of service must be the main features of the
EPAX. The EPAX shall have the priority feature for a particular subscriber.

The following state of art facilities are also to be provided.

i. Priority cut-in into an engaged extension/tie line.
ii. Automatic cut off on forced release condition.
iii. Barred access to tie lines
iv. Call transfer
v. Call consult
vi. Call forward etc.

5.1.8. The priority cut in facility shall be provided in three hierarchies as stated
below.
i. Priority cut in into two busy local extensions.
ii. Priority cut in into one busy local extension and one local
E&M tie trunk.
iii. Priority cut in into two busy E&M trunks in the same EPAX
on transit call.
Subscriber access to the E&M Trunks shall be controlled through barred
access facility.

5.1.9 The equipment should be housed in a standard steel cabinet with proper
ventilation, and it should be dust and vermin proof housing. It should be
painted as per relevant IS and must have provision for access to the circuitry

5
 from both the front and rear sides. The ventilation fan shall work on 48V
DC only.

5.1.10. Programming the required facilities on the EPAX with an ordinary

telephone through the service line is preferred. For EPAXs, which cannot
be programmed with an ordinary telephone, the Bidder shall include the
supply of the required programmer (Example: EPROM programmer or
console) within the scope of supply with a detailed write-up of the
programming schedule through the operator console/ programmer.
6.0 TESTS

6.1. Type/acceptance and routine tests shall be carried out on the EPAX and
Electronic Push Button Telephones proposed for purchase under this
package in accordance with TEC specification
6.1.1. EMI / EMC Test
6.1.2.
The EPAX is required to perform in a working environment of high voltage
power system with high level of Electromagnetic interference and calls for
high degree of Electromagnetic computability for achieving maximum
throughput of traffic. The working environment is riddled with fast
transients, currents, high voltage lightning & switching surges and severe
short circuit current faults. The EPAX is therefore required to be tested
thoroughly for its functional performance as per the EMI/EMC standard

6.2. Type Tests:

The following type tests shall be conducted on a selected sample of EPAX

6.2.1. EPAX
i. Power supply test
ii. Protection test
iii. Engage pulse timing test
iv. Priority timing test
v. Digital pulse timing test
vi. Interdigit pulse timing test
vii. Releasing pulse timing test
viii. Test calls - Subscriber to Subscriber
Subscriber to Trunk
Trunk to Trunk

6.2.2. Telephones

i. Climatic test
ii. Vibration test
iii. Bump/Fall/Topple test

6
 iv. Corrosion test
v. Protection test

6.3. Acceptance/Routine Tests

6.3.1 EPAX

i. Power supply test

ii. Pulses timing test
iii. Test calls - Subscriber to Subscriber
Subscriber to Trunk
Trunk to Trunk
6.3.2. Telephones
i. Climatic test
ii. Vibration test
iii. Corrosion test
iv. Protection test

6.4. Testing Expenses

6.4.1. Entire cost of testing for the acceptance and routine tests and tests during
manufacture specified herein shall be treated as included in the quoted
unit price of EPAX and Electronic Push Button Telephones.

6.5 Additional Tests:

The PMC reserves the right of having at his own expenses any other test(s)
of reasonable nature carried out at Bidder's premises, at site, or in any other
place in addition to the aforesaid type, acceptance and routine tests, to
satisfy himself that the material comply with the specifications.

6.6. Test Reports:

a. i. Copies of the type tests shall be enclosed with the bid

ii. Before dispatch of the equipment at least six (6) copies along with
one original shall be submitted.

b. Record of routine test reports shall be maintained by the Bidder at his

Works for periodic inspection or as and when desired by PMC

c. Test Certificates of tests conducted during manufacture shall be maintained

by the Bidder. These shall be produced for verification as and when desired
by the PMC

7
 ANNEXURE –I
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR EPAX
(To be filled by the Bidder)

Item No. Description Data

1 Type
2 Power
3 Priority facility
4 Type of Alarm indication
5. Protection
6 Fully wired capacity of Trunks/Subscribers
7. Equipped capacity at the time of supply
8. The EPAX shall be compatible to the
following codes for pulses in various
signaling circuits
(i). Coded engaged pulse
(ii). Priority pulse
(iii).Digit pulse
(iv). Inter digit pulse
(v).Release pulse

Signature of the Bidder

8
 ANNEXURE –II
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR ELECTRONIC PUSH
BUTTON TELEPHONES
(To be filled by the Bidder)

Item No. Description Data

1. Type
2. Dial speed
3. Break-make ratio
4. Inter digit pause
5. Reliability
6. Ringing Voltage
7. Hook-Switch endurance
8. Operating temperature
9. Tone/Pulse switchable
10. Last no. redial facility
11. Ringer OFF-LOW-HI facility
12. Hold on music
13. Pause facility
14. Ring LED provision

Signature of the Bidder

9
 SECTION – IX
CHAPTER - XIII
 SECTION – IX
CHAPTER - XIII

SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM (SAS)

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 The scope of this specification covers design, manufacture, supply, installation,
testing and commissioning of sub-station Automation system (SAS).

The EPC contractor should procure the Substation Automation System from
reputed firms like M/s. ABB Ltd, India, M/s.Siemens India etc. with the prior
approval obtained from PMC.

1.2 The sub-station Automation system shall be installed to control and monitor all
sub-station equipment in the two 132/33kV sub-stations Gharbara and
Recreational Green (R.C. Green) locally and from Remote Control Center (RCC).
A major Central Task of the sub-station Automation System is the execution of
automation tasks, such as logical operations and switching sequences.

1.3 The bidder offering the sub-station automation system shall have at least 10 years
of experience in design, engineering, manufacture, installation, testing and
commissioning of SAS. The commissioned system should have been in
satisfactory operation on 132/33kV system or higher for at least two years as on
the date of bid opening.

1.4 The SAS shall contain the following main functional parts:

1.4.1 Bay control Intelligence Electronic Devices (IED s) for control and monitoring.
All the IEDs shall be as per IEC 61850 standard (Chapters 1-10 of the
technical standard document released by IEC) and shall be connected
directly to the interbay bus as shown in the System architecture.

1.4.2 Station Human Machine Interface (HMI)

1.4.3 Redundant managed switched Ethernet Local Area Network communication

infrastructure with hot standby.

1.4.4 Gateway for remote control via industrial grade hardware (to RCC) through
IEC60870-5-101 protocol.

1.4.5 Remote HMI.

1.4.6 Peripheral equipment like printers, display units, key boards, Mouse etc.

1
1.4.7 It shall enable local station control via a PC by means of Human Machine
Interface (HMI) and control software package, which shall contain an extensive
range of supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) functions.

1.4.8 It shall include communication gateway, intelligent electronic devices (IEDs)

for bay control and inter IED communication infrastructure. An architecture
drawing for SAS shown in Annexure.

1.4.9 The communication gateway shall facilitate the information flow with remote
control centre. The bay level intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) for protection
and control shall provide the direct connection to the switchgear without the need
of interposing components and perform control, protection, and monitoring
functions.

2.0 General system design

2.1.1 The Substation Automation System (SAS) shall be suitable for operation and
monitoring of the complete substation including future extensions.

2.1.2 The systems shall be of the state-of-the art suitable for operation under electrical
environment present in Extra high voltage substations, follow the latest
engineering practice, ensure long-term compatibility requirements and continuity
of equipment supply and the safety of the operating staff.

2.1.3 The offered SAS shall support remote control and monitoring from Remote
Control centre via gateways.

2.1.4 The system shall be designed such that personnel without any background
knowledge in Microprocessor-based technology are able to operate the system.
The operator interface shall be intuitive such that operating personnel shall be
able to operate the system easily after having received some basic training.

2.1.5 The system shall incorporate the control, monitoring and protection functions
specified, self-monitoring, signaling and testing facilities, measuring as well as
memory functions, event recording and evaluation of disturbance records.

2.1.6 Maintenance, modification or extension of components may not cause a shutdown

of the whole substation automation system. Self-monitoring of components,
modules and communication shall be incorporated to increase the availability and
the reliability of the equipment and minimize maintenance.

2.1.7 Bidder shall offer the Bay level unit (a bay comprises of one circuit breaker and
Isolator, earth switches and instrument transformer), bay mimic along with relay
and protection panels and Station HMI in Control Room building for overall
optimization in respect of cabling and control room building.

2
3.0 System architecture
3.1 The SAS shall be based on a decentralized architecture and on a concept of
bay-oriented, distributed intelligence.

3.2 Functions shall be decentralized, object-oriented and located as close as possible

to the process.

3.3 The main process information of the station shall be stored in distributed
databases. The typical SAS architecture shall be structured in two levels, i.e. in a
station and a bay level.

3.4 At bay level, the IEDs shall provide all bay level functions regarding control,
monitoring and protection, inputs for status indication and outputs for commands.
The IEDs should be directly connected to the switchgear without any need for
additional interposition or transducers.

3.5 Each bay control IED shall be independent and its functioning shall not be
affected by any fault occurring in any of the other bay control units of the station.

3.6 The data exchange between the electronic devices on bay and station level shall
take place via the communication infrastructure. This shall be realized using fibre-
optic cables, thereby guaranteeing disturbance free communication. The fibre
optic cables shall be run in G . I conduit pipes. Data exchange is to be realised
using IEC 61850 protocol with a redundant managed switched Ethernet
communication infrastructure

3.7 The communication shall be made in 1+1 mode, excluding the links between
individual bay IEDs to switch, such that failure of one set of fibre shall not affect
the normal operation of the SAS. However it shall be alarmed in SAS. Each fibre
optic cable shall have four (4) spare fibres.

3.8 At station level, the entire station shall be controlled and supervised from the
station HMI. It shall also be possible to control and monitor the bay from the bay
level equipment at all times.

3.9 Clear control priorities shall prevent operation of a single switch at the same time
from more than one of the various control levels, i.e. RCC, station HMI, bay level
or apparatus level. The priority shall always be on the lowest enabled control
level.
3.10 The station level contains the station-oriented functions, which cannot be realised
at bay level, e.g. alarm list or event list related to the entire substation, gateway
for the communication with remote control centres.

3.11 The GPS time synchronising signal for the synchronization of the entire system
shall be provided.

3
3.12 The SAS shall contain the functional parts as described in para 1.4 above.

4.0 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 The high-voltage apparatus within the station shall be operated from different
places:
• Remote control centres
• Station HMI.
• Local Bay controller IED (in the bays)
• Operation shall be possible by only one operator at a time.
• The operation shall depend on the conditions of other functions, such as
interlocking, synchrocheck, etc. (see description in ”Bay level control
Functions”).

4.2 Select-before-execute
For security reasons the command is always to be given in two stages: selection of
the object and command for operation under all mode of operation except
emergency operation. Final execution shall take place only when selection and
command are actuated.

4.3 Command supervision

4.4 Bay/station interlocking and blocking

4.4.1 Software Interlocking is to be provided to ensure that inadvertent incorrect
operation of switchgear causing damage and accidents in case of false operation
does not take place.

4.4.2 In addition to software interlocking hardwired interlockings are to be provided

for:
• Bus Earth switch Interlocking
• Transfer Bus interlocking (where applicable)
It shall be a simple layout, easy to test and simple to handle when upgrading the
station with future bays. For software interlocking the bidder shall describe the
scenario while an IED of another bay is switched off or fails.

4.5 Run Time Command cancellation

Command execution timer (configurable) must be available for each control level
connection. If the control action is not completed within a specified time, the
command should get cancelled.

4.6 Self-supervision
Continuous self-supervision function with self-diagnostic feature shall be
included.

4
4.7 User configuration
4.7.1 The monitoring, controlling and configuration of all input and output logical
signals and binary inputs and relay outputs for all built-in functions and signals
shall be possible both locally and remotely.

4.7.2 It shall also be possible to interconnect and derive input and output signals, logic
functions, using built-in functions, complex voltage and currents, additional logics
(AND-gates, OR gates and timers). (Multi-activation of these additional functions
should be possible).

4.7.3 The Functional requirement shall be divided into following levels:

• Bay (a bay comprises of one circuit breaker and Isolator, earth switches and
instrument transformer) Level Functions
• System Level Functions

4.8 Bay level functions

In a decentralized architecture the functionality shall be as close to the process as
possible. In this respect, the following functions can be allocated at bay level:
• Bay control functions including data collection functionality.
• Bay protection functions
• Separate IEDs shall be provided for bay control function and bay protection
function.

4.9 Bay control functions

• Control mode selection
• Select-before-execute principle
• Command supervision:
o Interlocking and blocking
o Double command
• Synchrocheck, voltage selection
• Run Time Command cancellation
• Transformer tap changer control (for power transformer bays)
• Operation counters for circuit breakers and pumps
• Hydraulic pump/ Air compressor control and runtime supervision
• Operating pressure supervision
• Display of interlocking and blocking
• Breaker position indication per phase
• Alarm annunciation
• Measurement display
• Local HMI (local guided, emergency mode)
• Interface to the station HMI.
• At least 500 time tagged events in a ring buffer
• Disturbance record function.
• Extension possibilities with additional I/O's inside the unit or via fibre-optic
communication and process bus

5
4.10 Control mode selection

4.10.1 Bay level Operation:

As soon as the operator receives the operation access at bay level the operation is
normally performed via bay control IED. During normal operation bay control
unit allows the safe operation of all switching devices via the bay control IED.

4.11 Emergency Operation

It shall be possible to close or open the selected Circuit Breaker with ON or OFF
push buttons even during the outage of bay IED.

4.12 Remote mode

Control authority in this mode is given to a higher level (Remote Control Centre)
and the installation can be controlled only remotely. Control operation from lower
levels shall not be possible in this operating mode.

4.14 Synchronism and energizing check

The synchronism and energizing check functions shall be bay-oriented and
distributed to the bay control and/or protection devices. These features are:
• Settable voltage, phase angle, and frequency difference.
• Energizing for dead line - live bus, live line - dead bus or dead line – dead bus
with no synchrocheck function.
• Synchronising between live line and live bus with synchro-check function

4.15 Voltage selection

The voltages relevant for the Synchrocheck functions are dependent on the station
topology, i.e. on the positions of the circuit breakers and/or the isolators. The
correct voltage for synchronizing and energizing is derived from the auxiliary
switches of the circuit breakers, the isolator, and earthing switch and shall be
selected automatically by the bay control and protection IEDs.

4.16 Transformer tap changer control

Raise and lower operation of OLTC taps of transformer shall be facilitated
through Bay controller IED.

4.17 Bay protection functions

• The protection functions are independent of bay control function. The
protection shall be provided by separate protection IEDs (numerical relays)
and other protection devices.
• IEDs, shall be connected to the communication infrastructure for data sharing
and meet the real-time communication requirements for automatic functions.
The data presentation and the configuration of the various IEDs shall be
compatible with the overall system communication and data exchange
requirements.

6
 • Event and disturbance recording function
• Each IED should contain an event recorder capable of storing at least 500
timetagged events in a ring buffer. This shall give alarm if 70% memory is
full.
Disturbance recorder shall meet the requirements as specified vide clause
5.1.10d(xi 4) of Technical specification on ‘Control and Relay Panels’. i.e.
Chapter-IX of Section-IX of part II of Volume-III.

5.0 System level functions

5.1 Status supervision

5.1.1 The position of each switchgear, e.g. circuit breaker, isolator, earthing switch,
transformer tap changer etc., shall be supervised continuously. Every detected
change of position shall be immediately displayed in the single-line diagram on
the station HMI screen, recorded in the event list, and a hard copy printout shall
be produced. Alarms shall be initiated in the case of spontaneous position
changes.

5.1.2 The switchgear positions shall be indicated by two auxiliary switches, normally
closed (NC) and normally open (NO), which shall give ambivalent signals. An
alarm shall be initiated if these position indications are inconsistent or if the time
required for operating mechanism to change position exceeds a predefined limit.

5.1.3 The SAS shall also monitor the status of sub-station auxiliaries. The status and
control of auxiliaries shall be done through separate one or more IED and all
alarm and analogue values shall be monitored and recoded through this IED.

5.2 Measurements
5.2.2 Analogue inputs for voltage and current measurements shall be connected directly
to the voltage transformers (VT) and the current transformers (CT) without
intermediate transducers. The values of active power (W), reactive power (VAR),
frequency (Hz), and the rms values for voltage (U) and current (I) shall be
calculated.

5.2.3 The measured values shall be displayed locally on the station HMI and in the
control centre. The abnormal values must be discarded. The analogue values shall
be updated every 2 seconds.

5.2.4 Threshold limit values shall be selectable for alarm indications.

6.0 Event and alarm handling

6.1 Events and alarms are generated either by the switchgear, by the control IEDs, or
by the station level unit. They shall be recorded in an event list in the station HMI.
Alarms shall be recorded in a separate alarm list and appear on the screen. All, or

7
 a freely selectable group of events and alarms shall also be printed out on an event
printer. The alarms and events shall be time-tagged with a time resolution of 1 ms.

7.0 Station HMI

7.1 Substation HMI Operation:

On the HMI the object has to be selected first. In case of a blocking or
interlocking conditions are not met, the selection shall not be possible and an
appropriate alarm annunciation shall occur. If a selection is valid the position
indication will show the possible direction, and the appropriate control execution
button shall be pressed in order to close or open the corresponding object.
Control operation from other places (e.g. REMOTE) shall not be possible in this
operating mode.

8.0 Presentation and dialogues

8.1 General
8.1.1 The operator station HMI shall be a redundant with hot standby and shall provide
basic functions for supervision and control of the substation. The operator shall
give commands to the switchgear on the screen via mouse clicks or keyboard
commands.

8.1.2 The HMI shall give the operator access to alarms and events displayed on the
screen. Aside from these lists on the screen, there shall be a printout of alarms or
events in an event log.

8.1.3 An acoustic alarm shall indicate abnormalities, and all unacknowledged alarms
shall be accessible from any screen selected by the operator.

8.1.4 The following standard pictures shall be available from the HMI:
• Single-line diagram showing the switchgear status and measured values
• Control dialogues with interlocking and blocking details. This control
dialogue shall tell the operator whether the device operation is permitted
or blocked.
• Measurement dialogues
• Alarm list, station / bay-oriented
• Event list, station / bay-oriented
• System status

9.0 HMI design principles

9.1 Consistent design principles shall be adopted with the HMI concerning labels,
colours, dialogues and fonts. Non-valid selections shall be dimmed out.

8
9.2 The object status shall be indicated using different status colours for:
• Selected object under command
• Selected on the screen
• Not updated, obsolete values, not in use or not sampled
• Alarm or faulty state
• Warning or blocked
• Update blocked or manually updated
• Control blocked
• Normal state

10.0 Process status displays and command procedures

10.1 The process status of the substation in terms of actual values of currents, voltages,
frequency, active and reactive powers as well as the positions of circuit breakers,
isolators and transformer tap-changers shall be displayed in the station single-line
diagram.

10.2 In order to ensure a high degree of security against undesired operation, a "select-
before-execute" command procedure shall be provided. After the "selection" of a
switch, the operator shall be able to recognize the selected device on the screen,
and all other switchgear shall be blocked. As communication between control
centre and device to be controlled is established, the operator shall be prompted
to confirm the control action and only then final execute command shall be
accepted. After the “execution” of the command the operated switching symbol
shall flash until the switch has reached its new position.

10.3 The operator shall be in a position to execute a command only, if the switch is
not blocked and if no interlocking condition is going to be violated. The
interlocking statements shall be checked by the interlocking scheme implemented
at bay and station level.

10.4 After command execution the operator shall receive a confirmation that the new
switching position has been reached or an indication that the switching procedure
was unsuccessful with the indication of the reason for non-functioning.

11.0 System supervision & display

The SAS system shall be comprehensively self-monitored such that faults are
immediately indicated to the operator, possibly before they develop into serious
situations. Such faults are recorded as a faulty status in a system supervision
display. This display shall cover the status of the entire substation including all
switchgear, IEDs, communication infrastructure and remote communication links,
and printers at the station level, etc.

9
12.0 Event list
12.1 The event list shall contain events that are important for the control and
monitoring of the substation.
12.2 The event and associated time (with1 ms resolution) of its occurrence has to be
displayed for each event.
12.3 The operator shall be able to call up the chronological event list on the monitor at
any time for the whole substation or sections of it.
12.4 A printout of each display shall be possible on the hard copy printer.
12.5 The events shall be registered in a chronological event list in which the type of
event and its time of occurrence are specified. It shall be possible to store all
events in the computer for at least one month. The information shall be obtainable
also from a printed event log.

12.6 The chronological event list shall contain:

• Position changes of circuit breakers, isolators and earthing devices
• Indication of protective relay operations
• Fault signals from the switchgear
• Indication when analogue measured values exceed upper and lower limits.
• Suitable provision shall be made in the system to define two level of alarm on
either side of the value or which shall be user defined for each measurand.
• Loss of communication.
• Filters for selection of a certain type or group of events shall be available. The
filters shall be designed to enable viewing of events grouped per:
• Date and time
• Bay
• Device
• Function e.g. trips, protection operations etc.
• Alarm class

13.0 Alarm list

13.1 Faults and errors occurring in the substation shall be listed in an alarm list and
shall be immediately transmitted to the control centre. The alarm list shall
substitute a conventional alarm tableau, and shall constitute an evaluation of all
station alarms. It shall contain unacknowledged alarms and persisting faults. The
date and time of occurrence shall be indicated.

13.2 The alarm list shall consist of a summary display of the present alarm situation.
Each alarm shall be reported on one line that contains:
• The date and time of the alarm
• The name of the alarming object
• A descriptive text
• The acknowledgement state.

10
13.3 Whenever an alarm condition occurs, the alarm condition must be shown on the
alarm list and must be displayed in a flashing state along with an audible alarm.
After acknowledgement of the alarm, it should appear in a steady (i.e. not
flashing) state and the audible alarm shall stop. The alarm should disappear only
if the alarm condition has physically cleared and the operator has reset the alarm
with a reset command. The state of the alarms shall be shown in the alarm list
(Unacknowledged and persistent, Unacknowledged and cleared, Acknowledged
and persistent).

13.4 Filters for selection of a certain type or group of alarms shall be available as for
events.

14.0 Object picture

When selecting an object such as a circuit breaker or isolator in the single-line
diagram, the associated bay picture shall be presented first. In the selected object
picture, all attributes like

• Type of blocking
• Authority
• Local / remote control
• Errors etc., shall be displayed.

15.0 Control dialogues

The operator shall give commands to the system by means of mouse click located
on the single-line diagram. It shall also be possible to use the keyboard for
command activation. Data entry is performed with the keyboard. Dedicated
control dialogues for controlling at least the following devices shall be available:
• Breaker and Isolator
• Transformer tap-changer

16.0 User-authority levels

It shall be possible to restrict activation of the process pictures of each object
(bays, apparatus...) within a certain user authorisation group. Each user shall then
be given access rights to each group of objects, e.g.:

• Display only
• Normal operation (e.g. open/close of switchgear)
• Restricted operation (e.g. by-passed interlocking)
• System administrator

16.1 For maintenance and engineering purposes of the station HMI, the following
authorisation levels shall be available:
• Level 1 – Operator. No authorization – only monitoring
• Level 2 – Authorization for configuration.

11
 • Level 3 – Authorization for system management.
• Level 4 - The access rights shall be defined by passwords assigned during the
log-in procedure. Only the system administrator shall be able to add/remove
users and change access rights.

17.0 Reports
The reports shall provide time-related follow-ups of measured and calculated
values. The data displayed shall comprise:

17.1 Availability Based Tariff Report (ABT)

17.1.1 Trend reports:

• Day (mean, peak)
• Month (mean, peak)
• Semi-annual (mean, peak)
• Year (mean, peak)

17.2 Historical reports of selected analogue Values:

• Day (at 15 minutes interval)
• Week
• Month
• Year

17.3 It shall be possible to select displayed values from the database in the process
display on-line. Scrolling between e.g. days shall be possible. Unsure values shall
be indicated. It shall be possible to select the time period for which the specific
data are kept in the memory.

17.4 Following printouts shall be available from the printer and shall be printed on
demand:

i) Daily voltage and frequency curves depicting time on X-axis and the
appropriate parameters on the Y-axis. The time duration of the curve is 24
hours.
ii) Weekly trend curves for real and derived analogue values.
iii) Printouts of the maximum and minimum values and frequency of
occurrence and duration of maximum and minimum values for each
analogue parameter for each circuit in 24 hr period.
iv) Provision shall be made for logging information about breaker status like
number of operation with date and time indications.
v) Equipment operation details shift wise and during 24 hours.
vi) Printout on adjustable time period as well as on demand for MW, MVAR,
Current, Voltage on each feeder and transformer as well as Tap Positions,
temperature and status of pumps and fans for transformers.
vii) Printout on adjustable time period as well as on demand system frequency
and average frequency.

12
 viii) Reports in specified formats which shall be handed over to successful
bidder.

18.0 Trend display (historical data)

18.1 It shall be possible to illustrate all types of process data as trends - input and
output data, binary and analogue data. The trends shall be displayed in graphical
form as column or curve diagrams with a maximum of 10 trends per screen.
Adjustable time span and scaling ranges must be provided.

18.2 It shall be possible to change the type of value logging (direct, mean, sum, or
difference) on-line in the window. It shall also be possible to change the update
intervals on-line in the picture as well as the selection of threshold values for
alarming purposes.

19.0 Automatic disturbance file transfer

All recorded data from the IEDs with integrated disturbance recorder as well as
dedicated disturbance recording systems shall be automatically uploaded (event
triggered or once per day) to a dedicated computer and be stored on the hard disc.

20.0 Disturbance analysis

The PC-based work station shall have necessary software to evaluate all the
required information for proper fault analysis.

21.0 IED parameter setting

It shall be possible to access all protection and control IEDs for reading the
parameters (settings) from the station HMI or from a dedicated monitoring
computer. The setting of parameters or the activation of parameter sets shall only
be allowed after entering a password.

22.0 Automatic sequences

The available automatic sequences in the system should be listed and described,
(e.g. sequences related to the bus transfer). It must be possible to initiate
predefined automatic sequences by the operator and also define new automatic
sequences.

23.0 Gateway
23.1 Communication Interface

23.2 The Substation Automation System shall have the capability to support
simultaneous communications with multiple independent remote master stations,

23.3 The Substation Automation System shall have communication ports as follows:
(a) Two ports for Remote Control Centre
(b) Two ports for Local Control

13
23.4 The communication interface to the SAS shall allow scanning and control of
defined points within the substation automation system independently for each
control centre. The substation automation system shall simultaneously respond to
independent scans and commands from Remote Control Centre (RCC). The
substation automation system shall support the use of a different communication
data exchange rate (bits per second), scanning cycle, and/or communication
protocol to each remote control centre. Also, each control centre’s data scan and
control commands may be different for different data points within the substation
automation system's database.

24.0 Remote Control Centre Communication Interface

The two 132kV Substations R.C Green and Gharbara shall be connected with
Remote Control Centre (RCC) at Delta 33kV S.S through Optic Fibre Cable
which is covered in package (A). The EPC contractor should coordinate with the
EPC contractor of package (A) for integration.

24.1 Interface equipment:

The Contractor shall provide interface equipment for communicating between
Substation Automation system and Remote control centre.

24.2 Communication Protocol

The communication protocol for gateway to control centre must be open protocol
and shall support IEC 60870-5-101 and IEC 61850 for all levels of ommunication
for sub-station automation such as Bay to station HMI, gateway to remote station
etc..

25.0 System hardware:

25.1 Redundant Station HMI, HMI View Node, Remote HMI and Disturbance
Recorder Work station:
• The contractor shall provide redundant station HMI in hot standby mode.
• It shall be capable to perform all functions for entire substation including
future requirements as indicated in the Single Line Diagram (SLD). It
shall use industrial grade components. Processor and RAM shall be
selected in such a manner that during normal operation not more than 30%
capacity of processing and memory are used. Contractor shall demonstrate
these features.
• The capacity of hard disk shall be selected such that the following
requirement should occupy less than 50% of disk space:
• Storage of all analogue data (at 15 Minutes interval)and digital data
including alarm, event and trend data for thirty(30) days, Storage of all
necessary software, 20GB space for owner's use.
• Contractor shall demonstrate that the capacity of hard disk is sufficient to
meet the above requirement.

14
26.0 HMI (Human Machine Interface)
The Visual Display Unit (VDU) shall show overview diagrams (Single Line
Diagrams) and complete details of the switchgear with a colour display. All event
and alarm annunciation shall be selectable in the form of lists. Operation shall be
by a user friendly function keyboard and a cursor positioning device. The user
interface shall be based on WINDOWS concepts with graphics & facility for
panning, scrolling, zooming, decluttering etc.

26.1 Visual Display Units/TFT's (Thin Film Technology)

• The contractor shall provide three display units, one for station HMI, one for
redundant HMI and one for DR work station. These shall have high resolution
and reflection protected picture screen. High stability of the picture geometry
shall be ensured. The screen shall be at least 21" diagonally in size and
capable of colour graphic displays.

• The display shall accommodate resolution of 1280 X 1024 pixels.

• The HMI shall be able to switch the key board and cursor positioning device,
as unit among all the monitors at a consol vis push button or other controls.

27.0 Printer
27.1 It shall be robust & suitable for operation with a minimum of 132 characters per
line. The printing operation shall be quiet with a noise level of less than 45 dB
suitable for location in the control room. Printer shall accept and print all ASCII
characters via master control computer unit interface.

27.2 The printer shall have in built testing facility. Failure of the printer shall be
indicated in the Station HMI. The printer shall have an off line mode selector
switch to enable safe maintenance. The maintenance should be simple with
provisions for ease of change of print head, ribbon changing, paper insertion etc.

27.3 All printers mounted in the control room shall be provided with a separate printer
enclosure each. The enclosure shall be designed to permit full enclosure of the
printers at a convenient level. Plexiglas windows shall be used to provide visual
inspection of the printers and ease of reading. The printer enclosures shall be
designed to protect the printers from accidental external contact & each should be
removable from hinges at the back and shall be provided with lock at the front.

27.4 All reports and graphics prints shall be printed on laser printer. One dot matrix
printer shall be exclusively used for hourly log printing.

27.5 All printers shall be continuously online.

15
28.0 Mass Storage Unit
The mass storage unit shall be built-in to the Station HMI. All operational
measured values, and indications shall be stored in a mass-storage unit of
CDROM / DVD-ROM with 700 MB or more capacity. The unit should support at
least Read (48X), Write(24X), and Re-Write (10X) operations, with Multi-
Session capability. It should support ISO9660, Rockridge and Joliet Filesystems.
It should support formatting and use under the operating system provided for
Station HMI. The monthly back up of data shall be taken on disc. The facility of
back up of data shall be inherent in the software.

28.1 Switched Ethernet Communication Infrastructure:

The bidder shall provide redundant switched optical Ethernet communication
infrastructure for SAS.

28.2 Bay level unit

The bay unit shall use industrial grade components. The bay level unit, based on
microprocessor technology, shall use numerical techniques for the calculation and
evaluation of externally input analogue signals. They shall incorporate select-
before-operate control principles as safety measures for operation via the HMI.
They shall perform all bay related functions, such as control commands, bay
interlocking, data acquisition, data storage, event recording and shall provide
inputs for status indication and outputs for commands. They shall be directly
connected to the switchgear. The bay unit shall acquire and process all data for
the bay (Equipment status, fault indications, measured values, alarms etc.) and
transmit these to the other devices in sub-station automation system. In addition,
this shall receive the operation commands from station HMI and control centre.
The bay unit shall have the capability to store all the data for at least 24 hours.

One No. Bay level unit shall be provided for supervision and control of each bay
(a bay comprises of one circuit breaker and Isolator, earth switches and
instrument transformer). The Bay level unit shall be equipped with analogue and
binary inputs/outputs for handling the control, status monitoring and analogue
measurement functions. All bay level interlocks are to be incorporated in the Bay
level unit so as to permit control from the Bay level unit/local bay mimic panel,
with all bay interlocks in place, during maintenance and commissioning or in case
of contingencies when the Station HMI is out of service.

The Bay level unit shall meet the requirements for withstanding electromagnetic
interference according to relevant parts of IEC 61850. Failure of any single
component within the equipment shall neither cause unwanted operation nor lead
to a complete system breakdown.

16
28.3 Input/Output (I/O) modules
The I/O modules shall form a part of the bay level unit and shall provide coupling
to the substation equipment. The I/O modules shall acquire all switchgear
information (i.e. data coming directly from the switchgear or from switchgear
interlocking devices) and transmit commands for operation of the switchgear. The
measured values of voltage and current shall be from the secondaries of
instrument transformers. The digital inputs shall be acquired by exception with 1
ms resolution. Contact bouncing in digital inputs shall not be assumed as change
of state

29.0 Extendibility in future

Substation automation system offered shall be suitable for extension in future for
additional bays. During such requirement, all the drawings and configurations,
alarm/event list etc. displayed shall be designed in such a manner that its
extension shall be easily performed.. During such event, normal operation of the
existing substation shall be unaffected and system shall not require a shutdown.
The contractor shall provide all necessary software tools along with source codes
to perform addition of bays in future and complete integration with SAS by the
user. These software tools shall be able to configure IED, add additional analogue
variable, alarm list, event list, modify interlocking logics etc. for additional
bays/equipment which shall be added in future.

30.0 Software structure

The software package shall be structured according to the SAS architecture and
strictly divided in various levels. Necessary firewall shall be provided at suitable
points in software to protect the system. An extension of the station shall be
possible with lowest possible efforts. Maintenance, modification or an extension
of components of any feeder may not force a shut-down of the parts of the system
which are not affected by the system adaptation.

30.1 Station level software

30.2 Human-machine interface (HMI)

The base HMI software package for the operator station shall include the main
SAS functions and it shall be independent of project specific hardware version
and operating system. It shall further include tools for picture editing, engineering
and system configuration. The system shall be easy to use, to maintain, and to
adapt according to specific user requirements. Systems shall contain a library with
standard functions and applications.

30.3 Bay level software

30.4 System software

The system software shall be structured in various levels. This software shall be
placed in a non-volatile memory. The lowest level shall assure system

17
 performance and contain basic functions, which shall not be accessible by the
application and maintenance engineer for modifications. The system shall support
the generation of typical control macros and a process database for user specific
data storage. In case of restoration of links after failure, the software along with
hardware shall be capable of automatically synchronising with the remaining
system without any manual interface. This shall be demonstrated by contractor
during integrated system test.

30.5 Application software

In order to ensure robust quality and reliable software functions, the main part of
the application software shall consist of standard software modules built as
functional block elements. The functional blocks shall be documented and
thoroughly tested. They form part of a library. The application software within
the control/protection devices shall be programmed in a functional block
language.

31.0 Network Management System: (NMS)

The contractor shall provide network management system software for
following management functions:
• Configuration Management
• Fault Management
• Performance Monitoring
• This system shall be used for management of communication devices and
other IEDs in the system. This NMS can be loaded in DR work-station and
shall be easy to use, user friendly and menu based. The NMS shall monitor all
the devices in the SAS and report if there is any fault in the monitored
devices. The NMS shall
• Maintain performance, resource usage, and error statistics for all managed
links and devices and present this information via displays, periodic reports
and on demand reports.
• Maintain a graphical display of SAS connectivity and device status.
• Issue alarms when error conditions occurs
• Provide facility to add and delete addresses and links
• The contractor shall provide each software in two copies in CD to load into
the system in case of any problem related with Hardware/Communication etc.

32.0 TESTS
The substation automation system offered by the bidder shall be subjected to
following tests to establish compliance with IEC 61850 for EHV sub-station
equipment installed in sheltered area in the outdoor switchyard and specified
ambient conditions:

32.1 Type Tests:

Control IEDs and Communication Equipment:
Power Input:
• Auxiliary Voltage

18
 • Current Circuits
• Voltage Circuits
• Indications

Accuracy Tests:
• Operational Measured Values
• Currents
• Voltages
• Time resolution

Insulation Tests:
• Dielectric Tests
• Impulse Voltage withstand Test

Influencing Quantities
• Limits of operation
• Permissible ripples
• Interruption of input voltage

Electromagnetic Compatibility Test:

• 1 MHZ. burst disturbance test
• Electrostatic Discharge Test
• Radiated Electromagnetic Field Disturbance Test
• Electrical Fast transient Disturbance Test
• Conducted Disturbances Tests induced by Radio Frequency Field
• Magnetic Field Test
• Emission (Radio interference level) Test.
• Conducted Interference Test

Function Tests:
• Indication
• Commands
• Measured value Acquisition
• Display Indications

Environmental tests:
• Cold Temperature
• Dry Heat
• Wet heat
• Humidity (Damp heat Cycle)
• Vibration
• Bump
• Shock

19
32.2 Factory Acceptance Tests:
The Contractor shall submit a test specification for factory acceptance test (FAT)
and commissioning tests of the station automation system for approval. For the
individual bay level IED’s applicable type test certificates shall be submitted.

32.3 Integrated Testing;

• The integrated system tests shall be performed as detailed in subsequent
clauses as per following configuration:
• Redundant Station HMI, DR work station and 2 bays

32.4 Hardware Integration Tests:

The hardware integration test shall be performed on the specified systems to be
used for Factory tests when the hardware has been installed in the factory. The
operation of each item shall be verified as an integral part of system. Applicable
hardware diagnostics shall be used to verify that each hardware component is
completely operational and assembled into a configuration capable of supporting
software integration and factory testing of the system. The equipment expansion
capability shall also be verified during the hardware integration tests.

32.5 Field Tests:

The field tests shall completely verify all the features of SAS hardware and
software.

33.0 SYSTEM OPERATION

33.1 Substation Operation

33.2 NORMAL OPERATION

Operation of the system by the operator from the remote RCC or at the substation
shall take place via industry standard HMI (Human Machine interface) subsystem
consisting of graphic colour VDU, a standard keyboard and a cursor positioning
device (mouse).

33.3 The coloured screen shall be divided into 3 fields:

• Message field with display of present time and date
• Display field for single line diagrams
• Navigation bar with alarm/condition indication

For display of alarm annunciation, lists of events etc a separate HMI View node
shall be provided.

All operations shall be performed with mouse and/or a minimum number of

function keys and cursor keys. The function keys shall have different meanings
depending on the operation. The operator shall see the relevant meanings as
function tests displayed in the command field (i.e. operator prompting). For

20
 control actions, the switchgear (i.e. circuit breaker etc.) requested shall be
selectable on the display by means of the cursor keys. The switching element
selected shall then appear on the background that shall be flashing in a different
color. The operator prompting shall distinguish between:-

• Prompting of indications e.g. fault indications in the switchgear, and

• prompting of operational sequences e.g. execution of switching operations

The summary information displayed in the message field shall give a rapid
display of alarm/message of the system in which a fault has occurred and alarm
annunciation lists in which the fault is described more fully.

Each operational sequence shall be divided into single operation steps which are
initiated by means of the function keys/WINDOW command by mouse. Operator
prompting shall be designed in such a manner that only the permissible keys are
available in the command field related to the specific operation step. Only those
switching elements shall be accessed for which control actions are possible. If the
operation step is rejected by the system, the operator prompting shall be supported
by additional comments in the message field. The operation status shall be reset to
the corresponding preceding step in the operation sequence by pressing one of the
function keys. All operations shall be verified. Incorrect operations shall be
indicated by comments in the message field and must not be executed.

The offer shall include a comprehensive description of the system. The above
operation shall also be possible via WINDOWS based system by mouse.

34.0 POWER SUPPLY

• Power for the substation automation system shall be derived from substation
220V DC system.
• Inverter of suitable capacity shall be provided for station HMI and its peripheral
devices e.g. printer etc. In the event of Power failure, necessary safeguard
software shall be built for proper shutdown and restart.

35.0 DOCUMENTATION
35.1 The following documents shall be submitted for PMC ’s approval during detailed
engineering:
• System Architecture Drawing
• Hardware Specification
• Sizing Calculations of various components
• Response Time Calculation
• Functional Design Document
• The following documentation to be provided for the system in the course of
the project shall be consistent, CAD supported, and of similar look/feel. All
CAD drawings to be provided in “dxf” format.
• List of Drawings
• Substation automation system architecture

21
 • Block Diagram
• Guaranteed technical parameters, Functional Design Specification and
Guaranteed availability and reliability
• Calculation for power supply dimensioning
• I/O Signal lists
• Schematic diagrams
• List of Apparatus
• List of Labels
• Logic Diagram (hardware & software )
• Kiosk layout drawing
• GA of kiosk and GTP
• Control Room Lay-out
• Test Specification for Factory Acceptance Test (FAT)
• Product Manuals
• Assembly Drawing
• Operator’s Manual
• Complete documentation of implemented protocols between various elements
• Listing of software and loadable in CD ROM
• Other documents as may be required during detailed engineering

Two sets of hard copy and Four sets of CD ROM containing all the as built
documents/drawings shall be provided.

36.0 TRAINING, SUPPORT SERVICES, MAINTENANCE AND SPARES

36.1 The scope includes training of the personnel. The contractor shall arrange free of
cost training required for successful operation and maintenance of the equipment.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary training material. Each trainee shall
receive individual copies of all technical manuals and all other documents used
for training. These materials shall be sent to PMC at least two months before the
scheduled commencement of the particular training course. Class materials,
including the documents sent before the training courses as well as class
handouts, shall become the property of PMC. PMC reserves the right to copy such
materials, but for in-house training and use only. Hands-on training shall utilize
equipment identical to that being supplied to PMC . The contractor shall indicate
the schedule, location, and detailed contents of each course and the No. of
personnel need to be trained on shore or off shore.

36.2 Computer System Hardware

The following subjects shall be covered in this training programme:

(a) System Hardware Overview: Configuration of the system hardware.

(b) Equipment Maintenance: Basic theory of operation, maintenance

techniques and diagnostic procedures for each element of the computer

22
 system, e.g., processors, auxiliary memories, LANs, routers and printers.
Configuration of all the hardware equipments.

(c) System Expansion: Techniques and procedures to expand and add

equipment such as loggers, monitors, and communication channels.

(d) System Maintenance: Theory of operation and maintenance of the

redundant hardware configuration, failover hardware, configuration
control panels, and failover switches. Maintenance of protective devices
and power supplies.

(e) Subsystem Maintenance: Theory of design and operation, maintenance

techniques and practices, diagnostic procedures, and (where applicable)
expansion techniques and procedures. Classes shall include hands-on
training for the specific subsystems that are part of supplied equipment or
part of similarly designed and configured subsystems. All interfaces to the
computing equipment shall be taught in detail.

(f) Operational Training: Practical training on preventive and corrective

maintenance of all equipment, including use of special tools and
instruments. This training shall be provided on the supplid equipment, or
on similarly configured systems.

36.3 Computer System Software Course

The Contractor shall provide a computer system software course that covers the
following subjects:

(a) System Programming: Including all applicable programming languages

and all stand-alone service and utility packages provided with the system.
An introduction to software architecture, Effect of tuning parameters (OS
software, Network software, database software etc.) on the performance of
the system.

(b) Operating System: Including the user aspects of the operating system,
such as program loading and integrating procedures; scheduling,
management, service, and utility functions; and system expansion
techniques and procedures

(c) System Initialization and Failover: Including design, theory of operation,

and practice

(d) Diagnostics: Including the execution of diagnostic procedures and the

interpretation of diagnostic outputs,

23
 (e) Software Documentation: Orientation in the organization and use of
system software documentation.

(f) Hands-on Training: One week, with allocated computer time for trainee
performance of unstructured exercises and with the course instructor
available for assistance as necessary.

36.4 Application Software Course

The Contractor shall provide a comprehensive application software courses
covering all applications including the database and display building course. The
training shall include:

(a) Overview: Block diagrams of the application software and data flows.
Programming standards and program interface conventions.

(b) Application Functions: Functional capabilities, design, and major

algorithms. Associated maintenance and expansion techniques.

(c) Software Development: Techniques and conventions to be used for the

preparation and integration of new software functions.

(d) Software Generation: Generation of application software from source code

and associated software configuration control procedures.

(e) Software Documentation: Orientation in the organization and use of

functional and detailed design documentation and of programmer and user
manuals.

(f) Hands-on Training: One week, with allocated computer time for trainee
performance of unstructured exercises and with the course instructor
available for assistance as necessary.

36.5 Requirement of training:

The contractor shall provide training for two batches for two weeks each for
following courses.

S.No. Name of Course

1 Computer System Hardware
2 Computer System Software
3 Application Software

37.0 Maintenance

37.1 Maintenance Responsibility during the Guaranteed Availability Period.

During Guaranteed Availability Period, the Contractor shall take continual
actions to ensure the guaranteed availability and shall make available all the

24
 necessary resources such as specialist personnel, spare parts, tools, test devices
etc. for replacement or repair of all defective parts and shall have prime
responsibility for keeping the system operational.

38.0 RELIABILITY AND AVAILABILITY

38.1 The SAS shall be designed so that the failure of any single component, processor,
or device shall not render the system unavailable. The SAS shall be designed to
satisfy the very high demands for reliability and availability concerning:

• Mechanical and electrical design

• Security against electrical interference (EMI)
• High quality components and boards
• Modular, well-tested hardware
• Thoroughly developed and tested modular software
• Easy-to-understand programming language for application programming
• Detailed graphical documentation and application software
• Built-in supervision and diagnostic functions
• Security
• Experience of security requirements
• Process know-how
• Select before execute at operation
• Process status representation as double indications
• Distributed solution
• Independent units connected to the local area network
• Back-up functions
• Panel design appropriate to the harsh electrical environment and ambient
conditions
• Panel grounding immune against transient ground potential rise

38.2 Outage terms

38.3 Outage
The outage is the state in which substation automation system or a unit of SAS is
unavailable for normal operation as defined in the clause 33.2 due to an event
directly related to the SAS or unit of SAS. .

38.3.1 Actual outage duration (AOD)

The time elapsed in hours between the start and the end of an outage. The time
shall be counted to the nearest 1/4th of an hour. Time less than 1/4th of an hour
shall be counted as having duration of 1/4th of an hour.

38.4 Period Hours (PH)

The number of hours in the reporting period. In a full year the period of hours are
8760 hours (8784 for a leap year).

25
38.5 Actual Outage hours (AOH)
• The sum of Actual Outage Duration within the reporting period
• AOH = Σ AOD

38.6 Availability:
Each SAS shall have a total availability of 99.98 % i.e. the ratio of total time
duration minus the actual outage duration to total time duration.

38.7 Guarantees Required

The availability for the complete SAS shall be guaranteed by the Contractor.
Bidder shall include in their offer detailed calculation for the availability
The contractor shall demonstrate their availability guaranteed by conducting the
availability test on the total Sub station automation system as whole after
commissioning of total Sub station automation system. The tests shall verify the
reliability and integrity of all sub systems. Under these conditions the tests shall
establish an overall availability of 99.98%. After the lapse of 1000 hours of
cumulative test time, test records shall be examined to determine the conformance
with availability criterion. In case of any outage during the availability test, the
contractor shall rectify the problem and after rectification, the 1000 hours period
start after such reification. If test object has not been met the test shall continue
until the specified availability is achieved.

The contractor has to establish the availability in a maximum period of 3 months

from the date of commencement of availability test. After the satisfactory
conclusion of the test both contractor and PMC shall mutually agree to the test
results and if these results satisfy the availability criterion, the test is considered to
be completed successfully. After that the system shall be taken over by the
PMC/Owner and then the guarantee period shall start.

39.0 Spares

39.1 Consumables:
All consumables such as paper, cartridges shall be supplied by the contractor till
the SAS is taken over by the PMC. .

39.2 Availability Spares:

In addition to mandatory spares for SAS, the bidder is required to list the spares,
which may be required for ensuring the guaranteed availability during the
guaranteed availability period. The final list of spares shall form part of scope of
supply and accordingly the price thereof shall be quoted by the bidder and shall be
considered in the evaluation of the bids. During the guaranteed availability period,
the spare parts supplied by the Contractor shall be made available to the
Contractor for usage subject to replenishment at the earliest. Thus, at the end of
availability period the inventory of spares with the PMC shall be fully
replenished by the Contractor. However, any additional spares required to meet
the availability of the system (which are not a part of the above spares supplied by

26
 the Contractor) would have to be supplied immediately by the Contractor free of
cost.

40.0 LIST OF EQUIPMENTS

40.1 Quantity of equipments shall be decided by bidder in order to achieve guaranteed
reliability and availability as declared by bidder.
• Station HMI
• Redundant Station HMI (in Hot-stand by mode)
• Bay level units along with bay mimic
• Disturbance Recorder Work Station(Maintenance HMI)
• Colour Laser Printer – 1 No. (For Reports & Disturbance records)
• Dot matrix printers - (one each for Alarms and log sheets)
• All interface equipment for gateway to RCC.
• Communication infrastructure between Bay level units, Station HMI, Printers,
gateways, redundant LAN etc. as required
• Remote workstation including HMI and along with one laser printer and one
dot matrix printer.
• Any other equipment as necessary.

41.0 Basic Monitoring requirements are:

• Switchgear status indication
• Measurements Voltage (V),Current (I),Active power (P),
• Reactive power (Q),Frequency (F)
• Event
• Alarm
• Winding temperature of transformers & reactors
• ambient temperature
• Status and display of 415V LT system, 220V & 48V DC system
• Status of display of Fire protection system and Air conditioning system.
• Acquisition of all counters through potential free contacts, by counting the
receive/send commands.
• Acquisition of alarm and fault record from protection relays
• Disturbance records
• Monitoring the state of batteries by displaying DC voltage, charging current
and load current etc.
• Tap-position of Transformer

27
ANNEXURE

28